R&S UPL Set/User Manual/UPL_Bd2_10E Bd2 10E

UPL_Bd2_10E UPL_Bd2_10E

User Manual: R&S UPL Set/User Manual/UPL_Bd2_10E

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 434 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

1078.2089.12-10- 2
Test and Measurement
Division
Operating Manual
AUDIO ANALYZER
R&S UPL/UPL16/UPL66
DC to 110 kHz
1078.2008.06/16/66
Software version UPL 3.00
Volume 2
Operating manual consists of 2 volumes
Printed in the Federal
Republic of Germany
Dear Customer,
The Audio Analyzer R&S UPL is abbreviated as UPL.
UPL Tabbed Divider Overview
1078.2089.12 RE E-10
Tabbed Divider Overview
Contents
Data Sheets
Safety Instructions
Certificate of quality
EU Certificate of Conformity
List of R & S Representatives
VOLUME 1
Tabbed Divider
1 Chapter 1: Preparation for Use
2 Chapter 2: Manual Operation
3 Index
VOLUME 2
Contents
Tabbed Divider
4 Chapter 3: Remote Control
5 Chapter 4: Maintenance
6 Annex A UPL Default Setup
7 Index
UPL Contents
1078.2089.02 3 E-10
Contents
1 Preparation for Use
1.1 Putting into Operation........................................................................................................... 1.1
1.1.1 Setting up the Audio Analyzer..................................................................................... 1.1
1.1.2 Rackmounting............................................................................................................. 1.1
1.1.3 Power Supply.............................................................................................................. 1.1
1.1.4 Switching On...............................................................................................................1.3
1.1.6 Connecting an External Keyboard .............................................................................. 1.4
1.1.7 Connecting a Mouse................................................................................................... 1.4
1.2 Fitting Options...................................................................................................................... 1.5
1.2.1 Enabling Software Options ......................................................................................... 1.5
1.2.2 Installation of Supplementary Software ...................................................................... 1.6
1.2.3 Installation of Virtual Drive (RAMDRIVE).................................................................... 1.7
1.3 Software Installation ............................................................................................................ 1.9
1.4 UPL Start Options................................................................................................................ 1.11
1.4.1 Restarting the UPL Software .................................................................................... 1.11
1.4.2 Integration of Supplementary Programs ................................................................... 1.11
1.4.3 Command Line Parameters of the UPL Software .................................................... 1.12
1.4.4 Immediate Effect of Command line Parameters at Power-Up.................................. 1.14
2 Manual Operation
2.1 Explanations of Front- and Rearpanel Views incl. Key Combinations on the
External Keyboard................................................................................................................. 2.3
2.1.1 Front-panel View ...........................................................................................................2.3
2.1.2 Rear-panel View.......................................................................................................... 2.11
2.1.3 Block Diagram............................................................................................................. 2.12
2.2 Operating Instructions........................................................................................................ 2.13
2.2.1 Brief Introduction .........................................................................................................2.13
2.2.2 Introductory Examples................................................................................................. 2.15
2.3 General Instructions for Use .............................................................................................. 2.29
2.3.1 Panels.......................................................................................................................... 2.31
2.3.2 Data Entry.................................................................................................................... 2.34
2.3.2.1 Selecting a Parameter ................................................................................. 2.34
2.3.2.2 Entry of Numeric Data ................................................................................. 2.35
2.3.2.3 Using the Softkeys....................................................................................... 2.36
2.3.2.4 Help Line...................................................................................................... 2.36
2.3.2.5 Entry of File Names ..................................................................................... 2.36
2.3.2.6 Data Input or Output during Measurements ................................................ 2.39
Contents UPL
1078.2089.02 4 E-10
2.3.3 Display of Measured Values........................................................................................ 2.40
2.3.4 Settling Process .......................................................................................................... 2.41
2.3.4.1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 2.41
2.3.4.2 The Settling Parameters: ............................................................................... 2.42
2.3.4.3 Settling Process with External Sweep:........................................................... 2.47
2.3.4.4 SETTLING Check and Optimization.............................................................. 2.48
2.3.5 Status Display........................................................................................................... 2.51
2.3.6 Error Messages ........................................................................................................ 2.53
2.3.7 Help Function............................................................................................................ 2.55
2.3.8 Simplification of Panels............................................................................................. 2.56
2.4 Units...................................................................................................................................... 2.57
2.4.1 Units for the Display of Measurement Results ............................................................ 2.57
2.4.2 Units for the Entry of Values........................................................................................ 2.61
2.5 Generators (GENERATOR Panel) ...................................................................................... 2.64
2.5.1 Selecting the Generator .............................................................................................. 2.65
2.5.2 Configuration of Analog Generator.............................................................................. 2.66
2.5.2.1 Unbalanced Output (Output UNBAL)............................................................. 2.68
2.5.2.2 Balanced Output (Output BAL) ...................................................................... 2.69
2.5.2.3 Output Power ................................................................................................. 2.70
2.5.3 Configuration of the Digital Generator......................................................................... 2.71
2.5.3.1 Generating Jitter, Phase and Common Mode ................................................ 2.77
2.5.3.2 AES/EBU Protocol Definition.......................................................................... 2.78
2.5.4 Functions..................................................................................................................... 2.85
2.5.4.1 Common Parameters for Generator Signals.................................................. 2.86
2.5.4.1.1 Common Parameters for SINE, DFD, MOD DIST Signals........... 2.86
2.5.4.1.2 Common Parameters for All Generator Functions ....................... 2.87
2.5.4.1.3 Equalization of the Signals SINE, SINE BURST, DFD,
MULTISINE, RANDOM ................................................................ 2.88
2.5.4.1.4 Amplitude Variation of the Signals MULTISINE, RANDOM and
ARBITRARY ................................................................................. 2.89
2.5.4.2 Sweeps ........................................................................................................ 2.91
2.5.4.3 SINE............................................................................................................. 2.99
2.5.4.4 MULTISINE................................................................................................ 2.101
2.5.4.5 SINE BURST ............................................................................................. 2.106
2.5.4.6 SINE2 BURST ........................................................................................... 2.109
2.5.4.7 MOD DIST (Two-tone Signal to SMPTE) ................................................. 2.111
2.5.4.8 DFD (Difference Frequency Distortion) .................................................... 2.114
2.5.4.9 Random (Pseudo Noise) ........................................................................... 2.117
2.5.4.10 Arbitrary (User-Programmable Signal) ...................................................... 2.124
2.5.4.11 POLARITY (Polarity Test Signal).............................................................. 2.127
2.5.4.12 FSK (Frequency Shift Keying) ................................................................... 2.127
2.5.4.13 STEREO SINE........................................................................................... 2.128
2.5.4.14 MODULATION (modulated sine)............................................................... 2.132
2.5.4.15 DC Voltage................................................................................................. 2.133
2.5.4.16 Coded Audio (Coded Audio Signals) ......................................................... 2.134
UPL Contents
1078.2089.02 5 E-10
2.5.5 Auxiliary Generator.................................................................................................... 2.138
2.5.5.1 Auxiliary Generator Used as Analog Generator ........................................ 2.139
2.5.5.2 Auxiliary Generator Used as Common Mode Generator........................... 2.140
2.5.5.3 Auxiliary Generator Used as Jitter Generator............................................ 2.140
2.5.5.4 Auxiliary Generator Sweep ........................................................................ 2.141
2.6 Analyzers (ANALYZER Panel) .......................................................................................... 2.142
2.6.1 Selecting the Analyzer............................................................................................... 2.142
2.6.2 Configuration of Analog Analyzers ............................................................................ 2.146
2.6.3 Configuration of Digital Analyzer ............................................................................... 2.153
2.6.3.1 Measurement of Jitter, Phase and Common Mode...................................... 2.158
2.6.4 Ways of Starting the Analyzer, Ext. Sweep............................................................... 2.159
2.6.5 Functions................................................................................................................... 2.165
2.6.5.1 Common Parameters of Analyzer Functions............................................. 2.166
2.6.5.2 RMS (incl. S/N) .......................................................................................... 2.178
2.6.5.3 RMS SELECT (Selective RMS Value)....................................................... 2.184
2.6.5.4 PEAK, Q-PEAK (Peak and Quasi-peak Weighting incl. S/N).................. 2.196
2.6.5.5 DC.............................................................................................................. 2.198
2.6.5.6 THD Measurement .................................................................................... 2.199
2.6.5.7 THD+N/SINAD Measurement (Total Harmonic Distortion+ Noise) .......... 2.203
2.6.5.8 MOD DIST (Modulation Distortion)........................................................... 2.212
2.6.5.9 DFD (Difference Frequency Distortion) .................................................... 2.214
2.6.5.10 Wow & Flutter ............................................................................................ 2.217
2.6.5.11 POLARITY (Polarity Test).......................................................................... 2.219
2.6.5.12 FFT (Spectrum) ......................................................................................... 2.220
2.6.5.13 FILTER SIM ............................................................................................... 2.229
2.6.5.14 Waveform (Display in the Time Domain)................................................... 2.230
2.6.5.15 Protocol Analysis ....................................................................................... 2.234
2.6.5.16 Measurement of Digital Input Amplitude.................................................... 2.234
2.6.5.17 Measurement of Phase between Digital Input and Reference Signal ....... 2.234
2.6.5.18 INPUT Display .......................................................................................... 2.235
2.6.5.19 Frequency Measurement........................................................................... 2.237
2.6.5.20 Combined Frequency, Phase and Group Delay Measurement................. 2.240
2.6.5.22 Coherence Measurement and Transfer Function...................................... 2.244
2.6.5.23 Loudspeaker Measurements (RUB & BUZZ) ............................................ 2.246
2.6.5.24 Third Analysis (1/3 OCTAVE) .................................................................... 2.252
2.6.5.25 12th OCTAVE Analysis (12th OCTAVE)...................................................... 2.256
2.6.6 Headphone/Speaker Output...................................................................................... 2.260
2.6.7 Applications ............................................................................................................... 2.266
2.6.7.1 Crosstalk Measurement............................................................................... 2.266
2.6.7.2 Linearity Measurements............................................................................... 2.268
2.6.7.3 Fast Frequency-Response Measurements.................................................. 2.271
2.6.8 Optimizing the Measurement Speed......................................................................... 2.272
1. Speed Optimization without Affecting Measurement Results................................ 2.272
2. Compromise between Measurement Time and Accuracy or Dynamic ................. 2.273
3. Speed Optimization Through Use of Internal Generator....................................... 2.274
4. Optimizing the Speed of Generator Sweeps......................................................... 2.274
5. Optimized Utilization of DSP Performance with the Clock Rate............................ 2.276
2.6.9 Improving the Frequency Response ......................................................................... 2.277
2.7 Analyzer Filters (FILTER Panel) ....................................................................................... 2.278
Contents UPL
1078.2089.02 6 E-10
2.7.1 Weighting Filters........................................................................................................ 2.279
2.7.2 Creating the User-definable Filters............................................................................ 2.284
2.7.2.1 Common Parameters of All Filters............................................................... 2.285
2.7.2.2 Lowpass / Highpass..................................................................................... 2.286
2.7.2.3 Bandpass / Bandstop................................................................................... 2.287
2.7.2.4 Notch............................................................................................................ 2.289
2.7.2.5 Third-octave / Octave................................................................................... 2.290
2.7.2.6 Internal Calculation of Filters ....................................................................... 2.291
2.7.2.7 File-defined Filter ("FILE-DEF") ................................................................... 2.292
2.8 STATUS Panel.................................................................................................................... 2.293
2.9 Series of Measured Values, Files and Loadable Instrument Settings (FILE Panel)... 2.294
2.9.1 Loading and Storing .................................................................................................. 2.294
2.9.1.1 Loading and Storing of Instrument Setups and Complete Setups............... 2.296
2.9.1.2 Loading and Storing of Series of Measured Values and Block/List Data .... 2.302
2.9.1.3 Format of Block/List Files.............................................................................. 2.307
2.9.1.4 Editing Limit Files......................................................................................... 2.312
2.9.1.5 Generating a Limit file from a Trace File...................................................... 2.314
2.9.1.6 Generating a Limit File using an Application Program................................. 2.317
2.9.1.7 Limit Report.................................................................................................. 2.317
2.9.2 Editing Files and Directories...................................................................................... 2.321
2.9.3 Series of Measured Values (Sweeps and Scans) and Block/List Data..................... 2.324
2.9.3.1 Scan count =1.............................................................................................. 2.324
2.9.3.2 Interpolation to a Common X Axis ............................................................... 2.325
2.9.3.3 Scan Count >1 ............................................................................................. 2.325
2.10 Graphical Data Presentation (DISPLAY and GRAPHICS Panels)................................ 2.327
2.10.1 Parameters for Display of Traces and Spectra (DISPLAY Panel).......................... 2.330
2.10.2 Trace and Spectrum Display (GRAPH panel) ........................................................ 2.337
2.10.3 Parameters for the Display of Lists......................................................................... 2.344
2.10.4 Display (GRAPH) of Lists........................................................................................ 2.346
2.10.5 Parameters for BARGRAPH Display...................................................................... 2.347
2.10.6 BARGRAPH Display (GRAPHICS Panel)............................................................... 2.349
2.10.7 Limit Check............................................................................................................. 2.350
2.10.8 PROTOCOL Analysis ............................................................................................. 2.352
2.10.9 Switching between Full-screen and Part-screen Mode .......................................... 2.357
2.11 Starting and Stopping Measurements or Sweeps.......................................................... 2.358
2.11.1 Overview of Measurement and Sweep Systems .................................................... 2.358
2.11.2 Switching Measurement Modes On and Off........................................................... 2.359
2.11.3 Operating States of Measurement System (No Sweep Active).............................. 2.360
2.11.4 Overview of Sweep Modes ..................................................................................... 2.361
2.11.5 Switching Sweeps On and Off ................................................................................ 2.362
2.11.6 Operating States of Sweep System........................................................................ 2.363
2.11.7 Operating Modes of External Frequency and Level Sweeps.................................. 2.367
2.11.8 Several Sweep Traces Displayed in a Diagram...................................................... 2.368
UPL Contents
1078.2089.02 7 E-10
2.12 Display of Selected Inputs / Outputs............................................................................... 2.370
2.13 Fast Switch-off of Outputs ............................................................................................... 2.371
2.14 Printing / Plotting / Storing the Screen Contents........................................................... 2.371
2.14.1 Screen Copy to Printer (pixel-oriented)................................................................... 2.381
2.14.2 Output in HP-GL Format......................................................................................... 2.383
2.14.3 Output in PCX Format ............................................................................................ 2.383
2.14.4 Output in PostScript Format ................................................................................... 2.384
2.14.4 1 PostScript Configuration File PS.CFG....................................................... 2.385
2.14.4 2 Integrating and Output of PostScript Files................................................. 2.387
2.14.5 Output of Measurement Traces and Lists ............................................................ 2.389
2.15 Setting and Displaying Auxiliary Parameters (OPTIONS Panel)................................. 2.390
2.15.1 Selecting the Remote-Control Interface (IEC/IEEE Bus/COM2) ............................ 2.390
2.15.2 Beeper On/Off......................................................................................................... 2.393
2.15.3 Keyboard Settings................................................................................................... 2.393
2.15.4 Language of Help Texts.......................................................................................... 2.393
2.15.5 Display Settings ...................................................................................................... 2.394
2.15.5.1 Switching the Measurement Display ON/OFF........................................... 2.394
2.15.5.2 Reading Rate of Measurement Results..................................................... 2.395
2.15.5.3 Resolution of Measurement Results.......................................................... 2.395
2.15.5.4 Graphics Display with Selectable Colours ................................................. 2.395
2.15.6 Calibration............................................................................................................... 2.399
2.15.7 Version Display and Service Functions .................................................................. 2.401
2.15.8 Transfer of Parameters (Parameter Link Function)................................................ 2.403
2.15.9 Selecting the Sampling Mode ................................................................................. 2.405
2.16 Macro-Operation................................................................................................................ 2.406
2.17 Connecting External Devices........................................................................................... 2.408
2.18 UPL Used as Computer..................................................................................................... 2.412
2.18.1 Setting the Realtime Clock ..................................................................................... 2.412
Contents UPL
1078.2089.02 8 E-10
3 Remote Control
3.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 3.1
3.2 First Steps (Read-in of Measured Values) .......................................................................... 3.3
3.3 Switchover to Remote Control............................................................................................. 3.4
3.3.1 Setting the Device Address......................................................................................... 3.4
3.3.2 Indications During Remote Control............................................................................. 3.4
3.3.3 Return to Manual Operation........................................................................................ 3.5
3.4 IEC/IEEE-Bus Messages ....................................................................................................... 3.6
3.4.1 Interface Messages .................................................................................................... 3.6
3.4.2 Device-Dependent Messages (Commands and Responses)..................................... 3.6
3.5 Structure and Syntax of Device-Dependent Messages ..................................................... 3.7
3.5.1 SCPI Introduction........................................................................................................ 3.7
3.5.2 Command Structure.................................................................................................... 3.7
3.5.3 Structure of a Command Line..................................................................................... 3.9
3.5.4 Responses to Queries .............................................................................................. 3.11
3.5.5 Types of Parameters ................................................................................................ 3.13
3.5.6 Overview of Syntax Elements................................................................................... 3.15
3.5.7 Programming Model of UPL Generator .................................................................... 3.16
3.5.8 Programming Model of UPL Analyzer....................................................................... 3.17
3.6 Instrument Model and Command Processing.................................................................. 3.18
3.6.1 Input Unit................................................................................................................... 3.18
3.6.2 Parser ....................................................................................................................... 3.19
3.6.3 Setting the Device Hardware .................................................................................... 3.19
3.6.4 Why is a Specific Operating Sequence Sometimes Required?................................ 3.19
3.6.5 Status Reporting System .......................................................................................... 3.21
3.6.6 Output Unit................................................................................................................3.21
3.6.7 Triggering a Measurement/Sweep............................................................................ 3.21
3.6.8 Command Synchronization....................................................................................... 3.21
3.6.8.1 Wait for End of Calibration ............................................................................. 3.22
3.6.8.2 Wait for End of Measurement/Sweep............................................................. 3.22
3.6.8.3 Comparison of Synchronization Capabilities .................................................. 3.24
3.7 Status Reporting System.................................................................................................... 3.24
3.7.1 Structure of SCPI Status Register ............................................................................ 3.25
3.7.2 Overview of Status Register ..................................................................................... 3.27
3.7.3 Description of Status Registers ................................................................................ 3.28
3.7.3.1 Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE) .................. 3.28
3.7.3.2 IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE) ......................................... 3.29
3.7.3.3 Definition of bits used in the Event Status Register....................................... 3.29
3.7.3.4 STATus:OPERation Register......................................................................... 3.30
3.7.3.5 STATus:QUEStionable Register.................................................................... 3.31
3.7.3.6 STATus XQUEStionable Register ................................................................. 3.32
UPL Contents
1078.2089.02 9 E-10
3.7.4 Use of Status Reporting System ................................................................................. 3.33
3.7.4.1 Service Request, Use of Hierarchical Structure ............................................ 3.33
3.7.4.2 Serial Poll....................................................................................................... 3.34
3.7.4.3 Parallel Poll .................................................................................................... 3.34
3.7.4.4 Queries .......................................................................................................... 3.35
3.7.4.5 Error Queue Query ........................................................................................ 3.35
3.7.5 Resetting the Status Reporting Systems..................................................................... 3.36
3.8 Notation of Command Table .............................................................................................. 3.37
3.9 Common Commands .......................................................................................................... 3.39
3.10 IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands................................................................................................... 3.41
3.10.1Generators .................................................................................................................. 3.41
3.10.1.1 Selection of Generator................................................................................. 3.41
3.10.1.2 Configuration of Analog Generators ............................................................ 3.41
3.10.1.3 Configuration of Digital Generators ............................................................. 3.44
3.10.1.3.1 AES / EBU PROTOCOL Definition............................................... 3.48
3.10.1.3.2 Auxiliary AUX GEN....................................................................... 3.50
3.10.1.4 Generator Sweeps....................................................................................... 3.52
3.10.1.4.1 Sweep Settings for Auxiliary Generator (AUX GEN) .................... 3.52
3.10.1.5 Generator Functions .................................................................................... 3.62
3.10.1.5.1 SINE ........................................................................................... 3.63
3.10.1.5.2 MULTISINE ................................................................................ 3.65
3.10.1.5.3 SINE BURST.............................................................................. 3.69
3.10.1.5.4 SINE2 BURST............................................................................ 3.71
3.10.1.5.5 MOD DIST.................................................................................. 3.73
3.10.1.5.6 DFD ............................................................................................ 3.76
3.10.1.5.7 RANDOM ................................................................................... 3.79
3.10.1.5.8 ARBITRARY............................................................................... 3.83
3.10.1.5.9 POLARITY.................................................................................. 3.86
3.10.1.5.10 FSK (Frequency shift keying) ..................................................... 3.87
3.10.1.5.11 STEREO SINE ........................................................................... 3.88
3.10.1.5.12 MODULATION (FM or AM signal).............................................. 3.91
3.10.1.5.13 DC voltage.................................................................................. 3.92
3.10.1.5.14 Coded Audio (Coded Audio Signals).......................................... 3.93
3.10.2IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands for Analyzers .................................................................... 3.97
3.10.2.1 Selection of Analyzer................................................................................. 3.97
3.10.2.2 Configuration of Analog Analyzers ............................................................ 3.97
3.10.2.3 Configuration of Digital Analyzers............................................................ 3.100
3.10.2.4 Starting the Analyzer, Ext. Sweep ........................................................... 3.103
3.10.2.5 Analyzer Functions .................................................................................. 3.105
3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer Functions .......................... 3.106
3.10.2.5.2 RMS Measurement incl. S/N.................................................... 3.108
3.10.2.5.3 Selective RMS Measurement incl. Sweep ............................... 3.112
3.10.2.5.4 Peak and Quasi-Peak Measurement incl. S/N......................... 3.119
3.10.2.5.5 DC Measurement ..................................................................... 3.122
3.10.2.5.6 THD Measurement................................................................... 3.123
3.10.2.5.7 THD + N / Sinad Measurement ................................................ 3.125
3.10.2.5.8 MOD DIST................................................................................ 3.128
3.10.2.5.9 DFD .......................................................................................... 3.129
Contents UPL
1078.2089.02 10 E-10
3.10.2.5.10 Wow & Flutter ...................................................................... 3.130
3.10.2.5.11 POLARITY ........................................................................... 3.131
3.10.2.5.12 FFT ...................................................................................... 3.131
3.10.2.5.13 Filter Simulation ................................................................... 3.136
3.10.2.5.14 WAVEFORM........................................................................ 3.137
3.10.2.5.15 Coherence Measurement and Transfer Function................ 3.140
3.10.2.5.16 Loudspeaker Measurements (RUB & BUZZ) ...................... 3.142
3.10.2.5.17 Input Level of Digital Signal (DIG INP AMP)........................ 3.146
3.10.2.5.18 Phase Measurement (PHAS TO REF) ................................ 3.147
3.10.2.5.19 PROTOCOL......................................................................... 3.147
3.10.2.5.20 INPUT DISP......................................................................... 3.148
3.10.2.5.21 Frequency Measurement ..................................................... 3.150
3.10.2.5.22 Combined Frequency, Phase and Group-Delay
Measurement....................................................................... 3.151
3.10.2.5.23 Sample Rate Measurement .................................................. 3.154
3.10.2.5.24 Terzanalyse............................................................................ 3.156
3.10.2.5.25 12th Octave Analysis (12th OCTAVE) ................................. 3.160
3.10.3 Selection of Analyzer Filter ..................................................................................... 3.163
3.10.4 Units for IEC/IEEE Measurement Results .............................................................. 3.171
3.10.5 Loading and Storing................................................................................................ 3.177
3.10.5.1 Loading and Storing Instrument Setups .................................................... 3.177
3.10.5.1.1 Loading and Storing Traces and Lists........................................ 3.179
3.10.5.1.2 Storing Limit Violations (Error Reports)...................................... 3.180
3.10.5.1.3 Storing Equalization Files ........................................................... 3.181
3.10.5.2 Commands for Editing Files and Directories ............................................. 3.182
3.10.6 Commands for Graphical Representation of Results ............................................. 3.183
3.10.6.1 Commands for Limit Check ....................................................................... 3.193
3.10.6.2 PROTOCOL Analysis ................................................................................ 3.195
3.10.7 Commands for Printing/Plotting of Screen and Storing in Files.............................. 3.197
3.10.8 Setting and Display of Auxiliary Parameters........................................................... 3.207
3.10.8.1 IEC/IEEE-Bus Address............................................................................ 3.207
3.10.8.2 Switching the Beeper On/Off ................................................................... 3.207
3.10.8.3 MACRO Operating .................................................................................. 3.208
3.10.8.4 Transfer of Settings ................................................................................. 3.209
3.10.8.6 Parameters of COM2 Interface ............................................................... 3.211
3.10.8.7 Keyboard Settings ................................................................................... 3.212
3.10.8.8 Display Settings....................................................................................... 3.213
3.10.8.9 Version Display........................................................................................ 3.217
3.10.8.10 Calibration................................................................................................ 3.219
3.10.8.11 Loading Speed f. Setups a. Analyzer Measurement Functions............... 3.220
3.10.9 Commands for Data Output ................................................................................. 3.221
3.10.10 Commands for Input/Output of Block Data........................................................... 3.222
3.10.11 Commands for Status and Error Queries ............................................................. 3.229
3.10.12 Commands for Synchronization ........................................................................... 3.232
3.10.14 Settings without Corresponding IEC/IEEE-Bus Command .................................. 3.234
UPL Contents
1078.2089.02 11 E-10
3.11 Alphabetical List of IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands............................................................... 3.235
3.12 IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface...................................................................................................... 3.293
3.12.1 Interface Characteristics......................................................................................... 3.293
3.12.2 Bus Lines ................................................................................................................ 3.293
3.12.3 Interface Functions ................................................................................................. 3.294
3.13 Interface Messages ........................................................................................................... 3.295
3.13.1 Common Commands.............................................................................................. 3.295
3.13.2 Addressed Commands ........................................................................................... 3.295
3.14 List of Error Messages...................................................................................................... 3.296
3.14.1 SCPI-Specific Error Messages ............................................................................... 3.296
3.14.2 Command Error ...................................................................................................... 3.297
3.14.3 Execution Error ....................................................................................................... 3.298
3.14.4 Device-Specific Error .............................................................................................. 3.299
3.14.5 Query Error ............................................................................................................. 3.299
3.14.6 UPL-Specific Error Messages................................................................................. 3.299
3.15 Examples of IEC/IEEE-Bus Programming (Hints and Program Examples) ............... 3.300
3.15.1 R&S BASIC............................................................................................................. 3.300
3.15.2 IEC/IEEE-Bus Control after Power-Up ................................................................... 3.300
3.15.3 Command Logging - Converting UPL-B10 Commands into
IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands..................................................................................... 3.300
3.15.4 Initialization and Default Status............................................................................... 3.302
3.15.5 Sending Instrument Setting Commands................................................................. 3.302
3.15.6 Switchover to Manual Control................................................................................. 3.302
3.15.7 Readout of Instrument Settings .............................................................................. 3.302
3.15.8 Readout of Measurement Results .......................................................................... 3.303
3.15.8.1 Readout of Triggered Measurements........................................................ 3.304
3.15.8.2 Readout of Non-Triggered Measurements................................................ 3.305
3.15.9 Sweep Setting/Trigger ............................................................................................ 3.305
3.15.9.1 Generator Sweep....................................................................................... 3.305
3.15.9.2 External Sweep.......................................................................................... 3.306
3.15.9.3 RMS-Selektiv-Sweep................................................................................. 3.306
3.15.10 Tuning - Setup for Maximum Measurement Speed.............................................. 3.307
3.15.10.1 Configuration for Maximum Measurement Speed................................. 3.307
3.15.10.2 Adapting Measurement Speed to Signal Frequency............................. 3.307
3.15.10.3 Configuration for Maximum Sweep Speed............................................ 3.309
3.15.10.3.1 Generator Sweep ..................................................................... 3.309
3.15.10.3.2 External Sweep ........................................................................ 3.310
3.15.10.3.3 RMS Selective Sweep.............................................................. 3.310
3.15.10.3.4 Measurement Speed with Reference to Sampling Mode......... 3.312
3.15.11 List Management .................................................................................................. 3.312
3.15.11.1 Loading Lists into the UPL....................................................................... 3.312
3.15.11.1.1 Loading Sweep Lists into the UPL ......................................... 3.312
3.15.11.1.2 Loading and Display of Several Traces in the UPL................ 3.312
3.15.11.1.3 Loading and Displaying of Trace Pairs in the UPL................. 3.313
3.15.11.2 Readout of Data Lists from the UPL........................................................ 3.314
3.15.11.2.1 Readout of Lists of up to 1024 Values ..................................... 3.315
Contents UPL
1078.2089.02 12 E-10
3.15.11.2.2 Readout of FFT Lists of more than 1024 Values ..................... 3.315
3.15.11.2.3 FFT Lists with Suppressed Noise Floor ................................... 3.317
3.15.11.2.4 Readout of Several Traces from UPL ...................................... 3.317
3.15.11.2.5 Readout of Trace Pairs from UPL............................................ 3.318
3.15.12 Filter Settings...................................................................................................... 3.319
3.15.13 Finding a File...................................................................................................... 3.320
3.15.14 Readout of Error Queue ..................................................................................... 3.320
3.15.15 Command Synchronization ................................................................................ 3.320
3.15.15.1 Command Synchronization with *WAI..................................................... 3.321
3.15.15.2 Command Synchronization with *OPC?.................................................. 3.321
3.15.15.3 Command Synchronization with *OPC and SRQ .................................... 3.321
3.15.16 Service Request ................................................................................................... 3.322
3.15.16.1 SRQ Interrupt Routine with Serial Poll..................................................... 3.322
3.15.16.1.1 Initialization of Serial Poll SRQ................................................. 3.322
3.15.16.1.2 Serial Poll SRQ Routine ........................................................... 3.323
3.15.16.2 SRQ Interrupt Routine with Parallel Poll.................................................. 3.324
3.15.16.2.1 Initialization of Parallel Poll SRQ............................................ 3.324
3.15.16.2.2 Parallel Poll SRQ Routine ...................................................... 3.324
3.15.17 Readout of Cursor Position and Values ............................................................... 3.325
3.15.18 Call a BASIC-Macro.............................................................................................. 3.329
3.15.19 Third analysis - Output of Block Data................................................................... 3.333
3.16 Automatic Control of UPL with R&S BASIC.................................................................... 3.337
3.16.1 Use.......................................................................................................................... 3.337
3.16.2 Scope of Functions ................................................................................................. 3.337
3.16.3 Preparation for Use................................................................................................. 3.338
3.16.4 Operation ................................................................................................................ 3.339
3.16.4.1 Switchover between UPL and BASIC Entry Mode................................... 3.339
3.16.4.2 First Steps (Readout of Measurement Results) ...................................... 3.340
3.16.4.3 Logging Mode.......................................................................................... 3.340
3.16.4.4 Differences to IEC/IEEE-Bus Remote Control ........................................ 3.341
3.16.4.5 UPL-Specific Modifications to the BASIC Manual ................................... 3.346
3.16.4.6 BASIC Screen.......................................................................................... 3.348
3.16.4.7 Control Commands Unsuitable for Logging ............................................ 3.349
3.16.4.8 Driver for Screen and Keyboard STRINX.SYS........................................ 3.350
3.16.4.9 Operation of Serial Interfaces COM1 and COM2.................................... 3.354
3.16.4.10 UPL-Specific Error Messages From BASIC ............................................ 3.355
3.16.4.11 UPL/BASIC Memory Management.......................................................... 3.356
3.17 Remote Control via RS-232 Interface .............................................................................. 3.357
3.17.1 Preparation for Use................................................................................................. 3.357
3.17.2 Switchover to Remote Control ................................................................................ 3.358
3.17.3 Return to Manual Operation.................................................................................... 3.358
3.17.4 First Steps (Readout of Measurement Results) ..................................................... 3.358
3.17.4.1 Readout of Measurement Results in QuickBASIC .................................... 3.359
3.17.4.2 Readout of Measurement Results in R&S BASIC ..................................... 3.360
3.17.4.3 Readout of Measurement Results in Borland-C 3.0 .................................. 3.361
3.17.5 Binary Data via RS232 Interface .......................................................................... 3.363
3.17.6 Differences to Remote Control via IEC/IEEE Bus ................................................ 3.364
UPL Contents
1078.2089.02 13 E-10
4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting .................................................................... 4.1
4.1 Maintenance........................................................................................................................... 4.1
4.1.1 Mechanical Maintenance............................................................................................... 4.1
4.1.2 Electrical Maintenance .................................................................................................. 4.1
4.2 Function Test......................................................................................................................... 4.1
4.3 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 4.2
4.3.1 BIOS-SETUP.................................................................................................................4.2
4.3.2 Others............................................................................................................................ 4.5
5 UPL Default Setup
A.1 Default Settings of Generator...............................................................................................A.1
A.2 Default Settings of Analyzer..............................................................................................A.13
A.3 Default Settings of Filter Panel ..........................................................................................A.21
A.4 Default Settings of Display Panel ......................................................................................A.22
A.5 Default Settings of Options Panel......................................................................................A.23
A.6 Default Settings of File Panel.............................................................................................A.25
6 Index
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Introduction
1078.2008.02 3.1 E-10
3 Remote Control
3.1 Introduction
• UPL may be equipped with option UPL-B4 permitting remote control via an IEC/IEEE-bus interface to
IEC 625.1/IEEE 488.2 standard and an
• RS-232 interface at the COM2 port.
In addition, UPL may be equipped with option UPL-B10 permitting sequence control for automatic
measurements.
Note:
The sections below mainly describe remote control via the IEC/IEEE-bus interface but most of them also
applies to remote control via the RS-232 interface and the Universal Sequence Controller
UPL-B10. If this is not the case reference will be made to the applicable section.
Note:
If the remote-control option UPL-B4 was not originally ordered with the UPL, it may be obtained via the
local sales engineer (for Order No. see data sheet). After entering an enable code as described in the
supplied instructions, the IEC/IEEE-bus option and the RS-232 interface are ready for use without any
additional hardware installations being required.
Note:
If the remote control option UPL-B4 is not enabled, UPL should not be connected to other
instruments via the IEC/IEEE bus as in this case problem-free operation cannot be guaranteed.
The connectors for the IEC/IEEE-bus and the RS-232 interface (COM2) are located at the rear of the
instrument. They allow a controller to be connected for remote control. The instrument supports SCPI
version 1993.0 (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments). The SCPI standard is based on
standard IEEE 488.2 and aims at the standardization of device-specific commands, error handling and
status registers (see section 3.5.1 SCPI Introduction).
Note:
In the IEC/IEEE-bus command lists given below, all commands confirmed or approved by the SCPI
committee are written in normal characters. Other innovative commands or commands required for
general measurements are in italics and in the form and style as specified by SCPI (not part of SCPI
definition).
This section assumes a basic knowledge of IEC/IEEE-bus programming and controller operation. A
description of the interface commands is to be obtained from the relevant manuals.
The requirements of the SCPI standard placed on command syntax, error handling and configuration of
status registers are explained in detail in the respective sections. Tables provide a fast overview of the
bit assignment in the status registers. The tables are supplemented by a comprehensive description of
the status registers. For detailed program examples of the main functions see 3.15 Examples of
IEC/IEEE-Bus Programming.
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Introduction UPL
1078.2008.02 3.2 E-10
All program examples for IEC/IEEE-bus control are written in R&S BASIC, likewise all program
examples in the UPL software in the paths
C:\UPL\IEC EXAM\EXAM1.BAS ff and
C:\UPL\B10 EXAM\EXAM1.BAS ff.
Examples C:\UPL\IEC EXAM\EXAM1.BAS ff can be directly run on a controller using a suitable
IEC/IEEE-bus card and R&S BASIC. Files with the extension .SAC are setup files required by the
program examples for setting the UPL. Files with the extension .TXT provide the program code of the
examples as an ASCII file and can be accessed by any editor.
Examples C:\UPL\B10 EXAM\EXAM1.BAS ff can be run on an UPL using the Universal Sequence
Controller UPL-B10. Meaning of files with the extensions .SAC and .TXT as described above.
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: First Steps
1078.2008.02 3.3 E-10
3.2 First Steps (Read-in of Measured Values)
The short and simple operating sequence below permits rapid setup of the instrument and of its basic
functions.
A condition is, however, that the IEC/IEEE-bus address, which is factory-set to 20, is not changed.
Program example:
Triggering 10 measurement results and display on the screen.
1. Interconnect instrument and controller using the IEC/IEEE-bus cable.
2. Write the following program on the controller and start it with RUN (F2):
10 IEC TERM 10: ’ Controller expects LF as a delimiter of an UPL reply
20 IEC TIME 5000: ’Controller waits max. 5 s for a reply from
30 ’ UPL before sending an IEC/IEEE-bus timeout
40 IEC OUT 20,"*RST": ’ UPL default setup
45 IEC OUT 20,"INP:TYPE GEN2": ’ Internal connection to generator channel 2
50 IEC OUT 20,"*CLS": ’ Resets IEC/IEEE-bus status register
60 FOR I = 1 TO 10
70 IEC OUT 20,"INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI": ’ Triggers a single measurement
80 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:DATA?": ’ Requests a measurement result
90 IEC IN 20, M$: ’Read-in of measurement result
100 PRINT M$: ’Output of measurement result
110 NEXT I
120 END
As a result of the default setup with *RST (see annex A UPL Default Setup in the UPL manual), the
UPL generator produces a 1-kHz sinewave signal with a level of 0.5 V.
Command INP:TYPE GEN2 establishes an internal connection between generator channel 2 and
analyzer channel 1 so that no cabling of outputs and inputs is required for this first test. The UPL
analyzer carries out 10 RMS measurement, indicates the measurement results in the display and
outputs them continuously on the controller display.
Note:
A measurement result must be triggered before it can be displayed on the screen (line 70). The settled
result available after triggering can be requested (line 80), read-in (line 90) and output to the controller
display (line 100).
3. Press the [LOCAL] key on the front panel to return to manual operation.
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10) RS-232 interface
See 3.16.4.2 First Steps (Readout of Measurement
Results) See 3.17.4 First Steps (Readout of Measurement
Results)
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Switchover to Remote Control UPL
1078.2008.02 3.4 E-10
3.3 Switchover to Remote Control
After power-on, the instrument is always in the manual operating state (LOCAL state) and can be
operated from the front panel or the keyboard. It is switched to remote control (REMOTE state shown by
REMOTE caption in the screen center) as soon as it receives an addressed command from a controller.
If the UPL has been set to the manual status from REMOTE with the LOCAL key, then each command
via
R&S BASIC switches the UPL to the REMOTE status, because R&S BASIC sends each command in
addressed form to the UPL. If the
NI GPIB device driver is used, the first IEC/IEEE command should be send addressed. This
addressing for board-specific programming is for example the command ibcmd (board address,
20, 1) or for device-specific programming the repeat addressing setting in the NI GPIB device
driver – or ibloc(0) before the first IEC/IEEE command. If the UPL in the LOCAL state is sent a
non-addressed command, the latter will be carried out but the screen will show the old manual
settings and not the expected empty screen with the REMOTE caption.
During remote control, operation from the front panel is disabled. The instrument remains in the remote
state until it is reset to manual operation via the front panel or the IEC/IEEE bus (see section 3.3.3
Return to Manual Operation). Switching from manual operation to remote control and vice versa has no
effect on the instrument setup.
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10) RS-232 interface
See 3.16.4.1 Connection Basic-UPL 3.17.2 Switchover to Remote Control
3.3.1 Setting the Device Address
The IEC/IEEE-bus address of the instrument is factory-set to 20. It can be changed manually under
UPL IECadr in the OPTIONS panel or via the IEC/IEEE bus.
Manually: Enter the required address under UPL IECadr in the OPTIONS panel.
Via IEC/IEEE bus:
IECOUT 20,"SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 30":’ Set new address 30
HOLD 500:’ Wait approx. 500 ms before new commands are effected
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10) RS-232 interface
Not applicable Not applicable
3.3.2 Indications During Remote Control
• The remote-control status is signalled by the word REMOTE in the display center and by the REM
LED on the UPL front panel.
• Measurement results (active) are indicated in the upper part of the display.
•Error messages occurring during IEC/IEEE-bus control are displayed in plain text in the lower part of
the UPL display (see also section 3.14 List of Error Messages).
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Return to Manual Operation
1078.2008.02 3.5 E-10
3.3.3 Return to Manual Operation
Return to manual control can be made from the front panel or via the IEC/IEEE bus.
Manual: Press the [LOCAL] key, the REM LED goes out.
Prior to the switchover, command processing must be completed as otherwise
remote control is immediately switched on again.
Note: LLO state (Local Lockout):
The [LOCAL] key can be locked by the universal command LLO in order to
prevent inadvertent switchover:
R&S-BASIC:
R&S BASIC command IECLLO
NI-GPIB-Treiber:
NI command SendLLO(0)
This state can be cancelled only by switching the "REN" line of the IEC/IEEE
bus from 0 to 1:
R&S-BASIC:
R&S BASIC commands IECNREN, followed by IECREN.
NI-GPIB-Treiber:
NI commands ibsre(0,0); followed by ibsre(0,1);.
Via IEC/IEEE bus: R&S-BASIC:
:
IECLAD 20:’ Sets device to manual operation
IECGTL
:
NI-GPIB-Treiber:
ibloc (0);
To switch UPL from LOCAL state to REMOTE state, see 3.3 Switchover to
Remote Control
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10) RS-232 interface
See 3.16.4.1 Connection Basic-UPL 3.17.3 Return to Manual Operation
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Messages UPL
1078.2008.02 3.6 E-10
3.4 IEC/IEEE-Bus Messages
The messages transmitted on the data lines of the IEC/IEEE bus can be subdivided into two groups:
•interface messages and
•device-dependent messages
3.4.1 Interface Messages
Interface messages are transmitted on the data lines of the IEC/IEEE bus, with the control line "ATN"
being active. They are used for communication between the controller and the instrument and can only
be sent by a controller with controller function on the IEC/IEEE bus.
There are two groups of interface messages:
•common commands and
•addressed commands
See 3.13.1, Universal Commands and 3.13.2, Addressed Commands
Common commands affect all devices connected to the IEC/IEEE bus without any addressing being
required, whereas addressed commands only affect devices addressed as a listener. The relevant
interface messages for the UPL are listed in annex A.
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10) RS-232 interface
Not applicable Not applicable
3.4.2 Device-Dependent Messages (Commands and Responses)
The device-dependent messages are transmitted on the data lines of the IEC/IEEE bus, with the control
line ATN being not active. The ASCII code is used for data transmission. Device-dependent messages
are differentiated according to the direction in which they are sent via the IEC/IEEE bus:
•Commands are messages sent by the controller to the UPL. They control the device functions
and request information.
The commands are subdivided according to two criteria:
1. According to the effect they have on the device:
Setting commands cause device settings to be made, e.g. the resetting of
the UPL or the setting of the output level to 1 Volt.
Queries cause data to be provided for output via the
IEC/IEEE bus, eg for device identification or query of
the active input.
2. According to their definition in the IEEE 488.2 standard:
Common commands are precisely defined in their function and notation in
the IEEE 488.2 standard. They refer to functions as for
instance the management of the standardized status
registers, resetting and selftest
Device-specific refer to functions that depend on the device
commands characteristics, such as frequency setting. A large
number of these commands has also been
standardized by the SCPI Consortium (see section
3.5.1 SCPI Introduction)
•Responses are messages sent by the UPL to the controller following a query. They may
contain results, device settings or information on the device status (see section
3.5.4 Responses to Queries).
The section below describes structure and syntax of device-dependent messages. As from section
3.10 IEC-bus Commands onwards, the commands are listed independent of their function,
described in brief and listed in alphabetical order.
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Structure and Syntax of Messages
1078.2008.02 3.7 E-10
3.5 Structure and Syntax of Device-Dependent Messages
3.5.1 SCPI Introduction
SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) describes a standardized command set for
the programming of instruments regardless of the type of instrument or manufacturer. The goal of the
SCPI Consortium is to standardize device-specific commands to a large extent. For this purpose an
instrument model has been developed which defines identical functions within an instrument or of
different instruments. Command systems have been generated and assigned to these functions so that
it is possible to address identical functions by the same commands. The command systems have a
hierarchical structure. Fig. 3-1 shows this tree structure, using a detail from the SOURce command
system for controlling the signal sources of the instrument. The other examples of syntax and structure
of the commands are taken from this command system.
SCPI is based on the IEEE 488.2 standard, ie it uses the same syntax elements as well as the "common
commands" defined therein. The syntax of the responses is partly subjected to stricter rules than laid
down in the IEEE 488.2 standard).
3.5.2 Command Structure
The commands consist of a so-called header and usually one or several parameters. Header and
parameters are separated by a "white space" (ASCII code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, eg space). The
headers may be composed of several keywords. The query form is generated by appending a question
mark directly to the header.
Common Commands Common commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk "*"
and one or several parameters.
Examples "*RST" RESET, resets the UPL
"*ESE 253" EVENT STATUS ENABLE, sets the bits of
the Event Status Enable Registers
"*ESR?" EVENT STATUS QUERY, queries the
contents of the Event Status Register.
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10) RS-232 interface
Common commands to be used can be looked up in Table 3.9 Common Commands.
Device-specific commands
Hierarchy Device-specific commands have a hierarchical structure (see Fig. 3-1).
The various levels are represented by compound headers. Headers of
the highest level (root level) have one keyword only. This keyword
stands fro a whole command system.
Example: SENSe This keyword denotes the command system
SENSe (see section 3.5.7 Programming
Model of UPL Generator)
For lower-level commands the full path has to be specified, starting with
the highest level in the left-most position. The individual keywords are
separated by a colon ":".
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Structure and Syntax of Messages UPL
1078.2008.02 3.8 E-10
Example: "SENSe:FUNCtion:SETTling:MODE EXPonential"
(exponential settling of function test results)
This command is at the fourth level of the SENSe system. It selects the
function settling mode.
Fig. 3-1 Tree structure of SCPI command system, SENSe being shown
as an example
Optional keywords: Some command systems permit certain keywords to be optionally inserted
into the header or omitted. In the manual these keywords are marked by
square brackets. For reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standard, the
instrument must be able to recognize the full command length. Some of the
commands become considerably shorter when the optional keywords are
omitted.
Example: "DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT[:DATA] ’String’"
The following command has the same effect:
"DISPlay:TEXT ’String’" (text in graphic display)
Long and short form: The keywords have a long and a short form. The short form or the long
form can be entered, other abbreviations are not permissible
Example: "STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle 1"
The following command has the same effect:
"STAT:QUES:ENAB 1" (0 bit of Status Questionable Register
enabled)
Note:
The short form uses uppercase characters, the long form gives the whole
keyword. Uppercase and lowercase letters are used for identification in the
manual, the UPL itself does not differentiate between uppercase and
lowercase characters.
Parameter: The parameter must be separated from the header by a "white space". If a
command contains several parameters, they have to be separated by a
comma ",". Some of the queries permit the parameters MINimum and
MAXimum to be entered. For a description of the various types of
parameter see section 3.5.5 Types of Parameters.
Example: "SENSe:FREQuency:STARt? MAXimum"
Response: 21641.8
(query requesting the maximum value for starting a frequency sweep)
Numeric suffix: If a device has several identical functions or features, eg inputs, the
desired function can be selected by a suffix added to the command.
Example: "SENSe2:Voltage:REFerence 1V"
(reference value for a relative INPUT peak measurement)
Note: Entries without suffix are interpreted like entries with suffix 1
SENSe
SWEep LIST FUNCtion
DMODe MMODe SETTling WEIGhtingSTANdard
TOLerance MODE
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Structure and Syntax of Messages
1078.2008.02 3.9 E-10
3.5.3 Structure of a Command Line
The UPL can process IEC/IEEE-bus commands containing up to 240 characters. If this length is
exceeded, an error message is output.
A command line may take up more than one line on the controller display. The end of a line is
determined by a delimiter.
Delimiters for a command set to the UPL:
A command line to the UPL may contain one or several commands. It is terminated by a <New Line>
(ASCII code, 10 decimal) or <EOI> (EOI line active) together with the last useful character of the
command line or by <New Line>. Since a <Carriage Return> character (ASCII code, 13 decimal) as a
filler before the delimiter has no effect, the combination <Carriage Return><New Line> is permissible.
Example for generating the various delimiter combinations:
<Carriage Return>+<New Line>+<EOI> (default setting of IEC/IEEE-bus controller):
10 IECEOI
20 IECOUT 20,"XYZ" If no ’;’ is sent at the line end, <CR><NL> is added.
<New Line>+<EOI>:
10 IECEOI
20 IECOUT 20,"XYZ"+CHR$(10);’;’ ensures that no <CR><NL> is added.
<EOI>:
10 IECEOI
20 IECOUT 20,"XYZ";’;’ ensures that no <CR><NL> is added.
<New Line>:
10 IECNEOI
20 IECOUT 20,"XYZ"+CHR$(10);’;’ ensures that no <CR><NL> is added.
<Carriage Return>+<New Line>:
10 IECNEOI
20 IECOUT 20,"XYZ" If no ’;’ is sent at the line end, <CR><NL> is added.
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10) RS-232 interface
User cannot influence the delimiter. See 3.17.6 Differences to Remote Control via IEC/IEEE Bus
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Structure and Syntax of Messages UPL
1078.2008.02 3.10 E-10
Sequencing of commands:
Commands may be lined up unless they exceed 240 characters in length.
Several commands in a command line are separated by a semicolon ";". If the next command belongs
to a different system, the semicolon is followed by a colon ":"
Example: IECOUT 20,"SOUR:FREQ:STAR 20Hz;:SYST:BEEP:STAT ON"
(switches on beeper for error messages)
This command line contains two commands. The first command belongs to the SOURce
system and is used to set the start frequency for a generator sweep. The second command
is part of SYSTem and switches on an acoustic alarm in the case of errors.
If the successive commands belong to the same system and therefore have one or several common
levels, the command line may be shortened. The second command following the semicolon then starts
at the level that is below the common levels (see also Fig. 3-1). The colon after the semicolon has to be
omitted.
Example: IECOUT 20,"SOUR:FREQ:STAR 20Hz;:SYST:BEEP:STAT ON"
(Start- and stop command for sweep)
This command line is shown in full length and contains two commands separated by a
semicolon. Both commands belong to the SOURce command system, FREQency
subsystem, ie they have two common levels.
In the shortened command line the second command starts at the level below
SOURce:FREQ. The colon after the semicolon has to be omitted.
The abbreviated form of the command line is:
IECOUT 20,"SOURce:FREQ:STAR;STOP 15kHz"
A new command line always begins with the complete path.
Example: IECOUT 20,"SOUR:FREQ:START 20Hz"
IECOUT 20,"SOUR:FREQ:STOP 15 kHz
(Start- and stop command for sweep)
When common commands starting with an asterisk ’*’ are linked in a command string, they are
preceded by a semicolon ’;’ and not by ’;:’ as is the case with linked UPL commands.
Example: IECOUT 20,"INIT;*WAI;:SENS:DATA1?"
↑
(triggers measurement, selects result of function measurement on channel 1 and sends next command only
after completion of the measurement!)
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Structure and Syntax of Messages
1078.2008.02 3.11 E-10
3.5.4 Responses to Queries
Delimiters of responses sent by the UPL:
All responses sent by the UPL to the IEC/IEEE-bus controller are terminated by <New Line> (ASCII
code, 10 decimal) and <EOI> (EOI line active). With the aid of the IECTERM command, the IEC/IEEE-
bus controller can be set to various delimiters, but only the setting
IECTERM 10 is useful.
• IECTERM 10 causes the IEC/IEEE-bus controller to respond to the delimiter <New Line>. With
• IECTERM 1 (EOI only) ), the response string from the UPL displayed on the monitor of the IEC/IEEE-
bus controller is followed by an empty line, as <New Line> before <EOI> is interpreted as part of the
response string.
• IECTERM 0 (<Carriage Return>+<New Line>), the response string from the UPL displayed on the
monitor of the IEC/IEEE-bus controller will again be followed by an empty line, as the <Carriage
Return> is interpreted as part of the response string and changed into a line feed command by the
IEC/IEEE-bus controller.
All other settings cause a TIMEOUT.
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10) RS-232 interface
User cannot influence the delimiter. See 3.17.6 Differences to Remote Control via IEC/IEEE Bus
Possible queries
Unless explicitly specified otherwise, a query is defined for each setting command. The query is
generated by appending a question mark to the associated setting command. Some of the SCPI rules
imposed on the query responses are stricter than those of the IEEE 488.2 standard:
1. The requested parameter is sent without header.
Example: Setting: "INPut:TYPE BAL"
Query: "INPut:TYPE?" Response: BAL
(input BAL for analog analyzer)
2. Maximum and minimum values requested by the character data MAXimum and MINimum are
returned as numeric values
Example: Setting: "SENSe:FREQuency MAX|MIN|any value"
Query: "SENSe:FREQuency? MAX" Response: 21641.8
Query: "SENSe:FREQuency? MIN" Response: 2.0
(maximum or minimum value depend on current setting)
3. Numeric values with floating decimal point are output in the same unit as entered.
Example: Setting: "SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 20kHz?"
Query: "SENSe:FREQuency:STARt?" Response: 20.0 for 20 kHz
(sweep start frequency)
4. Integral values are returned as such.
Example: Setting: "INST:NSEL 1"
Query: "INST:NSEL?" Response: 1
(25-kHz analog generator)
5. Text (character data) are returned in short form (see sections 3.5.1 and 3.5.4).
Example: Setting: "OUTPut:TYPE BALanced"
Query: "OUTPut:TYPE?" Response: BAL
(generator output channel 1 XLR balanced)
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Structure and Syntax of Messages UPL
1078.2008.02 3.12 E-10
6. Character strings are output in the same way as they are input, ie the simple and
double quotation marks are also output (see section 3.5.6 Overview of Syntax Elements).
Example: Setting: "MMEMory:STORe:STATe 2,’LASTSAVE.SCO’"
Query: "MMEMory:STORe:STATe? 2" Response: ’LASTSAVE.SCO’
(storage of UPL setting under ’LASTSAVE.SCO’
7. Data blocks are output as ASCII characters or in binary form depending on the IEC/IEEE-bus
commands FORM ASC and FORM REAL.
Example:
Five floating-point values in the form of a trace are available after a sweep.
Setting: "FORM ASC"
Query: "TRACe? TRACe" Response: 1.1,1.2,1.3,1.4,1.5
(load Y values of curve A into the UPL)
Setting: "FORM REAL"
Query: "TRACe? TRACe"
The response is sent as a binary data stream. Floating-point values are 4 bytes long
and output in the IEEE format (LSB first):
#220
1st value 2nd value 3rd value 4th value 5th value
--- 1.1 --- --- 1.2 --- --- 1.3 --- --- 1.4 --- --- 1.5 ---
23 32 32 30 cd cc 8c 3f 3f 3f 3f 3f9a 99 99 66 66 a6 33 33 b3 00 00 c0
The ASCII character ’#’ introduces a binary block transfer.
Number of digits of subsequently indicated length in ASCII
Number of following bytes in ASCII. This value divided by 4 yields
the number of the subsequent floating-point values in IEEE format.
Hexadecimal
form
To receive the binary data stream in its full length, set EOI (in R&S-BASIC: IEC
TERM 1) in the controller program and not LF (0Ah = 10d) (in R&S-BASIC: IEC
TERM 10) as would normally be set for the reception of ASCII strings. This is to
avoid the binary data stream being interrupted if the bit combination 0Ah occurs.
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10) RS-232 interface
See
3.16.4.4 Differences from the IEC-bus Syntax -
UPL-B10
See
3.17.6 Differences to Remote Control via
IEC/IEEE Bus
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Structure and Syntax of Messages
1078.2008.02 3.13 E-10
3.5.5 Types of Parameters
Most commands require the specification of a parameter. The parameters must be separated from the
header by a "white space" (ASCII code, 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, generally a blank). Parameters may be
specified as numeric values, Boolean parameters, character data, character strings and block data. The
type of parameter required for the specific command as well as the permitted range of values are
described together with the commands (see section 3.10 IEC-bus Commands).
Numeric values Numeric values may be entered in any customary form, ie with sign, decimal
point and exponent. If the values exceed the resolution of the UPL, they will be
rounded off. The number including the exponent may comprise up to 20
characters. The number of digits of mantissa and exponent is only limited by
this condition. The exponent is denoted by an "E" or "e". The exponent alone
must not be used. Physical quantities may be stated with the unit. Permissible
prefixes for the unit (also called engineering) are M (Mega), K (Kilo), m (milli)
and u (micro). The units for which these prefixes may be used can be seen
from the tables in section 2.4 Units in the UPL manual. With no unit stated,
the basic unit is assumed (see section 3.10 IEC-bus Commands column
Basic unit of UPL manual).
Examples:
"SOURce:FREQuency 1.5 kHz" 1500 Hz
1.5E3 1.5E+3
1.5E 3 1.5E 03
+1.5E3 001.5E3
Special
numeric values The parameters MINimum, MAXimum, UP and DOWN are interpreted as
special numeric values.
MIN/MAX MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value.
Upon a query the numeric value will be returned.
Example: Setting command: "SOURce:VOLTage MAXimum"
Query: "SOURce:VOLTage?" Response: 24
(maximum generator level)
UP/DOWN UP increments, DOWN decrements the current numeric value by 0.001%.
NAN Not A Number represents the value 9,91E37, is only sent as a device
response and denotes missing or illegal values.
Boolean parameter Boolean parameters represent two states. The on state (true condition) is
represented by ON, the off state (false condition) by OFF.
Example: Setting command: "SENS:FUNC:WEIG ON"
Query: "SENS:FUNC:WEIG?" Response: ON
(W&F weighting filter on)
Character data Character data follow the syntax rules for keywords, ie they also have a short
and a long form. Like any other parameter, they must be separated from the
header by a ’white space’. A query returns the short form of the character data.
Example: Setting command: "DISPlay:MODE COLB"
Query: "DISPlay:MODE?" Response: COLB
(Coloured representation on internal and external display)
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Structure and Syntax of Messages UPL
1078.2008.02 3.14 E-10
Character string According to SCPI strings must always be given in single or double quotation
marks. Normally single quotes are used as the double quotes are used for
identifying the total IEC/IEEE-bus command as a string.
Example: "MMEMory:DELete ’C:\UPL\USER\MYSETUP.SCO’"
(clearing of specified file)
Data strings Numeric values are to be separated by commas, decimal digits by a ’.’.
Example: "TRAC LIST1, 100.0,1000.0,5000.0,15000.0"
(setting the X values in a graphics display)
"SOUR:LIST:FREQ 1.1,1.2,1.3,1.4,1.5"
(setting the frequencies for a frequency sweep)
Whether the data strings start with a comma or a blank depends on the
command and is defined by SCPI.
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Structure and Syntax of Messages
1078.2008.02 3.15 E-10
3.5.6 Overview of Syntax Elements
The following list provides an overview of the syntax elements..
:
;
,
?
*
"
#
The colon separates the keywords of a command.
In a command line, the colon following a semicolon identifies
the highest command level.
The semicolon separates two commands in a command line. It does not change the path.
The comma separates several parameters of a command.
The question mark forms a query.
The asterisk identifies a common command.
Quotation marks denote the beginning of a character string and terminate it.
The double cross denotes the beginning of block data.
A "white space" (ASCII code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, eg space) separates header and
parameter.
Decimal point of numeric values. .
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Programming Model of UPL Generator
1078.2008.02 3.16 E-10
3.5.7 Programming Model of UPL Generator
AES/EBU
S/P DIF
OPTICAL
Digital outputs
Ch 1 and Ch 2
XLR female
Analog outputs
Ch 1 and Ch 2
"OUTP:TYPE
UNB|
BAL"
"OUTP:SEL
OFF|
CH1|
CH2|
CH2Is1"
INTERN
Analog
generator
25 kHz
Digital
generator
48 kHz
Channel
setting
Generator instruments
Output configuration
IEC\IEEE-bus commands
Signal function
"INST A25|D48"
"SOUR:FUNC
SIN|
MULT|
BURS|
S2P|
MDIS|
DFD|
RAND|
USER|
POL"
Sine
Multisine
Burst
Sine² Pulse
POLARITY
Sine² Pulse
Sine² Pulse
Sine² Pulse
Sine² pulse
Wiring of XLR connector
balanced (BAL) or
unbalanced (UNB)
Fig. 3-2 Instruments and signal functions of UPL generator
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Programming Model of UPL Analyzer
1078.2008.02 3.17 E-10
3.5.8 Programming Model of UPL Analyzer
OPTICAL
Digital inputs
Ch 1 and Ch 2
XLR female
GEN1
GEN2
GEN1
GEN2
Analog
Inputs Ch1
Analog
Inputs Ch2
"INP1:TYPE
BAL|GEN1|GEN2"
"INP2:TYPE
BAL|GEN1|GEN2"
"INP:SEL
CH1|
CH2|
CH1And2|
CH1Is2|
CH2Is1"
"INST2 A22|A110|A300"
"INST2 D48"
"INP:TYPE
AES|SPD|OPT|INT"
INTERNAL
"INP:SEL
CH1|
CH2|
BOTH"
Analog
analyzer
22 kHz
Analog
analyzer
110 kHz
Digital
analyzer
48 kHz
Measurement functions
Cannel
setting
Analyzer instruments
Input configuration
Ch1
Ch2
Ch1
Ch1
Ch2
Ch2
"SENS:DATA1?"
"SENS:DATA2?"
"SENS2:DATA1?"
"SENS2:DATA2?"
"SENS3:DATA1?"
"SENS3:DATA2?"
"SENS4:DATA?"
(Freq. of Ch1)
(Freq. of Ch2)
(Phase or group delay of Ch2)
IEC/IEEE-Bus commands
Read-in of
measurement results
RMS
RMS
selective
PEAK
QPEAK
WAV
Input
PEAK
Input
RMS
Freq.
Freq./
phase
"SENS:FUNC
’RMS|
RMSS|
PEAK|
QPE|
DC|
THD|
THDN|
MDIS|
DIM|
DFD|
WAF|
FFT|
WAV’ "
"SENS2:FUNC
’PEAK|
RMS’ "
"SENS3:FUNC
’FREQ’|
FQPH’|
FQGR"
GEN CROSSED
GEN CROSSED
Freq./
grpdel
BAL (XLR)
UNBAL (BNC)
XLR female
Fig. 3-3 Instruments and measurement functions of UPL analyzer
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Instrument Model and Command Processing UPL
1078.2008.02 3.18 E-10
3.6 Instrument Model and Command Processing
The instrument model shown in the following figure has been configured under the aspect of processing
IEC/IEEE-bus commands. The individual components operate independently of each other and
simultaneously. They communicate with each other by means of so-called messages.
IEC/IEEE bus
Data set
Device hardware
Input unit
with input buffer
Command
identification
(Parser)
Output unit
with
output buffer
IEC/IEEE bus
Status reporting
system
Fig. 3-4 Instrument model with remote control via IEC/IEEE-bus
3.6.1 Input Unit
The input unit receives the commands in the form of characters from the IEC/IEEE bus and collects
them in the input buffer. The input buffer has a capacity of 1024 characters. As soon as the input buffer
is full or receives the interface message DCL, transfer on the IEC/IEEE bus is stopped and the received
data are sent to the parser where the commands are checked for syntax and semantic errors and the
hardware is set in the sequence in which the commands arrived. Data transfer on the IEC/IEEE bus is
then continued. However, if the buffer is not yet full when a terminator is received, the input unit can
receive the next command while the previous command is identified and executed. Reception of a DCL
clears the input buffer.
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Instrument Model and Command Processing
1078.2008.02 3.19 E-10
3.6.2 Parser
The parser (to parse = grammatically analyze) analyzes the data received from the input unit proceeding
in the order in which the data are received. A GET (Group Execute Trigger), for example, is only
processed when the previously received commands are executed. A DCL command will be given
priority. Each command identified as correct will immediately be executed and causes a hardware
setting.
Syntax and semantic errors are recognized and passed on to the status reporting system. The
remaining part of a command line after the syntax error will be further analyzed as far as possible and
processed.
While the parser is setting the hardware, the input unit can collect new commands in the input buffer.
This means that further commands can already be processed while settings are being made in the
hardware ("overlapping execution").
3.6.3 Setting the Device Hardware
The term "device hardware" refers to that part of the UPL which performs the instrument function
proper: signal generation, measurements, etc. This does not include the controller.
An IEC/IEEE-bus command line which may contain several setting commands is sent to the parser,
which checks the IEC/IEEE-bus commands for syntax and semantic errors. If a command is identified
as correct, a check is made with the aid of the current settings whether the command is permissible.
Permissible commands are taken over into the UPL data set (corresponds to hardware settings) and
the device hardware is set. If it turns out that the command is illegal because of the existing settings, as
for example a generator level of 20 V on the unbalanced outputs, an "execution error" message is sent
to the status reporting system and no new settings will be made in the device hardware for this
command. Subsequent commands which prove to be permissible are executed as described in the
following section.
This strictly hierarchical sequence ensures that at no time illegal device states will be set.
3.6.4 Why is a Specific Operating Sequence Sometimes Required?
•Each IEC/IEEE-bus command received by the UPL is immediately checked whether it is permissible.
This check can only be carried out if the UPL knows which instrument or function the command is
intended for, ie if the addressed instrument or command has been activated before.
Example1:
Selecting an input impedance of 600 Ohm is permissible for the balanced input, not for the
unbalanced one.
If this check and the respective error messages were to be omitted, measurements would be carried
out with incorrect instrument settings or would not be possible at all and the user would not even
know about it.
Example2:
Setting: generator, unbalanced outputs.
Remote programming of 20 V generator level.
This is not possible, however, as the balanced output allows only 12 V to be set.
–Should the UPL accept this incorrect setting without signalling an error because the user might
afterwards select unbalanced outputs which can handle 20 V.
–What will happen when this subsequent selection is not made?
– Should the incorrect voltage be output?
–Or, should an error message be output when the switchover is not performed?
–And when should this error be signalled?
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Instrument Model and Command Processing UPL
1078.2008.02 3.20 E-10
These conflicts can be avoided by observing the required operating sequence!
•Since similar menu items of different instruments or functions are addressed with the same command
in remote control, they can only be distinguished by a reference to the currently used instrument or
function.
Example:
Command "INPut:SELect CH1" may be used for all 3 analyzer units.
To provide the possibility for presetting also parameters of non-active functions, information on the
instrument or function to be addressed would have to be added to each IEC/IEEE-bus command.
Thus the internal address management of UPL commands would have to be carried out by the
IEC/IEEE-bus programmer. This would make programming unnecessarily difficult and the number of
commands would increase by many times. The UPL uses approx. 6000 menu items which would
then have to be "called up" separately by the user.
•An important operational feature of the UPL is its capability to note the settings for the individual
generator and analyzer functions and to restore all required parameters when one of these functions
is selected.
This eliminates the need to reset each parameter when a new function is selected.
Example:
Settings: Generator, MOD DIST function with frequencies 400 Hz and 7 kHz.
Switchover to DFD function
The frequency pair 11 and 12 kHz, which was set when the DFD function was used last, is
automatically reset.
This function of the UPL is also available for operation via IEC/IEEE bus, ie even in the case of
remote control a function switchover triggers an automatic reset of all pertaining parameters. This is
a much quicker and more reliable than a reset of each parameter every time by the user via IEC/IEEE
bus.
If settings for non-active instruments would be permissible as well, this automatic function could no
longer be used, as in this case already set parameters would also be overwritten.
•As the same internal data sets are used for manual and remote control (combined manual and
remote control should be possible), the same method of internal parameter processing can only be
allowed for the two modes. Since automatic parameter restoration is indispensable for manual
control, it must also be used in the case of remote operation.
To relieve the user from having to pay attention to such not so obvious conditions, the following applies
for manual and remote control of the UPL:
Any setting that is not permissible cannot become effective in the UPL
This has sometimes the disadvantage that a certain sequence has to be observed even in the case of
remote-control. However, this is more than compensated for by the fact that setting errors are
immediately signalled.
Note:
The command logging capability offered by the Universal Sequence Controller for UPL, option UPL-B10,
minimized the risk of incorrect settings (see 3.15.3 Command Logging - Converting B10 into IEC/IEEE-
Bus Commands)
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Instrument Model and Command Processing
1078.2008.02 3.21 E-10
3.6.5 Status Reporting System
The status reporting system collects information on the device status and makes it available to the
output unit on request. Structure and function are described in detail in section 3.7 Status Reporting
System.
3.6.6 Output Unit
The output unit collects the information requested by the controller. It processes such information in line
with the SCPI rules and makes it available in the 1024-character output buffer. If the requested
information is longer it will be made available in blocks in a way that is not noticeable to the controller.
If the UPL is addressed as a talker and the output buffer does not contain any data or expect data from
the data set management, the output unit sends the error message "Query UNTERMINATED" to the
status reporting system. No data will be sent on the IEC/IEEE bus and the controller waits for the set
time limit. This procedure is prescribed by SCPI.
3.6.7 Triggering a Measurement/Sweep
A measurement or a sweep can be triggered in three different ways:
• With the SCPI-specific command IEC OUT 20,"INIT"
• With the Common Command IEC OUT 20,"*TRG"
• With the addressed command "Group Execute Trigger" IEC LAD 20: IEC GET
The three trigger modes take about the same execution time.
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10) RS-232 interface
See 3.16.4.4 Differences from the IEC-bus Syntax -
UPL-B10
The addressed GET command is illegal.
See 3.17.6 Differences to Remote Control via IEC/IEEE
Bus
The addressed GET command is illegal.
Another three commands are available for waiting for a triggered measurement result. They are
described in section 3.6.8.3 Comparison of Synchronization Capabilities. The synchronization
command "*WAI" is used in the program examples below and in 3.15.15.1 Command
Synchronization with *WAI for demonstrating the three trigger modes for a single measurement.
3.6.8 Command Synchronization
There are two events in the UPL, which have to be waited for before the next command can be
executed to make sure that subsequent commands meet clear conditions:
• End of a calibration
• End of a measurement (measurement result ready to be fetched)
Through programming, the controller can be forced to wait for the end of a calibration or measurement
(see table 3-2 Comparison of synchronization capabilities). Commands "*OPC", "*OPC?" or "*WAI"
are used to ensure that a calibration or measurement is completed before a new command is sent (see
section 3.6.8.3 Comparison of Synchronization Capabilities).
In the examples below synchronization by means of the *WAI command is described.
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Instrument Model and Command Processing UPL
1078.2008.02 3.22 E-10
3.6.8.1 Wait for End of Calibration
Wait for the calibration to be completed before sending the next setting command:
When analog analyzer instruments are called up with commands
IECOUT 20,"INSTrument2 A22;*WAI"
IECOUT 20,"INSTrument2 A110;*WAI"
with calibration switched on in the current setup ("CALibrate:ZERO:AUTO ON")
or upon loading a setup with commands
IECOUT 20,"MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 0, ’filename’;*WAI"
(current setup)
IECOUT 20,"MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 2, ’filename’;*WAI"
(complete setup)
IECOUT 20,"*RST;*WAI"
(default setup)
with calibration switched on in the setup to be loaded ("CALibrate:ZERO:AUTO ON")
or after calling up a calibration with commands
IECOUT 20,"CALibrate:LDG:AUTO ONCE;*WAI" or "CALibrate LDG;*WAI"
IECOUT 20,"CALibrate:ZERO:AUTO ON;*WAI" or "CALibrate AUTO;*WAI"
IECOUT 20,"CALibrate:ZERO:AUTO ONCE;*WAI" or "CALibrate DCC;*WAI"
Without this forced synchronization, a subsequent generator or analyzer setting command would trigger
a new calibration procedure.
3.6.8.2 Wait for End of Measurement/Sweep
Note:
In the explanations below the term measurement result denotes either a single measurement result or a
sequence of results obtained in a single sweep.
A measurement or a sweep can be triggered by means of INIT , *TRG or GET (see section 3.6.8.2
Wait for End of Measurement/Sweep).
INIT will be used in the examples below.
With IEC/IEEE-bus commands assuming a settled measurement result, synchronization with *WAI,
*OPC? or *OPC must be effected by means of an SRQ. The use of the three synchronization methods
is described in section 3.6.8.3 Comparison of Synchronization Capabilities.
*WAI will be used in the examples below.
The effect of the various combinations of measurement or sweep trigger with a synchronization
command is described in the table below.
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Instrument Model and Command Processing
1078.2008.02 3.23 E-10
Table 3-1 Trigger command with/without synchronization
Trigger command with/without
synchronization Description
"INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI" A single measurement or sweep is triggered. Subsequent commands are processed
after the measurement or sweep is completed.
Generator and analyzer setting commands do not trigger a new measurement.
A new measurement has to be triggered with
IECOUT 20,"INIT;*WAI".
This command is the simplest to use and should preferably be used for triggering a
measurement.
"INIT:CONT OFF"
without *WAI When a generator or analyzer setting command is sent during a single measurement,
ie before the measurement is completed, the measurement is restarted to avoid
incorrect results (incorrect results could be obtained, for instance, when the generator
voltage is varied during the measurement).
Generator or analyzer setting commands sent after the single measurement has been
terminated will not trigger a new measurement.
A new measurement has to be triggered with
IECOUT 20,"INIT" .
"INIT:CONT ON;*WAI" Generator and analyzer setting commands will only be processed when the
measurement is terminated. They will not trigger a new measurements.
A new measurement has to be triggered with
IECOUT 20,"INIT;*WAI" .
"INIT:CONT ON"
without *WAI Each generator or analyzer setting command restarts a measurement to avoid incorrect
measurement results (incorrect results could be obtained, for instance, when the
generator voltage is varied during the measurement).
Note:
A synchronization of commands other than analyzer, generator, INIT, status loading or calibration
commands is ineffective and should be avoided considering that synchronization commands are .
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Instrument Model and Command Processing UPL
1078.2008.02 3.24 E-10
3.6.8.3 Comparison of Synchronization Capabilities
Table 3-2 Comparison of synchronization capabilities
Comman
dAction after hardware settling Controller programming
*OPC? Upon completion of the calibration or after a
measurement result has been obtained, command
"*OPC?" causes "1" to be entered in the output
buffer. The "1" is irrelevant - the method is based on
the fact that command IECIN 20,A$ stops the program
run until the buffer has a "1".
This method is therefore not suitable to wait for a
"1" in the program loop. This is possible with
*OPC.
IECOUT 20,"INST2 A22"
IECOUT 20,"*OPC?
IECIN 20,A$
*WAI Upon completion of the calibration or after a
measurement result has been obtained, the next
command is executed.
IECOUT 20,"INST2 A22;*WAI"
*OPC Upon completion of the calibration or after a
measurement result has been obtained, the Operation
Complete bit in the Event Status Register (ESR) is set
which triggers an SRQ if bit 5 in the Status Enable
Register is set.
- Set bit 0 in the ESE
- Set bit 5 in the SRE
- Wait for Service Request (SRQ)
Advantage over "*OPC?" and "*WAI":
While waiting for SRQ with the Operation Complete bit in
the Event Status Register set, the program may carry
out other tasks.
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10) RS-232 interface
See 3.16.4.4 Differences from the IEC-bus Syntax -
UPL-B10
*OPC cannot be used.
See 3.17.6 Differences to Remote Control via IEC/IEEE
Bus
*OPC cannot be used.
Detailed examples for command synchronization are given in section 3.15.15 Command
Synchronization
3.7 Status Reporting System
The status reporting system (see Fig. 3-6, Overview of Status Register) stores all information on the
current operating status of the UPL, eg AUTORANGE being performed, and on errors. Such information
is stored in the status registers and in the error queue. The contents of the status registers and of the
error queue can be queried via the IEC/IEEE bus.
The information is hierarchically structured. The topmost level is formed by the Status Byte Register
(STB) defined by IEEE 488.2 and the associated mask register Service Request Enable (SRE). The
STB receives its information from the Standard Event Status Register (ESR) also defined in IEEE 488.2
and the associated mask register Standard Event Status Enable (ESE) as well as from the SCPI-
defined STATus:OPERation and STATus:QUEStionable registers and the UPL-specific register
STATus:XQUEstionable, which contain detailed information on the UPL.
The status reporting system also includes the IST flag (Individual STatus) and the Parallel Poll Enable
Register (PPE) assigned to it. The IST flag, just as SRQ, combines the complete device status in a
single bit. The PPE for the IST flag has an analog function like the SRE has for the Service Request.
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Status Reporting System
1078.2008.02 3.25 E-10
3.7.1 Structure of SCPI Status Register
The STATus:OPERation Register and the STATus:QUEStionable Register (see section 3.7.3.4
STATus:OPERation Register and) consists of five registers of 16 bits each with different functions (See
Fig. 3-5). The individual bits are independent of each other, ie each hardware status is assigned a bit
number which is the same for all five registers. Bit 5 of the STATus OPERation Registers, for instance,
is assigned in all five registers to the hardware status "wait for trigger". Bit 15 (the most significant bit) is
set to zero in all registers. Thus the contents of the registers can be processed by the controller as a
positive integer.
PTRansition register
EVENT register
ENABle register
& & & & & & & & & & & & & & & &
To Status Byte Register
Summary bit & = logig AND
= logig OR
of all bits
+
+
NTRansition register
CONDition register
15 14 13 12 32
10
Fig 3-5 Status register model
CONDition register The CONDition register is directly written to by the hardware or the summary
bit of the next lower register. Its contents reflects the current device status.
This register can only be read, but neither written to nor cleared. After an SRQ
has been caused by an entry in one of the status registers, reading the
CONDition register does not trigger another SRQ. Further SRQs are only
possible when the EVENT register of the status register is read.
Reading the register does not change its contents.
PTRansition register The Positive TRansition register acts as a transition filter. Upon transition of a
bit of the CONDition register from 0 to 1, the associated PTR bit decides
whether the EVENt bit will be set to 1
PTR bit = 1: the EVENt bit is set.
PTR bit = 0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This register can be written and read.
Reading the register does not change its contents.
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Status Reporting System UPL
1078.2008.02 3.26 E-10
NTRansition register The Negative TRansition register also acts as a transition filter. Upon
transition of a bit of the CONDition register from 1 to 0, the associated NTR bit
decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.
NTR bit = 1: the EVENt bit is set.
NTR bit = 0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This register can be written and read.
Reading the register does not change its contents.
With the aid of these two transition registers the user can define the status
change of the CONDition register (none, 0 to 1, 1 to 0 or both) that is to be
stored in the EVENt register.
EVENt register The EVENt register reports whether an event has occurred since its last
reading, it is the memory of the CONDition register. It registers events that
have been reported by the transition registers. The EVENt register is
continuously updated by the instrument. It can only be read by the user.
Reading this register clears its contents. After an SRQ has been caused
by an entry in a status register, another SRQ is only possible when the EVENt
register of the status register is read. Reading the CONDition register does
not cause another SRQ.
This register is frequently referred to as the overall register.
ENABle register The ENABle register determines whether the EVENt bit affects the summary
bit (see below). Each bit of the EVENt register is ANDed (symbol ’&’) with the
associated ENABle bit. The events of all logical operations of this register are
ORed (symbol ’+’) and passed on to the summary bit.
ENAB bit = 0: the associated EVENt bit does not affect the summary bit.
ENAB bit = 1: if the associated EVENt is "1", the summary bit is also
set to "1".
This register can be written and read by the user.
Reading the register does not change its contents.
Summary bit As stated above, the summary bit for each register is derived from the EVENt
and the ENABle registers. The result is entered into a bit of the CONDition
register of the next higher register.
The instrument automatically generates the summary bit for each register. An
event, eg a non-locking PLL, may thus cause a service request through all
hierarchical levels.
Note:
The Service Request Enable Register SRE defined in IEEE 488.2 may be considered as the ENABle
register of the STB provided that the STB is configured in conformance with SCPI. Accordingly, the ESE
may be considered as the ENABLe register of the ESR.
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Status Reporting System
1078.2008.02 3.27 E-10
3.7.2 Overview of Status Register
Fig. 3-6 Overview of Status Register
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10) RS-232 interface
See 3.16.4.4 Differences from the IEC-bus Syntax -
UPL-B10
List of usable commands of the status reporting system.
See 3.17.6 Differences to Remote Control via IEC/IEEE
Bus
List of usable commands of the status reporting system.
SRE STB
STATus:OPERation register
PPE
IST flag
(Response to parallel poll)
& = logic UND
= logic ODER
of all bits
ESE ESR
SRQ
RQS/MSS
ESB
Power on
User Request
Command Error
Execution Error
Device Dependent Error
Query Error
frei
Operation Complete
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
STATus:QUEStionable register
always 0
RUN (BASIC Macro)
free
free
Analyzer overrun
Measuring status
Sweep status
Sweep status
free
free
Waiting for trigger
Measuring
SWEeping
RANGing
free
CALibrating
always 0
Overload of input channel 2
Overload of input channel 1
Generator status
Generator status
Generator status
Sweep underrange
free
free
Phase meas. res. uncertain
Freq. meas. res. uncertain
free
free
free
free
Function meas. res. uncertain
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OPER
QUES
ENABle part
CONDition part
PTRansition part
NTRansition part
EVENt part
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
-&-
STATus:XQUEstionable register
Low-dist. generator calib. under progress
Negative reference value matched
Analyzer offset calib. under progress
Setup conversion
Printer not ready
Hardcopy under progress
ORUN in channel 2
ORUN in channel 1
Calib. in channel 2
Calib. in channel 1
Range information for function
measurement in channel 2
Range information for function
measurement in channel 1
Function meas. result of channel 2 uncertain
Function meas. result of channel 1 uncertain
Error queue
Meas.-
results
XQUE
MAV
ERRQ
STATus:EVENt-Register
Query
responses
Message AVailable
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Status Reporting System UPL
1078.2008.02 3.28 E-10
3.7.3 Description of Status Registers
3.7.3.1 Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE)
The STB is already defined in IEEE 488.2. It provides a rough overview of the UPL status, collecting
information from the lower-level registers. It is comparable with the CONDition register of a
SCPI-defined register and is at the highest level of the SCPI hierarchy. Its special feature is that bit 6
acts as the summary bit of all other bits of the Status Byte Register.
The Status Byte Register is read out by the query *STB? or a Serial Poll .
The SRE is associated with the STB. The function of the SRE corresponds to that of the ENABle
register of the SCPI registers. Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE. Bit 6 of the SRE is
ignored. If a bit is set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1, a Service
Request (SRQ) will be generated on the IEC/IEEE bus, which triggers an interrupt in the controller
configured for this purpose, and can be further processed by the controller.
The SRE can be set by the command *SRE and read out by the query *SRE?.
Its contents are not set to zero during reading.
If the EVENt part of a status register is read, the associated bit in the status byte register is deleted (eg
STAT:OPER:EVEN? deletes the OPER bit (d7) in the OPERation register).
Table 3-3 Definition of bits used in the Status Byte Register
Bit
No. Definition
0Free
1 XQUEstionable Status summary bit
This bit is set if in the XQUEstionable Status Register an EVENt bit is set and the associated
ENABle bit is set to 1.
The query command of the XQUEstionable Status Registers is "STATus:XQUEstionable:CONDition?" or
"STATus:XQUEstionable[:
2 Error Queue EVENt]?"
The Error Queue contains an entry to be read with command "SYSTem:ERRor?" followed by IECIN.
3QUEStionable Status summary bit
This bit is set if in the QUEStionable Status Register an EVENt bit is set and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1.
A set bit denotes a questionable device status which can be specified in greater detail by querying the
QUEStionable Status Registers with "STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?" or "STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?"
4MAV
A measurement result, response to a query (IEC/IEEE-bus command with ’?’) or Error Queue entry is available and
can be read with an IECIN command.
5ESB bit
Summary bit of the Event Status Register. This bit is set if one of the bits in the Event Status Register is set and
enabled in the Event Status Enable Register.
Setting of this bit denotes a serious error which can be specified in greater detail by querying the Event Status
Registers with "*ESR?".
6MSS bit (master status summary bit)
This bit is set if the UPL triggers a service request. This is the case if one of the other bits of this register is set
together with its mask bit in the Service Request Enable Register SRE.
7OPERation Status Register summary bit
This bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation Status Register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1.
A set bit denotes that an action is just being performed by the UPL. Information on the type of the action can be
obtained by querying the OPERation Status Register with "STATus:OPERation:CONDition?" or
"STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?".
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10) RS-232 interface
See 3.16.4.4 Differences from the IEC-bus Syntax -
UPL-B10
Cannot be used
See 3.17.6 Differences to Remote Control via IEC/IEEE
Bus
Cannot be used
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Status Reporting System
1078.2008.02 3.29 E-10
3.7.3.2 IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE)
Similar to the SRQ, the IST flag (Individual Status Flag) combines the complete status information in a
single bit. It can be queried by a parallel poll (see section 3.7.4.3 Parallel Poll, and 3.15.16.1 SRQ
Interrupt Routine with Serial Poll or with "*IST?".
The Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE) determines which bits of the STB affect the IST flag. The bits of
the STB are ANDed with the corresponding bits of the PPE, bit 6 - in contrast to the SRE - being used
too. The IST flag is obtained by ORing all results together. The PPE can be set by the command *PRE
and read by the query *PRE?.
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10) RS-232 interface
See 3.16.4.4 Differences from the IEC-bus Syntax -
UPL-B10
Cannot be used
See 3.17.6 Differences to Remote Control via
IEC/IEEE Bus
Cannot be used
3.7.3.3 Definition of bits used in the Event Status Register
The ESR is already defined in the IEEE 488.2 standard. It is comparable to the EVENt register of an
SCPI register. The Event Status Register can be read out by the query *ESR?.
The ESE forms the associated ENABle register. It can be set by the command *ESE and read out by
the query *ESE?.
Table 3-4 Definition of bits used in the Event Status Register
Bit No. Definition
0Operation Complete
Upon reception of the "*OPC" command this bit is set exactly when all previous commands have been
executed.
1Free
2Query Error
This bit is set if the controller wants to read data from the instrument but has not sent a data request
command, or if the controller does not fetch the requested data but sends instead a new command to the
instrument. A frequent cause is a faulty query which cannot be executed.
3Device-dependent Error
This bit is set if a device-dependent error occurs. An error message with a positive number denoting the
error in greater detail in plain text (see 3.14 List of Error Messages) will be entered into the Error
Queue.
4Execution Error
This bit is set if the syntax of the command received is correct but the command cannot be executed due
to various marginal conditions. An error message with a number between -200 and -300 describing the
error in greater detail (see 3.14 List of Error Messages) will be entered into the Error Queue.
5Command Error
This bit is set if an undefined command or a command with incorrect syntax is received. An error
message with a number between -100 and -200 describing the error in greater detail (see 3.14 List of
Error Messages) will be entered into the Error Queue.
6User Request
This bit is set upon pressing the [LOCAL] key, ie when the instrument is switched to manual control.
7Power On
This bit is set upon power on of the instrument.
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Status Reporting System UPL
1078.2008.02 3.30 E-10
3.7.3.4 STATus:OPERation Register
The CONDition part of this register contains information on the operations currently performed by the
UPL and the EVENt part on the operations performed by the UPL since the last readout of the register.
The register can be read by the commands
"STATus:OPERation:CONDition?" or
"STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?".
Table 3-5 Definition of bits used in the STATus:OPERation register
Bit No. Definition
0CALibrating
This bit is set as long as a calibration is performed by the UPL.
1Free
2RANGing
This bit is set as long as the UPL performs a range change (eg. autorange).
3SWEeping
This bit is set while the UPL is performing a sweep. Bits 8 and 9 inform on the current sweep state.
4MEASuring
This bit is set while the UPL is performing a measurement. Bit 10 informs on the current measurement state.
5WAIT for TRIGGER
This bit is set while the UPL waits for a trigger event.
6 - 7 Free
8 and 9 Sweep Status
Bit 3, 9, 8
0 0 0 = Sweep OFF No sweep performed
0 0 1 = Sweep TERMINATED Single sweep completed
0 1 0 = Sweep STOPPED Sweep has been stopped and may be continued
0 1 1 = Sweep INVALID Sweep invalid as not yet started
1 0 0 = Sweep MANU RUNNING Manual sweep running
1 0 1 = Sweep SNGL RUNNING Single sweep running
1 1 0 = Sweep CONT RUNNING Continuous sweep running
1 1 1 = Sweep OFF
10 Measuring Status
Bit 4, 10
0 0 = Measuring TERM Single measurement completed
0 1 = Measuring STOP Measurement stopped
1 0 = Measuring SNGL Single measurement running
1 1 = Measuring CONT
11 Analyzer Overrun
The sampling rate applied to the external input is too high for the digital meter selected.
Remedy:
- Select a lower external sampling rate and set function again
- Select a fast digital meter.
12,13 Free
14 RUN (BASIC-Macro)
If a BASIC macro (see 2.16 Macro Operation) is started with the command SYST:PROG:EXEC ’filename.bas’,
this bit is set to 1. This bit is set to 0 when the program has been quit. This 1→0 transition can be queried via
serial poll or initiate an SRQ, eg to fetch measurement data (for a detailed example see 3.15.18 Call BASIC-
Macro
15 Free
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Status Reporting System
1078.2008.02 3.31 E-10
3.7.3.5 STATus:QUEStionable Register
This register contains information on questionable device states. These may for instance occur if the
UPL is operated out of specifications. The register can be read by the commands
"STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?" or
"STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?".
Table 3-6 Definition of bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable Register
Bit No. Definition
0Function
This bit is set when the result of a function measurement is questionable.
1 - 4 Free
5FREQuency
This bit is set when the result of a frequency measurement is questionable.
6PHASe
This bit is set when the result of a phase measurement is questionable.
7 - 8 Free
9Sweep underrange
During the sweep, valid but inaccurate measurement results were obtained because of underranging.
10 - 12 Generator status
Bit 12, 11, 10
0 0 0 = Generator OFF Both generator channels are switched off
0 0 1 = Generator OFF
0 1 0 = Generator RUNNING Generator outputs a signal
0 1 1 = Generator BUSY Generator DSP computes a waveform
1 0 0 = Generator HALTED No generator output signal due to incomplete or invalid setting
1 0 1 = Generator OVERRUN The sampling rate applied to the external input is too high for
the digital generator selected Remedy:
- Select lower sampling rate, call up function again.
- Select faster digital generator
1 1 0 = Generator OFF
1 1 1 = Generator OFF
13 -14 Analyzer Status
Bit 14, 13
0 0 = Normal working order (no overload at any channel)
0 1 = ANL 1: OVLD Overload at input channel 1
1 0 = ANL 2: OVLD Overload at input channel 2
1 1 = ANL 1: OVLD 2: OVLD Overload at both input channels
With input impedance of 300Ω or 600Ω one or both input channels are overloaded!
To protect the analyzer input against damages the input impedance temporarily is switched to 200 kΩ and the
generator output is turned off. Measurement will be continued.
Ways to recover from overload:
- remove overload (input voltage at 300Ω or 600Ω must not exceed 25 V) or
- set input impedance to 200kΩ (INP:IMP R200K).
Reactivate generator output by sending command "OUTPut ON".
C.f. 2.13 Fast Switch-off of Outputs. The overload protection of the analyzer inputs is valid for analog board
versions ≥ 4.00 and software version ≥ 1.0.
15 Free
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Status Reporting System UPL
1078.2008.02 3.32 E-10
3.7.3.6 STATus XQUEStionable Register
This register contains additional information for the Status Operation Register and information on rarely
occurring states. It can be read by the queries "STATus:XQUEStionable :CONDition?" or
"STATus:XQUEStionable[:EVENt]?".
Table 3-7 Definition of bits used in the STATus:XQUEstionable Register
Bit No. Definition
0Bit set: Information of MEASuring bit (d4) and Measuring Status bit (d10) of Status Operation Register
refers to channel 1.
MEASuring bit (d4)
Measuring status bit (d10)
0 0 = Measuring TERM Single measurement terminated on
0 1 = Measuring STOP Measurement stopped on
1 0 = Measuring SNGL Single measurement in progress on
1 1 = Measuring CONT Continuous measurement in progress on
1 Bit set: Information of MEASuring bit (d4) and Measuring Status bit (d10) of Status Operation Register
refers to channel 2.
Analogous to bit No. 0.
2 - 3 Additional range information for channel 1
d3 d2
0 0 = Measurement result valid
0 1 = Ranging in channel 1.
Bit d2 (RANGing) of STATus OPERation Register set simultaneously.
1 0 = Underrange (measurement result inaccurate) in channel 1
1 1 = Overrange (measurement result invalid) in channel 1
Function bit d0 (function measurement result uncertain) of the Status Questionable
Register set simultaneously with underrange and overrange bits.
4 - 5 Additional range information for channel 2
d3 d2
0 0 = Measurement result valid
0 1 = Ranging in channel 2.
Bit d2 (RANGing) of STATus OPERation Register set simultaneously.
1 0 = Underrange (measurement result inaccurate) in channel 2
1 1 = Overrange (measurement result invalid) in channel 2
Function bit d0 (function measurement result uncertain) of the Status Questionable
Register set together with the underrange and overrange bits.
6Bit set: The calibration denoted in bit 13 or 15 is in progress in channel 1. No measurements are performed
during this period.
7Bit set: The calibration denoted in bit 13 or 15 is in progress in channel 2. No measurements are
performed during this period.
8Bit set: The sampling rate at the external input of channel 1 is too high for the digital instrument.
Remedy: Set lower rate and recall measurement function.
9Bit set: Ditto for channel 2
10 Bit set: Read-out of screen content to a printer or a file. Operation of UPL is disabled for a few seconds.
11 Bit set: Printer not ready.
12 Bit set: A previous SETUP is converted to the latest status.
13 Bit set: Calibration of analyzer offset in progress. No measurement results are output during this period.
14 Bit set: A negative reference value is limited to +10-10 for the dBr calculation.
15 Bit set: Calibration of low-distortion generator in progress. No measurement results are output during
this period.
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Status Reporting System
1078.2008.02 3.33 E-10
3.7.4 Use of Status Reporting System
For an efficient use of the status reporting system, the information contained therein has to be
transferred to the controller and further processed. There are various methods which are described in
the following. Detailed program examples are given in 3.15 Examples of IEC/IEEE-Bus
Programming.
3.7.4.1 Service Request, Use of Hierarchical Structure
Under certain conditions, the UPL may send a service request (SRQ) to the controller. This service
request usually causes an interrupt at the controller to which the controller program can respond by a
suitable action. As shown in Fig. 3-6 (Section 3.7.2 Overview of Status Register), a SRQ will always be
triggered if one or several of the bits 3, 5 or 7 have been set in the Status Byte Register and enabled in
the SRE. Each of these bits combines the information from a further status register. By setting the
ENABle registers of the status registers accordingly, any bit in any status register will be able to trigger a
SRQ. To utilize the possibilities of the service request, all bits in the enable registers SRE and ESE
should be set to "1".
Examples:
(see also Fig 3-6 , Section 3.7.2 Overview of Status Register ):
Use command "*OPC" for generating an SRQ. While waiting for the SRQ, the program may perform
other tasks.
• Setting bit 0 (Operation Complete) in the ESE
• Setting bit 5 (ESB) in the SRE
Upon completion of the settings, the UPL generates an SRQ.
Indicating the end of a sweep by an SRQ via bit 3 in the STATus OPERation Register. While waiting for
the SRQ the program may perform other tasks.
• Setting bit 7 (summary bit of STATus:OPERation Register) in the SRE
• Setting bit 3 (Sweep Terminated) in the STATus:OPERation:ENABle Register.
• Setting bit 3 in the STATus:OPERation:NTRansition to ensure that the transition of sweeping bit 3
from 1 to 0 (Sweep-Terminated) is also stored in the EVENt register. Calling up the *CLS command
causes all bits of the NTRansition and PTRansition to be set to 1 so that any bit change is recorded.
Enabling the desired enable bit, in this case bit 3, will normally be sufficient.
After having completed the sweep, the UPL generates an SRQ.
The SRQ is thus the only way for the UPL to become active of its own. A controller program should set
the UPL so that a service request will be generated in case of malfunctions. The program should
suitably respond to the service request. A detailed example of a service request routine is given in
section 3.15.15 Command Synchronization.
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10) RS-232 interface
See 3.16.4.4 Differences from the IEC-bus Syntax -
UPL-B10
Cannot be used
See 3.17.6 Differences to Remote Control via
IEC/IEEE Bus
Cannot be used
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Status Reporting System UPL
1078.2008.02 3.34 E-10
3.7.4.2 Serial Poll
Serial Poll is mainly used for obtaining a quick overview of the status of several devices connected to
the IEC/IEEE bus
In the case of a Serial Poll, the status byte of a device can be queried with
IECOUT 20,"*STB?"
IEC IN 20,A%
However, querying the status byte is normally implemented by interface messages (see annex A,
Interface Messages) which means that a single byte is set to the hardware.
The R&S BASIC command for the execution of a Serial Poll is
IEC SPL 20,A%
It is much quicker than the Common Command "*STB?".
The serial poll method has already been defined in the IEEE 488.1 standard and used to be the only
standard method for querying the status byte of several devices. This method also works with
instruments which neither conform to SCPI nor to IEEE 488.2.
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10) RS-232 interface
See 3.16.4.4 Differences from the IEC-bus Syntax -
UPL-B10
Cannot be used
See 3.17.6 Differences to Remote Control via
IEC/IEEE Bus
Cannot be used
3.7.4.3 Parallel Poll
In the parallel poll mode up to eight devices are simultaneously requested by a command from the
controller to transmit 1 bit of information on the assigned data line, ie to pull the assigned data line to
logic 0 or 1. Similar to the SRE register which defines the conditions under which an SRQ will be
generated, there is a Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE), which is also ANDed bit by bit with the STB –
taking into account bit 6. The result is ORed and is then returned (may be inverted) as a reply to a
parallel poll of the controller. The result can also be read out without parallel poll by the query *IST.
The UPL must first be set for the parallel poll using the R&S BASIC command IEC PCON.
Example:
IECPCON 20,1,6: UPL identifies itself by a 1 on line 6.
This command assigns a data line to the device on which it sends an SRQ. The parallel poll itself is
made by IEC PPL Pp%.
The parallel poll mode is mainly used to find out quickly which of the devices connected to the IEC/IEEE
bus has caused an SRQ. For this purpose SRE and PPE must be set to the same value. A detailed
example of parallel poll is given in section 3.15.16.1.2 Serial Poll SRQ Routine.
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10) RS-232 interface
See 3.16.4.4 Differences from the IEC-bus Syntax -
UPL-B10
Cannot be used
See 3.17.6 Differences to Remote Control via IEC/IEEE
Bus
Cannot be used
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Status Reporting System
1078.2008.02 3.35 E-10
3.7.4.4 Queries
Each individual register of a status register can be read out by queries. The individual queries are given
in the detailed description of the registers in Section 3.7.3 Description of Status Registers. The queries
always return a number representing the bit pattern of the queried register. This number is evaluated by
the controller program.
Queries are mainly used after a SRQ to obtain detailed information on the cause for the SRQ.
3.7.4.5 Error Queue Query
• Each error condition in the instrument causes an entry in the error queue. The entries in the error
queue are detailed error messages in plain text which can be read out via IEC/IEEE bus by the query
SYSTem:ERRor?. Each query SYSTem:ERRor? returns an entry from the error queue. If there are
no more error messages in the error queue, 0 = "No error" is returned by the instrument
•The error queue should be queried in the controller program after each SRQ since the queue entries
provide a more precise description of the error cause than the status registers. In particular in the test
phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried at regular intervals since it also
registers faulty commands from the controller to the UPL.
Note:
In addition to an entry in the Error Queue, each error causes a plain-text message to be output on the
UPL display so that the IEC/IEEE-bus control program can be checked in the REMOTE control mode
without reading out the Error Queue.
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Status Reporting System UPL
1078.2008.02 3.36 E-10
3.7.5 Resetting the Status Reporting Systems
Table 3-8 contains the various commands and events causing a reset of the status reporting system.
None of the commands, with the exception of *RST affects the functional device setting. In particular
DCL does not clear the device settings.
Table 3-8 Resetting of device functions
Effect
Event
DCL, SDC
(Device Clear,
Selected Device
Clear)
*RST or
SYSTem:PRESet STATus:PRESet *CLS
Clears STB, ESR
yes
Clears SRE, ESE
Clears PPE
Clears EVENt registers
yes
Clears ENABle registers of OPERation,
QUESTionable and XQUEStionable Register,
fills ENABle registers of all other registers with
"1".
yes
Fills PTRansition registers with "1",
clears NTRansition registers
yes
Clears Error Queue
yes
Clears output buffer yes 1) 1) 1)
Clears command processing and input buffer yes
1) Any command that is the first one in a command line clears the output buffer.
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Notation
1078.2008.02 3.37 E-10
3.8 Notation of Command Table
All commands implemented in the UPL according to the command system are tabulated and described
in detail in section 3.10 IEC-bus Commands. The notation is in line with the SCPI standard provided
the committee has defined a command for the required function.
Command table in section 3.10 IEC-bus Commands
Command: In this column the complete command without parameters is listed.
Parameter: Here the required parameters and their range of values are stated. If the
command is only available in the form of a query, ’Query only’ is marked in
this column.
Basic unit: Basic unit of physical parameter.
Meaning: Brief description of command.
Section: Reference to the detailed function description in the case of manual
operation, mainly section 2 of the UPL manual.
Upper/lower case Upper/lowercase characters are used to differentiate between the long
form and the short form of the keywords of a command. The UPL itself
does not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase letters.
Special character | For some commands there is a choice of keywords having the same effect.
These keywords are stated in the same line and separated by a vertical
bar. Only one of these keywords need to be stated in the header of the
command. The effect of the command is independent of the keyword
selected.
Example:"SOURce:FREQuency:CW|:FIXed"
(setting generator to a constant frequency of 1 kHz)
The two commands below have an identical effect
"SOURce:FREQuency:CW 1E3"≡ "SOURce:FREQuency:FIXed 1E3"
A vertical bar in the notation of the parameters is used to separate
alternative options and is to be seen as "or". The effect of the command
differs according to the parameter stated.
Example:Selection of parameters for the command
"SENSe:VOLTage:UNIT V|DBV|DBU"
(measurement result may be displayed in Volt, dBV or dBu)
Special characters [ ] Keywords in square brackets may be omitted in compound headers (see
section 3.5.3 Structure of a Command Line). For reasons of compatibility
with the SCPI standard, the instrument must be able to accept the full
length of the command.
Parameters in square brackets may also be optionally inserted in the
command or omitted.
Example: "SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence:MODE ..."
has the same effect as
"SENSe:REFerence:MODE ..."
(selecting the method for generating a level reference value)
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Notation UPL
1078.2008.02 3.38 E-10
Parameters in square brackets
may also be optionally inserted in the command or omitted.
Example: TRACe[1] stands for TRACe and TRACe1
TRACe[1|2] denotes that either TRACe1 or
TRACe2 can be selected, causing
different settings.
DISPlay:TRACe[1|2]:MARKer MODE ...
(markers for FFT spectrum display may be different for TRACe1
and TRACe2)
TRACe[] denotes that the command can be used for
TRACe1 and TRACe2, causing the same settings
in both cases.
DISPlay:TRACe[]:CURSor[1]:MODE ...
(selected cursor function apply to both traces!)
Special characters { } Parameters in curly brackets may be included in the command as often as
required.
Example: SENSe[1]:LIST:FREQuency <n>{,<n>}
(frequencies of an RMS-selective sweep)
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Common Commands
1078.2008.02 3.39 E-10
3.9 Common Commands
The common commands are based on the IEEE 488.2 (IEC 625.2) standard. A specific command has
the same effect in different instruments. The headers of these commands consist of an asterisk "*"
followed by three letters. Many common commands refer to the status reporting system described in
detail in section 3.15 Examples of IEC/IEEE-Bus Programming.
Table 3-9 Common Commands
Command Brief description Parameter / Notes Universal
Sequence
Controller
UPL-B10
RS-232 interface
*CLS Resets status byte no query Not usable Not usable
*ESE Sets Event Status Enable Register 0 to 255 Not usable Not usable
*ESR? Readout of content of Event Status
Register query only Usable Usable
*IDN? Identification query ROHDE&SCHWARZ, UPL,
0, 2.xx Usable Usable
*IST? Query for content of IST flag query only Not usable Not usable
*OPC Synchronization command Usable Usable
*PCB Address for passing back the IEC/IEEE-
bus control 0 to 30, no query Not usable Not usable
*PRE Sets Parallel Poll Enable Register 0 to 255 Not usable Not usable
*RST Resets the device to a defined default
state. The parameter link (see 2.15.8
Transfer of Parameters (Parameter
Link Function)) is disabled to maintain
the default setting described in
Appendix A UPL Default Setup
no query Usable Usable
*SRE Sets Service Request Enable Register 0 to 255 Not usable Not usable
*STB? Query for content of Status Byte query only Not usable Not usable
*TRG Triggers measurement no query Usable Usable
*TST? UPL selftest query only Usable Usable
*WAI Synchronization command Usable Usable
*CLS
CLEAR STATUS sets the status byte (STB), the Standard Event Register (ESR) and the EVENt part
of the QUEStionable, OPERation and of the XQUEstionable Register to zero. The command has no
effect on the mask and transition parts of the register. The output buffer is cleared.
*ESE 0 to 255
EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the Event Status Enable Register to the defined value. The query
*ESE? returns the content of the Event Status Enable Registers in decimal form.
*ESR?
EVENT STATUS ENABLE returns the contents of the Event Status Enable Register in decimal form
(0 to 255) and clears the register.
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Common Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.40 E-10
*IDN?
IDENTIFICATION QUERY for identification of the instrument.
The response is for example: "Rohde&Schwarz, UPL, 0, 2.xx"
UPL = instrument designation: 0 = serial number, 2.xx = firmware version
*IST?
INDIVIDUAL STATUS QUERY returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form (0 | 1).
The IST flag is the status bit sent during a Parallel Poll (see section 3.7.3.2 IST Flag and Parallel
Poll Enable Register (PPE)).
*OPC
OPERATION COMPLETE sets bit 0 in the Event Status Register if all preceding commands have
been executed. This bit may be used to assert a Service Request (see section 3.6.8.3 Comparison
of Synchronization Capabilities, 3.7.3.3 Event Status Reg. (ESR), Event Status Enable Reg. (ESE),
and section 3.15.15.3 Command Synchronization with *OPC and SRQ
*OPC?
OPERATION COMPLETE QUERY places an ASCII character "1" in the output buffer as soon as all
preceding commands have been executed (see 3.6.8.3 Comparison of Synchronization Capabilities
and section 3.15.15.3 Command Synchronization with *OPC and SRQ.
*PCB 0 to 30
PASS CONTROL BACK notifies the address of the controller to which the IEC/IEEE-bus control is to
returned.
*PRE 0 to 255
PARALLEL POLL REGISTER ENABLE sets the Parallel Poll Enable Register to the defined value.
The query *PRE? returns the contents of the Parallel Poll Enable Registers in decimal form
*RST
RESET sets the UPL to a defined default state. The parameter-Link (see 2.15.8 Transfer of
Parameters (Parameter Link Function)) is switched off to ensure that the default state as described
in Annex A UPL Default Setup is maintained after a change of instrument or function.
*SRE 0...255
SERVICE REQUEST ENABLE sets the Service Request Enable Register to the defined value. Bit 6
(MSS mask bit) remains 0. This command determines the conditions under which a Service Request
will be asserted. The query *SRE? outputs the contents of the Service Request Enable Registers in
decimal form.
Bit 6 is always 0.
*STB?
READ STATUS BYTE QUERY outputs the contents of the status byte in decimal form.
Its contents are not set to zero during reading.
If the EVENt part of a status register is read, the associated bit in the status byte register is deleted
(eg STAT:OPER:EVEN? deletes the OPER bit (d7) in the OPERation register).
*TRG
TRIGGER starts all actions waiting for a trigger event.
See sections 3.6.7 Triggering a Measurement/Sweep; 3.6.8.2 Wait for End of Measurement/Sweep
and section 3.15.8.1 Readout of Triggered Measurements.
*TST?
SELF TEST QUERY causes a brief selftest of the UPL and outputs an error code in decimal form (’0’
for ok., ’1’ for error)
*WAI
WAIT-to-CONTINUE allows processing of commands only after all preceding commands have been
executed, all signals settled and current measurements are terminated (see sections 3.6.8.2 Wait
for End of Measurement/Sweep, 3.6.8.3 Comparison of Synchronization Capabilities, and section
3.15.15.1 Command Synchronization with *WAI.
1078.2008.02 3.0 E-10
IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands
Selection of Generator  Configuration of Analog Generators • Configuration of Digital Generators
• Generator Sweeps  Generator Functions
IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands for Analyzers
Selection of Analyzer  Configuration of Analog Analyzers • Configuration of Digital Analyzers
• Starting the Analyzer, Ext. Sweep  Analyzer Functions
Selection of Analyzer Filter
Units for IEC/IEEE Measurement Results
Loading and Storing
Loading and Storing Instrument Setups • Loading and Storing Traces and Lists
Commands for Graphical Representation of Results
Commands for Printing/Plotting of Screen and Storing in Files
Setting and Display of Auxiliary Parameters
IEC/IEEE-Bus Address • Keyboard Settings • Tastatureinstellungen • Setting and Switching
Off the Displays • Version Display •Calibration •Transfer of Settings • Parameters of COM2 Interface
• Loading Speed for Setups and Analyzer Measurement Functions
Commands for Data Output
Commands for Input/Output of Block Data
Commands for Status and Error Queries
Commands for Synchronization
Settings without Corresponding IEC/IEEE-Bus Command
Alphabetical List of IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.41 E-10
3.10 IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands
3.10.1 Generators
3.10.1.1 Selection of Generator
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
INSTrument[1][:SELect]
equivalent to
INSTrument[1]:NSELect
A25
D48
aias
1
3
→ Two-channel analog generator, frequency range:
2 Hz to 21.75 kHz with universal generator
10 Hz to 110 kHz low-distortion generator (UPL-B1 option)
→ Two-channel digital generator, frequency range:
2 Hz to 21.93 kHz with option UPL-B2 (digital audio I/O)
2 Hz to 43.86 kHz with option UPL-B29 (digital audio 96 kHz)
→ Analog generator
→ Digital generator
2.5.1
GEN panel
INSTRUMENT
→ ANALOG
→ DIGITAL
3.10.1.2 Configuration of Analog Generators
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
OUTPut:SELect OFF
CH1
CH2
CH2Is1
→ Generator channels switched off
→ Only generator channel 1 active
→ Only generator channel 2 active
→ Both generator channels active
2.5.2
GEN panel
Channel(s)
→ OFF
→ 1
→ 2
→ 2 ≡ 1
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.42 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
OUTPut:TYPE BALanced
UNBalanced → Balanced output (XLR connector)
→ Unbalanced output (BNC connector) 2.5.2
GEN panel
Output
→ BAL
→ UNBAL
OUTPut:IMPedance R10
R200
R150
(Query reply. = R200)
R600
Only for OUTPut:TYPE Bal
→ Output impedance 10 Ω
→ Output impedance 200 Ω
→ Output impedance 150 Ω, if the standard generator source impedance
was changed from 200 Ω to 150 Ω using Modification Analog Generator
UPL-U3 (Order No. 1078.4900.02)
→ Output impedance 600 Ω
2.5.2
GEN panel
Impedance
→ 10 Ω
→ 200 Ω
(→ 150 Ω)
→ 600 Ω
SOURce:VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO ON
OFF
Range selection for setting the generator output voltage.
→ D/A converters operating at full range.
The output voltage is set using the output amplifier.
Optimum noise and THD values.
Any maximum voltage can be entered with command
SOUR:VOLT:LIM <nu>,
higher voltages are not permissible.
→ The output amplifier is set to the maximum voltage specified by the next
command; higher voltages are not permissible. The current output voltage
is attained with the smaller digital values of the D/A converter. Setting the
analog hardware is not required for changing the output voltage.
Advantage: fast level changes and better transient response.
2.5.2
GEN panel
Volt Range
→ AUTO
→ FIX
SOURce:VOLTage:LIMit[:AMPLitude] <nu>
0 to 20 V V
Output voltage limit for command
SOUR:VOLT:RANG:AUTO OFF preventing too high voltages to be entered. 2.5.2
GEN panel
For Volt Range =
AUTO, Max Volt
is displayed,
for Volt Range =
FIX, a numeric
value.
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.43 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:FREQuency:REFerence <nu>
1 MHz to 1 MHz Hz Reference frequency
2.5.2
GEN panel
Ref.Freq
SOURce:VOLTage:REFerence <nu>
1µV to 1 MV V Reference voltage
2.5.2
GEN panel
Ref.Volt
OUTPut ON
OFF
→ Switches all outputs on.
After an overload of analyzer inputs (input voltage into 300 Ω and 600 Ω
above 25 V), the input impedance is automatically switched to 200 kΩ to
protect the analyzer input and the generator output is switched off. This
command switches the generator on again and measurements can be
continued provided the overvoltage is eliminated or the input impedance
switched to 200 kΩ (INP:IMP R200K).
The overload protection of the analyzer iniputs is valid for analog board
versions ≥ 4.00 and software versions ≥ 1.0.
→ Switches all outputs off including clock lines of digital interfaces. See 2.13
Fast Switch-off of Outputs.
2.13
Taste
OUTPUT OFF
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.44 E-10
3.10.1.3 Configuration of Digital Generators
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:DIGital:FEED ADATa
JITTer
PHASe
COMMon
Use of generator data:
→ Generator controls the audio content of the output
→ Generator controls the jitter modulator of the digital interface
→ Same as JITTer with additional phase offset.
→ Generator controls common-mode voltage at digital output
2.5.3
GEN panel
Src Mode
→ AUDIO DATA
→ JITTER ONLY
→ PHASE
→ COMMON
ONLY
SOURce:DIGital:SYNC:DELay <nu> UI see
2.5.3.1
Setting a phase offset for SOUR:DIG:FEED JPHase 2.5.3.1
GEN panel
Phase ToRef
OUTPut:SELect OFF
CH1
CH2
CH2Is1
→ Generator channels off
→ Only generator channel 1 active
→ Only generator channel 2 active
→ Both generator channels active and in phase
2.5.3
GEN panel
Channel(s)
→ OFF
→ 1
→ 2
→ 2 ≡ 1
OUTPut:DIGital:UNBalanced:FEED AOUTput
AINPut → Same channel present at BNC and XLR connectors
→ Input signal through-connected and output at BNC connector
2.5.3
GEN panel
Unbal Out
→ AUDIO OUT
→ AUDIO IN
OUTPut:DIGital:CSIMulator
OFF
SIMLong
A 100-m cable of 110-Ω nominal impedance is simulated and
cut into the generator output.
→ Cable simulation switched off
→ Cable simulation switched on
2.5.3
GEN panel
Cable Sim
→ OFF
→ LONG CABLE
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.45 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:DIGital:SYNC:SOURce GCLock
AINPut
RINPut
SINPut
→ The clock is generated in the UPL. Selectable: 32, 44.1 or 48 kHz
and 27 to 55 kHz variable.
→ Generator clock from analyzer input.
→ Generator clock from rear reference input
→ Generator clock controlled via rear BNC connector. The mark-to-space
ratio can be set with command
SOUR:DIG:SYNC:MODE to .
2.5.3
GEN panel
Sync Out
→ GEN CLK
→ AUDIO IN
→ REF IN
→ SYNC IN
SOURce:DIGital:SYNC:MODE V50
V60
WCLock
IWCLock
F1024
→ The generator sampling rates of 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz are synchronized to
the 50-Hz video repetition rate.
→ Same as V50, but for 60 Hz (NTSC).
→ Generator directly synchronized to applied word clock using PLL.
→ Same as WCLock but with the inverted input used for synchronization.
→ Synchronization to a "customized clock", eg in the case of DAB
2.5.3
GEN panel
Sync Mode
→ VIDEO 50
→ VIDEO 60
→ WORD CLK
→ WRD CLK INV
→ 1024 kHz
OUTPut:SAMPle[:FREQuency]:MODE F32
F44
F48
F88
F96
EXTern
SYNChron
VALue
→ Sampling frequency 32 kHz (only with option UPL-B2 Digital Audio I/O, not
with option UPL-B29 Digital Audio 96 kHz)
→ Sampling frequency 44.1 kHz
→ Sampling frequency 48 kHz
→ Sample freq. 88.2 kHz (only with option UPL-B29 Digital Audio 96 kHz
in High Rate Mode CONF:DAI HRM)
→ Sample freq. 96 kHz (only with option UPL-B29 Digital Audio 96 kHz
in High Rate Mode CONF:DAI HRM)
→ External sample frequency. Refer to next command for input values.
→ Sampling frequency synchronized to analyzer.
→ Sampling frequency entered with next command.
2.5.3
GEN panel
Sample Freq
→ 32 kHz
→ 44.1 kHz
→ 48 kHz
→ 88.2 kHz
→ 96 kHz
→ EXTERN
→ SYNCHRON
→ VALUE:
OUTPut:SAMPle:FREQuency <nu>
27 kHz to 55 kHz
40 kHz to 106 kHz
Hz External sample frequency for digital instrument.
Option UPL-B2 (Digital Audio I/O)
Option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz)
2.5.3
GEN panel
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.46 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
OUTPut:DIGital:SYNC:FEED
AIPut
GCLock
RINPut
SPLL
Specifies the signal to be output at rear BNC connector for synchronization.
→ Audio input signal output without clock processing.
→ Output of internal generator clock.
→ Same as GCLock, but reference input.
→ Audio input signal output after clock processing with internal PLL.
2.5.3
GEN panel
Sync Out
→ AUDIO IN
→ GEN CLK
→ REF IN
→ SYNC PLL
OUTPut:DIGital:SYNC:TYPE WCLock
BCLock
Specifies the signal type for OUTPut:DIGital:SYNC:FEED ...... .
→ Sampling frequency
→ 128 times the sampling frequency
2.5.3
GEN panel
Type
→ WORD CLK
→ BIPHASE CLK
OUTPut:DIGital:REFerence:FEED
AINPut
AINReclock
AOUTput
RGENerator
Specifies the signal to be output at the Ref-Out connector.
→ The input is throughconnected.
→ The input signal is output again; the clock is processed via PLL using the
internal clock ("jitter suppression").
→ The same signal as on the front panel is output.
→ Reference generator output. For an output with phase the reference is
defined.
2.5.3
GEN panel
Ref Out
→ AUDIO IN
→ AUD IN RCLK
→ AUDIO OUT
→ REF GEN
SOURce:DIGital:REFerence AZERo
AONE
All data of the reference generator are
→ 0
→ 1
2.5.3
GEN panel
Data
→ ALL ZERO
→ ALL ONE
SOURce:VOLTage:LIMit[:AMPLitude] <nu>
0 to 1 FS FS Voltage limitation (for audio data only)
2.5.3
GEN panel
Max Volt
SOURce:FREQuency:REFerence <nu>
1 MHz to 1 MHz Hz Reference frequency
2.5.3
GEN panel
Ref.Freq
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.47 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:Voltage:REFerence <nu>
10 nFS to 100 Fs Hz Reference level
2.5.3
GEN panel
Ref Volt
OUTPut:AUDiobits <n>
8 to 24
Word length of audio samples in bits. 2.5.3
GEN panel
Audio Bits
OUTPut:SIGNal: LEVel <nu> Vpp Voltage at Unbal AES output 2.5.3
GEN panel
Unbal Vpp
OUTPut:SIGNal:BALanced:LEVel <nu>
0 to 8.5 V
Setting the output voltage of the digital signal at the BAL (XLR) interface.
Peak-to-peak voltage upon termination with nominal impedance (110 );
without termination the voltage is twice as high.
This voltage is always 4 times as high as the voltage at the UNBAL (BNC)
interface.
2.5.3
GEN panel
BAL Vpp
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.48 E-10
3.10.1.3.1 AES / EBU PROTOCOL Definition
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:PROTocol OFF
STATic
ENHanced
→ If the generated channel status data are of no interest, the
undesired menu lines are removed from the generator panel.
Channel status data cannot be entered.
The last-defined status remains unchanged.
→ Only basic channel status data can be generated (RAW data
identical in both channels have to be defined via a file with or without
valid CRC)
This mode can always be used without any restriction.
→ Selectable only with option UPL-B21 (digital audio protocol) fitted.
All protocol commands are displayed in the GENERATOR panel where the
full scope of protocol data generation can be entered and displayed.
Besides the valid CRC, local time code can also be generated, which
is reset with generator start and automatically counted up.
In this mode the analyzer must also be set to protocol analysis.
Therefore, when switching on ENHANCED the following settings are
made automatically in the analyzer panel:
• INSTRUMENT DIGITAL (INST2 D48)
• Meas Mode AUDIO DATA (SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT)
• FUNCTION PROTOCOL (SENS:FUNC ’PROT’)
Conversely, this function is set to OFF as soon as one of the
three named analyzer menu lines is changed.
2.5.3.2
ANA panel
PROTOCOL
→ PANEL OFF
→ STATIC
→ ENHANCED
OUTPut:VALidity CH1And2
NONE
Sets the validity bits in the AES/EBU data stream.
→ Valid bit for both channels set.
→ Valid bit for none of the channels set
2.5.3.2
GEN panel
Validity
SOURce:PROTocol:LCHannelstatus ZERO
AES3
CRC
RAW
Specifies how the channel status data for LEFT are to be generated.
→ All channel status data bits are 0
→ UPL generates local timecode and CRC. All other channel status data are
defined by the file loaded with command
MMEMory:LOAD:LPGC "filename".
→ Same as AES3, however local timecode is not generated by UPL but set
as a fixed value from the file.
→ Same as AES3, however neither local timecode nor CRC is generated by
UPL but set as fixed values from the file.
2.5.3.2
GEN panel
Ch Sta. L
→ ZERO
→ FILE+AES3
→ FILE+CRC
→ FILE
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.49 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
MMEMory:LOAD:LPGC "filename" Stating a file containing channel status data for LEFT.
Preset file type: * .pgc
2.5.3.2
GEN panel
Filename
SOURce:PROTocol:RCHannelstatus ZERO
LEQual
AES3
CRC
RAW
Specifies how the channel status data RIGHT are to be generated.
→ All channel status data bits are 0
→ The two sides are identical, all definitions made for left are copied to the
right side. The operating mode is defined by Ch. Stat L.
→ UPL generates local timecode and CRC.
All other channel status data are defined by the file loaded with command
MMEMory:LOAD:RPGC "filename".
→ Same as AES3, however local timecode not generated by UPL but set as a
fixed value from the file.
→ Same as AES3, however neither local timecode nor CRC is generated by
UPL but set as fixed values from the file.
2.5.3.2
GEN panel
Ch Stat. R
→ ZERO
→ EQUAL L
→ FILE+AES3
→ FILE+CRC
→ FILE
MMEMory:LOAD:RPGC "filename" Stating a file containing channel status data for RIGHT.
Preset file type: *.prd
2.5.3.2
GEN panel
Filename
SOURce:PROTocol:UMODe
ZERO
FILE
Specifies how user data are to be generated.
→ All user bits are initialized to be 0.
→ User bits are output according to the definitions in the file loaded with
command MEMory:LOAD:PGU "filename".
2.5.3.2
GEN panel
User Mode
→ ZERO
→ FILE DEF
MMEMory:LOAD:PGU "filename" Stating a file containing USER data
Preset data type: *.prd
2.5.3.2
GEN panel
Filname
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.50 E-10
3.10.1.3.2 Auxiliary AUX GEN
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce2:FUNCtion OFF
ANLGout
COMMon
JITTer
→ Auxiliary generator switched off, audio data generated without interference
signal, analog outputs switched off (high-impedance).
→ Audio data generated without interference signal, an analog signal
is generated at the analog XLR connectors in addition to the digital signal
at the BAL, UNBAL and optical outputs.
Frequency and level of the analog signal can be set or swept.
→ A common-mode interference signal is superimposed on the audio data,
the analog outputs are switched off (high-impedance).
Frequency and level of the interference signal can be set or swept
→ A jitter signal is added to the audio signal,
the analog outputs are switched off (high-impedance).
Jitter frequency and level can be set or swept.
Permissible only for digital generator in the Src Mode AUDIO DATA | PHASE
(INST D48 with SOUR:DIG:FEED ADAT|PHAS)
2.5.5
GEN panel
→ OFF
→ ANALOG OUT
→ COMMON MODE
→ JITTER
OUTPut2:SELect
OFF
CH1
CH2
CH2Is1
Selection of output channel when the auxiliary generator is used as an analog
generator (SOUR2:FUNC ANLG). The low-distortion generator is used, level
control is via the output amplifier.
→ Both channels off
→ Channel 1 on, channel 2 off
→ Channel 2 on, channel 1 off
→ Same signal on both channels
2.5.5
GEN panel
Channel(s)
→ OFF
→ 1
→ 2
→ 2 ≡ 1
OUTPut2:TYPE
UNBalanced
BALanced
Selection of output channel when the auxiliary generator is used as an analog
generator (SOUR2:FUNC ANLG).
→ An unbalanced signal is generated at the XLR connector; the maximum
output level is 10 V.
→ A balanced signal is generated at the XLR connector, the maximum output
level is 20 V. The output impedance can be selected in three steps with
the subsequent command.
2.5.5
GEN panel
Output
→ UNBAL
→ BAL
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.51 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
OUTPut2:IMPedance
R10
R200
R600
Selection of output impedance when the auxiliary generator is used as an
analog generator (SOUR2:FUNC ANLG) and OUTP2:TYPE BAL
is selected; the output impedance of the unbalanced output
is generally 5 Ω.
→ 10 Ω
→ 200 Ω
→ 600 Ω
2.5.5
GEN panel
Impedance
→ 10 Ω
→ 200 Ω
→ 600 Ω
SOURce2:SWEep ... The auxiliary generator has its own sweep system which is similar to that of
the function generator. 2-dimensional sweep, ie simultaneous frequency and
level sweep, is not implemented. The commands permissible for the
auxiliary generator are listed in section 3.10.1.4.1 Sweep Settings for
Auxiliary Generator (AUX GEN).
2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
SOURce2:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed] <nu>
10 Hz to 110 kHz Hz For SOUR2:FUNC ANLG: Entry of sinewave frequency of analog signal
For SOUR2:FUNC COMM: Entry of common-mode frequency
For SOUR2:FUNC JITT: Entry of jitter frequency
2.5.5
GEN panel
Depending on
AUX GEN:
→ Anlg Freq
→ Comm Freq
→ JittPkFreq
SOURce2:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude] <nu>
0 to 7.07 V
0 to 7.07 V
0 to 250 mUI
V
V
UI
For SOUR2:FUNC ANLG: Entry of sinewave amplitude of analog signal
For SOUR2:FUNC COMM: Entry of common-mode amplitude
For SOUR2:FUNC JITT: Entry of jitter-peak amplitude
2.5.5
GEN panel
Depending on
AUX GEN:
→ Anlg Ampl
→ Comm Ampl
→ JittPkAmpl
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.52 E-10
3.10.1.4 Generator Sweeps
3.10.1.4.1 Sweep Settings for Auxiliary Generator (AUX GEN)
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce2:SWEep:MODE MANual
AUTO
Auxiliary generator:
→ Manual sweep trigger
→ Automatic sweep trigger
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
Sweep Ctrl
SOURce2:SWEep:NEXTstep
DWELl
ASYNc
LIST
Auxiliary generator:
→ Sweep trigger at fixed preset time
→ Sweep triggered when a valid result is obtained
→ Sweep trigger is time-controlled by interpolated list value
Permissible for AUTO SWEEP and AUTO LIST only
(SOUR2:SWE:MODE AUTO;:SOUR2:FREQ|VOLT:MODE SWE1|LIST1)
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
Next Step
→ ANLR SYNC
→ DWELL
VALUE
→ DWELL FILE
SOURce2:SWEep:DWELl<nu>
10 ms to 1000 s s
Auxiliary generator:
Dwell time for each sweep step
Permissible for SOUR2:SWE:NEXT DWEL only.
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
Dwell
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST DWELl2,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
DWEL2
Specified file contains dwell times
Permissible for SOUR2:SWE:NEXT LIST only
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
Dwell File
SOURce2:FREQuency:MODE CW | FIXed
SWEep1
LIST1
Auxiliary generator:
→ Frequency setting by entry using command SOUR2:FREQ <nu>
→ Frequency setting for X axis via normal sweep
→ Frequency setting for X axis via list sweep
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
SWEEP CTRL
X Axis
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.53 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce2:SWEep:FREQuency:SPACing
LINear
LOGarithmic
Auxiliary generator:
Division of sweep range for
- frequency sweep of analog signal (SOUR2:FUNC ANLG)
- comon-mode frequency sweep (SOUR2:FUNC COMM)
- jitter frequency sweep (SOUR2:FUNC JITT)
→ linear
→ logarithmic
Permissible for SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE1 only
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG
SOURce2:FREQuency:STARt<nu>
10 Hz to 110 kHz
Hz Auxiliary generator:
Start value for frequency sweep
Permissible for SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE1 only
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
FREQUENCY
Start
SOURce2:FREQuency:STOP <nu>
10 Hz to 110 kHz
Hz Auxiliary generator:
Stop value of frequency sweep
Permissible for SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE1 only
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
FREQUENCY
Stop
SOURce2:SWEep:FREQuency:POINts <n>
2 to 1024
Auxiliary generator:
Number of sweep points of frequency sweep
Permissible for SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE1 only
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
FREQUENCY
Points
SOURce2:SWEep:FREQuency:STEP <nu>
depending on STARt
and STOP
Hz Auxiliary generator:
Step width of frequency sweep
Permissible for SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE1 only
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
FREQUENCY
Step
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST FREQuency2,’file’
Query
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
FREQ2
File containing frequency values
Permissible for SOUR2:SWE:MODE AUTO|MAN;:SOUR2:FREQ:MODE
LIST1 only
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
FREQ FILE
SOURce2:VOLTage:MODE CW | FIXed
SWEep1
LIST1
Auxiliary generator:
→ Amplitude setting by entry using command SOUR2:VOLT <nu>
→ Amplitude setting via normal sweep, amplitude as X axis
→ Amplitude setting via list sweep, amplitude as X axis
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
SWEEP CTRL
X Axis
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.54 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce2:SWEep:VOLTage:SPACing
LINear
LOGarithmic
Auxiliary generator:
Division of sweep range for
- sinewave amplitude of analog signal (SOUR2:FUNC ANLG)
- common-mode amplitude (SOUR2:FUNC COMM)
- jitter-peak amplitude (SOUR2:FUNC JITT)
→ linear
→ logarithmic
Permissible for SOUR2:VOLT:MODE SWE1 only
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
VOLTAGE |
AMPL
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG
SOURce2:VOLTage:STARt<nu>
0 to 7.07 V
0 to 7.07 V
0 to 250 mUI
V
V
UI
Auxiliary generator:
Start value for amplitude sweep
Permissible for SOUR2:VOLT:MODE SWE1 only
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
VOLTAGE |
AMPL
Start
SOURce2:VOLTage:STOP <nu>
0 to 7.07 V
0 to 7.07 V
0 to 250 mUI
V
V
UI
Auxiliary generator:
Stop value for amplitude sweep
Permissible for SOUR2:VOLT:MODE SWE1 only
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
VOLTAGE |
AMPL
Stop
SOURce2:SWEep:VOLTage:POINts <n>
2 to 1024
Auxiliary generator:
Number of sweep points of amplitude sweep
Permissible for SOUR2:VOLT:MODE SWE1 only
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
VOLTAGE |
AMPL
Points
SOURce2:SWEep:VOLTage:STEP <nu>
depending on STARt
and STOP
V
FS
Auxiliary generator:
Step width for amplitude sweep
Permissible for SOUR2:VOLT:MODE SWE1 only
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
VOLTAGE |
AMPL
Step
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST VOLTage2,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
VOLT2
File containing amplitude values
Permissible for SOUR2:SWE:MODE AUTO|MAN;:SOUR2:VOLT:MODE
LIST1 only
2.5.4.2 Sweepss
GEN panel
VOLTAGE |
AMPL
VOLT FILE
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.55 E-10
3.10.1.4.2 Sweep Settings for Generator Functions SINusoid, STEReo, BURSt, S2Pulse, MDISt, DFD and DC
• With a SINusoid, STEReo or DC sweep the sinusoidal frequency and/or the level is swept.
• With a BURSt and S2Pulse sweep the burst frequency and/or the level is swept, likewise Ontime and/or interval (see next section).
• With a MDISt sweep the upper frequency and/or the total voltage is swept.
• With a DFD sweep the center frequency and/or the total voltage is swept.
See 3.10.1.4.4 Which parameters can be swept?
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:SWEep:MODE MANual
AUTO → Manual sweep switching
→ Automatic sweep switching 2.5.4.1.3
GEN panel
Sweep Ctrl
SOURce:SWEep:NEXTstep
DWELl
ASYNc
LIST
→ Sweep after a certain (fixed) time has elapsed
→ Sweep after a valid measured value has been obtained
→ Sweep after a certain time defined by interpolated list value
2.5.4.1.3
GEN panel
Next Step
→ ANLR SYNC
→ DWELL
VALUE
→ DWELL FILE
SOURce:SWEep:DWELl<nu>
10 ms to 1000 s s Dwell time per sweep 2.5.4.1.3
GEN panel
Dwell
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST DWELl,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
DWEL
Specified file contains the dwell times 2.5.4.1.3
GEN panel
Dwell File
SOURce:FREQuency:MODE CW | FIXed
SWEep1
SWEep2
LIST1
LIST2
→ Frequency setting via entry
→ Frequency setting via normal sweep; frequency as X axis
→ Frequency setting via normal sweep; frequency as Z axis
→ Frequency setting via list sweep; frequency as X axis
→ Frequency setting via list sweep; frequency as Z axis
2.5.4.1.3
GEN panel
SWEEP CTRL
X Axis
Z Axis
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.56 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:FREQuency:STARt<nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
Hz Start value for frequency sweep
See 3.10.1.4.4 Which parameters can be swept?
2.5.4.2
GEN panel
FREQUENCY
→ Start
SOURce:FREQuency:STOP <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
Hz Stop value for frequency sweep 2.5.4.2
FREQUENCY
→ Stop
SOURce:SWEep:FREQuency:POINts <n>
2 to 1024
For analog instrument
Number of sweep points for frequency sweep 2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Points
SOURce:SWEep:FREQuency:SPACing LINear
LOGarithmic
Scaling of frequency sweep range
→ linear
→ logarithmic
2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Spacing
SOURce:SWEep:FREQuency:STEP <nu> Hz Step width for frequency sweep 2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Step
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST FREQuency[1]
"filename"
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
FREQ,
File containing frequencies 2.5.4.2
GEN panel
FREQ FILE
SOURce:VOLTage:MODE CW | FIXed
SWEep1
SWEep2
LIST1
LIST2
→ Amplitude setting via entry
→ Amplitude setting via normal sweep; amplitude as X axis
→ Amplitude setting via normal sweep; amplitude as Z axis
→ Amplitude setting via list sweep; amplitude as X axis
→ Amplitude setting via list sweep; amplitude as Z axis
2.5.4.2
GEN panel
SWEEP CTRL
X Axis
Z Axis
SOURce:VOLTage:STARt<nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
V
FS
Start value for amplitude sweep
See 3.10.1.4.4 Which parameters can be swept?
2.5.4.2
GEN panel
VOLTAGE
→ Start
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.57 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:VOLTage:STOP <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
V
FS
Stop value for amplitude sweep 2.5.4.2
GEN panel
VOLTAGE
→ Stop
SOURce:SWEep:VOLTage:POINts <n>
2 to 1024 Number of sweep points for amplitude sweep 2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Points
SOURce:SWEep:VOLTage:SPACing LINear
LOGarithmic
Scaling of amplitude sweep range
→ linear
→ logarithmic
2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG
SOURce:SWEep:VOLTage:STEP <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
V
FS
Step width for amplitude sweep 2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Step
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST VOLTage,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
VOLT
File containing amplitude values 2.5.4.2
GEN panel
VOLT FILE
SOURce:OFF:MODE SWEep2 | LIST2 Switches a Z sweep off which was switched on with one of the following
commands.
SOURce:FREQuency:MODE SWEep2 | LIST2 or
SOURce:VOLTage:MODE SWEep2 | LIST2 or
SOURce:ONTime:MODE SWEep2 | LIST2 or
SOURce:INTerval:MODE SWEep2 | LIST2
SWEep2 and LIST2 are synonyms in this command
2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Z Axis
→ OFF
Note: Max. 2 sweep parameters can be selected not to equal CW (= FIXed). Combining SWEep and LIST is not permissible. Likewise, assignment of the same
selection point (eg SWEep1) to different sweep parameters is not permissible; the selection made most recently is valid, the other sweep parameters are set to FIXed.
A normal sweep (or list sweep) is possible only when exactly 1 sweep parameter is set to SWEep1 (or LIST1).
The sweep system is switched off when all sweep parameters are set to CW (=FIXed).
Value range for "STARt", "STOP": values are specified in the functions section.
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.58 E-10
3.10.1.4.3 Sweep Settings for Generator Functions BURSt and S2Pulse
Sweep settings same as with SINusoid, but for BURSt and S2Pulse Ontime and Interval may be swept in addition see 3.10.1.4.4 Which parameters
can be swept?:
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:ONTime:MODE CW | FIXed
SWEep1
SWEep2
LIST1
LIST2
→ Burst time setting via entry
→ Burst time setting via normal sweep; burst time as X axis
→ Burst time setting via normal sweep; burst time as Z axis
→ Burst time setting via list sweep; burst time as X axis
→ Burst time setting via list sweep; burst time as Z axis
2.5.4.2
GEN panel
SWEEP CTRL
X Axis
Z Axis
SOURce:INTerval:MODE CW | FIXed
SWEep1
SWEep2
LIST1
LIST2
→ Interval setting via entry
→ Interval setting via normal sweep; interval as X axis
→ Interval setting via normal sweep; interval as Z axis
→ Interval setting via list sweep; interval as X axis
→ Interval setting via list sweep; interval as Z axis
2.5.4.2
GEN panel
SWEEP CTRL
X Axis
Z Axis
SOURce:ONTime:STARt<nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
s, cyc Start value for burst time sweep
See 3.10.1.4.4 Which parameters can be swept?
2.5.4.2
2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN panel
Start
SOURce:ONTime:STOP <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
s, cyc Stop value for burst time sweep 2.5.4.2
2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN panel
Stop
SOURce:SWEep:ONTime:POINts <n>
2 to 1024 Number of sweep points of burst time sweep 2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Points
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.59 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:SWEep:ONTime:SPACing LINear
LOGarithmic
Scaling of burst time sweep range
→ linear
→ logarithmic
2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG
SOURce:SWEep:ONTime:STEP <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
s, cyc Step size for burst time sweep 2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Step
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST ONTime,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
ONT
File containing burst time values 2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN panel
ONTIM FILE
SOURce:INTerval:STARt<nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
s Start value for interval sweep
See 3.10.1.4.4 Which parameters can be swept?
2.5.4.2
2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN panel
Start
SOURce:INTerval:STOP <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
s Stop value for interval sweep 2.5.4.2
2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN panel
Stop
SOURce:SWEep:INTerval:POINts <n>
2 to 1024
Number of sweep points for interval sweep 2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Points
SOURce:SWEep:INTerval:SPACing LINear
LOGarithmic
Scaling of interval sweep range
→ linear
→ logarithmic
2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.60 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:SWEep:INTerval:STEP <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
s Step size for interval sweep 2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Step
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST INTerval, ’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
INT
File containing interval values 2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN panel
INTV FILE
3.10.1.4.4 Which parameters can be swept?
Generator
Funktion FREQ-
Sweep VOLT-
Sweep ON TIME-
Sweep INTERVAL-
Sweep
SINusoid Sine frequency Sine amplitude --- ---
STEReo If SOUR:FREQ:SEL
FQPH selected:
Common sine
frequency for both
channels may be
swept
If SOUR:FREQ:SEL
FQFQ selected:
Sine frequency of left
channel may be
swept. Sine frequency
of right channel
remains constant.
If SOUR:VOLT:SEL
VLRT selected:
The levels of the left
(CH1) and right
channel (CH2) may
be swept and have a
fixed offset.
The offset remains
constant during level
sweep.
The level offset can
be set with
SOUR:VOLT:RAT
<n>
If SOUR:VOLT:SEL
VLVL selected:
--- ---
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.61 E-10
The sine amplitude of
the left channel (CH1)
may be swept. The
sine amplitude of right
channel (CH2)
remains constant
during sweep.
BURStSine frequency Burst amplitude
(amplitude during
HIGH phase of signal)
Burst duration, the
time during which the
sine has ist high level.
Burst interval length.
S2Pulse Burst frequency Burst amplitude
(amplitude during
HIGH phase of signal)
Burst duration, the
time during which the
sine has ist high level.
Burst interval length.
MDIStUseful frequency Total amplitude of
both sinewave signals --- ---
DFD Center frequency Total amplitude of
both sinewave signals --- ---
DC --- DC voltage --- ---
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.62 E-10
3.10.1.5 Generator Functions
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:FUNCtion[:SHAPe] SINusoid
STEReoMULTisine
BURSt
S2Pulse
MDISt
DFD
RANDom
USER
POLarity
FSK
FM
DC
Generator signal:
→ Sinusoidal tone
→ Stereo signal
→ Multi-tone (up to 17 sine lines)
→ Sine burst
→ Sine2 burst
→ Double sine (similar to SMPTE)
→ Double sine (difference frequency distortion method)
→ Noise
→ User-defined signals
→ Polarity test signal
→ Frequency shift keying
→ Modulated sine
→ DC Voltage
2.5.4
GEN panel
FUNCTION
→ SINE
→ STEREO SINE
→ MULTISINE
→ SINE BURST
→ SINE² BURST
→ MOD DIST
→ DFD
→ RANDOM
→ ARBITRARY
→ POLARITY
→ FSK
→ MODULATION
→ DC
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.63 E-10
3.10.1.5.1 SINE
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:FUNCtion [:SHAPe] SINusoid → Sinusoidal tone 2.5.4.3
GEN panel
FUNCTION
→ SINE
SOURce:FREQuency:OFFSet:STATe ON
OFF → Frequency offset 0.1 %
→ No frequency offset
2.5.4.1
GEN panel
Frq. Offset
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STATe OFF
ON
DC offset permitting a DC voltage to be superimposed to the generator
output.
→ Hardly any DC voltage at the output
→ DC voltage can be set with the next command.
Note:
This setting cannot be made in the analog generator when a low-distortion
generator is used.
2.5.4.1
GEN panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet <n>
-5 V to 5 V
-10 V to 10 V
-1FS to 1FS
V
FS
DC amplitude
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument
2.5.4.1
GEN panel
DC Offset
SOURce:SINusoid:DITHer:STATe ON
OFF → Noise superimposed on signal
→ Noise superimposition off
For digital instrument only
2.5.4.1
GEN panel
Dither
→ ON
→ OFF
SOURce:SINusoid:DITHer <nu>
0 to 1 FS
FS Noise amplitude 2.5.4.1
GEN panel
Dither
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.64 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:RANDom:PDF GAUSsian
TRIangle
RECTangle
→ Noise distribution, Gaussian
→ Noise distribution, triangular
→ Noise distribution, uniform
2.5.4.1
GEN panel
PDF
→ GAUSS
→ TRIANGLE
→ RECTANGLE
SOURce:LOWDistortion ON
OFF → Sine signal generated by LDG
→ Sine signal generated by function generator
Only available with ANALOG generator and option UPL-B1 (Low Distortion
Generator)
2.5.4.1
2.5.4.3
GEN panel
Low Dist
→ ON
→ OFF
SOURce:SWEep ... For sweep commands see 3.10.1.4 Generator Sweeps
SOURce:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed] <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
Hz Sine frequency
Can be used as sweep parameter
2.5.4.3
GEN panel
FREQUENQY
SOURce:VOLTage:EQUalize:STATe ON
OFF → Sine signal equalized
→ Sine signal not dependent on frequency
2.5.4.3
GEN panel
Equalizer
→ ON
→ OFF
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST EQUalize,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
EQU
File containing equalizer data 2.5.4.3
GEN panel
Equal.File
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude] <nu>
0 to 10 V
0 to 20 V
0 to 1 FS
V
V
FS
Sine amplitude
Can be used as sweep parameter
Analog range (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog range (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital range
Is voltage-limited by SOUR:VOLT:LIM see 3.10.1.2 and 3.10.1.3
2.5.4.3
GEN panel
VOLTAGE
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.65 E-10
3.10.1.5.2 MULTISINE
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:FUNCtion [:SHAPe] MULTisine Multi-tone (up to 17 sine lines) 2.5.4.4
GEN panel
FUNCTION
→ MULTISINE
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STATe
OFF
ON
DC offset permitting a DC voltage to be superimposed on the generator
output.
→ Virtually no DC voltage component at the output
→ DC voltage can be set with the next command.
Note:
This setting cannot be made in the analog generator when a low-distortion
generator is used.
2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet <n>
-5 V to 5 V
-10 V to 10 V
-1FS to 1FS
V
V
FS
DC amplitude
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument
2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC Offset
SOURce:RANDom:SPACing:MODE
USERdefined
ATRack
Setting the frequency spacing for the multisine measurement
→ The entered value (see next command) is corrected to the
next settable value.
→ The value of the analyzer frequency spacing of FFT is automatically set
It can be read out with command CALC:TRAN:FREQ:RES?
provided FFT is selected in the analyzer.
2.5.4.4
GEN panel
Spacing
→ USER DEF
→ ANLR TRACK
SOURce:RANDom:SPACing:FREQuency <nu>
Lower limit value:
analog = 2.93 Hz
digital = sampling
frequency / 16384
Hz Setting value for frequency spacing for multisine measurement
The value range depends on the selected generator and its sampling
rate (see 2.5.1 Selecting the Generator
2.5.4.4
GEN panel
Spacing
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.66 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:FUNCtion:MODE
alias
SOURce:MULTisine:MODE EQUalvoltage
DEFinedvoltage
Selection of entry mode for individual multisine voltages:
→ The same amplitude applies for each sine. It is entered with
command SOUR:VOLT1 <nu>.
→ A separate amplitude can be defined for each sine.
2.5.4.4
GEN panel
Mode
→ EQUAL VOLT
→ DEFINE VOLT
SOURce:VOLTage:EQUalizer:STATe ON
OFF
See 2.5.4.1.3 Equalization of SINE, SINE BURST, DFD, MULTISINE,
RANDOM
→ Every active multisine frequency line is equalized.
Equalizer is switched on. The menu item ”Equal. file” is activated,
ie the indicated file is loaded.
→ The levels of all frequency lines remain unchanged.
2.5.4.4
GEN panel
Equalizer
→ ON
→ OFF
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST EQUalizer,’filename’.
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
EQU
Equalizer file for correcting the multisine frequency lines.
Only with SOUR:VOLT:EQU:STAT ON selected, see 2.5.4.1.3 Equalization
of SINE, SINE BURST, DFD, MULTISINE, RANDOM
2.5.4.4
GEN panel
Equal.File
SOURce:MULTisine:COUNt<n>
1 to 17
Number of settable frequencies 2.5.4.4
GEN panel
No of Sin
SOURce:VOLTage:CREStfactor:MODE MINimized
DPHase
VALue
→ The crest factor (ratio of peak/rms value) is minimized.
→ The phase of the lines can be separately set with the next but one
command
SOURce:PHASe[<i>][:ADJust].
The start phase of the sinewave is entered.
→ The crest factor is set with the next command SOUR:VOLT:CRES <n>
so that it closely approaches a settable value.
2.5.4.4
GEN panel
Crest Fact
→ OPTIMIZED
→ DEFINE PHAS
→ VALUE
SOURce:VOLTage:CREStfactor <n>
1 to 100
The specified crest factor is approximated. This is the easier the more lines
are used for optimization. Acc. to measurements in line with ANSI S3.42 a
crest factor of 4 (= 12 dB) is recommended.
2.5.4.4
GEN panel
Crest Fact
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.67 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:PHASe[<i>][:ADJust] <i>
1 to 17
<nu>
0 to 360 °
Entered phase:
i-th sine phase; i = 2 to 17
The line is output starting with the specified phase.
If 0° is entered, the line starts at 0 and then rises.
If 90° is entered, the line starts with the specified voltage and then decreases.
For SOUR:VOLT:CRES:MODE DPHase only
2.5.4.4
GEN panel
Phas No 1 to 17
SOURce:VOLTage[<i>][:LEVel|AMPLitude] 1 to 17
<nu>
Analog instrument
OUTP:TYPE UNB
0 to 10 V
Analog instrument
OUTP:TYPE BAL
0 to 20 V
Digital instrument
0 to 1 FS
Level entry for i-th multisine line
Is voltage-limited by SOUR:VOLT:LIM see 3.10.1.2 and 3.10.1.3
The maximum amplitude can be set for SOUR<i>:VOLT only when all other
sinewaves have an amplitude of 0. Otherwise, Vmax must be reduced by the
sum of the remaining single voltages.
2.5.4.4
GEN panel
Volt No 1 to 17
SOURce:FREQuency[<i>][:CW|FIXed] <i>
1 to 17
<nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
Hz
Frequency entry for the i-th multisine line 2.5.4.4
GEN panel
Freq No 1 to17
SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal:GAIN <nu> dB Subsequent amplification of all sine lines (<0 → attenuation); the upper range
limit depends on individual rules for sine and sine frequencies as well as on
SOUR:VOLT:LIM
2.5.4.4
GEN panel
TOTAL GAIN
SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal[:LEVel|AMPLitude]?<nu>
Query only
V
FS
Total peak amplitude; query only
With the single amplitudes being unknown, all sinewaves should be set
explicitly to 0 before setting the maximum amplitude.
1. SOUR:MULT:MODE EQU
2. SOUR1:VOLT 0
2.5.4.4
GEN panel
TOTAL PEAK
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.68 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal:RMS? <nu>
Query only
V
FS
Total RMS amplitude; query only 2.5.4.4
GEN panel
TOTAL RMS
SOURce:AM:MODE
OFF
SINusoid
BURSt
Selection of the type of modulation
→ The amplitude modulation is switched off, the generator signal is not
modulated.
→The generator signal is amplitude-modulated from 0% to -100% in the
form of a sinewave.
→ The generator signal is switched on and off periodically.
2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
Ampl Var
→ OFF
→ SINE
→ BURST
SOURce:FREQuency:AM <nu>
1 µHz to fmax
fmax depending on
generator
Hz Setting of the modulation frequency
Available only with SINE modulation (SOUR:AM.MODE SIN)
2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
Mod Freq
SOURce:VOLTage:AM
<new>
<nu>
-100% to 0%
PCT Setting of the modulation deviation in %
Available only with SINE modulation (SOUR:AM.MODE SIN)
2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
Variation
SOURce:ONTime <nu>
tmin to tmax
Analog generator:
tmin= 20.83 µs
Digital generator:
tmin= 1 / sample
frequency
tmax: 60 s – tmin
s Entry of the burst duration (time, the sine is switched on)
Available only with BURST modulation (SOUR:AM:MODE BURS)
2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
ON TIME
SOURce:INTerval <nu>
set burst duration ...
60 s
s Entry of the burst interval length (burst period), the sum of burst duration and
break time.
Available only with BURST modulation (SOUR:AM:MODE BURS)
2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
INTERVAL
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.69 E-10
3.10.1.5.3 SINE BURST
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:FUNCtion [:SHAPe] BURSt→ Sine burst 2.5.4.5
GEN panel
FUNCTION
→ SINE BURST
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STATe
OFF
ON
DC offset permitting a DC voltage to be superimposed at the generator
output.
→ Hardly any DC voltage at the output
→ DC voltage can be set with the next command.
Note:
This setting cannot be made in the analog generator when a low-distortion
generator is used.
2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet <n>
-5 V to 5 V
-10 V to 10 V
-1FS to 1FS
V
FS
DC amplitude
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument
2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC Offset
SOURce:VOLTage:EQUalize:STATe
ON
OFF
Equalization of the sine voltage of the bursted sinewave
→ Equalizer on
→ Equalizer off
2.5.4.1.1
GEN-Panel
Equalizer
→ ON
→ OFF
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST EQUalize,’filename’
Query form:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
EQU
File containing equlizer data 2.5.4.1.1
GEN-Panel
Equal.File
SOURce:SWEep ... For sweep commands see 3.10.1.4 Generator Sweeps
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.70 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed] <nu>
Voltage range
determined by
instrument or function
Hz Sine frequency
Can be used as sweep parameter
2.5.4.5
GEN panel
FREQUENCY
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude] <nu>
0 to 12 V
0 to 24 V
0 to 1 FS
V
FS
Burst amplitude (amplitude during HIGH phase of signal)
Can be used as sweep parameter
Analog instrument (OUTPUP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument(OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument
Is voltage-limited by SOUR:VOLT:LIM see 3.10.1.2 and 3.10.1.3
2.5.4.5
GEN panel
VOLTAGE
SOURce:VOLTage:LOWLevel <nu>
0 to SOUR:VOLT
V
%on
FS
%on
Amplitude during LOW phase of signal
Analog instrument
Digital instrument
2.5.4.5
GEN panel
Low Level
SOURce:ONTime[:CW|FIXed] <nu>
0 to 60 s
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
s, cyc Burst time
Can be used as sweep parameter
2.5.4.5
GEN panel
ON TIME
SOURce:INTerval[:CW|FIXed] <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
s Interval time
Can be used as sweep parameter
2.5.4.5
GEN panel
INTERVAL
SOURce:ONTime:DELay <nu>
0 to 60 s
Sets a start delay for SINE BURST and SINE2 BURST. 2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN panel
BurstOnDel
Note: Clock rate and fmax depend on generator (see 2.5.1 Selecting the Generator).
Caution: "SOUR:VOLT" is voltage-limited by SCPI command "SOUR:VOLT:LIM"
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.71 E-10
3.10.1.5.4 SINE2 BURST
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:FUNCtion [:SHAPe] S2Pulse Sine2 burst 2.5.4.6
GEN panel
FUNCTION
→ SINE² BURST
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STATe OFF
ON
DC offset permitting a DC voltage to be superimposed at the generator
output.
→ Hardly any DC voltage at the output
→ DC voltage can be set with the next command.
Note:
This setting cannot be made in the analog generator when a low-distortion
generator is used.
2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet <nu>
-5 V to 5 V
-10 V to 10 V
-1FS to 1FS
V
FS
DC amplitude
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument
2.5.4.1.1
DC Offset
SOURce:SWEep ... For sweep commands see 3.10.1.4 Generator Sweeps 2.5.4.7
GEN panel
SOURce:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed] <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
Hz Burst frequency
Can be used as sweep parameter
2.5.4.6
GEN panel
FREQUENCY
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude] <nu>
0 to 12 V
0 to 24 V
0 to 1 FS
V
FS
Burst amplitude
Can be used as sweep parameter
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument
Is voltage-limited by SOUR:VOLT:LIM see 3.10.1.2 and 3.10.1.3
When negative amplitudes are entered the pulse is inverted.
2.5.4.6
GEN panel
VOLTAGE
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.72 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:ONTime[:CW|FIXed] <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
s ,cyc Burst time
Can be used as sweep parameter
2.5.4.6
GEN panel
ON TIME
SOURce:INTerval[:CW|FIXed] <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
s Interval time
Can be used as sweep parameter
2.5.4.6
GEN panel
INTERVAL
SOURce:ONTime:DELay <nu>
0 to 60 s
Sets a start delay for SINE BURST and SINE2 BURST. 2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN panel
BurstOnDel
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.73 E-10
3.10.1.5.5 MOD DIST
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:FUNCtion [:SHAPe] MDISt→ Double sine (similar to SMPTE) 2.5.4.7
GEN panel
FUNCTION
→ MOD DIST
SOURce:FREQuency:OFFSet:STATe ON
OFF → Frequency offset 0.1 %
→ No frequency offset
2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
Frq. Offset
→ +1000 PPM
→ OFF
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STATe OFF
ON
DC offset permitting a DC voltage to be superimposed at the generator
output.
→ Hardly any DC voltage at the output
→ DC voltage can be set with the next command.
Note:
This setting cannot be made in the analog generator when a low-distortion
generator is used.
2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet <n>
-5 V to 5 V
-10 V to 10 V
-1FS to 1FS
V
FS
DC amplitude
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument
2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC OFFSET
SOURce:SINusoid:DITHer:STATe ON
OFF → Noise superimposed onto the signal.
→ Noise superimposition off
For digital instrument only
With option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz)
not allowed in High Rate-Mode (CONF:DAI HRM),
allowed in Base Rate-Mode (CONF:DAI BRM)
2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
Dither
→ ON
→ OFF
SOURce:SINusoid:DITHer <nu>
0 to 1 FS
FS Noise amplitude 2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
Dither
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.74 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:RANDom:PDF GAUSsian
TRIangle
RECTangle
→ Noise distribution, Gaussian
→ Noise distribution, triangular
→ Noise distribution, equivalent
2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
PDF
→ GAUSS
→ TRIANGLE
→ RECTANGLE
SOURce:LOWDistortion ON
OFF
→ Useful signal generated by LDG
Only available with ANALOG generator and option UPL-B1 (Low
Distortion Generator)
→ Both sines generated by function generator.
2.5.4.1
2.5.4.7
GEN panel
Low Dist
→ ON
→ OFF
SOURce:SWEep ... For sweep commands see 3.10.1.4 Generator Sweeps 2.5.4.7
GEN panel
SOURce:FREQuency[1][:CW|FIXed] <nu>
ANALOG gen:
240 Hz to 21,75 kHz
DIGITAL gen:
240 Hz to fmax
fmax see 2.5.1
Hz Useful frequency
Can be used as sweep parameter
2.5.4.7
GEN panel
UPPER FREQ
SOURce:FREQuency2[:CW|FIXed] <nu>
30 Hz to fmax / 8
fmax see 2.5.1
Hz Interfering frequency 2.5.4.7
GEN panel
LOWER FREQ
SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal[:LEVel|AMPLitude] <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
V
FS
Total amplitude
Can be used as sweep parameter
Is voltage-limited by SOUR:VOLT:LIM see 3.10.1.2 and 3.10.1.3In the analog
instrument the lower limit SOUR:VOLT:RAT (for high rms voltage
specifications) depends on the required total rms voltage (see "TOTAL
VOLT").
2.5.4.7
GEN panel
TOTAL VOLT
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.75 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:VOLTage:RATio <n>
1 to 10
Ratio of interfering to useful signal 2.5.4.7
GEN panel
VOLT LF:UF
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.76 E-10
3.10.1.5.6 DFD
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:FUNCtion [:SHAPe] DFD → Double sine (difference frequency method) 2.5.4.8
GEN panel
FUNCTION
→ DFD
SOURce:FREQuency:OFFSet:STATe ON
OFF → Frequency offset 0.1 %
→ No frequency offset
2.5.4.1
GEN panel
Frq. Offset
→ + 1000 PPM
→ OFF
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STATe OFF
ON
DC offset permitting a DC voltage to be superimposed at the generator
output.
→ Hardly any DC voltage at the output
→ DC voltage can be set with the next command.
Note:
This setting cannot be made in the analog generator when a low-distortion
generator is used. With the offset switched on, the S/N ratio of the analog
DFD signal is poorer by 30 dB .
2.5.4.1
GEN panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON
SOURce:FUNCtion:MODE IEC268
IEC118
→ Entry of center frequency (MEAN FREQ) and difference frequency
(DIFF FREQ) to IEC 268 with commands
SOUR:FREQ:MEAN <nu> and
SOUR:FREQ:DIFF <nu>
If a frequency sweep is selected (for the X or Z axis),
the center frequency is swept.
→ Entry of upper DFD frequency (UPPER FREQ) and
difference frequency (DIFF FREQ) to IEC 118 with commands
SOUR:FREQ <nu> and
SOUR:FREQ:DIFF <nu>
If a frequency sweep is selected (for the X or Z axis),
the UPPER FREQ is swept.
2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
Mode
→ IEC 268
→ IEC 118
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.77 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet <n>
-5 V to 5 V
-10 V to 10 V
-1FS to 1FS
V
V
FS
DC amplitude
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument
2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC OFFSET
SOURce:SINusoid:DITHer:STATe ON
OFF → Noise is superimposed on signal.
→ Noise superimposition off
For digital instrument only.
With option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz)
not allowed in High Rate-Mode (CONF:DAI HRM),
allowed in Base Rate-Mode (CONF:DAI BRM)
2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
Dither
→ ON
→ OFF
SOURce:SINusoid:DITHer <nu>
0 to 1 FS
FS Noise amplitude 2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
Dither
SOURce:RANDom:PDF GAUSsian
TRIangle
RECTangle
→ Noise distribution, Gaussian
→ Noise distribution, triangular
→ Noise distribution, uniform
2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
PDF
→ GAUSS
→ TRIANGLE
→ RECTANGLE
SOURce:LOWDistortion ON
OFF
→ 1st sine generated by LDG
Only available with ANALOG generator and option UPL-B1 (Low
Distortion Generator)→ Both sines generated by function generator
2.5.4.1
2.5.4.8
GEN panel
Low Dist
→ ON
→ OFF
SOURce:SWEep ... For sweep commands see 3.10.1.4 Generator Sweeps
SOURce:FREQuency:MEAN <nu> Value range
determined by
instrument or function
Hz Center frequency
Can be used as sweep parameter
2.5.4.8
GEN panel
MEAN FREQ
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.78 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:FREQuency:[1][:CW|FIXed] <nu> Value range
determined by
instrument or function
Entry of upper DFD frequency with
SOURce:FUNCtion:MODE IEC 118 selected. 2.5.4.8
GEN-panel
UPPER FREQ
SOURce:FREQuency:DIFFerence <nu> Value range
determined by
instrument or function
Hz Difference frequency 2.5.4.8
GEN panel
DIFF FREQ
SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal[:LEVel|AMPLitude] <nu> Value range
determined by
instrument or function
V
FS
Total amplitude
Is voltage-limited by SOUR:VOLT:LIM see 3.10.1.2 and 3.10.1.3
2.5.4.8
GEN panel
TOTAL VOLT
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.79 E-10
3.10.1.5.7 RANDOM
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:FUNCtion [:SHAPe] RANDom → Noise 2.5.4.9
GEN panel
FUNCTION
→ RANDOM
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STATe OFF
ON
DC offset permitting a DC voltage to be superimposed at the generator
output.
→ Hardly any DC voltage at the output
DC voltage can be set with the next command.
Note:
This setting cannot be made in the analog generator when a low-distortion
generator is used.
2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet <n>
-5 V to 5 V
-10 V to 10 V
-1FS to 1FS
V
FS
DC amplitude
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument
2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC OFFSET
SOURce:RANDom:DOMain FREQuency
TIME → Frequency domain
→ Time domain
2.5.4.9
GEN panel
Domain
→ FREQ
→ TIME
SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal[:LEVel|AMPLitude] <nu>
0 to 12 V
0 to 24 V
0 to 1 FS
V
FS
Noise peak amplitude
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument
Is voltage-limited by SOUR:VOLT:LIM see 3.10.1.2 and 3.10.1.3
2.5.4.9
GEN panel
VOLT PEAK
SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal:RMS <nu> V
FS
Noise RMS amplitude
Analog-Instrument
Digital-Instrument
2.5.4.9
GEN panel
VOLT RMS
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.80 E-10
Further commands for frequency domain only (SOUR:RAND:DOM FREQ):
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:RANDom:SPACing:MODE ATRack
USERdefined → Analyzer frequency spacing synchronous
→ Frequency spacing acc. to user entry
2.5.4.9
GEN panel
Spacing
→ ANLR TRACK
→ USER DEF
SOURce:RANDom:SPACing:FREQuency <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
Hz Entry of frequency spacing 2.5.4.9
GEN panel
Spacing
SOURce:RANDom:SHAPe WHITe
PINK
TOCTave
ARBitrary
→ White noise
→ Pink noise
→ 1/3-octave noise
→ File-defined noise
2.5.4.9
GEN panel
Equalizatn
→ WHITE
→ PINK
→ THIRD OCT
→ FILE
SOURce:RANDom:FREQuency:LOWer
SOURce:RANDom:FREQuency:UPPer <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
Hz Lower/upper frequency limit for
white and pink noise
2.5.4.9
GEN panel
Lower Freq
Upper Freq
SOURce:FREQuency:MEAN <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
Hz Center frequency for 1/3-octave noise 2.5.4.9
GEN panel
MEAM FREQ
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.81 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST ARBitrary, ’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
ARB
RANDom, ’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
RAND
File with data for file-defined noise.
ARBitrary and RANDom are synonyms.
2.5.4.9
GEN panel
Shape File
SOURce:AM:MODE
OFF
SINusoid
BURSt
Selection of the type of modulation
→ The amplitude-modulation is switched off, the generator signal is not
modulated.
→The generator signal is amplitude-modulated from 0% to 100% in the
form of a sinewave.
→ The generator signal is switched on and off periodically.
2.5.4.9
GEN-Panel
Ampl Var
→ OFF
→ SINE
→ BURST
SOURce:FREQuency:AM <nu>
1 µHz to fmax
fmax depending on
the generator
Hz Setting of the modulation frequency
Available only with SINE modulation (SOUR:AM.MODE SIN)
2.5.4.9
GEN-Panel
Mod Freq
SOURce:VOLTage:AM <nu>
-100% to 0%
PCT Setting of the modulation deviation in %
Available only with SINE modulation (SOUR:AM.MODE SIN)
2.5.4.9
GEN-Panel
Variation
SOURce:ONTime <nu>
tmin to t max
Analog generator:
tmin= 20.83 µs
Digital generator:
tmin= 1 / sample
frequency
tmax: 60 s – tmin
s Entry of the burst duration (time the sine is switched on)
Available only with BURST modulation (SOUR:AM:MODE BURS)
2.5.4.9
GEN-Panel
ON TIME
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.82 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:INTerval <nu>
set burst duration ...
60 s
s Entry of the burst interval length (burst period), i.e., the sum of burst duration
and break time
Available only with BURST modulation (SOUR:AM:MODE BURS)
2.5.4.9
GEN-Panel
INTERVAL
Further commands for time domain only (SOUR:RAND:DOM TIME):
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:RANDom:PDF GAUSsian
TRIangle
RECTangle
→ Noise distribution, Gaussian
→ Noise distribution, triangular
→ Noise distribution, uniform
2.5.4.9
GEN panel
PDF
→ GAUSS
→ TRIANGLE
→ RECTANGLE
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.83 E-10
3.10.1.5.8 ARBITRARY
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:FUNCtion [:SHAPe] USER → User-defined waveforms 2.5.4.10
GEN panel
FUNCTION
→ ARBITRARY
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STATe
OFF
ON
DC offset permitting a DC voltage to be superimposed at the generator
output.
→ Hardly any DC voltage at the output
→ DC voltage can be set with the next command.
Note:
This setting cannot be made in the analog generator when a low-distortion
generator is used.
2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet <n>
-5 V to 5 V
-10 V to 10 V
-1FS to 1FS
V
FS
DC amplitude
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument
2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC Offset
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST ARBitrary, ’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
ARB
File with data for waveform 2.5.4.10
GEN panel
Filename
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.84 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal[:LEVel|AMPLitude] <nu>
Analog Instrument:
Output = UNBAL:
0 to 14,142 V
(OUTPUT = BAL:
0 to16.971 V
Digital Instrument:
Src Mode = AUDIO DATA:
0 to 1 FS
Src Mode = JITTER ONLY:
0 UI to 2,5 UI
Src Mode = PHASE:
0 to 1 FS
Src Mode = COMMON
ONLY:
0 V to 10 V
V
FS
Peak amplitude of signal
SOUR:VOLT:TOT and SOUR:VOLT:TOT:RMS are coupled via the crest
factor (which is constant for a specific signal). A change of SOUR:VOLT:TOT
therefore immediately affects the figure for SOUR:VOLT:TOT:RMS. If the
crest factor is changed, SOUR:VOLT:TOT will remain unchanged.
Is voltage-limited by SOUR:VOLT:LIM see 3.10.1.2 and 3.10.1.3
2.5.4.10
GEN panel
VOLT PEAK
SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal:RMS <nu>
0 V to 20 V
V
FS
RMS signal amplitude for Analog generator
Only available with ANALOG generator in format AWD and TTF
SOUR:VOLT:TOT and SOUR:VOLT:TOT:RMS are coupled via the crest
factor (which is constant for a specific noise signal). A change of
SOUR:VOLT:TOT:RMS therefore affects the SOUR:VOLT:TOT value.
2.5.4.10
GEN panel
VOLT RMS
SOURce:AM:MODE
OFF
SINusoid
BURSt
Selection of the type of modulation
→ The amplitude modulation is switched off, the generator signal is not
modulated.
→ The generator signal is amplitude-modulated from 0% to -100%
→ The generator signal is switched on and off periodically. .
2.5.4.10
GEN-Panel
Ampl Var
→ OFF
→ SINE
→ BURST
SOURce:FREQuency:AM <nu>
1 µHz to fmax
fmax depending on the
generator
Hz Setting of the modulation frequency
Available only with SINE modulation (SOUR:AM.MODE SIN)
2.5.4.10
GEN-Panel
Mod Freq
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.85 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:VOLTage:AM <nu>
-100% ... 0%
PCT Setting of the modulation deviation in %
Available only with SINE modulation (SOUR:AM.MODE SIN)
2.5.4.10
GEN-Panel
Variation
SOURce:ONTime <nu>
tmin to tmax
Analog generator:
tmin= 20.83 µs
Digital generator:
tmin= 1 / sample
frequency
tmax: 60 s – tmin
s Entry of the burst duration (time the sine is switched on)
Available only with BURST modulation (SOUR:AM:MODE BURS)
2.5.4.10
GEN-Panel
ON TIME
SOURce:INTerval <nu>
set burst duration ...
60 s
s Entry of the burst interval length (burst period), i.e., the sum of burst duration
and break time
Available only with BURST modulation (SOUR:AM:MODE BURS)
2.5.4.10
GEN-Panel
INTERVAL
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.86 E-10
3.10.1.5.9 POLARITY
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:FUNCtion [:SHAPe] POLarity → Polarity test signal 2.5.4.11
GEN panel
FUNCTION
→ POLARITY
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STATe
OFF
ON
DC offset permitting a DC voltage to be superimposed at the generator
output.
→ Hardly any DC voltage at the output
→ DC voltage can be set with the next command.
Note:
This setting cannot be made in the analog generator when a low-distortion
generator is used.
2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet <n>
-5 V to 5 V
-10 V to 10 V
-1FS to 1FS
V
FS
DC amplitude
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument
2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC Offset
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude] <nu>
0 to 12 V
0 to 20 V
0 to 1 FS
V
FS
Pulse amplitude
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument
Is voltage-limited by SOUR:VOLT:LIM see 3.10.1.2 and 3.10.1.3
2.5.4.11
GEN panel
VOLTAGE
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.87 E-10
3.10.1.5.10 FSK (Frequency shift keying)
Command Parameter Meaning Section
SOURce:FUNCtion[:SHAPe] FSK Frequency shift keying; generates a sequence of two different sinewave
frequencies each being output for 9 ms (baud rate 110) . The data coded in
this way can only be defined from option UPL-33 or UPL-B10 using command
SOURce:O33 ’O33-’ .
Frequency #1: 1850 Hz, logic 0
Frequency #2: 1650 Hz, logic 1
2.5.4.12
GEN panel
FUNCTION
→ FSK
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STATe ON
OFF
DC offset allows a DC voltage to be superimposed onto the generator output.
→ Almost no DC voltage at the output
→ The DC component can be set with the following command.
Note:
This setting is not possible in the analog generator when the low-distortion
generator is used.
2.5.4.12
GEN panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet <nu>
-5 V to 5 V
-10 V to 10 V
-1FS to 1FS
Amplitude of DC component
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument
2.5.4.12
GEN panel
DC Offset
SOURce:VOLTage <nu>
0 to 11.29 V
0 FS to 1 FS
Level for both FSK frequencies 2.5.4.12
GEN panel
Volt No 1
SOURce:O33 ’O33 ID code Sends the code for line measurements.
The data coded in this way can only be sent from option UPL-B33 or UPL-
B10 (universal sequence controller).
No manual
operation
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.88 E-10
3.10.1.5.11 STEREO SINE
Command Parameter Meaning Section
SOURce:FUNCtion[:SHAPe] STEReo → Sine with different signals for the left and right channel.
Only available with DIGITAL generator and option UPL-B6 (Extended
Analysis Function)
2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
FUNCTION
→ STEREO SINE
SOURce:FREQuency:OFFSet:STATeON
OFF → Frequency offset 0.1 %
→ No frequency offset 2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Frq. Offset,
→ +1000 ppm
→ OFF
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STATe
OFF
ON
DC offset permitting a DC voltage to be superimposed to the generator
output.
→ Hardly any DC voltage at the output
→ DC voltage can be set with the next command.
Note:
This setting cannot be made in the ANALOG generator when a low-distortion
generator is used.
2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet <nu>
-1 FS to 1 FS FS
DC amplitude 2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
DC Offset
SOURce:SINusoid:DITHer:STATeON
OFF → Noise superimposed on signal
→ Noise superimposition off 2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Dither
→ ON
→ OFF
SOURce:SINusoid:DITHer <nu>
0 to 1 FS
FS Noise amplitude 2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Dither
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.89 E-10
Command Parameter Meaning Section
SOURce:RANDom:PDF GAUSsian
TRIangle
RECTangle
→ Noise distribution, Gaussian
→ Noise distribution, triangular
→ Noise distribution, uniform
2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
PDF
→ GAUSS
→ TRIANGLE
→ RECTANGLE
SOURce:VOLTage:EQUalize:STATeON
OFF → Sine signal equalized
→ Sine signal not dependent on frequency 2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Equalizer
→ ON
→ OFF
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST EQUalize,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
EQU
File containing equalizer data
if SOURC:VOLT:EQU:STAT ON
2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Equal.File
SOURce:FREQuency:SELect
FQPH
FQFQ
Determines the type of frequency entry in the left and right channel.
→ Left (CH1) and right channel (CH2) have the same frequency but a
selectable phase with a fixed delay.
→ The frequency of the left (CH1) and right channel (CH2) can be
entered independently of each other.
2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Freq Mode
FREQ&PHASE
FREQ CH1&2
SOURce:VOLTage:SELect
VLRT
VLVL
Determines the type of level entry in the left and right channel.
→ The levels of the left (CH1) and right channel (CH2) have a fixed offset.
The offset remains constant during level sweep.
→ The level of the left (CH1) and right channel (CH2) can be entered
independently of each other.
2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Volt Mode
VOLT&RATIO
VOLT CH1&2
SOURce:SWEep ... For sweep commands see 3.10.1.4 Generator Sweeps
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.90 E-10
Command Parameter Meaning Section
SOURce:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed] <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
Hz If SOUR:FREQ:SEL FQPH selected:
Entry of common sine frequency for both channels. Can be used as
sweep parameter.
If SOUR:FREQ:SEL FQFQ selected:
Entry of sine frequency of left channel. Can be used as sweep parameter.
2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
FREQUENCY
oder
Freq Ch1
SOURce:FREQuency:CH2Stereo <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
Only available if SOUR:FREQ:SEL FQFQ:
Entry of sine frequency of right channel.
Remains constant during sweep.
2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Freq Ch2
SOURce:PHASe <nu>
0 ° to 360 °DEG Only available with SOUR.FREQ:SEL FQPH:
Entry of phase delay between right and left channel with the left channel
(CH1) as reference channel. During the sweep this phase remains constant
and cannot be swept.
2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Phas Ch2:1
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude] <nu>
0 to 1 FS FS
Entry of sine amplitude of left channel; may be used as sweep parameter.
The sine amplitude of right channel remains constant during sweep.
Is voltage-limited by SOUR:VOLT:LIM see 3.10.1.2 and 3.10.1.3
2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
VOLT Ch1
SOURce:VOLTage:CH2Stereo <nu>
0 to 1 FS
FS Only available with SOURce:VOLTage:SELect VLVL:
Entry of sine amplitude of right channel. Remains constant during sweep.
Is voltage-limited by SOUR:VOLT:LIM see 3.10.1.2 and 3.10.1.3
2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
VOLT Ch2
SOURce:VOLTage:RATio <n>
0 to 100000
Only available with SOUR:VOLT:SEL VLRT:
Entry of level offset between channel 2 (right channel) and channel 1 (left
channel) as numeric value.
The level of the right channel is reset upon each command
SOUR:VOLT:RATio <n> or SOURce:VOLTage <nu> and limited to 1.0 FS or
'Max Volt'.
2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Volt Ch2:1
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.91 E-10
3.10.1.5.12 MODULATION (FM or AM signal)
Command Parameter Meaning Section
SOURce:FUNCtion FM Setting a modulated sinewave signal. Either FM or AM can be used. 2.5.4.14
GEN-Panel
FUNCTION
→ FM
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STATeOFF
ON
DC offset permitting a DC voltage to be superimposed to the generator
output.
→ Hardly any DC voltage at the output
→ DC voltage can be set with the next command.
Note:
This setting cannot be made in the ANALOG generator when a low-distortion
generator is used.
2.5.4.14
GEN-Panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet <nu>
-5 V to 5 V
-10 V to 10 V
-1 FS to 1 FS
V
V
FS
DC amplitude
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument
2.5.4.14
GEN-Panel
DC OFFSET
SOURce:FUNCtion:MODE
FM
AM
Determines the type of modulation.
→ Frequency modulation; output of a frequency-modulated sinewave signal.
→ Amplitude modulation; output of amplitude-modulated sinewave signal.
2.5.4.14
GEN-Panel
Mode
→ FM
→ AM
SOURce:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed] <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument and
sample frequency
Hz Setting the modulation frequency 2.5.4.14
GEN-Panel
Mod Freq
oder
Freq Ch1
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.92 E-10
Command Parameter Meaning Section
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude] <nu>
0 to 100 %
PCT Modulation deviation / depth
With SOUR:FUNC:MODE FM: Setting the deviation in %.
With SOUR:FUNC:MODE AM: Setting of modulation depth in %
2.5.4.14
GEN-Panel
Bei FM:
Deviation
Bei AM:
Mod Depth
SOURce:FREQuency2[:CW|FIXed] <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument and
sample frequency
Hz Setting the carrier frequency 2.5.4.14
GEN-Panel
Carr Freq
SOURce:VOLTage2<nu>
0 to 5 V
0 to 6V
0 to 0.5 FS
V
V
FS
Setting the carrier amplitude
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument
2.5.4.14
GEN-Panel
Carr Volt
3.10.1.5.13 DC voltage
Command Parameter Meaning Section
SOURce:FUNCtion DC DC voltage 2.5.4.15
GEN-Panel
FUNCTION
→ DC
SOURce:SWEep ... For sweep commands see 3.10.1.4 Generator Sweeps
SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal[:LEVel|AMPLitude] <nu>
- 5 V to 5 V
-1 FS to 1 FS
V
FS
Entry of DC amplitude; may be used as sweep parameter.
Is voltage-limited by SOUR:VOLT:LIM see 3.10.1.2 and 3.10.1.3 2.5.4.15
GEN-Panel
VOLTAGE
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.93 E-10
3.10.1.5.14 Coded Audio (Coded Audio Signals)
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:FUNCtion[:SHAPe] CODedaud → Output of digitally coded audio data to IEC 61937.
Available only
• if the UPL-B23 (Coded Audio Signal Generation) is installed in
• DIGITAL generator (INST D48) in
• Meas Mode AUDIO DATA (SENSe:DIGital:FEED ADATa) at a
• sampling frequency of 48 kHz (OUTP:SAMP:MODE F48)
2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
FUNCTION
→ CODED AUDIO
SOURce:CODedaudio:FORMat AC3 Coding format AC-3 (Dolby Digital)
Other formats are in preparation.
2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
Format
→ AC-3
SOURce:CODedaudio:CHANnel
CH2
CH6
CHL
CHC
CHR
CHLS
CHRS
CHLF
Selection of channels producing sound.
→ Stereo mode at 192 kb/s. Frequency and level variation or sweep are
possible.
→ Multichannel sound with all channels at 448 kb/s. Frequency and level
variation or sweep possible.
Single channels at 448 kb/s. Limited frequency selection 41.7 Hz, 994.8 Hz
or 15 kHz (see next command) at a fixed level of -20 dB. Coding of samples
at 16 bit.
→ Front left
→ Front center
→ Front right
→ Rear left
→ Rear right
→ Low frequency enhancement
2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
Chan Mode
→ 2/0 192kb/s
→ 5.1 448kb/s
→ L 448kb/s
→ C 448kb/s
→ R 448kb/s
→ LS 448kb/s
→ RS 448kb/s
→ LFE 448kb/s
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.94 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:CODedaudio:FREQuency
F042
F997
F15K
Fixed frequency selection for crosstalk measurements and linearity (level)
sweeps.
→ exactly 41.7 Hz
→ exactly 994.8 Hz
→ exactly 15000.0 Hz
Only available in
• single channel modes
(SOUR:COD:CHAN CHL|CHC|CHR|CHLS|CHRS|CHLF) or with
• level variation (SOUR:VOLT:MODE FIX) selected
2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
Frequency
→ 42 Hz
→ 997 Hz
→ 15 kHz
SOURce:SWEep ... For sweep commands see 3.10.1.4 Generator Swepps 2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
SWEEP CTRL
SOURce:FREQuency:MODE FIX Frequency can be varied. The level is at -20 dB. 2.5.4.16 2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
Vari Mode
→ FREQUENCY
SOURce:FREQuency <new>
5.21 Hz to 20 kHz at
a sampling rate of
48 kHz
Hz Entry of sine frequency (can be swept).
The frequency step width depends on the number of WAV files in the
C:\UPL\AC3\48000\... directory and the frame length per WAV file:
Frequency range: 5 Hz to 1 kHz 1 kHz to 3 kHz 3 kHz to 20 kHz
Resolution 5.21 Hz 10.42 Hz 31.25 Hz
Number of frames: max. 6 max. 3 1
Frequency values outside this pattern are adapted to the next possible value.
Only available in the multichannel modes 2/0 or 5.1 (SOUR:COD:CHAN
CH2|CH6) with frequency variation SOURce:FREQ:MODE FIX selected.
2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
FREQUENCY
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.95 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:VOLTage:MODE FIX The level can be varied in 24 steps of –5 dBFS between 0 dBFS and –120
dBFS; one of three fixed settings can be selected as frequency
(SOUR:COD:FREQ F042|F997|F15K). This setting allows sweep of the sine
amplitude (next command).
Only available in the multichannel modes 2/0 or 5.1 (SOUR:COD:CHAN
CH2|CH6)
2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
Vari Mode
→ VOLTAGE
SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal[:LEVel|AMPLitude] <new>
1 µFS to 1 FS or
-120 dBFS to 0 dBFS
FS Entry of sine amplitude (can be swept)
Level can be varied in 24 steps of –5 dBFS between 0 dBFS and –120 dBFS.
Level values outside this pattern are adapted to the next possible value.
Only available in the multichannel modes 2/0 or 5.1 (SOUR:COD:CHAN
CH2|CH6) with level variation SOURce:VOLTage:MODE FIX selected.
2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
TOTAL VOLT
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators
1078.2008.02 3.96 E-10
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.97 E-10
3.10.2 IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands for Analyzers
3.10.2.1 Selection of Analyzer
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
INSTrument2[:SELect]
equivalent to
INSTrument2:NSELect
A22
A110
D48
1
2
4
→ Analog analyzer, 22 kHz
→ Analog analyzer, 110 kHz
→ Digital analyzer, 48 kHz
→ Analog analyzer, 22 kHz
→ Analog analyzer, 110 kHz
→ Digital analyzer, 48 kHz
2.6.1
ANLR panel
INSTRUMENT
→ ANLG 22 kHz
→ ANLG 110 kHz
→ DIGITAL
3.10.2.2 Configuration of Analog Analyzers
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
INPut[]:FILTer[:LPASs]:FREQuency <nu> Query only
2 Hz | 10 Hz
Hz Lower limit frequency for analyzer instruments A22 and D48. 2.6.2
ANLR panel
Min Freq
SENSe[]:POWer:REFerence:RESistance <nu>
1 mΩ to 100 kΩOhm Reference resistance for power units 2.4 (RREF
2.6.2
ANLR panel
Ref Imped
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.98 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
INPut[]:SELect CH1
CH2
CH1And2
CH1Is2
CH2Is1
→ Only channel 1 active
→ Only channel 2 active
→ Channel 1 and 2 active, settings may be different
→ Channel 1 and 2 active, identical settings
Data of channel 1 adopted for channel 2.
→ Channel 1 and 2 active, identical settings
Data of channel 2 adopted for channel 1.
2.6.2
ANLR panel
CHANNEL(s)
→ 1
→ 2
→ 1 & 2
→ 1 ≡ 2
→ 2 ≡ 1
INPut[1|2]:COUPling
AC
DC
Selection of coupling of analyzer input circuit for channels 1 and 2: available
in the two analog analyzer instruments only (INST2 A22 | 100).
→ AC coupling
A DC offset of the DUT will not be transmitted and
does not therefore affect the DUT.
Note:
A procedure similar to AC coupling can be selected in the digital analyzer
for specific measurement functions. Selection is made with menu item
DC Suppres ON (SENS:FUNC:DCS ON).
→ DC coupling:
Test signals up to 0 Hz are picked up and considered in the results of
RMS, RMS selective, Peak, Quasi-peak, DC, FFT and Waveform
measurements.
2.6.2
ANLR panel
CH1 Coupl
CH2 Coupl
→ AC
→ DC
INPut[1|2]:TYPE BALanced
GEN1
GEN2
→ Balanced input (XLR connector), see Fig. 2-1/11. For analog instruments
only.
→ Internal connection to generator channel 1. For analog instruments only.
→ Internal connection to generator channel 2. For analog instruments only.
2.6.2
ANLR panel
Input
→ BAL XLR
→ GEN1
→ GEN2
→ GEN CROSSED
INPut[1|2]:IMPedance R300
R600
R200K
Input impedance for unbalanced input
→ 300 Ω
→ 600 Ω
→ 200 kΩ
2.6.2
ANLR panel
Imped
→ 300 Ω
→ 600 Ω
→ 200 Ω
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.99 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
INPut[1|2]:LOW FLOat
GROund
→ Outer conductor of unbalanced. input not connected to instrument ground
(PE conductor).
→ Outer conductor of unbalanced. input connected to instrument ground (PE
conductor)
2.6.2
ANLR panel
Common
→ FLOAT
→ GROUND
SENSe[]:VOLTage:RANGe[1|2]:LOWer <nu>
For value range see
2.6.2 Configuration of
the Analog Analyzers
V Sets a range containing the specified level value. No underrange but higher
ranges may be selected.
2.6.2
ANLR panel
Range
→ LOWER
SENSe[]:VOLTage:RANGe[1|2]:AUTO ON
OFF → Autoranging
→ The current range is accepted and retained as :UPPer.
Corresponds to SENSe[]:VOLTage:RANGe[1|2][:UPPer]<current range>
2.6.22.6.2
ANLR panel
Range
→ AUTO
SENSe[]:VOLTage:RANGe[1|2][:UPPer] <nu>
For value range see
2.6.2 Configuration of
the Analog Analyzers
V Sets a range containing the specified level value and holds it unconditionally. 2.6.2
ANLR panel
Range
→ FIX
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.100 E-10
3.10.2.3 Configuration of Digital Analyzers
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe:DIGital:FEED
ADATa
JPHase
CINPut
Specifies the parameter measured in the analyzer:
→ Audio content
→ Demodulated jitter signal in the frequency range 0 to 100 kHz
→ Common-mode signal of digital inputs measured. Frequency range and
measurement function same as with jitter.
2.6.3.1
ANLR panel
Meas Mode
→ AUDIO DATA
→ JITTER/PHAS
→ COMMON/INP
SENSe:DIGital:SYNC:REFerence
GCLock
PLLVari
PLL32
PLL44
PLL48
PLL88
PLL96
Indicates the signal to which the jitter measurement should be referenced.
→ The generator clock is the reference for the jitter measurement. This is
only possible when the generator is also sychronized to the internal
generator clock (menu item "Sync To GEN CLK"
(SOUR:DIG:SYNC:SOUR GCL) in GENERATOR panel)
→ Reference signal is the sampling signal derived from the input signal via
the internal synchronization PLL. Synchronization is made via the VCO
with maximum lock-in range. The capture range is:
• with option UPL-B2 (Digital Audio I/O) 27 kHz to 55 kHz
• with option UPL-B29 in the Base Rate Mode 40 kHz to 55 kHz
• with option UPL-B29 in the High Rate Mode 40 kHz to 106 kHz
→ Reference signal is the sampling signal derived from the ...
→ ... input signal via the internal synchronization PLL. Synchronization is ...
→ ... made via the fixed-frequency VCXO.
→ only with option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) ...
→ ... in the High Rate Mode.
Only with Meas Mode JITTER/PHASE (SENS:DIG:FEED JPH) selected.
2.6.3
ANLR-Panel
Related to
→ GEN CLK
→ VARI (PLL)
→ 32.0 (PLL)
→ 44.1 (PLL)
→ 48.0 (PLL)
→ 88.2 (PLL)
→ 96.0 (PLL)
INPut:FILTer[:LPASs]:FREQuency <n> Query only
10 Hz | 20 Hz
Hz Lower frequency limit of analyzer.
For SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT only.
2.6.1
ANLR panel
Min Freq
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.101 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
INPut[]:SELect CH1
CH2
BOTH
For SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT only
→ Only channel 1 active
→ Only channel 2 active
→ Channel 1 and 2 active, identical setting
2.6.2
2.6.3
ANLR panel
CHANNEL(s)
→ 1
→ 2
→ BOTH
INPut[1|2]:TYPE AESebu
SPDif
OPTical
INTern
→ AES/EBU interface, for connector see Fig. 2-1/17.
→ S/P DIFF interface, for connector see Fig. 2-1/17.
→ Optical interface, for connector see Fig. 2-1/17.
→ Internal interface for digital generator OPTical and INTern for
SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT|PHAS only.
2.6.3
ANLR panel
Input
→ BAL (XLR)
→ UNBAL (XLR)
→ OPTICAL
→ INTERN
SENSe:DIGital:SYNC:SOURce AINPut
RINPut
→ The receiver is clocked with the input signal
(for SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT|PHAS only).
→ The receiver is clocked with the signal at the reference input
(for SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT|JPH only).
2.6.3
ANLR panel
Sync To
→ AUDIO IN
→ REF IN
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.102 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
INPut[]:SAMPle:FREQuency:MODE
F32
F44
F48
F88
F96
VALue
AUTO
CHSTatus
Setting the signal clock rate.
→ Sampling frequency 32 kHz for digital instrument, only with option UPL-B2
(Digital Audio I/O)
→ Sampling frequency 44.1 kHz for digital instrument
→ Sampling frequency 48 kHz for digital instrument
→ Sample frequency 88.2 kHz (only with option UPL-B29 Digital Audio 96
kHz in High Rate Mode CONF:DAI HRM)
→ Sample frequency 96 kHz (only with option UPL-B29 Digital Audio 96 kHz
in High Rate Mode CONF:DAI HRM)
→ Sampling frequency externally applied. For input values see next
command.
→ Transfer of measured sample frequency. The sample rate is updated if the
value varies by more than 0.01%. Smaller variations are ignored.
→ Transfer of the sample frequency specified in the channel status data.
For SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT|PHAS only.
2.6.3
ANLR panel
Sample Frq
→ 32 kHz
→ 44.1 kHz
→ 48 kHz
→ 88.2 kHz
→ 96.0 kHz
→ VALUE:
→ AUTO
→ CHAN STATUS
INPut[]:SAMPle:FREQuency <nu>
27 kHz to 55 kHz
40 kHz to 55 kHz
40 kHz to 106 kHz
Hz Value of applied sampling frequency
with option UPL-B2 (Digital Audio I/O)
with option UPL-B29 im Base Rate Mode
with option UPL-B29 im High Rate Mode
for SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT|PHAS only
2.6.3
ANLR panel
Sample Frq
→ VALUE:
INPut[]:AUDiobits <n>
For value range see
2.6.3 Configuration of
the Digital Analyzer
Word length of audio samples to be analyzed in bits.
For SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT|PHAS only
2.6.3
ANLR panel
Audio Bits
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.103 E-10
3.10.2.4 Starting the Analyzer, Ext. Sweep
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
TRIGger:SOURce IMMediate
TIMer
CH1Freq|CH2Freq
CH1Level |CH2Level
CH1Trigger|CH2Trigg
er
TCHart
CH1Rapidfreq
CH2Rapidfreq
CH1Edgetrigger
CH2Edgetrigger
→ Continuous measurement mode w i t h o u t trigger condition
→ Storing measured values in the buffer at regular intervals.
→ Collection of measured values due to a variation in frequency found at the
ANALYZER input, channel 1 or channel 2.
→ Collection of measured values due to a variation in level found at the
ANALYZER input, channel 1 or channel 2.
→ Triggers a single measurement as soon as the level is within the range
specified by ARM:VOLT:STAR and ARM:VOLT:STOP.
→ Measured values from the ongoing continuous measurement are entered
into a timing diagram at the time interval selected by means of command
TRIG:TIM <nu>.
→ External frequency sweep with fast frequency measurement in channel 1
→ and channel 2
→ Edge-sensitive triggering; a measurement is triggered as soon as the level
→ enters the interval between ARM:VOLT:START and ARM:VOLT:STOP for
the first time.
2.6.4
ANLR panel
START COND
→ AUTO
→ TIME
→ CH1Freq |
CH2Freq
→ CH1Level |
CH2Level
→ LEV TRG CH1|
LEV TRG CH2
→ TIME CHART
→ FRQ FST CH1
→ FRQ FST CH2
→ EDG TRG CH1
→ EDG TRG CH2
TRIGger:DELay <nu>
0 s to 10 s
s Waiting time after the measurement (settling time for DUT). 2.6.4
ANLR panel
Delay
TRIGger:TIMer <nu>
10 ms to 2000 s
s Interval between recordings of measured values. 2.6.4
ANLR panel
Timetick
TRIGger:COUNt<n>
2 to 1024
Number of measured values entered into the buffer. 2.6.4
ANLR panel
Points
ARM:LEVel:MIN <nu>
Analog instruments
10 µV to 1000 V
Digital instrument
1µFS to 1.0 FS
V
FS
Minimum voltage required for triggering a measurement with external
frequency sweep.
2.6.4
ANLR panel
Min VOLT
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.104 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
ARM:FREQuency:STARt
ARM:FREQuency:STOP <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
Hz The input frequency must be within the start/stop frequency for triggering the
measurement.
2.6.4
ANLR panel
Start | Stop
ARM:VOLTage:STARt
ARM:VOLTage:STOP <nu>
Analog instruments
10 µV to 1000 V
Digital instrument
1 µFS to 1.0 FS
V
FS
The input level must be within the start/stop voltage limits for triggering a
measurement.
2.6.4
ANLR panel
Start | Stop
TRIGger:FREQuency:VARiation <nu>
LL to 50%
PTC Minimum percentage by which the input frequency must vary for triggering a
measurement.
LL: The lower limit for the entry of variation is not less than 0.1% and is output
such that not more than 1024 measured values are generated (depending on
the spacing between start and stop values).
2.6.4
ANLR panel
Variation
TRIGger:VOLTage:VARiation <nu>
LL to 900% or
LL to 20 dB
PTC Minimum percentage or dB value by which the input voltage must vary for
triggering a measurement.
LL: The lower limit for the entry of variation is not less than 0.1% or 0,01 dB
and is output such that not more than 1024 measured values are generated
(depending on the spacing between start and stop values).
2.6.4
ANLR panel
Variation
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.105 E-10
3.10.2.5 Analyzer Functions
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion ’OFF’
’RMS’
’RMSSelectiv’
’PEAK’
’QREak’
’DC’
’THD’
’THDNsndr’
’MDISt’
’DFD’
’WAF’
’POLarity’
’FFT’
’FILTersimulation’
’WAVeform’
’COHerence’
’RUBBuzz’
’PROTocol’
’THIRdoct’
→ Function measurement off
→ RMS measurement ’
→ RMS selective measurement
→ Peak measurement
→ Quasi-peak measurement
→ DC measurement
→ THD measurement
→ THD+N measurement
→ MOD DIST measurement
→ DFD measurement
→ Wow & flutter measurement
→ Polarity measurement
→ FFT display
→ Filter simulation
→ Waveform display
→ Coherence Measurement and Transfer Function
→ Loudspeaker measurements
→ AES/EBU protocol
→ Third analysis
2.6.5
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ OFF
→ RMS & S/N
→ RMS SELECT
→ PEAK & S/N
→ QPK & S/N
→ DC
→ THD
→ THD+N/SINAD
→ MOD DIST
→ DFD
→ WOW & FL
→ POLARITY
→ FFT
→ FILTER SIM.
→ WAVEFORM
→ COHERENCE
→ RUB & BUZZ
→ PROTOCOL
→ THIRD OCT
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.106 E-10
3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer Functions
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:TRIGger:SETTling:MODE
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:MODE
SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:MODE
SENSe3:PHASe:SETTling:MODE OFF
EXPonential
FLAT
AVERage
SENS:TRIG:SETT = Settling process for external triggering
SENS:FUNC:SETT = Settling process for measurement function
SENS3:FREQ:SETT = Settling process for frequency measurement
SENS3:PHAS:SETT = Settling process for phase measurement
→ OFF
→ Settling with exponential tolerance and resolution characteristic
→ Settling with tolerance and resolution band
→ Arithmetic averaging (not for settling with external triggering)
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Settling
→ OFF
→ EXPONENTIAL
→ FLAT
→ AVERAGE
SENSe[1]:TRIGger:SETTling:COUNt
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:COUNt
SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:COUNt
SENSe3:PHASe:SETTling:COUNt
<n>
for EXP | FLAT:
2 to 6
for AVER:
2 to 100
Number of test points considered in settling.
3 means that the currently measured value is compared with the two
preceding results.
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Samples
SENSe[1]:TRIGger:SETTling:TOLerance
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:TOLerance
SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:TOLerance
<n>
0.001 to 10 %
% Starting value of exponential tolerance characteristic or tolerance band. 2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Tolerance
SENSe[1]:TRIGger:SETTling:RESolution
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:RESolution
SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:RESolution
SENSe3:PHASe:SETTling:RESolution
<nu>
Value range and units
are determined by
instrument and
function
see 2.6.5.1
V
FS
%
dB
Hz
DEG(°)
Starting value of exponential resolution characteristic or resolution band. 2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Resolution
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:TOUT
SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:TOUT
SENSe3:PHASe:SETTling:TOUT
<nu>
0.001 to 10 s
s Maximum settling time
If no settled measurement result is achieved within this time, the
measurement is aborted and an invalid result is signalled.
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Timeout
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.107 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SYSTem:SPEaker:SOURce OFF
INP1
INP2
IN1And2
FNC1
FNC2
FN1And2
AES1
AES2
AE1And2
→ Loudspeaker and headphones output switched off.
→ Aural monitoring of input signal of analog analyzers A22 and A110
on channel 1.
The signal is available at both output channels.
In the DIGITAL analyzer with option Digital Audio I/O (UPL-B2) in the
Meas Mode JITTER/PHAS the demodulated jitter signal is applied to the
ANLG 110 kHz analyzer and can be listened to.
In the DIGITAL analyzer with option Digital Audio I/O (UPL-B2), in the
Meas Mode COMMON/INP the superimposed common-mode signal
is applied to the digital inputs of the ANLG 110 kHz analyzer
and can be monitored.
→ The input signal of the analog analyzer A22 and A110 can be
monitored on channel 2.
→ ... on both channels (stereo).
With channel 1 or 2 selected as analyzer input, only the left or,
the right headphones output can be used for monitoring.
→ Aural monitoring of function output of analog analyzer
A22 for all measurement functions (except THD+N) for channel 1.
→ ... for channel 2.
→ ... for both channels (stereo).
→ Aural monitoring of left channel of AES/EBU interface of digital analyzer
D48 (Option: Digital Audio Protocol Analysis and Generation UPL-B2).
→ ... of right channel ...
→ ... of both channels (stereo) ...
2.6.6
ANLR panel
SPEAKER
→ OFF
→ INPUT Ch1
→ INPUT JITT
→ INPUT COMM
→ INPUT Ch2
→ INPUT Ch1&2
→ FUNCT Ch1
→ FUNCT Ch2
→ FUNCT Ch1&2
→ DIG Ch1
→ DIG Ch2
→ DIG Ch1&2
SYSTem:SPEaker:GAIN <nu>
-120 to 120 dB
dB Amplification or attenuation of function output. 2.6.6
ANLR panel
Pre Gain
SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume <nu>
0 to 100 %
% Volume of monitor output 2.6.6
ANLR panel
Skp Volume
SYSTem:PHONeSPKC
PERM → Phones output conforms to loudspeaker setting.
→ Headphones output permanently switched on.
2.6.6
ANLR panel
Phone Out
→ SPKPhone
→ PERMANENT
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.108 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SYSTem:SPEaker[:STATe] ON
OFF → Loudspeaker on
→ Loudspeaker off
Command has no effect if option UPL-B5 is not fitted.
2.6.6
ANLR panel
LOCAL key
3.10.2.5.2 RMS Measurement incl. S/N
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion "RMS" → RMS measurement 2.6.5
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ RMS & S/N
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:DCSuppression ON
OFF
Suppression of DUT DC in the digital analyzer.
→ DC not considered; corresponds to AC coupling
→ DC considered in the measurement and displayed; corresponds to DC
coupling
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
DC Suppres
→ ON
→ OFF
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SNSequence ON
OFF → S/N (signal-to-noise) measurement on
→ S/N (signal- to-noise) measurement off
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
S/N Sequ
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]see 3.10.4 Display units for RMS measurement 2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1/CH2
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.109 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE
AFASt
AUTO
TRIGgered
GENTrack
VALue
AFASt and AUTO match the measurement time to the signal frequency by
taking the signal period into account. The measurement time is matched as
far as possible to the input signal. Maximum algorithmic error:
→ 1%
→ 1‰.
→ A special mode is available for RMS measurements, permitting a single
delay-free measurement with selectable measurement time to be carried
out as soon as the signal exceeds a set trigger threshold for the first
time.In conjunction with the generator burst signal this measurement
mode permits the first period of a signal to be measured and is particularly
suitable for echo-free measurements on loudspeakers.
→ Measurement over (at least) one whole period of the generator signal. If
required, the generator frequency is matched to the analyzer sampling
rate. In the case of high frequencies the measurement time is extended to
several periods to increase the measurement accuracy. Particularly
suitable for measuring very noisy or distorted signals and for extremely
fast sweeps. This measurement method guarantees maximum
measurement accuracy at minimum measurement times and should
therefore be given preference.
If the MODDIST signal is used as generator signal, the measurement time
is referred to the LOWER Frequency, which normally dominates.
→ Numerical entry of measurement time. For entry of values see next
command.
2.6.5.2
ANLR panel
Meas Time
→ AUTO FAST
→ AUTO
→ TRIGGERED
→ GEN TRACK
→ VALUE:
SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture <nu>
1 ms ...
For value range see
2.6.5.2 → Meas Time
s Numerical entry of measurement time.
Measurement time for steadying the display.
2.6.5.2
ANLR panel
Meas Time
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.110 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence:MODE CH1Store
CH2Store
CH1Meas
CH2Meas
STORe
VALue
→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 1 is stored as a reference.
→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 2 is stored as a reference.
→ The value measured in channel 1 is used as a reference for the output of
results in reference-related units.
→ The value measured in channel 2 is used as a reference for the output of
results in reference-related units.
→ For a single-channel measurement, the current measurement result is
stored as a reference.
→ The reference value is entered using the next command.
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence <nu>
Analog instrument
100 pV to 1000 V
Digital instrument
0.0 to 1.0 FS
V
FS
Numerical entry of reference value. 2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference
SENSe:SWEep:SYNC
NORMal
BLOCk
Permits the speed to be increased for 1-dimensional generator frequency
sweeps with the universal generator:
→ normal speed common for all sweeps
→ sweep speed increased after the 2nd sweep; traces are not updated online
but only upon completion of the sweep (all at once).
Only available with option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) in Base Rate Mode
(CONF:DAI BRM).
In the high rate mode, the sweep can be operated at NORMal speed only.
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Sweep Mode
→ NORMAL
→ BLOCK
SENSe[1]:NOTCh[:STATe] OFF
DB0
DB12
DB30
→ Analog notch filter off;
→ Analog notch filter on; no gain
→ Analog notch filter on; gain 12 dB
→ Analog notch filter on; gain 30 dB
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Anlg. Notch
→ OFF
→ 0 dB
→ 12 dB
→ 30 dB
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.111 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:NOTCh:FREQuency:MODE FIXed
GENTrack → For numerical entry of notch-filter center frequency see next command.
→ The notch-filter center frequency tracks the generator frequency.
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Notch Freq
→ VALUE:
→ GEN TRACK
SENSe[1]:NOTCh:FREQuency:FIXed <nu> for analog instr.
10 Hz to 22.5 kHz
HZ Numerical center frequency of notch filter.
For analog instrument only.
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Notch Freq
→ VALUE:
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:..... <i>
1 to 3
See 3.10.3 Selecting the Analyzer Filters 2.7.1
ANLR panel
Filter
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:STATe OFF
ON → No POST-FFT for the selected measurement function
→ POST-FFT for selected measurement function: see 2.6.5.12 FFT
with the following settings available:
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:FFT S256 to S8K
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:WINDow RECT to KAIS
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:STARt ?
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:STOP ?
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:RESolution?
If the group-delay measurement is selected with command
SENSe3:FUNCtion FQGRoupdelay, POST-FFT is always active as the
frequency information is obtained from FFT.
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
POST FFT
→ OFF
→ ON
SENSe[1]:TRIGger:SETTling:..... For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions
2.3.4.2
ANLR panel
Fnct Settl
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.112 E-10
3.10.2.5.3 Selective RMS Measurement incl. Sweep
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion "RMSSelectiv"Selective RMS measurement 2.6.5
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ RMS SELECT
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:DCSuppression ON
OFF
Suppression of DUT DC in the digital analyzer.
→ DC not considered; corresponds to AC coupling
→ DC considered in the measurement and displayed; corresponds to DC
coupling
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
DC Suppres
→ ON
→ OFF
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]see 3.10.4 Units for
IEC Measurement
Results
Display units for RMS measurement 2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1/CH2
SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE
AFASt
AUTO
GENTrack
VALue
AFASt and AUTO: Automatic matching of measurement time to the signal
frequency taking the signal period into account. The measurement time is
matched as far as possible to the input signal. Maximum algorithmic error
→ 1%
→ 1‰
→ Measurement over (at least) one whole period of the generator signal. If
required, the generator frequency is matched to the analyzer sampling
rate. In the case of high frequencies the measurement time is extended to
several periods to increase the measurement accuracy. Particularly
suitable for measuring very noisy or distorted signals and for extremely
fast sweeps. This measurement method guarantees maximum
measurement accuracy at minimum measurement times and should
therefore be given preference.
If the MODDIST signal is used as generator signal, the measurement time
is referred to the LOWER Frequency, which normally dominates.
→ Numerical entry of measurement time. For entry of values see next
command.
2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
Meas Time
→ AUTO FAST
→ AUTO
→ GEN TRACK
→ VALUE
SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture <nu>
10 µs to 10s
s Numerical entry of measurement time.
Measurement time for steadying the display.
2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
Meas Time
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.113 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:BWIDth[:RESolution]:MODE
equivalent to
SENSe[1]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:MODE
PPCT1
PPCT3
PTOCt
POCT12
PFIX
PFASt
SPCT1
SPCT3
STOCt
SOCT12
SFIX
SFASt
Bandwidth of bandpass or bandstop of selective RMS filter.
Parameter starting with
P ... = bandpass
S ... = bandstop
PFASt
SFASt:
Bandstop filter with only 40 dB attenuation, third-octave bandwidth and
particularly
short settling time.
2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
Bandwidth
→ BP 1%
→ BP 3 %
→ BP 1/3 OCT
→ BP 1/12 OCT
→ BP FIX:
→ BP FAST
→ BS 1%
→ BS 3 %
→ BS 1/3 OCT
→ BS 1/12 OCT
→ BS FIX:
→ BS FAST
SENSe[1]:BWIDth[:RESolution]
equivalent to
SENSe[1]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]
<nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
Hz Numerical entry of arithmetically symmetrical bandwidth. 2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
Bandwidth
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence:MODE CH1Store
CH2Store
CH1Meas
CH2Meas
STORe
GENTrack
VALue
→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 1 is stored as a reference.
→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 2 is stored as a reference.
→ The value measured in channel 1 is used as a reference for the output of
results in reference-related units.
→ The value measured in channel 2 is used as a reference for the output of
results in reference-related units.
→ For a single-channel measurement, the current measurement result is
stored as a reference.
→ The currently set generator output level is used as a reference.
Using the subsequent command SENS:FREQ:FACT <n> the bandpass
filter of the RMS SEL measurement in the Freq Mode GENTRACK can be
set to any multiple of the fundamental.
This allows single harmonics to be measured.
→ The reference value is entered using the next command.
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE CH2
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ STORE
→ GEN TRACK
→ VALUE:
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.114 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence <nu>
Analog instruments
100 pV to 1000 V
Digital instrument
0.0 to 1.0 FS
V
FS
Numerical entry of reference value. 2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.115 E-10
Sweep for selective RMS measurement
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:MODE FIXed|CW
SWEep
LIST
MULTisine
GENTrack
CH1
CH2
→ Presetting for fixed frequency of selective RMS measurement. Numerical
entry with SENSe[1]:FREQuency[:FIXed|:CW]<nu>
→ Frequency sweep of selective RMS measurement.
The sweep parameters are determined by the following user
specifications:
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:STARt|STOP <nu>
SENSe[1]:SWEep:SPACing LINear|LOGarithmic
SENSe[1]:SWEep:STEP <nu>
SENSe[1]:SWEep:POINts <n>
→ List sweep of frequency of selective RMS measurement.
The sweep parameters are read from the file specified under
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST FREQuency, "filename" For format of block/list files
see 2.9.1.3 Format of Block/Listen Data.
→ The frequency of the selective RMS measurement is set consecutively to
the multisine frequencies specified in the generator panel
(see 2.5.4.4 MULTISINE). The sweep is similar to a LIST sweep.
→ The frequency of the selective RMS measurement tracks the current
generator frequency.
By means of the factor (see next command SENS:FREQ:FACT <n>) it can
be determined whether the center frequency should directly track the
generator frequency (factor = 1) or be a multiple thereof. If the factor is an
integral multiple, it may be used for measuring single harmonics. The
bandpass center frequency can be tracked to the generator signal
functions SINE, MULTISINE, BURST or SINE2 PULSE“, only; any other
signal function causes an error message. The frequency of the selective
RMS measurement tracks the frequency measured in
→ channel 1
→ channel 2.
2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
SWEEP CTRL
→ OFF
→ AUTO SWEEP
MANU SWEEP
→ AUTO LIST
MANU LIST
→GEN MLTSINE
FREQ MODE
→ GEN TRACK
→ FREQ CH1
→ FREQ CH2
SENSe:FREQuency:FACTor <nu> MLT
1 to 20 for RMS
selective
measurements
Factor by which the tracking bandpass filter is higher than the generator
frequency with setting GENTRACK (SENS:FREQ:MODE GENT). 2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
FREQ MODE
→ Factor
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.116 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe:SWEep:SYNC
NORMal
FAST
BLOCk
Permits the speed of 1-dimensional sweeps with the universal generator to be
increased.
→ Normal speed used for any kind of sweep
→ Sweep speed increased as from 2nd sweep
→ Sweep speed increased again as from 2nd sweep; update of curve not
online but only upon completion of the sweep (all at once).
Only available with option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) in Base Rate Mode
(CONF:DAI BRM).
In the high rate mode, the sweep can be operated at NORMal speed only.
2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
Sweep Mode
→ NORMAL
→ FAST
→ BLOCK
SENSe[1]:NOTCh[:STATe] DB12
DB30
DB0
OFF
→ Analog notch filter on; gain 12 dB
→ Analog notch filter on; gain 30 dB
→ Analog notch filter on; no gain
→ Analog notch filter off.
The notch filter can only be set in the analog instruments when a bandstop
filter has been selected for SENS:BWID:MODE.
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Anlg. Notch
→ 12 dB Auto
→ 30 dB Auto
→ 0 dB
→ OFF
SENSe[1]:FILTer2:..... See 3.10.3 Selecting the Analyzer Filters
Particularly when monitoring weak residual signals amplified by means of Pre
Gain, a highpass filter should be used for DC suppression to avoid the signal
to be distorted or suppressed altogether.
In conjunction with a selective RMS measurement filter No. 2 must be
selected as filter No. 1 is already used in the UPL as a selective RMS
bandpass or bandstop filter. 3.10.3 Selecting the Analyzer Filters
2.7.1
ANLR panel
Filter
SENSe[1]:FREQuency[:FIXed|CW] <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
Hz Numerical entry of frequency for selective RMS measurement. 2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
FREQ MODE
→ FIX
SENSe[1]:SWEep:MODE AUTO
MANual
Automatic sweep
→ This command in conjunction with command
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:MODe SWEep sets the AUTO SWEEP mode.
→ This command in conjunction with command
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:MODe SWEep sets the MANU SWEEP mode.
Pressing the LOCAL key activates the spinwheel.
2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
SWEEP CTRL
→ AUTO SWEEP
→ MANU SWEEP
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.117 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:LIST:MODE AUTO
MANual
Automatic list sweep
→ This command in conjunction with command
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:MODe LIST sets the AUTO LIST mode.
→ This command in conjunction with command
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:MODe SWEep sets the MANU LIST mode.
Pressing the LOCAL key activates the spinwheel.
2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
SWEEP CTRL
→ AUTO LIST
→ MANU LIST
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:STARt
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:STOP <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
Hz Start and stop frequency for frequency sweep of selective RMS
measurement.
2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
SWEEP CTRL
→ Start | Stop
SENSe[1]:SWEep:SPACing LINear
LOGarithmic → Linear sweep spacing
→ Logarithmic sweep spacing
2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG
SENSe[1]:SWEep:POINts <n>
2 to 1024
Number of sweep steps.
Depending on the selected SPACing (SENSe[1]:SWEep:SPACing
LINear|LOGarithmic),
the sweep frequency range between "STARt" and "STOP" is divided into <n>
linear or logarithmic sweep points.
2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
Points
SENSe[1]:SWEep:STEP <nu> | <n>
The selected step
size should be so
wide that not more
than 1023 single
steps (= 1024 sweep
points) are obtained.
It should not exceed
the absolute
difference between
STOP and STARt.
Sweep step size
Depending on selected SPACing
SENSe[1]:SWEep:SPACing LINear|LOGarithmic,
the sweep frequency range between "STARt" and "STOP" is divided into
linear steps in Hz or logarithmic steps in the form of a multiplier.
SENSe[1]:SWEep:SPACing LINear: Hz
SENSe[1]:SWEep:SPACing LOGarithmic: No unit because of multiplication
factor.
2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
Steps
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.118 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST FREQency,"filename
"
= path and filename
of frequency list for a
LIST sweep of a
selective RMS
measurement, eg
"c:\UPL\ref\swpflst.lst"
Loading a frequency list for the list sweep. 2.6.5.3
2.9.1.3
ANLR panel
SWEEP CTRL
→ Filename
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:..... For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions
2.3.4.2
ANLR panel
Fnct Settl
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.119 E-10
3.10.2.5.4 Peak and Quasi-Peak Measurement incl. S/N
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion "PEAK"→ Peak measurement 2.6.5
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ PEAK & S/N
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion "QPEak"→ Quasi-peak measurement 2.6.5
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ QPK & S/N
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]see 3.10.4 Units for
IEC Measurement
Results
Display units for RMS measurement 2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1/CH2
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SNSequence ON
OFF → S/N (signal-to-noise) measurement on.
→ S/N (signal-to-noise) measurement off.
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
S/N Sequ
→ ON
→ OFF
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:MMODePPEak
NPEak
PTOPeak
PABSolut
→ PK+ value
→ PK- value
→ Peak-to-peak value
→ Absolute peak value
2.6.5.4
ANLR panel
Meas Mode
→ PK +
→ PK -
→ PK to PK
→ PK abs
SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime:MODE SFASt
FAST
SLOW
FIXed
VALue
→ 50 ms
→ 200 ms monitoring interval for peak search
→ 1000 ms
→ s monitoring interval for quasi-peak search
→ Numerical entry of interval time. For entry of values see next command.
2.6.5.4
ANLR panel
Intv Time
→ FIX 50ms
→ FIX 200ms
→ FIX 1000ms
→ FIX 3 SEC
→ VALUE:
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.120 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime <nu>
20 ms to 10s
s Numerical entry of interval time.
Monitoring interval for peak search
2.6.5.4
ANLR panel
Intv Time
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence:MODE CH1Store
CH2Store
CH1Meas
CH2Meas
STORe
GENTrack
VALue
→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 1 is stored as a reference.
→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 2 is stored as a reference.
→ The value measured of channel 1 is used as a reference for theresults in
reference-related units.
→ The value measured of channel 2 is used as a reference for the results in
reference-related units.
→ For a single-channel measurement, the current measurement result is
stored as a reference.
→ The currently set generator output level is used as a reference.
→ The reference value is entered using the next command.
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE CH2
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ STORE
→ GEN TRACK
→ VALUE:
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence <nu>
Analog instrument
100 pV to 1000V
Digital instrument
0.0 to 1.0 FS
V
FS
Numerical entry of reference value. 2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference
SENSe[1]:NOTCh[:STATe] DB0
DB12
DB30
OFF
→ Analog notch filter on; no gain
→ Analog notch filter on; gain 12 dB
→ Analog notch filter on; gain 30 dB
→ Analog notch filter off;
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Anlg. Notch
→ 0 dB
→ 12 dB
→ 30 dB
→ OFF
SENSe[1]:NOTCh:FREQuency:MODE FIXed
GENTrack → For numerical entry of notch-filter center frequency see next command.
→ The center frequency of the notch filter tracks the generator frequency.
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Notch Freq
→ VALUE:
→ GEN TRACK
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.121 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:NOTCh:FREQuency:FIXed <nu>
for analog instr.
10 Hz to 22.5 kHz
Hz Numerical center frequency of notch filter. 2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Notch Freq
→ VALUE:
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:..... <i>
1 to 3
See 3.10.3 Selecting the Analyzer Filters
Only available with option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) in Base Rate Mode
(CONF:DAI BRM).
In the high rate mode (CONF:DAI HRM), the measurement functions PEAK
and QPEak can be operated without filter.
2.7.1
ANLR panel
Filter
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:..... For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions
2.3.4.2
ANLR panel
Fnct Settl
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.122 E-10
3.10.2.5.5 DC Measurement
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion "DC" → DC measurement 2.6.5
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ DC
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]see 3.10.4 Units for
IEC Measurement
Results
Display units for RMS measurement 2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1/CH2
SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE FAST
VALue → 200 ms integration time for steadying the display.
→ Numerical entry of integration time. For entry of values see next command.
2.6.5.5
ANLR panel
Meas Time
→ FIX 200ms
→ VALUE:
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence:MODE CH1Store
CH2Store
CH1Meas
CH2Meas
STORe
GENTrack
VALue
→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 1 is stored as a reference.
→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 2 is stored as a reference.
→ The value measured of channel 1 is used as a reference for the results in
reference-related units.
→ The value measured of channel 2 is used as a reference for the results in
reference-related units.
→ For a single-channel measurement, the current measurement result is
stored as a reference.
→ The currently set generator output level is used as a reference.
→ The reference unit is specified by the next command.
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE CH2
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ STORE
→ GEN TRACK
→ VALUE:
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence <nu>
Analog instrument
- 1000 V to 1000 V
V Numerical entry of reference value. 2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:..... For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions
2.3.4.2
ANLR panel
Fnct Settl
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.123 E-10
3.10.2.5.6 THD Measurement
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion "THD"THD measurement 2.6.5
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ THD
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:MMODeSELectdi
LSELectdi
DALL
LDALl
DODD
LDODd
DEVen
LDEVen
→ Any combination of harmonics from d2 to d9 can be set with the
→ following command. Result in dB
Result in V (analog) or FS (digital)
→ Selection of harmonics to be measured:
→ All harmonics from d2 to d9 Result in dB
Result in V (analog) or FS (digital)
→ All uneven harmonics:
→ d3, d5, d7, d9 Result in dB
Result in V (analog) or FS (digital)
→ All even harmonics:
→ d2, d4, d6, d8 Result in dB
Result in V (analog) or FS (digital)
2.6.5.6
ANLR panel
Meas Mode
→SELECT di
→ LEV SEL di
→ All di
→ LEV All di
→ All odd di
→ LEV odd di
→ All even di
→ LEV even di
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:DISTortion <n> *) Decimal equivalent of integer <n> for any combination of harmonics,
eg d2, d4, d6, d9, is desired;
binary: 10010101; decimal equivalent <n> = 149
2.6.5.6
ANLR panel
→ di2468
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:DMODeFAST
PRECision → Analog notch switched off.
→ Analog notch switched on when the applied signal is of good quality.
2.6.5.6
ANLR panel
Dyn Mode
→ FAST
→ PRECISION
SENSe[1]:UNIT PCT|DB Display units for results of THD measurements. 2.4
ANLR panel
Unit
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.124 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSE[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence <nu>
Analog Instruments:
100 pV to 1000 V
Digital Instrument:
100 pFS to 100 FS
V
FS
Numerical entry of reference value in reference-related level units.
SENS:FUNC:MMOD LSEL | LDAL | LDOD | LDEV
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Ref Volt
SENSe[1]:VOLTage:FUNDamental:MODE AUTO
VALue Determining the fundamental frequency:
Automatically by frequency measurement.
Numerical entry of fundamental frequency. For entry of values see next
command.
2.6.5.6
ANLR panel
Fundamentl
SENSe[1]:VOLTage:FUNDamental <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
Hz Numerical entry 2.6.5.6
ANLR panel
Fundamentl
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:..... For settling command see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions
2.3.4.2
ANLR panel
Fnct Settl
*)
MSB LSB Data bit
di9 di8 di7 di6 di5 di4 di3 di2 Harmonics
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Weighting
Example: di1, di3, di5 and di7
Data word: 10101010
Weighting = 2+8+32+128
Decimal equivalent: =170
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.125 E-10
3.10.2.5.7 THD + N / Sinad Measurement
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion "THDNsndr"→ THD+N measurement 2.6.5
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ THD+N/SINAD
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:MMODeTHDN
LTHDn
SNDRatio
NOISe
LNOise
Result display as
→ THD+N value in dB
→ THD+N RMS value in V (analog) or FS (digital)
→ SINAD value in negative dB
→ Same as THD+N but without harmonics weighting, in dB
→ Same as THD+N RMS value but without harmonics weighting, in V
(analog) or FS (digital)
2.6.5.7
ANLR panel
Meas Mode
→THD+N
→ LEVEL THD+N
→ SINAD
→ NOISE
→ LEVEL NOISE
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:DMODeFAST
PRECision → Analog notch filter switched off.
→ Analog notch filter switched on when the applied signal is of good quality.
2.6.5.7
ANLR panel
Dyn Mode
→ FAST
→ PRECISION
SENSe:FUNCtion:APERture:MODE SLOW
FAST
SFASt
Selection of measurement speed
→ Measurement using FFT size 8192
→ Measurement using FFT size 2048
→ Measurement using FFT size 512
2.6.5.7
ANLR panel
Meas Time
→ SLOW
→ FAST
→ SUPERFAST
SENSe[1]:THDN:REJection NARRow
WIDE
Sets the characteristic of the notch filter in the digital instrument.
→ The noise is measured close to the carrier.
→ An two-pole notch filter is additionally taken into account to evaluate
attenuated harmonics in the vicinity of the carrier.
2.6.5.7
ANLR panel
Rejection
→ NARROW
→ WIDE
SENSe[1]:UNIT PCT|DB Display units for results of THD+N measurement 2.4
ANLR panel
Unit
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.126 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence <nu>
Analog Instruments:
100 pV to 1000 V
Digital Instrument:
100 pFS to 100 FS
V
FS
Numerical entry of reference value for measurement response in reference-
related level units for the setting
SENS:FUNC:MMOD LTHD | LNO
2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Ref Volt
SENSe[1]:VOLTage:FUNDamental:MODE AUTO
VALue
Determining the fundamental frequency:
→ Automatically by frequency measurement.
→ Numerical entry of fundamental frequency. For entry of values see next
command.
2.6.5.7
ANLR panel
Fundamentl
→ AUTO
→ VALUE:
SENSe[1]:VOLTage:FUNDamental <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
Hz Numerical entry of fundamental frequency 2.6.5.7
ANLR panel
Fundamentl
SENSe[1]:FILTer1:..... See 3.10.3 Selecting the Analyzer Filters 2.7.1
ANLR panel
Fnct Settl
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:STATe OFF
ON → No POST-FFT for the selected measurement function
→ POST-FFT for selected measurement function (see 3.10.2.5.12 FFT)
CALC:TRAN:FREQ:FT S256 to S8K
CALC:TRAN:FREQ:WIND RECT to KAIS
CALC:TRAN:FREQ:STAR?
CALC:TRAN:FREQ:STOP?
CALCe:TRAN:FREQ:RES?
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
POST FFT
→ OFF
→ ON
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:FFT S512
S1K
S2K
S4K
S8K
FFT Size
→ 512 lines
→ 1024 lines
→ 2048 lines
→ 4096 lines
→ 8192 lines
2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
FFT Size
→ 512
→ 1024
→ 2048
→ 4096
→ 8192
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.127 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:LIMit:UPPer <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
Hz Upper band limit for THD+N measurement function 2.6.5.7
ANLR panel
→ Frq Lim Upp
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:LIMit:LOWer <nu>
Value range
determined
by instrument or
function
Hz Lower band limit for THD+N measurement function 2.6.5.7
ANLR panel
→ Frq Lim Low
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:..... For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions
2.7.1
ANLR panel
Fnct Settl
SENSe:VOLTage:EQUalize[:STATe]
ON
OFF
Activation/deactivation of an equalizer table consisting of frequency
information and associated voltage gain factors.
→ The equalizer is switched on. The command that follows is accepted. The
THD+N value is calculated from the equalized FFT spectrum.
→ The equalizer is switched off. The THD+N value is calculated from the
original FFT spectrum.
2.6.5.7
ANL Panel
Equalizer
→ ON
→ OFF
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST SENSe, ’filename’Command for entering the name of the equalizer file.
Only permissible with SENS:VOLT:EQU ON
2.6.5.7
ANL Panel
Equal. file
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.128 E-10
3.10.2.5.8 MOD DIST
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion "MDISt" MOD-DIST measurement. Measurement with double-sine (similar to SMPTE) 2.6.5
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ MODDIST
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:DMODeFAST
PRECision → Analog notch filter switched off.
→ Analog notch filter switched on if the applied signal is of good quality.
2.6.5.8
ANLR panel
Dyn Mode
→ FAST
→ PRECISION
SENSe[1]:UNIT PCT|DB Display units for results of MOD-DIST measurement. 2.4
ANLR panel
Unit
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:..... For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions
2.3.4.2
ANLR panel
Fnct Settl
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.129 E-10
3.10.2.5.9 DFD
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion "DFD" → Difference frequency distortion measurement 2.6.5
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ DFD
SENSe[1]:UNIT PCT|DB Display units for results of DFD measurement 2.4
ANLR panel
Unit
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:MMODeD2
D3 → Intermodulation distortion d2
→ Intermodulation distortion d3
2.6.5.9
ANLR panel
Meas Mode
→ d2 (IEC268)
→ d3 (IEC268)
→ d2 (IEC118)
→ d3 (IEC118)
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:DMODeFAST
PRECision → Analog notch filter switched off.
→ Analog notch filter switched on if the applied signal is of good quality.
2.6.5.9
ANLR panel
Dyn Mode
→ FAST
→ PRECISION
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:..... For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions
2.3.4.2
ANLR panel
Fnct Settl
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.130 E-10
3.10.2.5.10 Wow & Flutter
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion "WAF" → Wow & flutter measurement 2.6.5
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ WOW & FL
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:STANdard NAB
JIS
DINiec
SI05
SI10
→ W&F acc. to NAB
→ W&F acc. to JIS
→ W&F acc. to DIN/IEC
→ W&F, 2-sigma, 5 s.
→ W&F, 2-sigma, 10 s
2.6.5.10
ANLR panel
Rule
→ NAB
→ JIS
→ DIN/IEC
→ 2 Sigma 5 s
→ 2 Sigma 10s
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:WEIGhting ON
OFF → W&F weighting filter on
→ W&F weighting filter off
2.6.5.10
ANLR panel
Weighting
→ ON
→ OFF
SENSe[1]:UNIT PCT No further display unit selectable. 2.4
ANLR panel
Unit
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:STATe OFF
ON → No POST-FFT for selected measurement function
→ POST-FFT for selected measurement function (see 3.10.2.5.12 FFT)
CALC:TRAN:FREQ:FFT S256 to S8K
CALC:TRAN:FREQ:WIND RECT to KAIS
CALC:TRAN:FREQ:STAR?
CALC:TRAN:FREQ:STOP?
CALC:TRAN:FREQ:RES?
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
POST FFT
→ OFF
→ ON
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:..... For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions
2.3.4.2
ANLR panel
Fnct Settl
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.131 E-10
3.10.2.5.11 POLARITY
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion "POLarity"→ Polarity test of DUT. 2.6.5
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ POLARITY
3.10.2.5.12 FFT
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion "FFT"→ FFT measurement function 2.6.5.12
ANLR panel
Function
→ FFT
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:DCSuppression ON
OFF
Suppression of DUT DC in the digital analyzer.
→ DC not considered; corresponds to AC coupling
→ DC considered in the measurement and displayed; corresponds to DC
coupling
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
DC Suppres
→ ON
→ OFF
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]see 3.10.4 Units for
IEC Measurement
Results
Display units for RMS measurement 2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1/CH2
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.132 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence:MODE CH1Store
CH2Store
CH1Meas
CH2Meas
STORe
GENTrack
VALue
→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 1 is stored as a reference.
→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 2 is stored as a reference.
→ The value measured of channel 1 is used as a reference for the results in
reference-related units.
→ The value measured of channel 2 is used as a reference for the results in
reference-related units.
→ For a single-channel measurement, the current measurement result is
stored as a reference.
→ The currently set generator output level is used as a reference.
→ The reference unit is specified by the next command.
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE CH2
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ STORE
→ GEN TRACK
→ VALUE:
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
V
FS
Numerical entry of reference value. 2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference
SENSe[1]:CHANnel:DELay <nu>
-10 to 10 s
s Interchannel delay
Delay compensation of the DUT by entering the time by which channel 1 is to
be delayed with respect to channel 2. If channel 2 has a shorter delay than
channel 1, this can be compensated for by entering a negative value.
Available only for for two-channel measurements in instruments A22 and D48
and Zoom FFT off ("CALC:TRAN:FREQ:ZOOM 1")
2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
Chan Delay
SENSe[1]:NOTCh[:STATe] DB12
DB30
DB0
OFF
→ Analog notch filter on; gain 12 dB
→ Analog notch filter on; gain 30 dB
→ Analog notch filter on; no gain
→ Analog notch filter off;
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Anlg. Notch
→ 0 dB
→ 12 dB
→ 30 dB
→ OFF
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.133 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:NOTCh:FREQuency:MODE FIXed
GENTrack → For numerical entry of notch-filter center frequency see next command.
→ Center frequency of notch filter tracks the generator frequency.
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Notch Freq
→ VALUE:
→ GEN TRACK
SENSe[1]:NOTCh:FREQuency:FIXed <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
HZ Numerical entry of notch-filter center frequency. 2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Notch Freq
→ VALUE:
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:... <i>
1 to 3
See 3.10.3 Selecting the Analyzer Filters
The three filters are available with:
• Analyzer ANLG 22 kHz (INST2 A22) or
• Analyzer DIGITAL (INST2 D48) in Meas Mode AUDIO DATA
(SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT)
No filter can be switched on:
• Analyzer ANLG 110kHz
• Option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) in high rate mode (CONF:DAI HRM)
2.7.1
ANLR-Panel
Filter
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:FFT S256
S512
S1K
S2K
S4K
S8K
FFT size
→ 256 lines
→ 512 lines
→ 1024 lines
→ 2048 lines
→ 4096 lines
→ 8192 lines
2.6.5.12
ANLR panel
FFT Size
→ 256
→ 512
→ 1024
→ 2048
→ 4096
→ 8192
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency: AVERage <n>
1 to 256
Number of averaging procedures for optimum noise suppression. 2.6.5.12
ANLR panel
Average
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.134 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:AVERage:TCONtr
ol NORMal
EXPonential
→ The specified number of FFTs is performed, intermediate results are
added and then divided by this number.
→ Averaging is performed continuously.
2.6.5.12
ANLR panel
Avg Mode
→ NORMAL
→ EXPONENTIAL
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:STARt?
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:STOP?<nu>
Query only
Queries the beginning and end of FFT, depending on CENTer and SPAN.
The response is <nu> in Hz.
2.6.5.12
ANLR panel
Start / Stop
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:CENTer <nu>
Value range
determined by
instrument or function
Hz Center frequency for FFT calculation 2.6.5.12
ANLR panel
Center
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:ZOOM <n> = 1
1 to 128
for instr.
A22 a. D48
n = 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32,
64, 128
A110 =
n =1, 2, 4, 8,16
Zoom FFT off (standard FFT)
FFT zoom factor
Contrary to the manual mode, the zoom factor instead of the SPAN is entered
in the IEC/IEEE-bus mode. The SPAN being a function of the zoom factor it
can be determined by the following query.
2.6.5.12
ANLR panel
Zoom-FFT
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:SPAN? <nu>
Query only
Queries the frequency range around the center frequency as a function of the
zoom factor.
The response is <nu> in Hz.
Contrary to the manual mode, SPAN can only be read in but not entered in
the IEC/IEEE-bus mode. The SPAN value can be changed by changing the
zoom factor and modifying the sampling frequency and the oversampling
factor.
2.6.5.12
ANLR panel
Span
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:RESolution?<nu>
Query only
Queries the frequency resolution of FFT, depending on CENTer and SPAN.
The response is <nu> in Hz.
2.6.5.12
ANLR panel
Resolution
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.135 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:MTIMe?<nu>
Query only
Queries the measurement time of FFT, depending on FFT size.
The response is <nu> in s.
2.6.5.12
ANLR panel
Meas Time
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:WINDow RECTangular
HANNing
BLACkman_harris
RIF1
RIF2
RIF3
HAMMing
FLATtop
KAISer
→ Fast and frequency-accurate
→ High spectral resolution, wide, bell-shaped curve
→ Steep slope of bell lobe
→ Excellent suppression of distant interference
→ Excellent suppression of distant interference
→ Excellent suppression of distant interference
→ Implemented for the sake of completeness
→ Amplitude read from graphic diagram
→ Characteristics determined by ß factor
2.6.5.12
ANLR panel
Window
→ RECTANG...
→ HANN
→ BLACKMAN H
→ RIFE VINC 1
→ RIFE VINC 2
→ RIFE VINC 3
→ HAMMING
→ FLAT TOP
→ KAISER
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:WINDow:BETAfact
or <n> = 1 to 20 keine
Einheit
ß factor for KAISer window 2.6.5.12
ANLR panel
ß-Factor
SENSe:VOLTage:EQUalize[:STATe]
ON
OFF
Activation/deactivation of an equalizer table consisting of frequency
information and associated voltage gain factors.
→ The equalizer is switched on. The command that follows is accepted.
→ The equalizer is switched off; the FFT spectrum remains unchanged.
2.6.5.12
ANL Panel
Equalizer
→ ON
→ OFF
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST SENSe, ’filename’Command for entering the name of the equalizer file.
Only permissible with SENS:VOLT:EQU ON
2.6.5.12
ANL Panel
Equal. file
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.136 E-10
3.10.2.5.13 Filter Simulation
Command Parameter Basic
unit- Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion ’FILTersim’→ Display of sum frequency response of the filter
to be selected with SENS:FILT... on the UPL display, eg
SENS:FILT:AWE ON
SESN:FILT2:UFIL5 ON
SENS:FUNC ’FILT’
IEC LAD 20
IEC GTL
2.6.5.13
ANLR panel
Function
→ FILTER SIM.
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]PCT
DB
see 3.10.4 Units for
IEC Measurement
Results
Unit of Y axis to be selected with the next command for display of the filter
curve.
2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1/Ch2
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:..... <i>
1 to 3
See 3.10.3 Selecting the Analyzer Filters 2.7.1
ANLR panel
Filter
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.137 E-10
3.10.2.5.14 WAVEFORM
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion "WAVeform"→ Waveform display of applied signal 2.6.5
ANLR panel
Function
→ WAVEFORM
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:DCSuppression ON
OFF
Suppression of DUT DC in the digital analyzer.
→ DC not considered; corresponds to AC coupling
→ DC considered in the measurement and displayed; corresponds to DC
coupling
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
DC Suppres
→ ON
→ OFF
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:MMODeSTANdard
COMPressed
USAMpl
→ Standard display of samples, max. trace length is 7488 samples.
Interpolation can be switched on.
→ To allow measurements over longer periods of time only peaks are
displayed.
With command SENSe:WAVeform:COMPression <n> (see below) the
number of peak-weighted samples is determined.
Available only for instruments A22 and D48.
Interpolation cannot be switched on.
→ Undersampling of signal to record longer periods;
the number of samples specified under SENSe:WAVeform:
COMPression is arithmetically combined (without detection).
2.6.5.14
ANLR panel
Meas Mode
→ STANDARD
→ COMPRESSED
→ UNDERSAMP
SENSe[1]:WAVeform:COMPression <n>
2 to 1024
Number of peak-weighted samples of WAVeform mode
SENSe:FUNCtion:MMODe COMPressed.
2.6.5.14
ANLR panel
Comp Fact
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]see 3.10.4 Units for
IEC Measurement
Results
Display unit for results of DC measurement. 2.4
ANLR panel
Unit
SENSE[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence <nu>
Analog instrument
- 1000 V to 1000 V
Digital instrument
- 1 kFS to 1 kFS
V
FS
Numerical entry of reference value. 2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.138 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:..... <i>
1
See 3.10.3 Selecting the Analyzer Filters
A filter can be selected if
• Option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) fitted and Base Rate Mode
(CONF:DAI BRM)
• ANLG 22 kHz or DIGITAL instument (INST2 A22|D48)
• In DIGITAL analyzer Source Mode AUDIO DATA (SENS:DIG:FEED
ADAT)
• Measurement function WAVEFORM, Meas Mode UNDERSAMPLE
(SENS:FUNC:MMOD USAM) .
No filter can be switched on:
• In analyzer ANLG 110kHz
• Option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) eingebaut und High Rate Mode
(CONF:DAI HRM)
2.6.5.14
ANLR-Panel
Filter
TRIGger:LEVel <nu>
Analog instruments
-50V to 50V
Digital instrument
-1 FS to 1 FS
V
FS
Sets the voltage for the trigger threshold. 2.6.5.14
ANLR panel
Trig Level
TRIGger:SLOPePOSitive alias
RISing
NEGative alias
FALLing
Sets the trigger edge. 2.6.5.14
ANLR panel
Trig Slope
→ RISING
→ FALLING
SENSe[1]:SMOothing:APERture N1
N2
N4
N8
N16
N32
Selects the interpolation stages for smoothing the display of the traced
waveform.
N1 to N32 = factor 1 to 32
2.6.5.14
ANLR panel
Interpol
→ 1
→ 2
→ 4
→ 8
→ 16
→ 32
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.139 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:WAVeform:DURation <nu>
see 2.6.5.14
WAVEFORM
s Sets the period for which the signal is traced. The max. settable Trace Len is
a function of the sampling rate and the interpolation value.
2.6.5.14
ANLR panel
Trace Len
TRIGger:CHANnel CH1
CH2
GENBurst
→ Channel 1
→ Channel 2
triggers the measurement for both channels when the trigger level is
exceeded (TRIGger:LEVel <nu>).
→ The generator signal triggers the measurement upon start of the "Burst
On" phase, provided that a suitable generator function has been
selected. Signal delay times of the devices under test can thus be
determined graphically from the waveform display.
To be set only for two-channel measurements in instruments A22 and D48.
2.6.5.14
ANLR panel
Trig Src
→ CHAN 1
→ CHAN 2
→ GEN BURST
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.140 E-10
3.10.2.5.15 Coherence Measurement and Transfer Function
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion ’COHerence’Coherence and transfer function with built-in option UPL-B6
Conditions:
• Analog instrument 22 kHz (INST2 A22) or
digital instrument (INST2 D48) in Meas Mode AUDIO DATA
(SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT)
• Two-channel measurement (INP:SEL CH1A | CH2ICH1I | BOTH)
2.6.5.22
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ COHERENCE
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1] PCT
DB Units for result display for transfer function (ratio channel 2/channel 1) of
COHERENCE measurement provided TRACE A is selected with
DISP:TRAC:FEED ’SENS:DATA’.
2.6.5.22
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1
SENSe[1]:CHANnel:DELay <nu>
-10to10 s
s Interchannel delay
Delay compensation of the DUT by entering the time by which channel 1 is to
be delayed with respect to channel 2. If channel 2 has a shorter delay than
channel 1, this can be compensated for by entering a negative value.
Available only for for two-channel measurements in instruments A22 and D48
2.6.5.22
ANLR-Panel
Chan Delay
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency: FFT S256
S512
S1K
S2K
S4K
S8K
FFT size
→ 256 lines
→ 512 lines
→ 1024 lines
→ 2048 lines
→ 4096 lines
→ 8192 lines
2.6.5.22
ANLR panel
FFT Size
→ 256
→ 512
→ 1024
→ 2048
→ 4096
→ 8192
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.141 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency: WINDow HANNing
RECTangular
BLACkman_harris
RIF1
RIF2
RIF3
HAMMing
FLATtop
KAISer
→ Fast and frequency-accurate
→ Selective, wide bell
→ Steep bell slopes
→ Excellent far-off band attenuation
→ Excellent far-off band attenuation
→ Excellent far-off band attenuation
→ For reason of completeness
→ Amplitude can be read off the graphics display
→ Characteristics determinable by ß factor (subsequent command)
2.6.5.22
ANLR panel
Window
→ HANN
→ RECTANG...
→ BLACKMAN H
→ RIFE VINC 1
→ RIFE VINC 2
→ RIFE VINC 3
→ HAMMING
→ FLAT TOP
→ KAISER
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:WINDow:BETAfact
or <n>
1 to 20
ß-factor for KAISer window 2.6.5.22
ANLR panel
ß factor
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency: AVERage <n>
2 to 2048
Number of averaging procedures to increase the accuracy of the coherence
measurement 2.6.5.22
ANLR panel
Average
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.142 E-10
3.10.2.5.16 Loudspeaker Measurements (RUB & BUZZ)
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion ’RUBBuzz’Loudspeaker measurements only with built-in option UPL-B6
Rub&Buzz measurement is available if
• Option UPL-B6.
• Option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) fitted and Base Rate Mode
(CONF:DAI BRM)
• Analog instrumente 22 kHz (INST2 A22) both channels,
• Analog instrument 110 kHz (INST2 A100) channel 1 (INP:SEL CH1)
No Rub&Buzz measurement available if
• im DIGITAL-Instrument
• Option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) in High Rate Mode (CONF:DAI
HRM.
2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ RUB & BUZZ
SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE
AFASt
AUTO
VALue
GENTrack
Measurement time of RUB & BUZZ measurement for adapting the
measurement speed to the signal frequency.
→ Automatic matching of measurement time to signal frequency taking into
account the
→ signal period.
→ Numerical entry of desired measurement time.
→ Measurement taking up (at least) one whole generator signal period. If
required, the generator frequency can be adapted to the analyzer sample
rate. To increase the measurement time in the case of high frequencies,
the measurement time is exceeded to several periods. This mode
guarantees maximum accuracy at a minimum measurement time and
should be given preference.
2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
Meas Time
→ AUTO FAST
→ AUTO
→ VALUE:
→ GEN TRACK
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]V | DBV | DBU | ... |
DBR Unit for result display of RUB & BUZZ measurement 2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1/CH2
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.143 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence:MODE VALue
CH1Store
CH2Store
CH1Meas
CH2Meas
STORe
→ Reference value to be entered with the following command
→ With two-channel measurements the current measurement result of
channel 1 is stored as reference value.
→ With two-channel measurements the current measurement result of
channel 2 is stored as reference value.
→ Value measured in channel 1 is used as a reference for result display with
relative units
→ Value measured in channel 2 is used as a reference for result display with
relative units.
→ With single-channel measurements the current result is stored as
reference value.
2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
Reference
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence <nu>
Analog instrument
100 pV to 1000 V
Numerical entry of reference value with command SENS:REF:MODE VAL 2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
Reference
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:MODE
FIXed | CW
GENTrack
Determination of highpass filter type
→ A fixed highpass filter is used; the numeric value of the passband
frequency is entered with the subsequent command SENS:FREQ <nu>.
→ Generator tracking:
A tracking highpass filter is used which should preferably be tuned to
about the 5th harmonic of the generator frequency. The multiple by which
the passband frequency should be higher than the generator frequency
can be entered with the subsequent command SENS:FREQ:FACT <n>.
Frequency limits, within which tracking of the filter frequency should be
performed, can be selected with commands
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:LIMit:LOWer
and SENSe[1]:FREQuency:LIMit:UPPer.
When a limit is reached (FrqLim Low or Upp) the filter frequency is held
at this frequency.
Thus a tracking highpass filter can be created which becomes a fixed-
frequency highpass filter below FrqLim Low and/or above FrqLim Upp.
If tracking should be performed over the entire frequency range, the
frequency limits should be set to the minimum and maximum value.
2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
FREQ MODE
→ FIX
→ GEN TRACK
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.144 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FREQuency[:FIXed|CW] <nu>
Value range depends
on instrument
Entry of numeric passband frequency for the setting SENS:FREQ:MODE FIX 2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
FREQ MODE
→ FIX
SENSe:FREQuency:FACTor <nu> MLT
2 to 20
Factor by which the passband frequency of the tracking bandpass or
highpass filter should be higher than the generator frequency when
GENTRACK (SENS:FREQ:MODE GENT) is set.
2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
FREQ MODE
→ Factor
SENSe:SWEep:SYNC
NORMal
FAST
BLOCk
Permits the speed for 1-dimensional sweeps with the universal generator to
be increased:
→ Normal sweep speed to be used with any kind of sweeps.
→ Sweep speed increased as from 2nd sweep run.
→ Further increase of sweep speed as from 2nd sweep. Update of trace is
not online but performed (all in one) when the sweep is completed.
2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
Sweep Mode
→ NORMAL
→ FAST
→ BLOCK
SENSe[1]:FILTer2:.....
SENSe[1]:FILTer3:...
↑
The 2 is important!
Two digital filters (number 2! and 3!) can be selected in addition to the
standard highpass filter.
Use: Lowpass filter for band limiting (particularly in the ANLG 110 kHz
instrument), delay filter for extending the settling time, etc., Bandstop to filter
out spurious.
Note:
Like the standard highpass filter, the filter selected here is only active for
measurement channel 1.
2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
Filter
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:LIMit:LOWer <nu>
Value range:
ANLG 22 kHz:
10.0 Hz to 21.9 kHz
ANLG 110 kHz:
20.0 Hz to 120 kHz
Lower band limit for tracking the highpass filter frequency for command
SENS:FREQ:MODE GENT.
If the product of generator frequency and factor drops below the value
specified here, the passband frequency of the highpass filter is held at this
value.
2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
Frq Lim Low
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.145 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:LIMit:UPPer <nu>
Value range:
ANLG 22 kHz:
FrqLim Low to
21.9 kHz
ANLG 110 kHz:
FrqLim Low to
120 kHz
Upper band limit for tracking the highpass filter frequency for command
SENS:FREQ:MODE GENT.
If the product of generator frequency and factor exceeds the value specified
here, the passband frequency of the highpass filter is held at this value.
2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
Frq Lim Upp
SYSTem:SPEaker ... In the 22 kHz analyzer, the (residual) Rub & Buzz signal in channel 1 and the
unfiltered signal in channel 2 can be monitored. This is done by selecting
SYST:SPE:SOUR FNC1 | FNC2 provided the selected channel is also active
as a measurement channel.
2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
SPEAKER
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.146 E-10
3.10.2.5.17 Input Level of Digital Signal (DIG INP AMP)
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe2:FUNCtion ’DIGInpampl’→ Measurement of digital input amplitude, see 3.10.2.5.20
Available only in Meas Mode COMMON/INP ("SENS:DIG:FEED CINP")
2.6.5.16
ANLR-Panel
INPUT DISP
→ DIG INP AMPL
SENSe2:UNIT[] V | DBV | DBU | DBM
W | DPCTV | DV |
VVR
PCTVVR | DPCTW
DW | PPR | PCTPPR
DBR
Unit for result display of digital input amplitude. 2.6.5.16
ANLR-Panel
Unit
SENSe2[:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence:MODE
VALue
STORe
DIGoutampl
Reference value for result display in relative units
provided a referenced unit is selected.
→ Reference value specified with the following command.
→ The current measurement result is stored as reference value.
→ The currently valid and each newly set generator voltage is stored as
reference value.
2.6.5.16
ANLR-Panel
Reference
→ VALIE:
→ STORE
→ DIG OUT AMP
SENSe2[:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence <nu>
100 pV to1000 V
V Numerical entry of reference value. 2.6.5.16
ANLR-Panel
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.147 E-10
3.10.2.5.18 Phase Measurement (PHAS TO REF)
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe2:FUNCtion ’PHASetoref’→ Measurement of phase between digital input and reference input
see 3.10.2.5.20
Nur verfügbar im Meas Mode JITTER/PHAS (SENS:DIG:FEED JPH"
2.6.5.17
ANLR-Panel
INPUT DISP
→ PHAS TO REF
SENSe2:UNIT[] UI | PCTFRM |
DEGFRM
NS
Unit for result display of phase. 2.6.5.17
ANLR-Panel
Unit
3.10.2.5.19 PROTOCOL
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion "PROTocol" Protocol data of the digital AES/EBU interface are displayed in the graphics
window. 2.6.5
ANLR panel
Function
→ PROTOCOL
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.148 E-10
3.10.2.5.20 INPUT DISP
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe2:FUNCtion "OFF"
"PEAKvoltage"
"RMS"
"PHASetoref"
"DIGInpampl"
→ Input peak measurement off
→ Display of input peak value for all analyzers in all
measurement modes
In the digital analyzer the input signal is sampled with the
user-determined sample rate (see 2.6.3).
In the analog analyzer the input signal is sampled with the
following clock rates after input level control:
ANLG 22 kHz with 48 kHz, ANLG 110 kHz with 307.2 kHz
The input peak measurement mainly serves for level control
and shows peak values of the AC-coupled input signal in front
of the filters.
→ Input RMS measurement for the
analog analyzers INST2 A22 | A100, and the
digital analyzers INST D48 in the measurement mode
SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT for measurement functions
SENS:FUNC ’THD’|’THDNsndr’|’MDISt’|’DFD’|’FFT’
The input RMS measurement can be displayed in the form of a
sweep curve if DISP:TRAC:FEED ’SENS2:DATA’ is set in the
DISPLAY panel
→ Display of frame phase of the signal with jitter between AUDIO and
REF input. This measurement can be carried out simultaneously with any
measurement function available for the JITTER signal:
SENS:FUNC ’RMS’|’RMSS’|’PEAK’|’FFT’|’WAV’|’PROT’
→ Display of digital input amplitude at the selected
digital input (XLR or BNC). Only with
jitter option (UPL-B22) in the measurement mode COMMON/INP.
(INST2 D48 mit SENS:DIG:FEED JPH)
This measurement can be carried out simultaneously with any
measurement function available for the COMMON signal:
SENS:FUNC ’RMS’|’RMSS’|’PEAK’|’FFT’|’WAV’
2.6.5.18
ANLR panel
INPUT DISP
→ OFF
→ PEAK
→ RMS
→ PHAS to REF
→ DIG INP AMP
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]see 3.10.4 Units for
IEC Measurement
Results
Display units for RMS measurement 2.4
Unit Ch1/CH2
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.149 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe2[:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence:MODE CH1Store
CH2Store
STORe
CH1Meas
CH2Meas
GENTrack
DIGoutampl
VALue
→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 1 is stored as a reference.
→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 2 is stored as a reference.
→ The value measured of channel 1 is used as a reference for the results in
reference-related units.
→ The value measured of channel 2 is used as a reference for the results in
reference-related units.
→ For a single-channel measurement, the current measurement result is
stored as a reference.
→ The currently set generator output level is used as a reference.
→ The measured value is referenced to the level of the digital signal
set in the digital generator (see 2.6.5.18 INPUT) that is to
- "Unbal Vpp", with the UNBAL input selected, and to
- "Bal Vpp", with the BAL input selected.
Permissible only in the Meas Mode COMMON/INP (SENS:DIG:FEED
CINP)
with display of digital input amplitude INPUT DISP = DIG INP
AMP (SENS2:FUNC ’DIGI’)
if GENERATOR INSTRUMENT = DIGITAL is set.
→ The reference value is entered using the next command.
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE CH2
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ STORE
→ GEN TRACK
→ DIG OUT AMP
→ VALUE:
SENSe2[:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence <nu>
Analog instrument
1µV to 1000V
Digital instrument
0.0 to 1.0 FS
V
FS
Numerical entry of reference value. 2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.150 E-10
3.10.2.5.21 Frequency Measurement
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe3:FUNCtion "OFF"
"FREQuency" → Frequency measurement off
→ Frequency measurement on
The availability of the frequency measurement depends on measurement
function and option UPL-B29 (digital audio 96 kHz), see 2.6.1 Selecting the
Analyzer
2.6.5.19
ANLR panel
FREQ/PHAS
→ OFF
→ FREQ
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:APERture:MODE
FAST
PRECision
Definition of measurement time and precision of the frequency measurement
for the measurement functions OFF and RMS. Does not influence the other
measurement functions.
→ The frequency measurementis set to attain optimum speed
→ The frequency measurement is set to attain optimum precision
2.6.5.19
ANLR-Panel
Meas Time
→ FAST
→ PRECISION
SENSe3:FREQuency:UNIT[1|2]HZ|DHZ|DPCTHZ|
TOCT|OCT|DEC|
F|FR
Display units for results of frequency measurement. 2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1/Ch2
SENSe3:FREQuency:REFerence:MODE CH1Store
CH2Store
CH1Meas
CH2Meas
STORe
GENTrack
VALue
→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 1 is stored as a reference.
→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 2 is stored as a reference.
→ The value measured of channel 1 is used as a reference for the results in
reference-related units.
→ The value measured of channel 2 is used as a reference for the results in
reference-related units.
→ For a single-channel measurement, the current measurement result is
stored as a reference.
→ The currently set generator output level is used as a reference.
→ The reference unit is specified by the next command.
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Ref Freq
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE CH2
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ STORE
→ GEN TRACK
→ VALUE:
SENSe3:FREQuency:REFerence <nu>
- 1 MHz to 1 MHz
Hz Numerical entry of reference value. 2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Ref Freq
SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:..... For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions
Frequency settling not selectable for
SENSe:DIGital:FEED PHASe|CINPut
2.3.4.2
ANLR panel
Freq Settl
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.151 E-10
3.10.2.5.22 Combined Frequency, Phase and Group-Delay Measurement
Combined Frequency and Phase Measurement
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe3:FUNCtion "OFF"
"FQPHase" → Combined frequency and phase measurement off.
→ Combined frequency and phase measurement on.
The availability of the frequency and phase measurement depends on
measurement function and option UPL-B29 (digital audio 96 kHz), see 2.6.1
Selecting the Analyzer
2.6.5.19
ANLR panel
FREQ/PHASE
→ OFF
→ FREQ&PHASE
SENSe3:FREQuency:UNIT[1] HZ|DHZ|DPCTHZ|
TOCT|OCT|DEC|
FFR
Display units for results of frequency measurement. 2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1
SENSe3:PHASe:UNIT2 DEG|RAD|DDEG|
DRAD|Display units for results of phase measurement. 2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch2
SENSe3:FREQuency:REFerence:MODE STORe
GENTrack
VALue
→ The current frequency measurement result is stored as reference value.
→ The currently set generator frequency is used as a reference.
→ The reference value is entered using the next command.
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Ref Freq
→ STORE
→ VALUE:
→ GEN TRACK
SENSe3:FREQuency:REFerence <nu>
- 1 MHz to 1 MHz
Hz Numerical entry of reference value. 2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.152 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe3:PHASe:FORMat POSitive
POSNegative
NEGative
RAD
RADBipolar
RADNegative
Display format for phase measurement
→ 0 to 360°
→ - 180° to -180°
→ - 360° to 0 °
→ 0 to 2 π
→ - π to + π
→ -2 π to 0
2.6.5.19
ANLR panel
Format Pha
→ 0 .. 360°
→ -180° .. 180°
→ - 360° .. 0°
→ 0 .. 2 π
→ - π .. + π
→ -2 π .. 0
SENSe3:PHASe:REFerence:MODE STORe
VALue → The current phase measurement result is stored as reference value.
→ The reference value is entered using the next command.
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference
→ STORE
→ VALUE:
SENSe3:PHASe:REFerence <nu>
-360° to +360°
DEG Numerical entry of reference value . 2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference
SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:..... For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions
2.3.4.2
ANLR panel
Freq Settl
SENSe3:PHASe:SETTling:..... For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions
2.3.4.2
ANLR panel
Phas Settl
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.153 E-10
Combined Frequency and Group-Delay Measurement
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe3:FUNCtion "OFF"
"FQGRoupdelay" → Combined frequency and group-delay measurement off
→ Combined frequency and group-delay measurement on. With RSM
measurements, POST-FFT is automatically switched on as the frequency
information is obtained from FFT.
The availability of the frequency and group-delay measurement depends on
measurement function and option UPL-B29 (digital audio 96 kHz), see 2.6.1
Selecting the Analyzer
2.6.5.19
ANLR panel
FREQ/PHASE
→ FREQ&GRPDEL
SENSe3:FREQuency:UNIT[1] HZ|DHZ|DPCTHZ|
TOCT|OCT|DEC|
FFR
Display units for results of frequency measurement 2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1
SENSe3:PHASe:UNIT2 S
DS
DEG
RAD
Display units for results of group-delay measurement
Note:
In addition to group delay (in s), phases outside the range
±
360
°
can be
measured in DEG or RAD when the frequency sweep mode has been
selected.
2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch2
SENSe3:FREQuency:REFerence:MODE STORe
VALue
GENTrack
→ The current frequency measurement result is stored as reference value.
→ The reference value is entered using the next command.
→ The currently set generator frequency is used as a reference value.
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Ref Freq
→ STORE
→ VALUE:
→ GEN TRACK
SENSe3:FREQuency:REFerence <nu>
-1 MHz to 1 MHz
Hz Numerical entry of reference value. 2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Ref Freq
SENSe3:PHASe:REFerence:MODE STORe
VALue → The current phase measurement result is stored as reference value.
→ The reference value is entered using the next command.
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Ref Phase
→ STORe
→ VALUE:
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.154 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe3:PHASe:REFerence <nu>
-360 s to +360 s
s Numerical entry of reference value 2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Ref Phase
SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:..... For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions
2.3.4.2
ANLR panel
Freq Settl
3.10.2.5.23 Sample Rate Measurement
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe3:FUNCtion ’OFF’
’SFREquency’→ Off
→ The measured sampling frequency is displayed on the channels switched
on
Available only for instrument D48
2.6.5.21
ANLR-Panel
FREQUENCY
→ SAMPLE FREQ
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:APERture:MODE
FAST
PRECision
Definition of measurement time and precision of the frequency measurement
for the measurement functions OFF and RMS. Does not influence the other
measurement functions.
→ The frequency measurementis set to attain optimum speed
→ The frequency measurement is set to attain optimum precision
2.6.5.19
ANLR-Panel
Meas Time
→ FAST
→ PRECISION
SENSe3:FREQuency:UNIT[1] HZ | DHZ | DPCTHZ |
TOCT
|
OCT
|
DEC
|
FFR
Selection of the result units for channel 1 2.4
ANLR-Panel
Unit Ch1
SENSe3:FREQuency:UNIT2 HZ | DHZ | DPCTHZ |
TOCT
|
OCT
|
DEC
|
FFR
Selection of the result units for channel 2. 2.4
ANLR-Panel
Unit Ch2
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.155 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe3:FREQuency:REFerence:MODE CH1Store
CH2Store
CH1Meas
CH2Mea
STORe
GENTrack
VALue
→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 1 is stored as a reference.
→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 2 is stored as a reference.
→ The value measured of channel 1 is used as a reference for the results in
reference-related units.
→ The value measured of channel 2 is used as a reference for the results in
reference-related units.
→ For a single-channel measurement, the current measurement result is
stored as a reference.
→ The currently set generator output level is used as a reference.
→ The reference unit is specified by the next command.
2.6.5.19
ANLR-Panel
Ref Freq
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE CH2
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ STORE
→ GEN TRACK
→ VALUE:
SENSe3:FREQuency:REFerence <nu>
-1 MHz to 1 MHz
Hz Numerical entry of reference value. 2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Ref Freq
SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:... For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions
2.3.4.2
ANLR-Panel
Freq Settl
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.156 E-10
3.10.2.5.24 Terzanalyse
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FUNCion ’THIRdoct’The analysis is performed according to standard IEC 1260 of 1995 with level
accuracy of class 0 (± 1,0 dB).
Third Analysis measurement is available if
• Option UPL-B6 (Extended Analysis Functions) or with hardware upgrade
UPL-U8 or in modell UPL 06G.
• Analog instrumente 22 kHz (INST2 A22) both channels
• Digital instrument with option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) in Base Rate
Mode (CONF:DAI BRM)
No Third Analysis measurement available if
• Analyzer 110 kHz
• Digital instrument with option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) in High Rate
Mode (CONF:DAI HRM.
For a detailed example see 3.15.19 Readout of Blockdata of Third Octave
Measurement
2.6.5.24
ANLR-Panel
Function
→ 1/3 OCTAVE
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:MCOunt
T30
T32
Defines the number of thirds which can be measured and displayed
→Maximum 30 thirds can be calculated and displayed.
The lowest third which can be measured has a rated center frequency of
25 Hz.
→ 2 additional low-frequency thirds, i.e., maximum 32 thirds, can be
calculated and displayed. The lowest third which can be measured has a
nominal center frequency of 16 Hz.
2.6.5.24
ANLR-Panel
Line Count
→ 30
→ 32
SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE VALue
Measurement Time of third analysis
→ The only parameter determining the measurement speed is the
measurement time, which is entered with the next command. The
measurement time also determines the update rate of the third analysis.
2.6.5.24
ANLR-Panel
Meas Time
→ VALUE:
SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture <nu>
64 ms to 43200s
s Numerical entry of measurement time of the third analysis. 2.6.5.24
ANLR-Panel
Meas Time
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.157 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe:VOLTage:INTV:MODE
OFF
FORever
SMOoth
EDGE
Hold function for the maximum result of each third.
Reset by "INIT:CONT ON"
→ Max-hold function switched off; only the third bars are displayed.
→ Max-hold function switched on; the markers lie on the maximum values;
reset only by starting the measurement with "INIT:CONT ON".
→ Max-hold function switched on; the markers lie on the maximum values for
the "hold time" to be set with the following command
(SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime <n>) and then decay exponentially
(time constant 0.5 s).
→ Max-hold function switched on; the markers remain on the maximum
values for the "hold time" to be set with the following command
(SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime <n>) and then go back to the current
measurement value for the third.
2.6.5.24
ANLR-Panel
Max Hold
→ OFF
→ FOREVER
→ SLOW DECAY
→ FAST DECAY
SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime <nu>
20 ms to 100 s
s Setting of the time for which the maximum value of a third is held before the
marker returns to the measured value. The selected hold time does not
influence the decay time.
Only for
Max Hold = SLOW DECAY (SENSe:VOLTage:INTV:MODE SMOoth) und
Max Hold = FAST DECAY (SENSe:VOLTage:INTV:MODE EDGE)
2.6.5.24
ANLR-Panel
Holdtime
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]Analog units:
V | DBV | DBU |
DBM | W | DPCTV |
DV | VVR | PCTVVR |
DPCTW |DW | PPR |
PCTPPR |DBR
Digital units:
FS | PCTFS | DBFS |
DPCT | DBR | LSBS |
BITS
Units for the third analysis measurement results 2.4
ANLR-Panel
Unit Ch1/Ch2
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.158 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence:MODE CH1Store
CH2Store
CH1Meas
CH2Meas
STORe
VALue
→ Dual-channel measurement: Store the current measurement result of
channel 1 as reference value.
→ Dual-channel measurement: Store the current measurement result of
channel 2 as reference value.
→ Dual-channel measurement: Each result of level measurement in
channel 1 is used as reference value for result output in reference-related
units (floating reference value).
→ Dual-channel measurement: Each result of level measurement in
channel 2 is used as reference value for result output in reference-related
units (floating reference value).
→ With single-channel measurement: Store the current result as reference
value
→ Reference value is displayed upon using the following command
2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Reference
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE CH2
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ VALUE:
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence <nu>
Analog instruments
100 pV to 1000 V
Digital instrument
0.0 to 1.0 FS
V
FS
Numeric entry of reference value. 2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Reference
SENSe[1]:FILTer[1] ... See 3.10.3 Selecting the Analyzer Filters
Only available with option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) in Base Rate Mode
(CONF:DAI BRM).
In the high rate mode (CONF:DAI HRM), the measurement functions
THIRdoct can be operated without filter.
2.7.1
ANLR-Panel
Filter
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.159 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:LIMit:LOWer
<nu>
ANLG 22 kHz,
32 lines:
14.1 Hz to 21938 Hz
30 lines
22.6 Hz to 21938 Hz
DIG 48 kHz,
32 lines:
14.1Hz to fmax
30 lines
22.6 Hz to 21938 Hz
fmax depending on
the sampling rate but
not exceeding 22449
Hz
Hz Lower band limit for third analysis. 2.6.5.24
ANLR-Panel
→ Frq Lim Low
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:LIMit:UPPer <nu>
ANLG 22 kHz:
FrqLim Low to 21938
Hz
DIGITAL:
FrqLim Low to fmax
fmax depending on
the sampling rate but
not exceeding
22449 Hz
Hz Upper band limit for third analysis. 2.6.5.24
ANLR-Panel
→ Frq Lim Upp
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.160 E-10
3.10.2.5.25 12th Octave Analysis (12th OCTAVE)
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion ’TWELvthoct’The 12th octave analysis is a level measurement by means of a special
zoom FFT in up to 125 frequency bands simultaneously.
The 12th octave analysis is available
• with UPL-B6 option installed (Extended Analysis Functions)
• in the analog instrument 22 kHz (INST2 A22),
• in the digital instrument with UPL-B29 option installed
(Digital Audio 96 kHz) in base rate mode, only (CONF:DAI BRM)
The 12th octave analysis is not available
• in the 110-kHz analyzer
• in the digital instrument, with UPL-B29 option installed
(Digital Audio 96 kHz) in high rate mode (CONF:DAI HRM).
2.6.5.25
ANLR-Panel
Function
→ 12th OCTAVE
SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE VALue → Numeric entry of the measurement time of the 12th octave analysis
The measurement time defines the update rate of the 12th octave
analysis
For entry of values see next command..
2.6.5.25
ANLR-Panel
Meas Time
→ VALUE:
SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture <nu>
tmessFFT ... 43200 s
tmessFFT =
Measurement time
for a zoom FFT
depending on the
lower frequency limit
s Numeric entry of the measurement time of the 12th octave analysis 2.6.5.25
ANLR-Panel
Meas Time
SENSe:VOLTage:INTV:MODE
OFF
ON
Hold function for the maximum values of the individual thirds.
axhold function switched off, the bars of the frequency bands
are displayed, only.
→ Maxhold function switched on, the markers lie on the highest values;
reset via "INIT:CONT ON".
2.6.5.25
ANLR-Panel
Max Hold
→ OFF
→ ON
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.161 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]Analog units:
V | DBV | DBU |
DBM | W | DPCTV |
DV | VVR | PCTVVR |
DPCTW |DW | PPR |
PCTPPR |DBR
Digital units:
FS | PCTFS | DBFS |
DPCT | DBR | LSBS |
BITS
Result display units of the 12th octave analysis. 2.4
ANLR-Panel
Unit Ch1/Ch2
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence:MODE CH1Store
CH2Store
CH1Meas
CH2Meas
STORe
VALue
→ Dual-channel measurement: Store the current measurement result of
channel 1 as reference value.
→ Dual-channel measurement: Store the current measurement result of
channel 2 as reference value.
→ Dual-channel measurement: Each result of level measurement in
channel 1 is used as reference value for result output in reference-related
units (floating reference value).
→ Dual-channel measurement: Each result of level measurement in
channel 2 is used as reference value for result output in reference-related
units (floating reference value).
→ Single-channel measurement: Store the current result as reference value
→ Reference value is displayed upon using the following command
2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Reference
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE CH2
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ STORE
→ VALUE:
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence <nu>
Analog instruments
100 pV to 1000 V
Digital instrument
0.0 to 1.0 FS
V
FS
Numeric entry of reference value. 2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Reference
SENSe[1]:FILTer[1] ... See 3.10.3
Available only with option UPL-B29 installed (Digital Audio 96 kHz) in base
rate mode (CONF:DAI BRM).
In the high rate mode (CONF:DAI HRM), the 12th octave function can be
operated without filter, only.
2.7.1
ANLR-Panel
Filter
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.162 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:LIMit:LOWer
<nu>
ANLG 22 kHz:
15.4 Hz to 20586 Hz
DIG 48 kHz:
15.4 Hz to fmax
fmax depending on
the sampling rate but
not exceeding
20586 Hz
Hz Lower band limit for the 12th octave analysis. 2.6.5.25
ANLR-Panel
→ Frq Lim Low
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:LIMit:UPPer <nu>
ANLG 22 kHz:
FrqLim Low to
20586 Hz
DIGITAL:
FrqLim Low to fmax
fmax depending on
the sampling rate but
not exceeding
20586 Hz
Hz Upper band limit for the 12th octave analysis. 2.6.5.25
ANLR-Panel
→ Frq Lim Upp
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.163 E-10
3.10.3 Selection of Analyzer Filter
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i> <i>*) = 1 to 3
OFF
Query returns name
of the filter switched
on:
UFIL1
:
UFIL9
AWE
CMES
CCIT
CCIR
CCIU
DEMP5015
DEMP50
DEMP75
DEMP17
WRUM
URUM
DCN
CARM
IECT
JITT
Switches off the filter in the analyzer measurement functions.
Measurement Number of
functions possible filters
------------------------------------------------
RMS 3
RMS SELECT 1
PEAK 3 (*)
QPK 1 (*)
THD+N 1
FFT 3 (*)
FILTER SIM 3
WAVEFORM 1 (*)
RUB&BUZZ 2
THIRD OCT 1 (*)
UPL-B29: For the functions marked (*), no digital filter can be switched on in
the high rate mode or analyzer ANLG 110 kHz.
2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i> <i>*)
1 to 3
OFF
Switches off the filter in the analyzer measurement functions RMS, PEAK,
QPE or THDN.
2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:UFILter1... UFILter9[:STATe] <i>*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF
A HPASs, LPASs, BPASs, BSTOp, NOTCh, TERZ, OCTav or FILE filter with
freely selectable parameters (see SENSe:FILTer<n>:HPASs|:LPASs ... and
subsequent commands) can be assigned to each of the 9 user filters
(UFILter).
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.
2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.164 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:CCITt[:STATe] <i>*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF
For psophometric measurements
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.
2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ CCITT
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:CCIUnweight[:STATe] <i>*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF
Bandpass filter 20 Hz to 20 kHz
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.
2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ CCIR unwtd
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:CCIRweight[:STATe] <i>*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF
For RFI voltage measurements
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.
2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ CCIR wtd
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:AWEighting[:STATe] <i>*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF
For RFI voltage measurements
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.
2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ A Weighting
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:CMESsage[:STATe] <i>*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF
For transmission measurements
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.
2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ C MESSAGE
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:DEMPhasis50[:STATe] <i>*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF
For unweighted and weighted noise measurements
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.
2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ DEEMPH 50
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:DEMPhasis75[:STATe] <i>*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF
For unweighted and weighted noise measurements
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.
2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ DEEMPH 75
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.165 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:DEMPhasis17[:STATe] <i>*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF
For unweighted and weighted noise measurements
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.
2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ DEEMPH J.17
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:DEMPhasis5015[:STATe] <i>*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF
For unweighted and weighted noise measurements
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.
2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ DEEM 50/15
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:WRUMble[:STATe] <i>*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF
Weighted noise measurement for testing tape recorders
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.
2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ RUMBLE wtd
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:URUMble[:STATe] <i>*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF
Unweighted noise measurement for testing tape recorders
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.
2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ RUMBLE unw
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:DCNoise[:STATe] <i>*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF
Highpass filter for measuring the DC noise
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.
2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ DC NOISE HP
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:CARM[:STATe] <i>*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF
Filter for weighted noise measurements in line with older regulations.
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.
2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ CCIR ARM
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:JITTer[:STATe] <i>*) = 1 to 4
ON | OFF Weighting of jitter transmission function 2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ JITTER wtd
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.166 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:IECTuner[:STATe] <i>*)
1 to 4
ON|OFF
Filter for tuner measurements to DIN/IEC 315 2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ IEC Tuner
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:HPASs[:STATe] <i>
1 to 9
ON
Highpass
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.
2.7.2
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:LPASs[:STATe] <i>
1 to 9
ON
Lowpass
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.
2.7.2
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:BPASs[:STATe] <i>
1 to 9
ON
Bandpass
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.
2.7.2
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:BSTOp[:STATe] <i>
= 1 to 9
ON
Bandpass
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.
2.7.2
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:NOTCh[:STATe] <i>
1 to 9
ON
Notch filter
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.
2.7.2
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
*) <i> stands for the filter of analyzer measurement functions RMS, PEAK, QPE and THDN, which has been assigned the specified filter function.
Example:
" SENS: FUNC ’ RMS ’ "
" SENS: FILT1:DEMP5015 ON"
" SENS: FILT3:CCIT ON"
causes the following setting in the ANALYZER panel in the RMS & S/N measurement function
:
• Notch (Gain) OFF
• Filter DEEM 50/15 i = 1
• Filter OFF i = 2
• Filter CCITT i = 3
• Func Settl OFF
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.167 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:TOCTave[:STATe] <i>
1 to 9
ON
Third-octave filter (Third Octave)
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.
2.7.2
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:OCTav[:STATe] <i>
1 to 9
ON
Octave filter
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.
2.7.2
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:FILE[:STATe] <i>
1 to 9
ON
User-defined filter
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.
2.7.2
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
SENSe:UFILter[1...9]:DEGRee N4
N8
Selection of order for highpass and lowpass filters
→ Order 4
→ Order 8
2.7.2
FILTER panel
Degree
→ 4
→ 8
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:PASSb<i> = 1 to 9
<nu> = LL*)
For MB limit see 2.6.1
Selecting the
Analyzer
Hz
Passband of HPASs and LPASs 2.7.2.2
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
→ Passband
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:STOPb?<i>
1 to 9
Query only
Queries the stopband of HPASs and LPASs 2.7.2.2
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
→ Stopband
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:PASSb:LOWer <i> = 1 to 9
<nu> = LL*)
For MB limit see
2.6.5.1 Common
Parameters of
Analyzer Functions
Hz
Lower passband of BPASs and BSTOp 2.7.2.3
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
→ Passb low
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.168 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:PASSb:UPPer <i> = 1 to 9
<nu> = LL*)
For MB limit see 2.6.1
Selecting the
Analyzer
Hz
Upper passband of BPASs and BSTOp 2.7.2.3
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
→ Passb upp
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:STOPb:LOWer?<i>
1 to 9
Query only
Queries the lower stopband of BPASs and BSTOp 2.7.2.3
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
→ Stopb low
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:STOPb:UPPer?<i>
1 to 9
Query only
Queries the upper stopband of BPASs and BSTOp 2.7.2.3
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
→ Stopb upp
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:CENTer <i> = 1 to 9
<nu> = LL*)
For MB limit see
2.6.1 Selecting the
Analyzer
Hz
Center frequency of NOTCh, TOCT OCTAv 2.7.2.4
2.7.2.5
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
→ Center Frq
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:WIDTh<i> = 1 to 9
<nu> = LL*)
For MB limit see 2.6.1
Selecting the
Analyzer
Hz
Center frequency of NOTCh, TOCT OCTAv 2.7.2.4 and
2.7.2.5
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
→ Width
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:ATTenuation <i>
1 to 9
<nu>
3 to 120 dB
dB
Attenuation of all filters except FILE Def. The value may be corrected in the
UPL and queried.
2.7.2.1
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
→ Atten
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:DELay Query only for all
filters except for file-
defined filters
<i> = 1 to 9
<nu> = 0 to 1 s
s
Settling time of FILE-defined filters 2.7.2.7
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
→ Delay
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.169 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:DELay?<i>
1 to 9
Query only
Queries the settling time of filters HPASs, LPASs, BPASs, BSTOp, NOTCh,
TOCT OCTav
2.7.2.1
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
→ Delay
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:FILE "filename"
<i>
1 to 9
Path and file name of file-defined filter data
e.g. "C:\UPL\USER\MYFILT.ZPZ"
2.7.2.7
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
→ Filename
*) LL = Lower limit value for instruments 22: 24 Hz
A110: 171 Hz
D48: Sample Freq*Oversamp/2000 (see 2.6.3 Configuration of the Digital Analyzer)
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.170 E-10
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.171 E-10
3.10.4 Units for IEC/IEEE Measurement Results
Command Parameter Meaning Section
SENSe[1|2][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]V
MV (only for SENS[1]...)
UV (only for SENS[1]...)
DBV
DBU
W
DBM
DV
DPCTV
VVR
PCTVVR
DW
DPCTW
PPR
PCTPPR
DBR
DB (only for SENS[1]...)
PCT (only for SENS[1]...)
FS
LSBS
DBFS
BITS
DPCT
PCTFS
UI
NS
V
mV
µV
dBV Absolute units for analog level measurement results
dBu
W
dBm
∆V
∆%V
V/VR
%V/Vr Relative units for analog level measurement results
∆W
∆%W
P/Pr
%P/Pr
dBr
dB Relative units for intermodulation measurements and W&F
%
FS
LSBs Absolute units for digital phase measurements
dBFS
bits
∆%
%FS Relative units for digital level measurements
UI Absolute units for digital jitter and phase measurements
ns
2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1/Ch2
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.172 E-10
Command Parameter Meaning Section
SENSe[1|2][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]PPMUI
DBUI
UIR
PCTUI
PCTFRM (only for
SENS2..)
DEGFRM (only for
SENS2..)
ppm Absolute units for digital jitter measurements
DBUI
Uir Relative units for digital jitter measurements
%UI
%FRM Absolute units for digital phase measurement results
FRM
2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1/Ch2
SENSe3:FREQuency:UNIT[1|2]HZ
DHZ
DPCTHZ
TERZ
OCT
DEC
FFR
Absolute and relative units for frequency readout
Hz
∆Hz
∆%Hz
Terz
Oct
Dec
f/fr
2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1/Ch2
SENSe3:PHASe:UNIT DEG
RAD
DDEG
DRAD
S
DS
Absolute and relative units for phase readout
°In addition to group delay (in s), phases outside the range ±360°
RAD can be measured in DEG or RAD
∆°
∆RAD
s (for group delay)
∆s (for group delay)
2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1/Ch2
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.173 E-10
Display units selectable for measurement results:
Example:
Display units selectable for measurement results
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]:
Instrument Measurement function Selectable display units
"INST2 A22 | A110"
"INST2 A22 | A110"
"INST2 A22"
"INST2 A22"
"INST2 A22 | A110"
"INST2 A22 | A110"
"INST2 A22 | A110"
"INST2 A22 | A110"
"SENS:FUNC ’RMS’ |
’RMSS’ |
’PEAK’ |
’QPE’ |
’DC’ |
’FFT’ "
"SENS:FUNC ’THDN’" und
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD LNOI | NOIS "
"SENS:FUNC ’WAV’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD COMP"
"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
V | DBV | DBU | DBM |
W | DPCTV | DV | VVR |
PCTVVR | DPCTW | DW | PPR |
PCTPPR | DBR"
"INST2 A22 | A110"
"INST2 A22 | A110"
"SENS:FUNC ’THD’ | ’MDIS’ | ’DFD’ "
"SENS:FUNC ’THDN’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD THDN | NOIS"
"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
DB | PCT"
"INST2 A22" "SENS:FUNC ’WAF’" "SENS:UNIT[1|2]
PCT"
"INST2 A22 | A110" "SENS:FUNC ’WAV’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD STAN"
"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
V | MV | UV | DPCTV | DV | VVR
| PCTVVR"
"INST2 A22 | A110" "SENS:FUNC ’THDN’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD SNDR"
"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
DB"
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.174 E-10
Instrument Measurement function Selectable display units
"INST2 D48" and
"SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT"
"SENS:FUNC ’RMSS’ | ’PEAK’ | ’QPE’ "
"SENS:FUNC ’THDN’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD LNOI | NOIS "
"SENS:FUNC ’WAV’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD COMP"
"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
FS | PCTFS | DBFS | DPCT |
DBR | LSBS | BITS"
"SENS:FUNC ’THD’ | ’MDIS’ | ’DFD’ "
"SENS:FUNC ’THDN’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD THDN | NOIS
"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
DB | PCT"
"SENS:FUNC ’WAF’" "SENS:UNIT[1|2]
PCT"
"SENS:FUNC ’DC’"
"SENS:FUNC ’WAV’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD STAN"
"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
FS | PCTFS | DPCT | LSBS"
"SENS:FUNC ’THDN’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD SNDR"
"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
DB"
Instrument Measurement function Selectable display units
"INST2 D48" and
"SENS:DIG:FEED JPH"
"SENS:FUNC ’RMS’ | ’RMSS’ | ’PEAK’ | FFT"
"SENS:FUNC ’WAV’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD COMP"
"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
UI | PCTUI | PPMUI | NS | UIR |
DBR | DBUI"
"SENS:FUNC ’WAV’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD STAN"
"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
UI | PCTUI | PPMUI | NS | UIR"
"INST2 D48" and
"SENS:DIG:FEED CINP"
"SENS:FUNC ’RMS’ | ’RMSS’ | ’PEAK’ | FFT"
"SENS:FUNC ’WAV’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD COMP"
"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
V | DBV | DBU | DBM |
W | DPCTV | DV |
VVR | PCTVVR |
DPCTW | DW | PPR | PCTPPR |
DBR"
"SENS:FUNC ’WAV’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD STAN"
"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
V | MV | UV | DPCTV | DV | VVR
| PCTVVR"
UPL IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
1078.2008.02 3.175 E-10
Display units selectable for input, peak, RMS and phase measurements
SENSe2[:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]:
Instrument Measurement function Selectable display units
"INST2 A22 | A110" "SENS2:FUNC ’PEAK’ | ’RMS’" "SENS2:UNIT[1|2]
V | DBV | DBU | DBM |
W | DPCTV | DV |
VVR | PCTVVR |
DPCTW | DW | PPR | PCTPPR | DBR"
"INST2 D48" and
"SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT"
"SENS2:FUNC ’PEAK’" "SENS2:UNIT[1|2]
FS | PCTFS | DBFS |
DPCT | DBR | LSBS | BITS"
"INST2 D48" and
"SENS:DIG:FEED JPH"
"SENS2:FUNC ’PEAK’" "SENS2:UNIT[1|2]
UI | PCTUI | PPMUI | NS | UIR |
DBR | DBUI"
"INST2 D48" and
"SENS:DIG:FEED JPH"
"SENS2:FUNC ’PHAS’" "SENS2:UNIT
UI | PCTFRM | DEGFRM | NS"
"INST2 D48" and
"SENS:DIG:FEED CINP"
"SENS2:FUNC ’PEAK | ’DIGI’" "SENS2:UNIT[1|2]
V | DBV | DBU | DBM |
W | DPCTV | DV |
VVR | PCTVVR |
DPCTW | DW | PPR | PCTPPR | DBR"
Display units selectable for frequency, phase and group delay measurements
SENSe3:FREQuency:UNIT[1|2] and SENSe3:PHASe:UNIT2:
Instrument Measurement function Selectable display units
"INST2 A22 | A110 | D48" "SENS3:FUNC ’FREQ’" "SENS3:FREQ:UNIT[1|2]
HZ | DHZ | DPCTHZ | TOCT | OCT |
DEC | FFR"
"INST2 A22" "SENS3:FUNC ’FQPH’" "SENS3:FREQ:UNIT
HZ | DHZ | DPCTHZ | TOCT | OCT |
DEC | FFR"
"SENS3:PHAS:UNIT
DEG | RAD | DDEG | DRAD"
"INST2 A22" "SENS3:FUNC ’FQGR’" "SENS3:FREQ:UNIT
HZ | DHZ | DPCTHZ | TOCT | OCT | DEC |
FFR"
"SENS3:PHAS:UNIT
S | DS"
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.176 E-10
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.177 E-10
3.10.5 Loading and Storing
3.10.5.1 Loading and Storing Instrument Setups
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SYSTem:INFOtext:STATe ON
OFF
→ During scrolling in the file selection window of the file box the "Info text"
for a setup is displayed in the user info line
(of minor importance for IEC/IEEE-bus control).
→ "Info text" is not displayed.
2.9.1.1
FILE panel
Info Displ
→ ON
→ OFF
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 0 | 2 | 4, "filename"
Query:
MMEM:...
... LOAD:STAT? 0
... LOAD:STAT? 2
... LOAD:STAT? 4
0: Load current setup with filename extension .SAC
2: Load complete instrument setup with filename extension .SCO.
For loading the R&S default setup under C:UPL \ SETUP \ DEFAULT.SET
use command *RST. Switch off the parameter link (see 2.15.8 Transfer of
Parameters (Parameter Link Function)) to ensure that the default setup
described under annex "A UPL Default Setup" remains unchanged even
after an instrument or function change.
4: Display of (4 bit-) PCX pictures on 1:1 scale on the screen of UPL. It is thus
possible to view under program control PCX files stored in UPL (eg for
demos). As long as a PCX picture is displayed on the screen, UPL is not
ready to receive further IEC/IEEE-bus commands. The PCX picture
remains on display until the UPL is set to the LOCAL state with the
SYST:COMM:GTL command. Subsequently the UPL is ready to receive
IEC/IEEE-bus commands. To switch the UPL from LOCAL to REMOTE
again, see 3.3 Switchover to Remote Control
2.9.1.1
FILE panel
Mode / Filename
MMEMory:STORe:INFOtext ’string’A comment of max. 39 characters can be entered for a description of the
measurement, a DUT, etc. This comment is displayed in the file box when a
setup is loaded by scrolling through the file selection window and
SYST:INFO:STAT ON has been selected.
2.9.1.1
FILE panel
Info Text
MMEMory:STORe:STATe 0|2,"filename"
Query:
MMEM:STOR:STAT?
0
MMEM:STOR.STAT?
2
0: Store current setup under filename extension .SAC
2: Store complete instrument setup under filename extension .SCO.
2.9.1.1
FILE panel
Mode / Filename
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.178 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
MMEMory:STORe:STATe:RONLyON
OFF → File is write-protected
→ File is not write-protected
2.9.1.1
FILE panel
Attrib
→ REAN ONLY
→ READ/WRITE
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.179 E-10
3.10.5.1.1 Loading and Storing Traces and Lists
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
MMEMory:STORe:FORMat BIN
ASCii
EXPort
→ Data stored in binary format
→ Data stored in ASCII format
→ Daten werden im Textformat in Tabellenform ohne Zusatzinformation mit
der Dateierweiterung .EXP gespeichert.
Vorteil: Dateien im EXP-Format können von jedem Texteditor oder
anderen Programmen problemlos gelesen und weiterverarbeitet
werden.
Nachteil: Da die Zusatzinformationen fehlen, können die Dateien
vomUPL/UPD nicht mehr eingelesen werden.
Informationen über den Inhalt der Dateien siehe 2.9.1.2 Loading and Storing
of Series of Measured Values and Block/List Data und 2.9.1.3 Format
of Block/Listen Data.
2.9.1.2
FILE panel
Format
→ REAL
→ ASCII
→ EXPORT
MMEMory:STORe:TRACeTRACe1,"filename"
TRACe2,"filename"
TR1And2,"filename"
Query:
MMEM:STOR:TRAC?
TRAC[1|2]
MMEM:STOR:TRAC?
TR1A
→ Store trace A buffer under "filename"
→ Store trace B buffer under "filename"
→ Store trace pair under "filename"
2.9.1.2
FILE panel
Store
→ TRACE A
→ TRACE B
→ TRACE A+B
MMEMory:STORe:LIST LIST1,"filename"
LIST2,"filename"
DWELl,"filename"
Query:
MMEM:STOR:LIST?
LIST[1|2]
MMEM:STOR:LIST?
DWEL
→ Store X-axis list under "filename"
→ Store Z-axis list under "filename"
→ Store dwell-time list under "filename"
2.9.1.2
FILE panel
Store
→ X-Axis
→ Z-Axis
→ DWEL VALUE
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.180 E-10
3.10.5.1.2 Storing Limit Violations (Error Reports)
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
MMEMory:STORe:FORMat BIN
ASCii → Data stored in binary format
→ Data stored in ASCII format
2.9.1.2
FILE panel
Format
→ REAL
→ ASCII
MMEMory:STORe:LIST ERRors,"filename"
LIMUpper,"filename"
LIMLower,"filename"
Query:
MMEM:STOR:LIST?
ERR
MMEM:STOR:LIST?
LIMU
MMEM:STOR:LIST?
LIML
→ Store limit error under "filename"
→ Store upper tolerance curve under "filename"
→ Store lower tolerance curve under "filename"
2.9.1.2
FILE panel
Store
→ LIM REPORT
→ LIM UPPER
→ LIM LOWER
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.181 E-10
3.10.5.1.3 Storing Equalization Files
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
MMEMory:STORe:FORMat BIN
ASCii → Data stored in binary format
→ Data stored in ASCII format
2.9.1.2
FILE panel
Format
→ REAL
→ ASCII
CALCulate:EQUalize:FEED TRACe1
TRACe2→ Amplitude data read from
→ Trace buffer A/B
2.9.1.2
FILE panel
Volt Source
→ TRACE A
→ TRACE B
CALCulate:EQUalize:NORMfreq <nu>
fmin to fmax Hz Frequency to the level at which is normalized
2.9.1.2
FILE panel
Norm Freq
CALCulate:EQUalize:INVert ON
OFF → Frequency stored in inverted form
→ Frequency stored without inversion
2.9.1.2
FILE panel
Invert 1/n
→ ON
→ OFF
MMEMory:STORe:LIST EQUalize,"filename"
Query:
MMEM:STOR:LIST?
EQU
Store equalization file under "filename" 2.9.1.2
FILE panel
Store
→ EQUALIZATN
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.182 E-10
3.10.5.2 Commands for Editing Files and Directories
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
MMEMory:DELete "filename" Deletes a file. 2.9.2
FILE panel
Delete
MMEMory:CDIRectory "pathname" Selects a directory for file operation. 2.9.2
FILE panel
Work Dir
MMEMory:COPY "filename1","filenam
e2" Selects the file to be copied.
Specifies the name of the target file (with drive and directory, if required) to
which a copy should be made.
2.9.2
FILE panel
Copy + To
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.183 E-10
3.10.6 Commands for Graphical Representation of Results
In the following, TRACe1 and TRACe2 serve for differentiating between displayed curves (trace A and trace B), bargraphs and result lists.
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:OPERation
CURVeplot
LISTalias TLISt
ERRors
BARGraph
SPECtrum
FFTList
FFTErrors
PROTocol
AUToprotocol alias
AUTOprotocol
The parameters below determine the form for the graphics display of
measurement results.
→ Line chart in Cartesian coordinates.
→ List of numeric values.
→ List of out-of-tolerance values. In this case the limit check function must
be active.
→ Bargraph display in analog form.
→ Display of FFT or, in the case of THD, DFD or MOD-DIST, in the form of
a schematic spectrum display.
→ FFT data in tabular form.
→ FFT limit violation data in tabular form. Limit check function must be active.
→ Protocol data of the digital AES/EBU interface displayed in the graphics
window.
→ Protocol data of the digital AES/EBU interface displayed in the graphics
window. Automatic decoding of the channel status bits irrespective of the
professional bit value (see 2.10.8 PROTOCOL Analysis).
2.10
DISP panel
OPERATION
→ CURVE PLOT
2.10.2
→ SWEEP LIST
2.10.4
→ SWP LIM REP
2.10.4
→ BARGRAPH
2.10.2
→ SPECT LIST
2.10.8
→ SPC LIM REP
2.10.6
→ PROTOCOL
2.10
2.10.8
→ PROTO AUTO
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:MODE DELete_bef_wr
WATerfall|CASCade
MAXHold
→ Selects a single trace or a pair of traces. Each new X sweep overwrites
the previous trace.
→ Shifts a single trace (trace pairs not possible) on the Z axis for obtaining a
spatial presentation (with FFT-SPECtrum only).
→ Maximum hold function for FFT SPECtrum for FFT-AVERage = 1.
2.10
DISP panel
Mode
→ DEL BEF WR
→ WATERFAL
→ MAX HOLD
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:COUNt <n>
recorded:
1 to 100 000
stored:
max. 17 traces
Specifies the number of single traces and trace pairs to be recorded together
and stored. Automatically sets the number of Z values in the case of a Z
sweep.
2.10
DISP panel
Scan Count
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.184 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:FEED
"SENSe1:DATA1"
"SENSe1:DATA2"
"SENSe2:DATA1"
"SENSe2:DATA2"
"SENSe3:DATA1"
"SENSe3:DATA2"
"HOLD"
"FILE"
"DFILe"
"OFF"
Selects the result to be displayed as TRACe1 (or TRACe2).
→ Measurement function specified by SENSe1:FUNCtion "<>". Value from
channel 2 (CH1).
→ Measurement function specified by SENSe1:FUNCtion "<>2. Value from
channel 2 (CH2).
→ Result of input RMS measurement of channel 1 (CH1) for THD and THDN
functions.
→ Result of input RMS measurement of channel 2 (CH2) for THD and THDN
functions.
→ Measured value from frequency meter, channel 1 (CH1).
→ Measured value from frequency meter,channel 2 (CH2) if SENS3:FUNC
FREQ is selected.
Measured value from phase meter, channel 2 (CH2) if SENS3:FUNC
FQPH.
Measured value from group delay measurement, channel 2 (CH2) if
SENS:FUNC FQGR is selected
→ Retains previously displayed values (no collection of new values).
→ Displays measured values from a file using the command
described below.
→ Loads a trace pair with scale and reference values or reference trace using
the command described below.
→ Switch-off
2.10.1
DISP panel
TRACE A/B
→ FUNC CH1
→ FUNC CH2
→ INP RMS CH1
→ INP RMS CH2
→ FREQ CH1
→ FREQ CH2
→ PHASE
→ GROUP DEL
→ HOLD
→ FILE
→ DUAL FILE
→ OFF
MMEMory:LOAD:TRACeTRACe[1|2],"filename
"
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:TRAC?
TRAC[1|2]
Loads a trace from a file for display. 2.10.1
DISP panel
TRACE A/B
→ FILE + Filename
TRACe:DATA? TRACe[1|2]
Query only
Query:
TRAC? TRAC[1|2]
The trace (block data!) can be read from the UPL to the controller. 2.10.1
DISP panel
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:Y[:SCALe]:UNIT <u>
see 3.10.4 Units for
IEC Measurement
Results
1) Determines the units for results displayed in numerical form. 2.10.1
DISP panel
Unit
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.185 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:MO
DE VALue
MAXimum
CURSor[1]
CURSor 2
FILE
HOLD
OTRAce
CH1Meas
CH2Meas
GENTrack
IFILe
REF997
REF1000
A reference value is required for all relative units of TRACe1 or TRACe2.
→ The subsequently entered value is used as a reference.
→ Uses the maximum value of the trace once.
→ The value pointing to the o-cursor is stored as a reference.
→ The value pointing to the *-cursor is stored as a reference.
→ Reference for reference-related units is a file indicated by
MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe[1|2]REFTrace,"name.TRC".
→ The reference-trace memory is no longer filled with new
(sweep) values. Stored values are retained.
→ Reference for reference-related units is another trace.
→ Reference for reference-related units is the value measured in channel
1 or 2 pertaining to the respective reference point (depending on the
display measured frequency, function or input result).
→ The reference trace is erased and reloaded for each measurement
using the respective generator setting.
→ When a trace with the associated reference trace (Internal reference FILe)
is loaded, IFILe activates this internal reference file again when another
reference has been selected before.
→The value measured at 997 Hz or 1 kHz is taken once as a reference
→value for a single sweep run. With FFT traces, the nearest bin (actually
measured frequency line) is taken, with frequency sweeps interpolation
is made between the two neighbouring points.If the X axis is not the
frequency axis (for example in the case of level sweeps or waveform
traces), an error message is output and the reference value remains
unchanged.
2.10.1
DISP panel
Reference
→ VALUE
→ MAX
→ oCURSOR
→ *CURSOR
→ FILE
→ HOLD
→ OTHER TRACE
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ GEN TRACK
→ FILE INTERN
→ REF 997 Hz
→ REF 1000 Hz
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <nu> 1) Entry of reference value for relative units. 2.10.1
DISP panel
Reference
→ VALUE
MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe[1|2]REFTrace,"filename"
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:TRAC[
1|2]? REFT
→ File containing the reference-trace data for trace A.
Default extension = .TRC
2.10.1
DISP panel
Reference
→ FILE +
Reference
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.186 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe2:Y[:SCALe]:EQUal ON
OFF
→ TRACe2 may be displayed on the same axis as TRACe1. In this case no
values can be entered for: UNIT,: RLEVel,:SCALe:AUTO,:TOP,:BOTTom
and :SPACing for the second axis.
→ Independent of trace 1.
2.10.1
DISP panel
Scale B
→ EQUAL A
→ NOT EQUAL A
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO ONCE
OFF
→ Uses the minimum and maximum values of the present trace for rescaling
the display once. The new scaling data are transferred to and used in
DISP:TRAC:Y:TOP <n> and DISP:TRAC:Y:BOTT <n>.
→ Leaves scaling to the user with the aid of the following two commands.
2.10.1
DISP panel
Scale
→ AUTO ONCE
→ MANUAL
ONCE
mit Softkey
F7
(AUTOSCALE)
→ F7 (A)
→ F8 (B)
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:NORMalize:
MODE
CURSor[1] (o-Cursor)
CURSor2 (*-Cursor)
VALue
With normalize the reference curve can be multiplied so that a specific Y
value is obtained at the desired Y position.
→ The multiplier is obtained from the measured value at the cursor position
divided by the reference value at this position. Thus the new reference
corresponds to the value measured at this position (= 0 dBr).
→ Entry of a fixed multiplier using the next command:
Presettings required:
DISP:TRAC[1|2]:OPER CURV and
DISP:TRAC[1|2]:FEED ’SENS1:DATA1’|’SENS1:DATA2’|’HOLD’ and
DISP:TRAC[1|2]:Y:UNIT VVRPCTVVR|PPR|PCTPPR|DBR and
DISP:TRAC[1|2]:Y:RLEV:MODE GENT
or
DISP:TRAC[1|2]:OPER CURV and
DISP:TRAC[1|2]:FEED ’SENS3:DATA1’|’SENS3:DATA2’|’HOLD’and
DISP:TRAC[1|2]:Y:UNIT TOCT|OCT|DEC|FFR and
DISP:TRAC[1|2]:Y:RLEV:MODE GENT
2.10.1
DISP panel
Normalize
→ o-Cursor
→ *-Cursor
→ VALue
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.187 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:NORMalize <nu>
10-12 to 106 or
-200 dB to 120 dB
Multi-
plier |
dB
The specified number is multiplied to obtain the reference value. This allows
the reference of a trace to be determined as required.
2.10.1
DISP panel
Normalize
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y:SPACing LINear
LOGarithmic → Linear spacing of Y axes
→ Logarithmic
2.10.1
DISP panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:TOP <nu> 1) Sets the upper value of the Y axis (of the dependent value) in the case of
DISPlay:TRACe[1|2]:Y:AUTO OFF
2.10.1
DISP panel
Top
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:BOTTom <nu> 1) Sets the lower value of the Y axis (of the dependent value) in the case of
DISPlay:TRACe[1|2]:Y:AUTO OFF.
2.10.1
DISP panel
Bottom
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:X[:SCALe]:UNIT <u> see 3.10.4
Units for IEC
Measurement Results
Determines the units for the numeric results displayed on the X axis. 2.10.1
DISP panel
Unit
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:X[:SCALe]:RLEVel <nu> 2) Entry of reference value for relative units. 2.10.1
DISP panel
Reference
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:X[:SCALe]:AUTO ON
OFF
→ Uses the minimum and maximum values of the present trace for
scaling the X axis (once).
→ Leaves scaling to the user with the aid of the following two commands.
2.10.1
DISP panel
Scale
→ AUTO
→ MANUAL
or
Softkey
F7
(AUTOSCALE)
→ F9 (X)
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.188 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:X:SPACing LINear
LOGarithmic → Linear spacing of X axis
→ Logarithmic
2.10.1
DISP panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:X[:SCALe]:LEFT <nu> 2) Sets the left-hand value of the X axis (of the independent value) in the case of
DISPlay:TRACe:X:AUTO OFF.
2.10.1
DISP panel
Left
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:X[:SCALe]:RIGHT <nu> 2) Sets the right-hand value of the X axis (of the independent value) in the case
of DISPlay:TRACe:X:AUTO OFF. The lower value of LEFT and RIGHT is
used as left-hand value.
2.10.1
DISP panel
Right
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT[:DATA] "string" Permits a text to be entered that will be displayed within the trace display in
the case of DISPlay:TRACe[1|2]:OPERation CURVeplot.
2.10.1
DISP panel
COMMENT
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT:LOCate <ny>[,<nx>] Determines the X and Y position of the text. X and Y are the relative distance
from the 0 point of the coordinates in % (0 to 100).
2.10.1
DISP panel
X Pos, Y Pos
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]: ACTive CURSor[1|2] Switches the cursors alternately on and off. This only affects the display.
CURSor1 is marked with o, CURSor2 with *.
2.10.2
DISP panel
Softkey, 1st level
F8
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[1]:MODE
N12
D12
OFF
Parameters used for selecting the cursor function and the type of the
displayed numeric cursor values.
→ Display of measured values A and B and of associated X value.
→ Display of difference value of A and B at the cursor position and of X value.
→ The deactivated cursor is no longer displayed.
2.10.2
Softkey
F8: selects Ο-
CURS.
F9: (Ο-CURSOR)
→ F6 (A,B)
→ F7 (A-B)
→ F11 (ON/OFF)
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.189 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor2:MODE N12
D12
C12
HL1
HL2
HLD1
HLD2
OFF
→ Display of measured values A and B and of associated X value.
→ Display of difference value of A and B at the cursor position and of X value.
→ Difference of trace and X values of curves A and B which are marked by
the two cursors.
→ The *-cursor is switched to horizontal line. Its Y value and intersections
with TRACe1 (if any) are displayed.
→ Intersections with TRACe2 are displayed.
→ The *-cursor is switched to horizontal line. The difference between its Y
value and the Y value of the o-cursor are displayed.
Intersections with TRACe1 are displayed as well.
→ Same as with HLD1, but the intersections with TRACe2 are displayed.
→ The deactivated cursor is no longer displayed.
2.10.2
Softkey
F8 sel. o-cursor
F9 sel. *-cursor
→ F6 (A,B)
→ F7 (A-B)
→ F8 (* - Ο)
→ F9 (HLINE)
→ A
→ F9 (HLINE)
→ B
→ F9 (HLINE)
→ ∆A
→ F9 (HLINE)
→ ∆B
→ F11 (ON/OFF)
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[1|2]:POSition:MO
DE MIN1
MIN2
I MAX1
MAX1
I MAX2
MAX2
MARKer1
NEXTharm
VALue
Changes the position of the specified cursor.
→ Sets cursor to the minimum of TRACe1.
→ Sets cursor to the maximum of TRACe2.
→ Sets cursor to calculated maximum of TRACe1 (with FFT only)
→ Sets cursor to maximum of TRACe1.
→ Sets cursor to calculated maximum of TRACe2 (with FFT only)
→ Sets cursor to maximum of TRACe2.
→ Sets cursor to value of 1st marker (FFT only).
→ Sets cursor to the next harmonic (FFT only).
→ Sets cursor to the value specified with the command below.
2.10.2
Softkey
F8 sel. Ο-CURS
or *-CURS
→ F10 (SET TO)
→ ----
→ ----
→ F6 (I MAX A)
→ F7 (MAX A)
→ F8 (I MAX B)
→ F9 (MAX B)
→ F10
(MARKER)
→ F11(NXTHARM)
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[1|2]:POSition <nu> 3) Sets specified cursor to the value of the X axis if
DISPlay:TRACe[]:CURSor[1|2]:POSition:MODE VALue is set.
2.10.2
not via softkey
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.190 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]: CURVeOFF
ON → TRACe1: trace A on/off
→ TRACe2: trace B on/off
2.10.2
Softkey
→ F6 (CURVE)
→ F6 (A ON/OFF)
→ F7 (B ON/OFF)
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:ZOOM <n>
0
1
-1
2
3
4
→ Restores the original X axis defined by X AXIS LEFT and RIGHT.
→ Expands the display on the X axis by the factor 2 (can be repeated).
→ Reduces the display on the X axis by the factor 2 (repeated actions
possible).
→ Shifts the center of the X axis of the new coordinates to the value of the
o-cursors (CURSor1) without expanding the X axis.
→ The end points of the expanded X axis are determined by the X values of
the two cursors
→ Cancels the last action.
2.10.2
Softkey
F10 (ZOOM)
→ F10 (UNZOOM)
→ F6 (AT o UP)
→ F7 (AToDOWN)
→ F8 (CEN TO o)
→ F9 (o TO *)
→ F11 (UNDO)
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:MARKer:MODE
MAXimum
CURSor
OFF
Markers for FFT spectrum display
→ Sets the first marker to the maximum of TRACe1 or TRACe2.
→ Sets the first marker to the value defined by the o-cursor. TRACe1 or
TRACe2 is used.
→ No markers
2.10.2
Softkey
F11
(MARKER)
F6 (TRACE A)
or
F7 (TRACE B).
→ MAX
→ CURSOR
→ VIEW OFF
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:MARKer:HARMonics ON
OFF
→ Sets markers for harmonics (frequency multiples) of MARKer1 (FFT only).
Values marked in TRACe1 or TRACe2.
→ No harmonics markers.
2.10.2
Softkey
F11 (MARKER)
F6 (TRACE A)
or
F7 (TRACE B)
→ F10 (HARM)
on/off
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.191 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:AUToscale Rescales the X and the TRACe1 axis. When active also the axis of TRACe2. 2.10.2
Softkey
F7
(AUTOSCALE)
F6 (ALL)
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:LABel ON
OFF → Activates user title and units.
→ Deactivates user title and units.
2.10.2
DISP panel
User Label
→ ON
→ OFF
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X:LABel "string" Specification of a string determining a user-definable label (unit and title) for
the X axis.
2.10.2
DISP panel
Unit/Label
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1]:Y:LABel "string" Specification of a string determining a user-definable label (unit and title) for
the Y1 axis.
2.10.2
DISP panel
Unit/Label
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe2:Y:LABel "string" Specification of a string determining a user-definable label (unit and title) for
the Y2 axis.
2.10.2
DISP panel
Unit/Label
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:INDex <n>
1 to 17
Selects the nth single trace or curve pair. In the graphics display a circle
marks the intersection of the vertical cursor line and the selected trace.
2.9.3.3
Keys
PAGE UP /
PAGE DOWN
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.192 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
DISPlay:CONFiguration P
SP
AP
GP
FP
DP
OP
GAT
GAO
GAD
FAT
FAO
FAD
SHON
SHOFf
Configuration of screen display after switchover to LOCAL:
→ Full-screen graphics display (plot)
→ Status panel and graphics window
→ Analyzer panel and graphics window
→ Generator panel and graphics window
→ File panel and graphics window
→ Display panel and graphics window
→ Options panel and graphics window
→ Generator, analyzer and filter panel
→ Generator, analyzer and options panel
→ Generator-, analyzer and display panel
→ File, analyzer and filter panel
→ File, analyzer and options panel
→ File, analyzer and display panel
→ Show IO graphics on
→ Show IO graphics off
2.3.1
Keys Ext. UPL
keyboard
GEN ALT+G
ANLR ALT+A
FILT ALT+T
FILE ALT+F
DISP ALT+D
GRAPH ALT+R
ZOOM ALT+Z
SHOW I/O ALT+I
OPTIONS ALT+O
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[]:DATA1?
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[]:DATA2?
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[]:DATA3?
Query only Return the values of the cursor position. Depending on
DISPlay:TRACe[]:CURSor[1|2]:MODE and
DISPlay:TRACe:CURSor[1|2]ACTive the following values are available:
DATA1 DATA2 DATA3
with CURSor1 and CURSor2 ACTive
N12AXB
D12 A-B X -
OFF - - -
only with CURSor2 ACTive:
C12 A-oA X-oX B-oB
HL1 XAL y XAR
HL2 XBL Y XBR
HLD1 XAL A-Y XAR
HLD2 XBL B-Y XBR
2.10.2
Display in
graphics
window
1) Depending on DISPlay:TRACe:FEED and (with SENSe1) of SENSe1:FUNCtion
2) Depending on the sweep selected for generator and analyzer
3) Same units as with DISPlay:TRACe[]:X:UNIT permitted.
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.193 E-10
3.10.6.1 Commands for Limit Check
See also Sections 2.10.7 Limit Check, 3.10.9 Commands for Input/Output of Data and 3.10.9 Commands for Input/Output of Data, for the transfer of limit curves
and limit check results in the form of block data.
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
CALCulate:LIMit:ON TRACe1
TRACe2
TR1And2
→ TRACe1 or bargraph 1 monitored.
→ TRACe2 or bargraph 2 monitored.
→ Both traces (bargraphs) monitored together.
2.10.7
DISP panel
Check
→ TRACE A
→ TRACE B
→ TRACE A+B
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:STATe ON
OFF → Upper limit monitoring switched on.
→ Upper limit monitoring switched off.
2.10.7
DISP panel
LIMIT CHECK
Mode
→ LIM UPPER
Mode
→ OFF
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:VALue <nu> *) Specifies a single upper limit value. 2.10.7
DISP panel
Lim Upper
→ VALUE:
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST LIMUpper,
"filename" → Defines a file containing the upper limit curve. 2.10.7
DISP panel
Lim Upper
→ FILE +
filenam"
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.194 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:STATe ON
OFF → Lower limit monitoring switched on.
→ Lower limit monitoring switched off.
2.10.7
DISP panel
LIMIT CHECK
Mode
→ LIM LOWER
Mode
→ OFF
CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:VALue <nu> *) Specifies a single lower limit value. 2.10.7
DISP panel
Lim Lower
→ VALUE:
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST LIMLower,
"filename" → Defines a file containing the lower limit curve. 2.10.7
DISP panel
Lim Lower
→ FILE + filename
CALCulate:LIMit:FAIL? <n>
Query only
Returns ON if Lim Upper values are exceeded or Lim Lower values are not
attained, otherwise OFF.
Lim Low
Lim Low Lim Low
Lim Upp
Lim Upp
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
Lim Upp
2.10.7
No manual
control
*) Same units as with DISPlay:TRACe[1|2]:Y:UNIT permitted.
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.195 E-10
3.10.6.2 PROTOCOL Analysis
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
DISPlay:PROTocol:SELect LCHannelstatus
RCHannelstatus
LUSerdata
RUSerdata
Selects the protocol data of the AES/EBU interface to be displayed.
→ Left channel: status data
→ Right channel: status data
→ Left channel: user data
→ Right channel: user data
2.10.8
DISP panel
Source
→ CHAN STAT L
→ CHAN STAT R
→ USER DATA L
→ USER DATA R
DISPlay:PROTocol:FORMat BINary
HEXadecimal
ASCii
FILE
Format selects the interpretation mode for user data.
→ User data displayed as 0101 sequence.
→ User data displayed as hexadecimal figures
→ User data displayed as plain text
→ Interpretation file for user data loaded with MMEMory:LOAD:PAU
"filename".
2.10.8
DISP panel
Format
→ BIN
→ HEX
→ ASCII
→ FILE DEF
MMEMory:LOAD:PAU "filename" Selects the interpretation file for user data if
DISPlay:PROTocol:FORMat FILE has been set.
2.10.8
DISP panel
Proto File
MMEMory:LOAD:PAC "filename" Selects the interpretation file for channel status data. 2.10.8
DISP panel
Proto File
DISPlay:PROTocol:ERRor:GENeral?Query only
Response:
UBB
SQB
NSYN
PRMB
SQLR
RERR
NONE
Query only
Indicates errors occurred.
"UBB" : unexpected preamble for beginning of block (too early)
"SQB" : no preamble (blank) for beginning of block
"NSYN" : no preamble for beginning of block
"PRMB" : preamble invalid
"SQLR" : error in the channel sequence (L/R)
"RERR" : measured and set rate differ by more than 200 ppm
"NONE" : no error
2.10.8
GRAPH panel
Display
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.196 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
DISPlay:PROTocol:ERRor:PARity?Query only Query only
Displays the sum of all occurred parity errors. Zero reset by reselecting the
analyzer or pressing the start key.
2.10.8
GRAPH panel
Display
DISPlay:PROTocol:ERRor:LCRC?Query only Query only
Internal counter of CRC errors (left)
2.10.8
GRAPH panel
Display
DISPlay:PROTocol:ERRor:RCRC?Query only Query only
Internal counter of CRC errors (right)
2.10.8
GRAPH panel
Display
DISPlay:PROTocol:CHSTatus?Query only
NO
LTC
YES
Query only
Indicates changes in the channel status data.
"NO" : No changes
"LTC" : Changes in local-time-code only
(bits 112 to 143) and CRC (bits 184 to 191).
"YES" : Changes at another bit position.
2.10.8
GRAPH panel
Display
DISPlay:PROTocol:LR? Query only
EQUAL
DIFF
Query only
Channel status data between left and right channel are ...
"EQUAL": same
"DIFF" : different
2.10.8
GRAPH panel
Display
DISPlay:PROTocol:LVALbit?Query only
Y0
N1
Query only
Indicates the position of the validity bit in the left channel.
2.10.8
GRAPH panel
Display
DISPlay:PROTocol:RVALbit?Query only
Y0
N1
Query only
Indicates the position of the validity bit in the right channel.
2.10.8
GRAPH panel
Display
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.197 E-10
3.10.7 Commands for Printing/Plotting of Screen and Storing in Files
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
HCOPy:DESTination PRSPc alias PRINter
PLHPgl alias
PLOTter
PRPS
PRHPgl
FIPCx,
’filename.PCX’
alias
PCXFile, ’name.PCX’
FIHPgl, ’filename.GL’
alias
HPGLfile, ’name.GL’
FIPS, ’filename.PS’
FIEPs, ’filename.EPS’
For reasons of
compatibility with
existing programs the
replys are as follows:
PRIN
PLOT
PRHP
PRPS
PCXF
HPGL
FIPS
FIEP
Screen copy
→ to printer in the specified printer format (PRSPC = SPeCial printer format)
→ to plotter in HPGL format
→ to printer in PostScript format
→ to printer in HPGL format taking into account the content of the prolog file
C:\UPL\REF\GL_PRO.LOG and the epilog file C:\UPL\REF\GL_EPI.LOG.
→ to file in PCX format
→ to file in HPGL format
→ to file in PostScript format
→ to file in Encapsulated PostScript format
2.14
OPTIONS panel
Destin
(destination/format)
→ PRINTR/SPC
→ PLOTTR/HPGL
→ PRINTR/HPGL
→ PRINTR/PS
→ FILE/PCX
→ FILE/HPGL
→ FILE/PS
→ FILE/EPS
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.198 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor ON
OFF
→ PCX information stored in colors in the file specified by HCOP:DEST
PCXFile, ’filename’.
→ PCX information stored in black/white in the file specified by HCOP:DEST
PCXFile, ’filename’.
2.14
OPTIONS panel
COLOR
→ ON
→ OFF
HCOPy:ITEM ALL
GRATicule
TRACe
Effective only with HCOPy:DESTination PLOTter|HPGLfile
→ The complete screen is output, ie all labels and cursors as well as
traces/bargraphs with scales. In the case of graphics windows the result
display and a panel are output in addition.
→ Stores the traces/bargraphs with scales and scale labels but not the
cursors and other labelling.
→ Only the trace(s) displayed is (are) transferred.
2.14
OPTIONS panel
Copy
→ SCREEN
→ CURVE/GRID
→ CURVE
HCOPy:ITEM:LABel:STATe ON
OFF → Hardcopy with comment
→ Hardcopy without comment 2.14
Key H COPY
or Ctrl F8
HCOPy:DEVice:PRINter <n> Effective only with HCOPy:DESTination PRINter
Selects a printer driver.
The number <n> to be specified for the desired printer driver can be obtained
from the printer-driver box "List of installable Printers" opened under
"Printname" in the OPTIONS panel.
2.14
OPTIONS panel
Printname
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.199 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
HCOPy:ITEM:FRAMe
WHITe
FDEFined
Effective only with HCOPy:DESTination PRSPc|FIPCx|PRPS|FIPS|FIEPs
Selection of background color of GRAPH panel frame and result panel for
hardcopies on a printer or storage in a .PCX file.
WHITE should be selected when the characters cannot be clearly
distinguished on the grey background.
→ White
→ Color defined via file
For HCOP:DEST PRSPc|FIPCx:
Color No. 2 (backgrnd frames) defined in files
\UPD\REF\PRN_BW.PLT (BW printer) and
\UPD\REF\PRN_CL.PLT (color printer) is used.
For HCOP:DEST PRPS|FIPS|FIEPs:
The color information for the frames of the GRAPH panel is taken
from the PostScript configuration file \UPD\REF\PS.CFG, key word
"Background Color" "Frame:" and "Plane:" and available as RGB
information for color PostScript pictures and as shades of grey for
black/white PostScript pictures.
Examples in file PS.CFG show the RGB combination for different
background colors.
2.14
OPTIONS panel
Frame
→ WHITE
→ FILE DEF
HCOPy:PLPort COM2
LPT1
IEC
Effective only with HCOPy:DESTination PLOTter
→ Hardcopy via serial interface 2.
→ Hardcopy via parallel printer interface.
→ Hardcopy via IEC/IEEE-bus interface.
2.14
OPTIONS panel
Plot on
→ COM 2
→ LPT 1
→ IEC BUS
HCOPy:PLADdress <n> Sets the IEC/IEEE-bus address of the plotter when
HCOPy:DESTination PLOTer and
HCOPy:PLPort IEC
has been selected.
2.14
OPTIONS panel
→ IEC Adr
HCOPy:PAGE:LMARgin <n>
0 to 80
Margin of hardcopy (number of spaces) 2.14
OPTIONS panel
LEFT MRGN
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.200 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
HCOPy:DEVice:RESolution
HIGH
MEDium
LOW
Sets the printer resolution. Whether a resolution can be set and which one
depends on the printer used.
→ High resolution (eg 300 dpi)
→ Medium resolution (eg 150 dpi)
→ Low resolution (eg 75 dpi)
2.14
OPTIONS panel
Prn Resol
→ HIGH
→ MEDIUM
→ LOW
HCOPy:PAGE:SCALe:X <n>
0.1 to 10
Scaling of X axis of hardcopy 2.14
OPTIONS panel
X-SCALING
HCOPy:PAGE:SCALe:Y <n>
0.1 to 10
Scaling of Y axis of screen hardcopy 2.14
OPTIONS panel
Y-SCALING
HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape
PORTtrait → Hardcopy in upright format
→ Hardcopy in landscape format 2.14
OPTIONS panel
ORIENTATION
→ LANDSCAPE
→ PORTRAIT
HCOPy:PAGE:WIDTh?Query only Indicates the hardcopy width in cm. The width of a hardcopy depends on the
following settings:
- HCOPy:DEVice:PRINter (selected printer)
- HCOPy:PAGE:SCALe:X (X scaling)
- HCOPy:DEVice:RESolution (resolution)
2.14
OPTIONS panel
Prn Width,
HCOPy:PAGE:LENGth?Query only Indicates the hardcopy length in cm. The length of a hardcopy depends on the
following settings:
- HCOPy:DEVice:PRINter (selected printer)
- HCOPy:PAGE:SCALe:Y (Y scaling)
- HCOPy:DEVice:RESolution (resolution)
2.14
OPTIONS panel
Prn Height
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.201 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
HCOPy:SIZE
A4
LETTer
Form feed for a screen copy in PostScript format
→ UPL images are optimally positioned on format A4
(21 cm * 29.6 cm).
→ UPL images are optimally positioned on format LETTER
(21.6 cm * 27.9 cm).
2.14
OPTIONS panel
Paper Size
→ A4
→ LETTER
HCOPy:PLOTs<n>
1 to 6
Number of UPL plots to be printed on a PostScript page. 2.14
OPTIONS panel
Plots/Page
SYSTem:PRINt
TRACe1
TRACe2
EQUalize
ERRors
DWELl
LIMLower
LIMUpper
LIST1
LIST2
TR1And2
OFF
Printout of numerals in ASCII code (including X axis).
→ Printout of TRACe1.
→ Printout of TRACe2.
→ Printout of equalization values
→ Printout of values violating limits
→ Printout of timing values
→ Printout of lower limit values
→ Printout of upper limit values
→ X axis (eg sweep)
→ Z axis (eg sweep)
→ Printout of both traces
→ Switched off
2.14.5
OPTIONS panel
PRINT------
Type
→ TRACE A
→ TRACE B
→ EQUALIZATN
→ LIM REPORT
→ DWELL
→ LIM LOWER
→ LIM UPPER
→ X AXIS
→ Z AXIS
→TRACE A+B
→ OFF
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.202 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
HCOPy[:IMMediate]
Without parameter
CNF
CF
NCNF
NCF
Starts printout of the screen content
Depending on command HCOP:DEST ... the current screen content is
printed, plotted, or stored in a PCX or HPGL file or as a PostScript file,
In the case of IEC/IEEE-bus and RS-232 control, only the result window and
REMOTE are printed.
A remedy is a HCOPY command with specified parameters which permits a
hardcopy with preceding screen configuration to be printed.
With setting
HCOPy:DESTination PRINter
One of the four parameters CNF, CF, NCNF or NCF can be added to the
HCOP command for printing the screen content with a comment:
CNF: Hardcopy with comment*, without form feed
CF: Hardcopy with comment*, with form feed
NCNF: Hardcopy without comment, without form feed
NCF: Hardcopy without comment, with form feed
Thus a specific screen configuration (3-panel, split-screen or full-screen
display) can be output to the printer via IEC/IEEE bus, RS-232 or through
UPL-B10 control.
The desired screen configuration has to be selected before with command
DISP:CONF ... (see end of section 3.10.6, Commands for Graphical Display
of Results).
The HCOP command with one of the 4 parameters switches the UPL from
REMOTE to manual control, builds up the screen with the selected
configuration, scans the screen content and starts the hardcopy.
The next IEC/IEEE-bus command switches the UPL back to the REMOTE
mode.
Program example:
:
IECOUT 20,"HCOPy:DESTination PRINter"
IECNREN:’ Inhibits the LOCAL key ...
IECREN:’... releases key blocking.
IECOUT 20,"DISP:CONF GAT":’ GEN, ANLR and FILTER panel
IECOUT 20,"HCOP CF":’ Triggers a hardcopy with comment
’ and form feed
IECLLO:’ Reactivates blocking of the LOCAL key.
:
HCOPy command
via IEC/IEEE bus,
RS-232 or
Universal
Sequence
Controller UPL-
B10
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.203 E-10
Command Parameter Meaning Section
Cont’d
HCOPy[:IMMediate]
CONFig
CONFig
Cont’d:
HCOPy:DESTination PRINter
If a screen copy without comment is output (HCOP:ITEM:LAB:STAT OFF),
the desired screen configuration is first set with command
DISP:CONF and then the HCOP command with parameter CONF is given.
Program example:
:
IECOUT 20,"HCOPy:DESTination PRINter"
IECNREN:’ Inhibits the LOCAL key ...
IECREN:’... releases key blocking.
IECOUT 20,"DISP:CONF GAT":’ GEN, ANLR and FILTER panel
IECOUT 20,"HCOP CONF":’ Trigg. a hcopy without comment
IECLLO:’ Reactivates blocking of the LOCAL key.
:
With setting
HCOPy:DESTination PCXFile,’filename’:
The desired screen configuration has to be selected first with command
DISP:CONF ...
see end of section 3.10.6, Commands for Graphics Display of Results).
The HCOP command with parameter CONF switches the UPL from REMOTE
to manual control, builds up the screen with the selected configuration, scans
the screen content and starts a hardcopy into the file.
The next IEC/IEEE-bus command reset the UPL to the REMOTE mode.
Program example:
:
IECOUT 20,"HCOPy:DESTination PCXFile,’filename’"
IECNREN:’ Inhibits the LOCAL key ...
IECREN:’... releases key blocking
IECOUT 20,"DISP:CONF GAT":’ GEN, ANLR and FILTER panel
IECOUT 20,"HCOP CONF":’ Triggers a hardcopy without
comment
IECLLO:’ Reactivates blocking of the LOCAL key.
:
HCOPy command
via IEC/IEEE bus,
RS-232 or
Universal
Sequence
Controller UPL-
B10
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.204 E-10
Command Parameter Meaning Section
Cont’d
HCOPy[:IMMediate] TITLe
SUPPlement With settings
HCOPy:DESTination PRPS
HCOPy:DESTination FIPS, ’filename.PS’
HCOPy:DESTination FIEPs, ’filename.EPS’
A comment* can be added to the PostScript plot as a TITLe or caption
(SUPPlement).
Thus a specific screen configuration (3-panel, split-screen or full-screen
display) can be output to the PostScript printer or a PostScript file via
IEC/IEEE bus, RS-232 or through UPL-B10 control.
A selection can be made with command HCOPy:ITEM ALL|GRAT|TRAC
whether the whole screen content (ALL), only traces and scales (GRAT) or
only traces (TRAC) are output as PostScript plot or stored in a PostScript file.
When a hardcopy of traces is to be made (HCOP:ITEM GRAT|TRAC) make
sure that the screen configuration selected with
DISP:CONF P|SP|AP|GP|FP|DP|OP allows traces to be plotted.
The HCOP command with one of the three parameters
switches the UPL from the REMOTE to the manual control mode,
builds up the selected configuration,
scans the screen content and starts the hardcopy.
The next IEC/IEEE-bus command resets the UPL to REMOTE.
Program example:
:
IECOUT 20,"HCOPy:DESTination FIPS, ’filename.PS’"
IECNREN:’ Inhibits the LOCAL key ...
IECREN:’... disables key blocking.
IECOUT 20,"DISP:CONF GAT":’ GEN, ANLR and FILTER panel
IECOUT 20,"HCOP TITL":’ Triggers a hardcopy with a
comment as a title
IECLLO:’ Reactivates blocking of the LOCAL key.
:
HCOPy command
via IEC/IEEE bus,
RS-232 or
Universal
Sequence
Controller UPL-
B10
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.205 E-10
Command Parameter Meaning Section
Cont’d
HCOPy[:IMMediate] CONFig Cont’d:
With settings
HCOPy:DESTination PRPS
HCOPy:DESTination FIPS, ’filename.PS’
HCOPy:DESTination FIEPs, ’filename.EPS’
If a screen copy without comment (HCOP:ITEM:LAB:STAT OFF) is output,
the desired screen configuration is first set with command
DISP:CONF and then the HCOP command with parameter CONF is
triggered.
Program example:
:
IECOUT 20," HCOPy:DESTination FIPS, ’filename.PS’ "
IECNREN:’ Inhibits the LOCAL key ...
IECREN:’... disables key blocking.
IECOUT 20,"DISP:CONF GAT":’ GEN, ANLR and FILTER panel
IECOUT 20,"HCOP CONF":’ Trigg. a hcopy without comment
IECLLO:’ Reactivates blocking of the LOCAL key.
:
HCOPy command
via IEC/IEEE bus,
RS-232 or
Universal
Sequence
Controller UPL-
B10
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting
1078.2008.02 3.206 E-10
Command Parameter Meaning Section
Cont’d
HCOPy[:IMMediate] CONFig With settings
HCOPy:DESTination PLOTter and
HCOPy:DESTination PRHPgl
HCOPy:DESTination HPGLfile,’filename’:
The default parameter CONF triggers a hardcopy to a plotter, a HPGL-
compatible printer or a HPGL file with preceding screen configuration.
A comment cannot be output.
In addition to the screen configuration selected with DISP:CONF ... a
selection can be made with command HCOPy:ITEM ALL|GRAT|TRAC
whether the total screen content (ALL), only traces with scales (GRAT) or only
traces (TRAC) are plotted or transferred to the HPGL file. When traces are to
be plotted (HCOP:ITEM GRAT|TRAC) make sure that a screen configuration
allowing traces to be plotted has been selected with DISP:CONF
P|SP|AP|GP|FP|DP|OP.
The HCOP command with one of the three parameters switches the UPL
from REMOTE control to manual control, builds up the screen with the
selected configuration,
scans the screen content and starts the hardcopy.
The next IEC/IEEE-bus command resets the UPL to REMOTE control.
Program example:
:
IECOUT 20,"HCOPy:DESTination PLOTter"
IECNREN:’ Inhibits the LOCAL key ...
IECREN:’... releases key blocking.
IECOUT 20,"DISP:CONF GAT":’ GEN, ANLR and FILTER panel
IECOUT 20,"HCOP CONF":’ Triggers a hardcopy
IECLLO:’ Reactivates blocking of the LOCAL key.
:
Note:
No further HCOP command may be given while a hardcopy is being executed
(printed), since a command would abort the printout.
HCOPy command
via IEC/IEEE bus,
RS-232 or
Universal
Sequence
Controller UPL-
B10
HCOPy:WAIT Starts the printout (see above)
The next Basic command is not carried out before printing (with optimum
speed) in the background is completed.
No manual
control
HCOPy:ABORtAborts the hardcopy. 2.14
Key H COPY
or CTRL F8
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters
1078.2008.02 3.207 E-10
3.10.8 Setting and Display of Auxiliary Parameters
3.10.8.1 IEC/IEEE-Bus Address
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess <n>
0 to 31
IEC/IEEE bus address of UPL 2.15.1
OPTIONS panel
UPL IECadr
3.10.8.2 Switching the Beeper On/Off
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SYSTem:BEEPer:STATe ON
OFF → Beeper on
→ Beeper off
2.15.2
OPTIONS panel
Beeper
→ ON
→ OFF
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters
1078.2008.02 3.208 E-10
3.10.8.3 MACRO Operating
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SYSTem:PROGram:EXECute ’filename’By means of this command any BASIC program with the name <filename>
(preferred file extension: *.BAS) can be loaded and started. After the program
has been quit, a 1 → 0 transition is generated in the RUN bit (#14) of the
operation register. This is communicated to the controller via SRQ or serial
poll so that it can fetch the measurement results. Data exchange between the
external control program and the BASIC program can be performed via the
measurement-result displays, the measurement-result buffers or the block
data input/output by adding on the command SYST:PROG <n>{,<n>}.
For a detailed example see 3.15.18 Call BASIC-Macro.
Only in IEC/IEEE-bus or RS232-remote-control mode can a BASIC macro be
started with this command. A program supplied by the Universal Autorun
Control UPD-K1 cannot start a BASIC macro.
2.15.9
Selecting the
Sampling Mode
2.16
OPTIONS-Panel
Exec Macro
<filename>
SYSTem:PROGram[:DATA] <n>{,<n>} Up to 1024 various floating-point values can be transferred to the external
control program from a BASIC macro. To do this, the values are written to the
block buffer by the BASIC macro and then read by the external control
program.
For a detailed example see 3.15.18 Call BASIC-Macro
No manual
control
SYSTem:PROGram:POINts? <n>
0 to 1024
Query only
Number of the available block-data values written to the block buffer by the
BASIC macro. No manual
control
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters
1078.2008.02 3.209 E-10
3.10.8.4 Transfer of Settings
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SYSTem:PARameter:LINK <n> *)
0 to 2047
Permits transfer of settings in the generator or analyzer to another signal or
measurement function or to another instrument. 2.15.7
OPTIONS panel
Param. Link
*)
Calculation of <n>:
Data bit Weight Function
d0 (LSB) 1 Changing generator function keeps FUNCTION parameters
d1 2 Changing generator instrument keeps Output Config
d2 4 Changing generator instrument keeps FUNCTION + Parameters
d3 8 Changing analyzer functiom keeps FUNCTION parameters
d4 16 Changing analyzer instrument keeps Input Configuration
d5 32 Changing analyzer instrument keeps START COND
d6 64 Changing analyzer instrument keeps INPUT DISP
d7 128 Changing analyzer instrument keeps FREQ/PHASE
d8 256 not used
d9 512 Changing analyzer instrument keeps FUNCTION + Parameters
d10 (MSB) 1024 Changing generator function (tracking Gen → Anl) the appropriate measurement function for the
analyzer is set. (MDIST, DFD, POL, FM → W&F)
Example: Function of d0, d3, d9 and d10 required
Databit: d10 d9 d8 d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0
Data word: 11000001001
Weighting: 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8421
n = Sum of the weighting of the set bits
n = 1 + 8 + 512 + 1024
n =1545
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters
1078.2008.02 3.210 E-10
3.10.8.5 Selecting the Sampling Mode
CONFigure:DAI
BRM
HRM
When hardware option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) is installed, UPL can
be operated in two different sampling modes:
→ Base Rate Mode
Option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) generally functions like option
UPL-B2 (Digital Audio I/O). Clock frequencies up to 55 kHz can be
generated and analyzed. Maximum performance of UPL performance
without reduction of functions.
→ High Rate Mode
Option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) permits generation and analysis in
the High Rate Mode with clock frequencies up to 106 kHz. Some
measurement functions in 2-channel operation are performed at lower
speed. Analyzer functions are slightly reduced:
• no RUB&BUZZ measurement
• THIRD OCT measurement only analog
• THIRD OCT, WAVEFORM, PEAK and QPEAK measurements only
without filter
• digital phase measurement not possible with all measurement functions
Note: In the HRM even the performance and functions of analog
measurements are reduced. This mode should therefore only be
selected when the higher sampling rate is really required in the
generator or analyzer.
2.15.9
OPTIONS panel
Sampl Mode
→ BASE RATE
→ HIGH RATE
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters
1078.2008.02 3.211 E-10
3.10.8.6 Parameters of COM2 Interface
The parameters to be set in this section apply to a screen printout on a plotter with COM2 interface selected.
(HCOP:DEST PLOT mit HCOP:PLP COM2).
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:FEED:BAUD <n>
n =
2400
3600
4800
7200
9600
19200
38400
56000
Transmission speed in baud (bits/s)
(default setting: 9600) 2.15.1
OPTIONS panel
Baud Rate
→ 2400 Baud
→ 3600 Baud
→ 4800 Baud
→ 9600 Baud
→ 19200 Baud
→ 38400 Baud
→ 56000 Baud
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:FEED:PARity[:TYPE] NONE
EVEN
ODD
Parity check
→ Parity check off
→ Check for even parity (default setting)
→ Check for odd parity
2.15.1
OPTIONS panel
Parity
→ NONE
→ EVEN
→ ODD
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:FEED:BITS <n>
n = 7 | 8
Number of data bits (default setting: 7) 2.15.1
OPTIONS panel
Data Bits
→ 7
→ 8
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GTL Return to manual operation.
This command is only required in case of remote control via RS-232 but can
also be used for IEC/IEEE-bus operation and Universal Sequence Controller
UPL-B10.
LOCAL
keystroke
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters
1078.2008.02 3.212 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:FEED:SBITs<n>
n = 1 | 2
Number of stop bits (default setting: 1) 2.15.1
OPTIONS panel
Stop Bits
→ 1
→ 2
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:CONTrol RTS
XON
Type of synchronization
→ Hardware handshake via RTS and CTS line (default setting)
→ Software handshake
2.15.1
OPTIONS panel
Handshake
→ RTS/CTS
→ XON/XOFF
3.10.8.7 Keyboard Settings
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SYSTem:KEY:RRATe<nu>
0 to 50 Hz
Hz Repetition rate of UPL and AT keyboard 2.15.3
OPTIONS panel
Reptn Rate
SYSTem:KEY:RDELay <nu>
0.25 to 1.0 s
s Response delay of UPL and AT keyboard 2.15.3
OPTIONS panel
Rep Delay
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters
1078.2008.02 3.213 E-10
3.10.8.8 Display Settings
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
DISPlay:MODE INTern
COLBoth
BWBoth
AUTO
→ Display on internal LCD
→ Additional display on external color monitor
→ Additional display on external monochrome monitor
→ Additional display on external VGA monitor; the display mode (color
or monochrome) is adapted to the built-in LCD. The display is thus
optimized for the built-in LCD so that the contrast quality will not be
affected.
2.15.5
OPTIONS panel
Extrn Disp
→ INTERN ONLY
→ BOTH COLOR
→ BOTH B/W
→ BOTH AUTO
DISPlay:ANNotation[:ALL]ON
OFF → Display of measurement results and status
→ Result and status display cleared (FFT, sweep and IEC/IEEE-bus
operation speeded up).
2.15.5
OPTIONS panel
Meas Disp
→ ON
→ OFF
Ext. Keyboard:
CTRL D
DISPlay:ACTualize
ON
OFF
This command may be called from Universal Autorun Control UPD-K1 or via
the IEC/IEEE bus or by means of RS232 remote control.
→ Updates the graphics panel and repeats the update every time
commands are output which change the graphics display in the UPL,
eg DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:X [:SCALe]:AUTO ON.
→ The graphics panel is not updated not even after commands changing the
graphics display in the UPL.
Note:
To enhance speed, it is best to turn off the graphic when the remote-
control mode is selected. Graphics should only be activated when traces
are to be displayed.
No manual
control
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters
1078.2008.02 3.214 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SYSTem:DISPlay:READing:RATE
MAXSpeed
FSTSpeed
MEDSpeed
SLWSpeed
Presetting for manual control.
Determines the rate for the output of measured values in the result windows.
The setting is only effective in the continuous measurement mode. In the
case of sweeps and triggered measurements as well as with all
measurements via IEC/IEEE bus, results are always output at maximum
speed.
→ Max. output speed
→ 6 results/second
→ 3 results/second
→ 1 result/second
2.15.5
OPTIONS panel
Read Rate
→ MAX SPEED
→ 6/s
→ 3/s
→ 1/s
SYSTem:DISPlay:READing:RESolution <n> Presetting for manual control.
Sets the number of decimal digits for the display of measured values in the
result windows. With measurements via IEC/IEEE bus results are always
displayed with maximum resolution.
Decimal digits for the 6 result windows are specified by 6 numbers between 0
and 6 (higher numbers are interpreted as 6).
0: Automatic display of decimal digits
1 to 6: 1 to 6 decimal digits
Each number is assigned to a result window:
CH1
CH2
Function Input peak Frequency
Window 1
Window 2
Window 3
Window 4
Window 5
Window 6
SYSTem:DISPlay:READing:RESolution 112244
Window 6
Window 5
Window 4
Window 3
Window 2
Window 1
Leading zeros may be omitted so that for <n> = 34, for example, the result in
window 6 is displayed with 4 decimal digits, the result in window 5 with 3 and
the results in windows 1 to 4 without any decimal digits at all.
2.15.5
OPTIONS panel
Read Resol
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters
1078.2008.02 3.215 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SYSTem:DISPlay:TRACe[]:LOAD MANual
DEFault
ACOLor
ALINe
→ For each scan of a trace group (to be selected with the subsequent
command SYST:DISP:TRAC[1|2]:SEL <n>) a color and the line pattern
can be selected for the display.
→ Automatic assignment of color and line pattern to max. 17 scans for Trace
A and Trace B. All scans of Trace A are green uninterrupted with thin
lines, those of Trace B yellow dotted with thin lines.
→ Automatic assignment of color to 17 scans for Trace A and Trace B. ALL
scans of Trace A in uninterrupted thin lines, all scans of Trace B in dotted
thin lines.
→ Automatic assignment of line pattern to 17 scans of Trace A and Trace B.
All scans of Trace A in green, all scans of Trace B in yellow.
2.15.5.4
OPTIONS panel
Scan conf
→ MANUAL
→ DEFAULT
→ AUTO COLOR
→ AUTO LINE
SYSTem:DISPlay:TRACe[1|2]:SELect <n>
1 to17
Scan number of trace group to which a color or line pattern is to be assigned
with the two subsequent commands SYST:DISP:TRAC[1|2]:COL and
SYST:DISP:TRAC[1|2]:LINE for screen display.
2.15.5.4
OPTIONS panel
Scannr.(A)
Scannr.(B)
SYSTem:DISPlay:TRACe[1|2]:COLor GREen
YELLow
BLUE
CYAN
MAGenta
WHITe
BLACk
DGRay
LGRay
Assignment of color to the scan number specified with command
SYST:DISP:TRAC[1|2]:SEL <n> when color display is selected.
Shades of grey with monochrome display selected.
Newly assigned colors are only visible on the screen after the LOCAL mode
has been restored.
2.15.5.4
OPTIONS panel
Color (A) / (B)
→ GREEN
→ YELLOW
→ BLUE
→ CYAN
→ MAGENTA
→ WHITE
→ BLACK
→ DARK GRAY
→ LIGHT GRAY
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters
1078.2008.02 3.216 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SYSTem:DISPlay:TRACe[1|2]:LINE
SSOLid
SD
SP
SPD
DSOLid
DD
DP
DPD
Line patterns for the scan number specified with command
SYST:DISP:TRAC[1|2]:SEL <n>.
→ thin continuous line
→ dashed line
→ dotted line
→ dash-dot line
→ three-times-wide continuous line
→ dashed line
→ dotted line
→ dash-dot line
The newly assigned line pattern is only visible on the screen after the LOCAL
mode has been restored.
2.15.5.4
OPTIONS panel
Line (A) / (B)
→
→ ------
→ ......
→ .-.-.-
→
→ ======
→ ::::::
→ :=:=:=
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters
1078.2008.02 3.217 E-10
3.10.8.9 Version Display
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SYSTem:SOFTware:VERSion?SOFTware
SETUp
Query only
Query:
SYST:SOFT:VERS?
SOFT
SYST:SOFT:VERS?
SETU
The response is the
number of a version
(eg 3.05).
→ Version number of UPL software
→ Version number of setup
2.15.7
OPTIONS panel
VERSIONS ------
Software
Setup
SYSTem:AHARdware:VERSion?ABOard
ACODe
Query only
Query:
SYST:AHAR:VERS?
ABO
SYST:AHAR:VERS?
ACOD
The response is
either the number of a
version (eg 0.01) or
-NA- (Not Available) if
the board is not
installed.
→ Version number of analog board
→ Version number of generator source impedance with the
BAL output selected:
Query reply 0.00: generator source impedance 200 Ω
(standard value)
0.01: generator source impedance 150 Ω with the
standard generator source impedance changed
from 200 Ω to 150 Ω using the Modification Analog
Generator UPL-U3 (Order No. 1078.4900.02)
2.15.7
OPTIONS panel
VERSIONS ------
Anlg Board code
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters
1078.2008.02 3.218 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SYSTem:DHARdware:VERSion?CPUboard
DBOard
Query only
Query:
SYST:DHAR:VERS?
CPU
SYST:DHAR:VERS?
DBO
The response is the
number of a version
(eg 0.05).
→ CPU board 3.86 | 4.86 (386-CPU, 486-CPU)
→ Version number of digital board
2.15.7
OPTIONS panel
VERSIONS ------
CPU board
Digl. Board
SYSTem:OPTions:VERSion?alias
LDG B1
REMOte B4
DAUDio B2 | B29
Answer:
1.15 to 1.27 UPL16 (U8)
1.46 to 1.51 UPL-B2
2.16 to 2.23: UPL-B29
SPEaker B5
DAPRotocol B21
DAJItter B22
SQCOntrol B10
B33
B6
B8
The response is either the number
of an option (eg 0.01), INST or -
NA- (Not Available) if the board or
option are not installed.
Version display of options
→ Low Distortion Generator (UPL-B1)
→ Remote Control (UPL-
B4)
→ Digital Audio I/O (UPL-B2)
Digital Audio 96 kHz (UPL-B29)
Acoustic measurements on GSM mobile stations (UPL16)
→ Audio Monitor (UPL-B5)
→ Digital Audio Protocol (UPL-B21)
→ Jitter and Interface Test (UPL-B22)
→ Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10)
→ Line measurement to ITU-T33 (UPL-B33)
→ Extended analyzer functions (UPL-B6)
→ Mobile Phone Test Set (UPL-B8)
2.15.7
2.6.6
OPTIONS panel
OPTIONS -------
B1 Low Dist
B4 Rem Ctrl
B2 DigAudio
B5 Speaker
B21 DA Prot
B22 DA Jitt
B10 Seq Ctrl
ITU-T O33
B6 Coher
B8 PhoneTst
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters
1078.2008.02 3.219 E-10
3.10.8.10 Calibration
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
CALibrate:LDG:AUTO OFF
ONCE → No calibration of low-distortion generator
→ Triggers an automatic calibration of the low-distortion generator.
This should be after one hour of operation at the earliest.
2.15.6
OPTIONS panel
CALIBR. GEN
LDG Auto
→ OFF
→ ONCE
CALibrate:ZERO:AUTO OFF
ON
ONCE
→ No offset calibration
→ Offset calibration cyclic and after a change of analyzer/instrument.
→ Manual triggering of offset calibration; then reset to ON
2.15.6
OPTIONS panel
CALIBR. ANL
Zero Auto
→ OFF
→ ON
→ ONCE
CALibrate:JITTer:AUTO OFF
ONCE → No calibration of digital Phase to Ref measurement.
→ Manual triggering of automatic calibration of digital
Phase to Ref measurement; then reset to OFF.
2.15.6
OPTIONS panel
CALIBR. DIG
PhaseToRef
→ OFF
→ ONCE
CALibrate OFF
AUTO
DCC
LDG
→ No offset calibration.
Equivalent to CALibrate:ZERO:AUTO OFF.
→ Offset calibration cyclic and after a change of analyzer/instrument.
Equivalent to CALibrate:ZERO:AUTO ON.
→ Manual triggering of offset calibration; then reset to AUTO.
Equivalent to CALibrate:ZERO:AUTO ONCE.
→ Automatic calibration of low-distortion generator. This should be after one
hour of operation at the earliest.
Equivalent to CALibrate LDG:AUTO ONCE.
2.15.6
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters
1078.2008.02 3.220 E-10
3.10.8.11 Loading Speed for Setups and Analyzer Measurement Functions
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SYSTem:LSPeed FAST
SLOW
Speed for loading setups and analyzer measurement functions
→ Loading setups and analyzer functions can be speeded up while
FAST is active.
(considerably faster than SLOW), given the following
minor restrictions:
• During loading of setups and changing analyzer functions the
graphics system is not initialized, IEC/IEEE-bus commands for the
graphics systems have no effect and are rejected with an error
message. K1 commands UPLGTLU und UPLGTLG
cannot be used for graphic display (see
section 3.16.4.3, Basic Extensions).
• When analyzer measurement functions are changed, the currently set
function is not stored, ie
after switching back to the previously set function, the parameters
of the slower mode (SYST:LSP SLOW) will be set.
• When an *RST is performed, the output of measurement results
is suppressed so as if the command DISP:ANN OFF were
output. When the IEC/IEEE-bus is quit,
(LOCAL key or IEC/IEEE-bus command GTL) the slower load
mode is set without the above-mentioned restrictions.
→ without restrictions, therefore slower than FAST
(default setting).
No manual
operation
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Data Input/Output
1078.2008.02 3.221 E-10
3.10.9 Commands for Data Output
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe[1]:DATA1|2? Query only Depen
ding
on
FUNC
Returns the measured value of the 1st analyzer for RMS, RMSS, PEAK,
QPE, DC, THD, THDN, MDIST, DFD and WAF functions.
DATA1 selects input channel 1
DATA2 selects input channel 2.
3.15.8
No manual
control
Result display
SENSe2:DATA1|2? Query only V/FS Returns the measured value of the 2nd analyzer (peak voltage meter).
DATA1 selects input channel 1
DATA2 selects input channel 2.
3.15.8
No manual
control
Result display
SENSe3:DATA1|2? Query only Hz Returns the measured value of 3rd analyzer (frequency counter).
DATA1 selects input channel 1
DATA2 selects input channel 2.
3.15.8
No manual
control
Result display
SENSe4:DATA? Query only DEG Returns the measured value of the 4th analyzer (phase meter). 3.15.8
No manual
control
Result display
Write access to the measurement-result buffers is also possible with Universal Autorun Control (UPD-K1) or remote control (IEC/IEEE bus interface).
This is of particular interest for operation with BASIC macros:
• The measurement results calculated by a BASIC macro can be displayed in the usual measurement-result window.
• Any floating-point parameters and measurement results may be exchanged between the BASIC macro and the controller via the measurement-result buffers.
For a detailed example see 3.15.18 Call BASIC-Macro.
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Block Data Input/Output
1078.2008.02 3.222 E-10
3.10.10 Commands for Input/Output of Block Data
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
FORMat[:DATA] ASCIi
REAL
→ Determines the numeric format for block data only. Output of numbers with
sign, point and possibly exponent (default).
→ Determines the numeric format for block data only. Output in binary
form. This setting is not stored in the setup and set to ASCII each
time the UPL is switched on.
No manual
control
SENSe[1]:LIST:FREQuency
SOURce:LIST:FREQuency <n>{,<n>}
<n>{,<n>}
Hz These two commands are identical and specify the block data for a frequency
sweep or frequencies for a sequence of measurements. When limit or
equalization curves are specified, the frequencies are to be sorted in
ascending or descending order.
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SENSe[1]:LIST:FREQuency:POINts?
SOURce:LIST:FREQuency:POINts?<n>
0 to 1023
Query only
The two commands are identical and return the number of currently available
block data for the frequency axis.
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:LIST:VOLTage <n>{,<n>} V Specifies the block data for a voltage sweep or the output voltage for a
sequence of measurements.
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:LIST:VOLTage:POINts?<n>
0 to 1023
Query only
Returns the number of currently available block data for the voltage axis. 2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:LIST:ONTime <n>{,<n>} S Specifies the block data for a sweep of the on-time and off-time ratio of the
burst signal or of a sequence of measurements.
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:LIST:ONTime:POINts?<n>
0 to 1023
Query only
Returns the number of currently available block data for the on-time axis. 2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:LIST:INTerval <n>{,<n>} Specifies the block data for a sweep of the on-time to off-time ratio of the
burst signal or a sequence of measurements.
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Block Data Input/Output
1078.2008.02 3.223 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SOURce:LIST:INTerval:POINts?<n>
0 to 1023
Query only
Returns the number of currently available block data for the interval axis. 2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:LIST:DWELl<n>{,<n>} s Specifies the block data for the dwell time of a sweep or a measurement
sequence.
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:LIST:DWELl:POINts?<n>
0 to 1023
Query only
Returns the number of currently available block data for the dwell time. 2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:LIST:DWELl:CONTrol[:DATA] <n>{,<n>} X axis for the dwell time. 2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:LIST:DWELl:CONTrol:POINts?<n>
0 to 1023
Query only
Returns the number of currently available block data for the dwell time. 2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:VOLTage:EQUalize[:DATA] <n>{,<n>} Specifies the block data for the voltage axis of the equalization curve. 2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:VOLTage:EQUalize:POINts?<n>
0 to 1023
Query only
Returns the number of currently available block data for the voltage
equalization list.
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:EQUalize:CONTrol[:DATA] <n>{,<n>} Specifies the block data for the frequency axis of the equalization curve. 2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:EQUalize:CONTrol:POINts?<n>
0 to 1023
Query only
Returns the number of currently available block data for the frequency axis of
the equalization curve.
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Block Data Input/Output
1078.2008.02 3.224 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
SENSe:VOLTage:EQUalize[:DATA] <n>{,<n>} Block data for voltage axis of equalization curve for measurement functions
THD+N and FFT.
2.9.1.3
No manual
operation
SENSe:VOLTage:EQUalize:POINts?<n>
0 to 1024
Query only
Returns the number of currently available block data values of the voltage
equalization list for measurement functions THD+N and FFT.
2.9.1.3
No manual
operation
SENSe:EQUalize:CONTrol[:DATA] <n>{,<n>} Block data for frequency axis of equalization curve for measurement functions
THD+N and FFT.
2.9.1.3
No manual
operation
SENSe:EQUalize:CONTrol:POINts?<n>
0 to 1024
Query only
Returns the number of currently available block data values for the frequency
axis of the equalization curve for measurement functions THD+N and FFT.
2.9.1.3
No manual
operation
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer[:DATA] <n>{,<n>}1) Specifies the block data for the Y axis of the upper limit curve. 2.9.1.3
No manual
control
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:TRACe<n>{,<n>} Returns the block data for the y axis of the upper limit trace interpolated
along the x axis. The command trac:points? list1 gives the number of
x values, which were used for interpolation. It is the same as the number of
interpolated y values for the upper limit trace.
2.9.1.3
Keine
Handbedienung
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:POINts?<n>
0 to 1023
Query only
Returns the number of currently available block data for the Y axis of the
upper limit curve.
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:CONTrol[:DATA] <n>{,<n>} Specifies the block data for the X axis of the limit curves 2.9.1.3
No manual
control
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:CONTrol:POINts?<n>
0 to 1023
Query only
Returns the number of currently available block data for the X axis of the limit
curves.
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Block Data Input/Output
1078.2008.02 3.225 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer[:DATA] <n>{,<n>}1) Specifies the block data for the Y axis of the lower limit curve. 2.9.1.3
No manual
control
CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:TRACe<n>{,<n>} Returns the block data for the y axis of the lower limit trace interpolated along
the x axis. The command trac:points? list1 gives the number of x
values, which were used for interpolation. It is the same as the number of
interpolated y values for the lower limit trace.
2.9.1.3
Keine
Handbedienung
CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:POINts?<n>
0 to 1023
Query only
Returns the number of currently available block data for the Y axis of the
lower limit curve.
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:CONTrol[:DATA] <n>{,<n>} Specifies the block data for the X axis of the limit curves. 2.9.1.3
No manual
control
CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:CONTrol:POINts?<n>
Query only
Returns the number of currently available block data for the X axis of the limit
curves.
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
CALCulate:LIMit:FAIL? Query only Returns ON if Lim Upper values are exceeded or Lim Lower values are not
attained, otherwise OFF.
Lim Low
Lim Low Lim Low
Lim Upp
Lim Upp
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
Lim Upp
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
CALCulate:LIMit:REPort[:DATA]?<n>{,<n>}Query only Returns the block data of limit violations. Corresponds to the contents of a
Limt Report file as described in section 2.9.1.2 Loading and Storing of Series
of Measured Values and Block/List Data
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
CALCulate:LIMit:REPort:POINts?<n>
0 to 1023
Query only
Returns the number of currently available block data of limit violations. 2.9.1.3
No manual
control
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Block Data Input/Output
1078.2008.02 3.226 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
TRACe[:DATA] TRACe1, <n>{,<n>}
Query:
TRACe? TRACe1
1) Specifies the block data of the first measurement sequence (Y1 axis). 2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe:POINts?TRACe1
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? TRAC1
Query reply <n> =
0 to 1023
Returns the number of currently available block data of the first measurement
sequence (Y1 axis).
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe[:DATA] TRACe2, <n>{,<n>}
Query:
TRACe? TRACe2
1) Specifies the block data of the second measurement sequence (Y2 axis). 2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe:POINts?TRACe2,
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? TRAC2
Query reply <n> =
0 to 1023
Query only
Returns the number of the currently available block data of the second
measurement sequence (Y2 axis).
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe[:DATA] LIST1, <n>{,<n>}
Query:
TRACe? LIST1
2) Specifies the block data of the first sweep list (X axis). 2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe:POINts?LIST1 <n>
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? LIST1
Query reply <n> =
0 to 1023
Query only
Returns the number of the currently available block data of the first
sweep list (X axis).
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe[:DATA] LIST2, <n>{,<n>}
Query:
TRACe? LIST2
2) Specifies the block data of the second (convoluted, nested) sweep list (Z
axis).
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Block Data Input/Output
1078.2008.02 3.227 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
TRACe:POINts?LIST2
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? LIST2
Query reply <n> =
0 to 1023
Returns the number of the currently available block data of the second
(convoluted, nested) sweep list (Z axis).
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe[:DATA] REFerence1,<n>{,<n
>}
Query:
TRACe? REF1
Loads the running reference values for the Y axis. 2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe:POINts?REFerence1
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? REF1
Query reply <n> =
0 to 1023
Returns the number of the currently available block data for the Y axis of trace
A.
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe[:DATA], REFerence2,<n>{,<n
>}
Query:
TRACe? REF2
Loads the running reference values for the Y axis of trace B 2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe:POINts?REFerence2
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? REF2
Query reply <n> =
0 to 1023
Returns the number of the currently available block data for the Y axis of
trace B.
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe[:DATA], CREFerence1,<n>{,<
n>}
Query:
TRACe? CREF1
Loads the running reference values for the X axis of trace A. 2.9.1.3
No manual
control
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Block Data Input/Output
1078.2008.02 3.228 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
TRACe:POINts?CREFerence1
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? CREF1
Query reply <n> =
0 to 1023
Returns the number of the currently available block data for the X axis of
trace A.
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe[:DATA] CREFerence2,<n>{,<
n>}
Query:
TRACe? CREF2
Loads the running reference values for the X axis of trace B 2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe:POINts?CREFerence2
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? CREF2
Query reply <n> =
0 to 1023
Returns the number of the currently available block data for the X axis of
trace B.
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
1) Depending on DISPlay:TRACe:FEED and (with SENSe1:DATA) of SENSe1:FUNCtion
2) Depending on sweep selected for generator and analyzer.
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Status and Error Queries
1078.2008.02 3.229 E-10
3.10.11 Commands for Status and Error Queries
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
STATus:PRESet Resets the Enable registers of the OPERation, QUEStionable and
XQUEstionable registers to 0. See 3.7.5 Resetting the Status Reporting
Systems.
3.7.5
No manual
control
STATus:OPERation:COND? Query only Outputs the contents of the CONDition register as a decimal number (current
value of Operating Status of UPL). For the weighting of the individual bits see
3.7.3.4 STATus:OPERation Register
Reading out does not clear the register.
3.7.3.4
No manual
control
STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?Query only Outputs the content of the EVENt register as a decimal number. A bit set in
the EVENt register indicates a change of the corresponding bit in the
CONDition register. The entry in the PTRansition and NTRansition registers
determines whether a bit transition from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 causes an entry
in the EVENt register.
Reading out clears the register!
3.7.3.4
No manual
control
STATus:OPERation:ENABle <n>
.... 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0
...
....d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0
Example:
d2 and d5 set:
<n> = 36 (4 + 32)
Sets the ENABle mask which validates a bit in the EVENt register.
Example: When d5 is set in the ENABle mask, the "Waiting for Trigger" event
is set in the EVENt register provided the bit has changed.
Dafault setting: every bit reset (0)
3.7.3.4
No manual
control
STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <n> If a bit is set in the PTRansition register, the transition from 0 to 1 of the
corresponding bit in the CONDition register causes 1 to be entered in the
corresponding bit of the EVENt register provided the corresponding bit in the
ENABle mask is set.
Default setting: every bit reset (65535 or 0xFFFF)
3.7.3.4
No manual
control
STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <n> If a bit is set in the NTRansition register, a transition from 1 to 0 of the
corresponding bit in the CONDition register causes 1 to be entered in the
corresponding bit of the EVENt register provided the corresponding bit in the
ENABle mask is set.
Default setting: every bit reset (65535 or 0xFFFF)
3.7.3.4
No manual
control
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Status and Error Queries
1078.2008.02 3.230 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
STATus:QUEStionable:COND? Query only Outputs the status of the CONDition register (current value of Questionable
Status of UPL) as a decimal number. For the weighting of the individual bits
see 3.7.3.5 STATus:QUEStionable Register.
Reading out does not clear the register.
3.7.3.5
No manual
control
STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?Query only Outputs the contents of the EVENt register as a decimal number. A bit set in
the EVENt register indicates a change of the corresponding bit in the
CONDition register. The entry in the PTRansition and NTRansition registers
determines whether a bit transition from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 causes an entry
in the EVENt register.
Reading out clears the register!
3.7.3.5
No manual
control
STATus:QUEStionable: ENABle <n> See above. 3.7.3.5
No manual
control
STATus:QUEStionable: PTRansition <n> See above. 3.7.3.5
No manual
control
STATus:QUEStionable: NTRansition <n> See above. 3.7.3.5
No manual
control
STATus:XQUEstionable:COND? Query only Outputs the content of the CONDition register as a decimal number (current
value of XQuestionable Status of UPL). For the weighting of individual bits
see
3.7.3.6 STATus:XQUEStionable Register.
Reading out does not clear the register.
3.7.3.6
No manual
control
STATus:XQUEstionable[:EVENt]?Query only See above. 3.7.3.6
No manual
control
STATus:XQUEstionable: ENABle <n> See above. 3.7.3.6
No manual
control
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Status and Error Queries
1078.2008.02 3.231 E-10
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
STATus:XQUEstionable: PTRansition <n> See above. 3.7.3.6
No manual
control
STATus:XQUEStionable: NTRansition <n> See above. 3.7.3.6
No manual
control
SYSTem:VERSion?Query only Returns the number of the associated SCPI version by specifying the year
with decimal point and one decimal digit.
2.15.7
No manual
control
SYSTem:ERRor?Query only Returns the last error message out of the error message queue. Error
messages consist of a number followed by text. Negative error numbers are
SCPI-defined, positive numbers are device-specific. If no error occurred, the
output is 0, "No error"
If the queue gets too long, the error message:
-350, "Queue overflow" is output.
With *CLS and upon power-on of the device, all error messages are cleared.
3.3.2
No manual
control
SYSTem:COMMunication:GTL Return to manual operation.
This command is only required in the case of remote-control via the RS-232
interface but can also be used for IEC/IEEE-bus operation and Universal
Sequence Controller UPL-B10.
LACAL
keystroke
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Synchronization
1078.2008.02 3.232 E-10
3.10.12 Commands for Synchronization
Command Parameter Basic
unit Meaning Section
INITiate:CONTinuous ON
OFF → Presetting of continuous measurement.
→ Presetting of a single measurement which is triggered with
INITiate[:IMMediate] (see next command)!
2.11
START key
SINGLE key
INITiate[:IMMediate] Starts a single measurement. Command INITiate:CONTinuous ON|OFF
determines whether it is a continuous or a single measurement (see previous
command).
The two INITiate commands simulate the function of the START or SINGLE
key. The following commands are to be entered:
START key: INITiate:CONTinuous ON, INITiate[:IMMediate]
SINGLE key: INITiate:CONTinuous OFF, INITiate[:IMMediate]
2.11
START key
SINGLE key
INITiate:FORCeSTARt
SINGle
STOP
CONTinuous
→ • A measurement in progress is immediately aborted.
• Trailing pointer, average and peak values are reset.
• A new continuous measurement is started.
(identical with command "INIT:CONT ON")
→ • A measurement in progress is immediately aborted.
• A new measurement is started.
(identical with command INIT:CONT OFF)
→ An ongoing measurement is stopped as if the STOP/CONT key
was pressed during the measurement (identical with command ABORt ).
The measurement is continued with INIT:FORC CONT.
→ • A new continuous measurement is started.
• Trailing pointer, average and peak values are not reset.
This is only effective if the measurement was interrupted with INIT:FORC
STOP or ABOR or if the measurement was started with INIT:FORC SING or
INIT:CONT OFF and completed.
2.11
→ Taste START
→ Taste SINGLE
→ STOP function
of toggel key
STOP/CONT
→ CONT function
of toggel key
STOP/CONT
INITiate:NEXT <n> Has the same effect as turning the spinwheel by <n> steps or pressing the
cursor keys (n=1 or n= −1). Makes the next step in the case of a manual
sweep or moves the graphics cursor provided the graphics panel is active.
2.11
Spinwheel
ABORtStops a measurement as if the STOP/CONT key were actuated during an
ongoing measurement. With the command INIT:CONT ON the measurement
is resumed.
2.11
STOP/CONT key
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Binary Data via IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface
1078.2008.02 3.233 E-10
3.10.13 Binary Data via IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface
Command Parameters Meaning Section
MMEMory:DATA ’filename’, #<lele><le><binary data>
<lele>: Length of subsequent length information
of binary data
<le>: Length of subsequent binary data
<Binary data>: Any binary codes of any length
If ’filename’ contains no path information, the command stores the subsequent binary data in
the current working directory of the UPL. The current working directory of the UPL is the
directory specified under Work Dir in the FILE Panel of the UPL.
If ’filename’ contains a path that exists in the UPL, the binary data are stored in this path.
If ’filename’ contains a path that does not exist in the UPL, the error message "Could not
write to file" is output.
This command therefore allows the transfer of any files of any length from the process
controller to the UPL.
If a data record to be transferred to the UPL is in the form of a file, its precise length can be
determined by means of the DOS command DIR. The value thus obtained is to be specified
in the command MMEM:DATA under "Length of subsequent binary data".
To allow file transfer from a process controller to the UPL not only for experienced C- and
IEC/IEEE-bus programmers, the DOS programs IEC_BT.EXE and UPMD5.EXE will be
supplied with the UPL as from UPL software version 2.0 (see „Initial Steps“, „Transfer of File
to UPL“ and following).
Example: MMEM:DATA 'MYSETUP.SAC',#48561<any binary data>
MMEM:DATA '\UPL\USER\MYSETUP.SAC',#48561<any binary data>
3.10.13
3.17.5
No manual
control
Example:
#220
The ASCII character # initiates binary block transfer
Number of digits of subsequent length information in ASCII
Length in ASCII of binary data record in bytes
:MMEM:DATA ’filename’, < any binary data (20 bytes) >
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Binary Data via IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface
1078.2008.02 3.234 E-10
Command Parameters Explanation Section
MMEMory:CHECk?’filename’
Query only
This command determines the MD5 signature of a file.
If ’filename’contains no path information, the command determines the MD5 signature of
the specified file in the current working directory of the UPL. The current working directory of
the UPL is the directory specified under Work Dir in the FILE Panel of the UPL.
If ’filename’ contains a path that exists in the UPL, the MD5 signature of the associated
file is determined.
If ’filename’ contains a path that does not exist in the UPL, the error message "Execution
error" is output.
A 32-digit signature of the specified file is returned in response to the query.
To check whether the contents of a file were transferred error-free from the process controller
to the UPL, the MD5 signature method can be used to generate, from the UPL path
C:\UPL\IEC_EXAM and prior to the transfer, a digital signature of the file on the process
controller using the program UPMD5.EXE. After the transfer of the file to the UPL via the
IEC/IEEE bus, a digital signature of the transferred file is generated by means of the command
MMEMory:CHECk? ’filename’. If the two signatures agree, it can be assumed that the file
contents are identical and the transfer was therefore error-free. Moreover, it can be determined
in this way whether any subsequent modifications have been made to a file.
Example: MMEM:CHEC?, ’\UPL\USER\MYSETUP.SAC’
Reply (for example):
"4edb9481dc7b1fb27393c10c950cf9c1"
3.10.13
3.17.5
No manual
control
3.10.14 Settings without Corresponding IEC/IEEE-Bus Command
• Setting the contrast for UPL monochrome display
• Selection of remote control in the OPTIONS panel with remote via IEC/COM2
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.235 E-10
3.11 Alphabetical List of IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands
Command Parameter Section
ABORt2.11
Taste STOP/CONT
ARM:FREQuency:STARt
ARM:FREQuency:STOP <nu>
Value range determined by
instrument or function
2.6.4
ANLR-Panel
Start Stop
ARM:LEVel:MIN <nu>
Analog instruments
10 mV to 1000 V
Digital instrument
1µFS to 1.0 FS
2.6.4
ANLR-Panel
Min VOLT
ARM:VOLTage:STARt
ARM:VOLTage:STOP <nu>
Analog instruments
10 mV to 1000 V
Digital instrument
1 mFS to 1.0 FS
2.6.4
ANLR-Panel
Start Stop
CALCulate:EQUalize:FEED TRACe1
TRACe22.9.1.2
FILE-Panel
Volt Source
→ TRACE A
→ TRACE B
CALCulate:EQUalize:INVert ON
OFF 2.9.1.2
FILE-Panel
Invert 1/n
→ ON
→ OFF
CALCulate:EQUalize:NORMfreq <nu>
fmin to fmax
2.9.1.2
FILE-Panel
Norm Freq
CALCulate:LIMit:FAIL? <n>
Query only 2.10.7
keine
Handbedienung
CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:CONTrol:POINts?<n>
Query only 2.9.1.3
No manual
control
CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:CONTrol[:DATA] <n>{,<n>}2.9.1.3
No manual
control
CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:POINts?<n>
0 to 1023
Query only
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:STATeON
OFF 2.10.7
DISP-Panel
LIMIT CHECK
Mode
→ LIM LOWER
→ OFF
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.236 E-10
Command Parameter Section
CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:TRACe<n>{,<n>} 2.9.1.3
No manual
control
CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:VALue <nu> 2.10.7
DISP-Panel
Lim Lower
→ VALUE:
CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer[:DATA] <n>{,<n>}2.9.1.3
No manual
control
CALCulate:LIMit:ON TRACe1
TRACe2
TR1And2
2.10.7
DISP-Panel
Check
→ TRACE A
→ TRACE B
→ TRACE A+B
CALCulate:LIMit:REPort:POINts?<n>
0 to 1023
Query only
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
CALCulate:LIMit:REPort[:DATA]?<n>{,<n>}
Query only 2.9.1.3
No manual
control
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:CONTrol:POINts?<n>
0 to 1023
Query only
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:CONTrol[:DATA] <n>{,<n>}2.9.1.3
No manual
control
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:POINts?<n>
0 to 1023
Query only
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:STATeON
OFF 2.10.7
DISP-Panel
LIMIT CHECK
Mode
→ LIM UPPER
Mode
→ OFF
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:TRACe<n>{,<n>} 2.9.1.3
No manual
control
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:VALue <nu> 2.10.7
DISP-Panel
Lim Upper
→ VALUE:
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer[:DATA] <n>{,<n>}2.9.1.3
No manual
control
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.237 E-10
Command Parameter Section
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:AVERage <n>
1 to 256 2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
Average
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:AVERage:TCON
trol
NORMal
EXPonential 2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
Avg Mode
→ NORMAL
→ EXPONENTIAL
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:CENTer <nu>
Value range determined by
instrument or function
2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
Center
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:FFT S256
S512
S1K
S2K
S4K
S8K
2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
FFT Size
→ 256
→ 512
→ 1024
→ 2048
→ 4096
→ 8192
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:MTIMe?<nu>
Query only 2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
Meas Time
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:RESolution?<nu>
Query only 2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
Resolution
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:SPAN? <nu>
Query only 2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
Span
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:STARt?
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:STOP? <nu>
Query only 2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
Start / Stop
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:STATeOFF
ON 2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
POST FFT
→ OFF
→ ON
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:WINDow RECTangular
HANNing
BLACkman_harris
RIF1
RIF2
RIF3
HAMMing
FLATtop
KAISer
2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
Window
→ RECTANG...
→ HANN
→ BLACKMAN H
→ RIFE VINC 1
→ RIFE VINC 2
→ RIFE VINC 3
→ HAMMING
→ FLAT TOP
→ KAISER
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.238 E-10
Command Parameter Section
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:WINDow:BETAf
actor <n> = 1 to 20 2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
ß-Factor
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:ZOOM <n>
1 to 128
for iInstrument
A22 u. D48:
n = 1,2,4,8,16,32,64,128 A110:
n = 1,2,4,8,16
n = 1: Zooming aus
2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
Zoom-FFT
CALibrate OFF
Equivalent to
CAL:ZERO:AUTO OFF
AUTO
Equivalent to
CAL:ZERO:AUTO ON
DCC
Equivalent to
CAL:ZERO:AUTO ONCE
LDG
Equivalent to
CAL LDG:AUTO ONCE
2.15.6
CALibrate:JITTer:AUTO OFF
ONCE 2.15.6
OPTIONS-Panel
CALIBR. DIG
PhaseToRef
→ OFF
→ ONCE
CALibrate:LDG:AUTO OFF
ONCE 2.15.6
OPTIONS-Panel
CALIBR. GEN
Low Dist
→ OFF
→ ONCE
CALibrate:ZERO:AUTO OFF
ON
ONCE
2.15.6
OPTIONS-Panel
CALIBR. ANL
Zero Auto
→ OFF
→ ON
→ ONCE
CONFigure:DAI BRM
HRM 2.15.9
OPTIONS-Panel
Sampl Mode
→ BASE RATE
→ HIGH RATE
DISPlay:ACTualize ON
OFF No manual
control
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.239 E-10
Command Parameter Section
DISPlay:ANNotation[:ALL] ON
OFF 2.15.5
OPTIONS-Panel
Meas Disp
→ ON
→ OFF
Ext. Keyboard:
CTRL D
DISPlay:CONFiguration P
SP
AP
GP
FP
DP
OP
GAT
GAO
GAD
FAT
FAO
FAD
SHON
SHOFf
2.3.1
Keys Ext. UPL
keyboar
d
GEN ALT+G
ANLR ALT+A
FILT ALT+T
FILE ALT+F
DISP ALT+D
GRAPH ALT+R
ZOOM ALT+Z
SHOW I/O
ALT+I
OPTIONS ALT+O
DISPlay:MODE INTern
COLBoth
BWBoth
AUTO
2.15.5
OPTIONS-Panel
Extrn Disp
→ INTERN ONLY
→ BOTH COLOR
→ BOTH B/W
→ BOTH AUTO
DISPlay:PROTocol:CHSTatus?Query only
Response::
NO
LTC
YES
2.10.8
GRAPH-Panel
Display
DISPlay:PROTocol:ERRor:GENeral?Query only
Response::
UBB
SQB
NSYN
PRMB
SQLR
RERR
NONE
2.10.8
GRAPH-Panel
Display
DISPlay:PROTocol:ERRor:LCRC? <n>
Query only 2.10.8
GRAPH-Panel
Display
DISPlay:PROTocol:ERRor:PARity?<n>
Query only 2.10.8
GRAPH-Panel
Display
DISPlay:PROTocol:ERRor:RCRC? <n>
Query only 2.10.8
GRAPH-Panel
Display
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.240 E-10
Command Parameter Section
DISPlay:PROTocol:FORMat BINary
HEXadecimal
ASCii
FILE
2.10.8
DISP-Panel
Format
→ BIN
→ HEX
→ ASCII
→ FILE DEF
DISPlay:PROTocol:LR? Query only
Response:
EQUAL
DIFF’
2.10.8
GRAPH-Panel
Display
DISPlay:PROTocol:LVALbit?Query only
Response:
Y0
N1
2.10.8
GRAPH-Panel
Display
DISPlay:PROTocol:RVALbit?Query only
Response::
Y0
N1
2.10.8
GRAPH-Panel
Display
DISPlay:PROTocol:SELect LCHannelstatus
RCHannelstatus
LUSerdata
RUSerdata
2.10.8
DISP-Panel
Source
→ CHAN STAT L
→ CHAN STAT R
→ USER DATA L
→ USER DATA R
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT:LOCate <ny>[,<nx>] 2.10.1
DISP-Panel
X Pos, Y Pos
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT[:DATA] ’string’ 2.10.1
DISP-Panel
COMMENT
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X:LABel ’string’ 2.10.2
DISP-Panel
Unit/Label
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:AUToscale alias
AUTOscale 2.10.2
Softkey
F7 (AUTOSCALE)
→ F6 (ALL)
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:COUNt<n>
recorded:
1 to 100,000
stored:
17 traces max.
2.10
DISP-Panel
Scan Count
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[]:DATA1?
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[]:DATA2?
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[]:DATA3?
Query only 2.10.2
Display in
graphics window
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.241 E-10
Command Parameter Section
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[1]:MODE N12
D12
OFF
2.10.2
Softkey
F8: sel. Ο-CURS.
F9: (Ο-CURSOR)
→ F6 (A,B)
→ F7 (A-B)
→ F11 (ON/OFF)
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[1|2]ACTive 2.10.2
DISP-Panel
Softkey level 1
F8
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[1|2]:POSition <nu> 2.10.2
nicht über Softkey
bedienbar
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[1|2]:POSition:M
ODE MIN1
MIN2
I MAX1
MAX1
I MAX2
MAX2
MARKer1
NEXTmarker
VALue
2.10.2
Softkey
F8 sel. Ο-CURS
or *-CURS.
→ F10 (SET TO)
→ ----
→ ----
→ F6 (I MAX A)
→ F7 (MAX A)
→ F8 (I MAX B)
→ F9 (MAX B)
→ F10 (MARKER)
→ F11 (NXT
HARM)
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor2:MODE N12
D12
C12
HL1
HL2
HLD1
HLD2
OFF
2.10.2
Softkey
F8 sel. Ο-CURSOR
F9 sel. *-CURSOR
→ F6 (A,B)
→ F7 (A-B)
→ F8 (* - Ο)
→ F9 (HLINE)
→ A
→ F9 (HLINE)
→ B
→ F9 (HLINE)
→ ∆A
→ F9 (HLINE)
→ ∆B
→ F11 (ON/OFF)
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:INDex <n>
1 to 17 2.9.3.3
Tasten
PAGE UP /
PAGE DOWN
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:LABel ON
OFF 2.10.2
DISP-Panel
User Label
→ ON
→ OFF
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.242 E-10
Command Parameter Section
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:MODE DELete_bef_wr
WATerfall|CASCade
MAXHold
2.10
DISP-Panel
Mode
→ DEL BEF WR
→ WATERFALL
→ MAX HOLD
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:OPERation CURVeplot
LIST alias TLISt
ERRors
BARGraph
SPECtrum
FFTList
FFTErrors
PROTocol
AUToprotocol alias AUTOprotocol
2.10
DISP-Panel
OPERATION
→ CURVE PLOT
2.10.2
→ SWEEP LIST
2.10.4
→ SWP LIM REP
2.10.4
→ BARGRAPH
2.10.2
→ SPECT LIST
2.10.8
→ SPC LIM REP
2.10.6
PROTOCOL
2.10
2.10.8
→ PROTO AUTO
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:X:SPACing LINear
LOGarithmic 2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:X[:SCALe]:AUTO ON
OFF 2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Scale
→ AUTO
→ MANUAL
or
Softkey
F7 (AUTOSCALE)
→ F9 (X)
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:X[:SCALe]:LEFT
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:X[:SCALe]:RIGHT <nu> 2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Left
Right
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:X[:SCALe]:RLEVel <nu> 2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Reference
→ VAQLUE
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:X[:SCALe]:UNIT V
Hz
s
and so on
see 3.10.4 Units for IEC
Measurement Results
2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Unit
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.243 E-10
Command Parameter Section
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:Y:AUTO ONCE
OFF 2.10.2
DISP-Panel
Scale
→ AUTO ONCE
→ MANUAL
ONCE via Softkey
F7 (AUTOSCALE)
→ F7 (A)
→ F8 (B)
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <nu> 2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Reference
→ VALUE
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:Y[:SCALe]:UNIT <u>
see 3.10.4 Units for IEC
Measurement Results
2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Unit
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:ZOOM <n>
0
1
–1
2
3
4
2.10.2
Softkey
F10 (ZOOM)
→ F10 (UNZOOM)
→ F6 (AT o UP)
→ F7 (AT o
DOWN)
→ F8 (CEN TO o)
→ F9 (o TO *)
→ F11 (UNDO)
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1]:Y:LABel 'string' 2.10.2
DISP-Panel
Unit/Label
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:CURVeOFF
ON 2.10.2
Softkey
→ F6 (CURVE)
→ F6 (A ON/OFF)
→ F7 (B ON/OFF)
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:FEED 'SENSe1:DATA1'
'SENSe1:DATA2'
'SENSe2:DATA1'
'SENSe2:DATA2'
'SENSe3:DATA1'
'SENSe3:DATA2'
’HOLD'
'FILE'
'DFILe’
'OFF'
2.10.1
DISP-Panel
TRACE A/B
→ FUNC CH1
→ FUNC CH2
→ INP RMS CH1
→ INP RMS CH2
→ FREQ CH1
→ FREQ CH2
→ PHASE
→ GROUP DEL
→ HOLD
→ FILE
→ DUAL FILE
→ OFF
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.244 E-10
Command Parameter Section
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:MARKer:HARMonics ON
OFF 2.10.2
Softkey
F11 (MARKER)
F6 (TRACE A)
or
F7 (TRACE B)
selects
→ F10 (HARM)
on/off
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:MARKer:MODE MAXimum
CURSor
OFF
2.10.2
Softkey
F11 (MARKER)
F6 (TRACE A)
or
F7 (TRACE B)
selects
→ MAX
→ CURSOR
→ VIEW OFF
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y:SPACing LINear
LOGarithmic 2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO ONCE
OFF 2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Scale
→ AUTO ONCE
→ MANUAL
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:BOTTom <nu> 2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Bottom
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:NORMaliz
e<nu>
10-12 to 106 or
–200 dB to 120 dB
2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Normalize
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:NORMaliz
e:MODE CURSor[1] (o-Cursor)
CURSor2 (*-Cursor)
VALue
2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Normalize
→ o-Cursor
→ *-Cursor
→ VALue
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.245 E-10
Command Parameter Section
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:M
ODE VALue
MAXimum
CURSor[1]
CURSor 2
FILE
HOLD
OTRAce
CH1Meas
CH2Meas
GENTrack
IFILe
REF997
REF1000
2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Reference
→ VALUE
→ MAX
→ oCURSOR
→ *CURSOR
→ FILE
→ HOLD
→ OTHER TRACE
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ GEN TRACK
→ FILE INTERN
→ REF 997 Hz
→ REF 1000 Hz
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:TOP <nu> 2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Top
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe2:Y:LABel ’string’2.10.2
DISP-Panel
Unit/Label
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe2:Y[:SCALe]:EQUal ON
OFF 2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Scale B
→ EQUAL A
→ NOT EQUAL A
FORMat[:DATA] ASCIi
REAL No manual
control
HCOPy:ABORt2.14
Taste H COPY
or CTRL F8
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.246 E-10
Command Parameter Section
HCOPy:DESTination PRSPc alias PRINter
PLHPgl alias PLOTter
PRPS
PRHPgl
FIPCx, ’filename.PCX’ alias
PCXFile, ’name.PCX’
FIHPgl, ’filename.GL’ alias
HPGLfile, ’name.GL’
FIPS, ’filename.PS’
FIEPs, ’filename.EPS’
Query response:
PRIN
PLOT
PRHP
PRPS
PCXF
HPGL
FIPS
FIEP
2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
Destin
(Ziel/Format)
→ PRINTR/SPC
→ PLOTTR/HPGL
→ PRINTR/HPGL
→ PRINTR/PS
→ FILE/PCX
→ FILE/HPGL
→ FILE/PS
→ FILE/EPS
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor ON
OFF 2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
COLOR
→ ON
→ OFF
HCOPy:DEVice:PRINter <n> 2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
Printname
HCOPy:DEVice:RESolution HIGH
MEDium
LOW
2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
Prn Resol
→ HIGH
→ MEDIUM
→ LOW
HCOPy:ITEM ALL
GRATicule
TRACe
2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
Copy
→ SCREEN
→ CURVE/GRID
→ CURVE
HCOPy:ITEM:FRAMeWHITe
FDEFined 2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
Frame
→ WHITE
→ FILE DEF
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.247 E-10
Command Parameter Section
HCOPy:ITEM:LABel:STATeON
OFF 2.14
Taste H COPY
or Ctrl F8
HCOPy:PAGE:LENGth?<n>
Query only 2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
Prn Height
HCOPy:PAGE:LMARgin <n>
0 to 80 2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
LEFT MRGN
HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape
PORTtrait 2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
ORIENTATION
→ LANDSCAPE
→ PORTRAIT
HCOPy:PAGE:SCALe:X<n>
0.1 to 10 2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
X-SCALING
HCOPy:PAGE:SCALe:Y<n>
0.1 to 10 2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
Y-SCALING
HCOPy:PAGE:WIDTh?<n>
Query only 2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
Prn Width,
HCOPy:PLADdress <n>
0 to 31 2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
→ IEC Adr
HCOPy:PLOTs<n>
1 to 6 2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
Plots/Page
HCOPy:PLPort COM2
LPT1
IEC
2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
Plot on
→ COM 2
→ LPT 1
→ IEC BUS
HCOPy:SIZE
A4
LETTer
2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
Paper Size
→ A4
→ LETTER
HCOPy:WAIT 2.14
No manual
control
HCOPy[:IMMediate] CNF
CF
NCNF
NCF
CONFig
2.14
Taste H COPY or
CTRL F8
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.248 E-10
Command Parameter Section
INITiate:CONTinuous ON
OFF 2.11
Taste START
Taste SINGLE
INITiate:FORCe
STARt
SINGle
STOP
CONTinuous
2.11
→ Taste START
→ Taste SINGLE
→ STOP function
of toggel key
STOP/CONT
→ CONT function
of toggel key
STOP/CONT
INITiate:NEXT <n> 2.11
Drehrad
INITiate[:IMMediate] 2.11
Taste START
Taste SINGEL
INPut:FILTer[:LPASs]:FREQuency <n> Query only
10 Hz | 20 Hz 2.6.1
ANLR-Panel
Min Freq
INPut[]:AUDiobits <n>
Value range see 2.6.3
Configuration of the Digital
Analyzer
2.6.3
ANLR-Panel
Audio Bits
INPut[]:SAMPle:FREQuency <nu>
Opt. UPL-B2 (Digital Audio I/O)
27 kHz to 55 kHz
Opt. UPL-B29 im Base Rate Mode
40 kHz to 55 kHz
Opt. UPL-B29 im High Rate Mode
40 kHz to 106 kHz
2.6.3
ANLR-Panel
Sample Frq
→ VALUE:
INPut[]:SAMPle:FREQuency:MODE F32
F44
F48
F88
F96
VALue
AUTO
CHSTatus
2.6.3
ANLR-Panel
Sample Frq
→ 32 kHz
→ 44.1 kHz
→ 48 kHz
→ 88.2 kHz
→ 96.0 kHz
→ VALUE:
→ AUTO
→ CHAN STATUS
INPut[]:SELect CH1
CH2
CH1And2
CH1Is2
CH2Is1
BOTH
2.6.2
2.6.3
ANLR-Panel
CHANNEL(s)
→ 1
→ 2
→ 1 & 2
→ 1 ≡ 2
→ 2 ≡ 1
→ BOTH
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.249 E-10
Command Parameter Section
INPut[1|2]:COUPling AC
DC 2.6.2
ANLR-Panel
CH1 Coupl
CH2 Coupl
→ AC
→ DC
INPut[1|2]:IMPedance R300
R600
R200K
2.6.2
ANLR-Panel
Imped
→ 300 Ω
→ 600 Ω
→ 200 kΩ
INPut[1|2]:LOW FLOat
GROund 2.6.2
ANLR-Panel
Common
→ FLOAT
→ GROUND
INPut[1|2]:TYPE BALanced
GEN1
GEN2
AESebu
SPDif
OPTical
INTern
2.6.2
2.6.3
ANLR-Panel
Input
→ BAL XLR
→ GEN1
→ GEN2
→ GEN CROSSED
→ BAL (XLR)
→ UNBAL (XLR)
→ OPTICAL
→ INTERN
INSTrument[1]:NSELect 1
32.5.1
GEN-Panel
INSTRUMENT
→ ANALOG
→ DIGITAL
INSTrument[1][:SELect] A25
D48 2.5.1
GEN-Panel
INSTRUMENT
→ ANALOG
→ DIGITAL
INSTrument2:NSELect 1
2
4
2.6.1
ANLR-Panel
INSTRUMENT
→ ANLG 22 kHz
→ ANLG 110 kHz
→ DIGITAL
INSTrument2[:SELect] A22
A110
D48
2.6.1
ANLR-Panel
INSTRUMENT
→ ANLG 22 kHz
→ ANLG 110 kHz
→ DIGITAL
MMEMory:CDIRectory ’pathname’2.9.2
FILE-Panel
Work Dir
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.250 E-10
Command Parameter Section
MMEMory:CHECk?’filename’3.10.13
3.15.20
3.17.5
keine
Handbedienung
MMEMory:COPY ’filename1’,’filename2’2.9.2
FILE-Panel
Copy + To
MMEMory:DATA ’filename’3.10.13
3.15.20
3.17.5
keine
Handbedienung
MMEMory:DELete ’filename’2.9.2
FILE-Panel
Delete
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST LIMUpper, ’filename’
Query-Form
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? LIMU
2.10.7
DISP-Panel
Lim Upper
→ FILE + filename
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST LIMLower, ’filename’
Query-Form
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? LIML
2.10.7
DISP-Panel
Lim Lower
→ FILE + filename
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST EQUalize,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? EQU
2.5.4.3
2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
Equal File
→ FILE + filename
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST ARBitrary,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? ARB
RANDom,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? RAND
2.5.4.9
2.5.4.10
GEN-Panel
Shape File
→ FILE + filename
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST DWELl,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? DWEL
2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Dwell File
→ FILE + filename
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST FREQuency[1|2],’filename’
Query-Form
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? FREQ[1|2]
2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
FREQ FILE
→ FILE + filename
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST FREQuency,’filename’
Query-Form
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? FREQ
2.6.5.3
2.9.1.3
ANLR-Panel
SWEEP CTRL
→ FILE + filename
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.251 E-10
Command Parameter Section
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST INTerval,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? INT
2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN-Panel
INTV FILE
→ FILE + filename
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST ONTime,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? ONT
2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN-Panel
ONTIM FILE
→ FILE + filename
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST VOLTage[1|2],’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? VOLT[1|2]
2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
VOLT FILE
→ FILE + filename
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST DWELl2,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? DWEL2
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN:
Dwell File
→ FILE + filename
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST FREQuency2,’filename’
Query-Form
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? FREQ2
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN
FREQUENCY
FREQ FILE
→ FILE + filename
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST VOLTage2,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? VOLT2
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN
VOLTAGE | AMPL
VOLT FILE
→ FILE + filename
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST EQUalize,’filename’.
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? EQU
2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
Equal.File
→ FILE + filename
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST EQUalize,’filename’
Query form:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? EQU
2.5.4.1.1
GEN-Panel
Equal.File
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST SENSe, ’filename’2.6.5.7
2.6.5.12
ANL Panel
Equal. file
MMEMory:LOAD:LPGC, ’filename’2.5.3.2
GEN-Panel
Filename
MMEMory:LOAD:PAC, ’filename’2.10.8
DISP-Panel
Proto File
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.252 E-10
Command Parameter Section
MMEMory:LOAD:PAU, ’filename’2.10.8
DISP-Panel
Proto File
MMEMory:LOAD:PGU, ’filename’2.5.3.2
GEN-Panel
Filname
MMEMory:LOAD:RPGC, ’filename’2.5.3.2
GEN-Panel
Filename
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe0|2|4, ’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:STAT? 0
MMEM:LOAD:STAT? 2
MMEM:LOAD:STAT? 4
2.9.1.1
FILE-Panel
Mode / Filename
MMEMory:LOAD:TRACeTRACe[1|2],’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:TRAC? TRAC[1|2]
2.10.1
DISP-Panel
TRACE A/B
→ FILE + Filename
MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe[1|2]REFTrace,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:TRAC[1|2]? REFT
2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Reference
→ FILE +
Reference
MMEMory:STORe:FORMat BIN
ASCii
EXPort
2.9.1.2
FILE-Panel
Format
→ REAL
→ ASCII
→ EXPORT
MMEMory:STORe:INFOtext ’string’2.9.1.1
FILE-Panel
Info Text
MMEMory:STORe:LIST LIST[1|2], ’filename’
DWELl[1|2], ’filename’
ERRors, ’filename’
LIMUpper, ’filename’
LIMLower, ’filename’
EQUalize, ’filename’
Query:
MMEM:STOR:LIST? LIST[1|2]
MMEM:STOR:LIST? DWEL[1|2]
MMEM:STOR:LIST? LIMU
MMEM:STOR:LIST? LIML
MMEM:STOR:LIST? EQU
2.9.1.2
FILE-Panel
Store
→ X-Axis
→ Z-Axis
→ DWEL VALUE
→ LIM REPORT
→ LIM UPPER
→ LIM LOWER
→ EQUALIZATN
MMEMory:STORe:STATe0|2,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:STOR:STAT? 0
MMEM:STOR.STAT? 2
2.9.1.1
FILE-Panel
Mode / Filename
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.253 E-10
Command Parameter Section
MMEMory:STORe:STATe:RONLyON
OFF 2.9.1.1
FILE-Panel
Attrib
→ READ ONLY
→ READ/WRITE
MMEMory:STORe:TRACeTRACe[1|2],’filename’
TR1And2,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:STOR:TRAC? TRAC[1|2]
MMEM:STOR:TRAC? TR1A
2.9.1.2
FILE-Panel
Store
→ TRACE A
→ TRACE B
→ TRACE A+B
OUTPut ON
OFF 2.13
Taste
OUTPUT OFF
OUTPut:AUDiobits <n> = 8 to 24 2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Audio Bits
OUTPut:DIGital:CSIMulator OFF
SIMLong 2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Cable Sim
→ OFF
→ LONG CABLE
OUTPut:DIGital:REFerence:FEED AINPut
AINReclock
AOUTput
RGENerator
2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Ref Out
→ AUDIO IN
→ AUD IN RCLK
→ AUDIO OUT
→ REF GEN
OUTPut:DIGital:SYNC:FEED AIPut
GCLock
RINPut
SPLL
2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Sync Out
→ AUDIO IN
→ GEN CLK
→ REF IN
→ SYNC PLL
OUTPut:DIGital:SYNC:TYPE WCLock
BCLock 2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Type
→ WORD CLK
→ BIPHASE CLK
OUTPut:DIGital:UNBalanced:FEED AOUTput
AINPut 2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Unbal Out
→ AUDIO OUT
→ AUDIO IN
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.254 E-10
Command Parameter Section
OUTPut:IMPedance R10
R200
R150 (Query response = R200)
R600
2.5.2
GEN-Panel
Impedance
→ 10 Ω
→ 200 Ω
→ 150 Ω
→ 600 Ω
OUTPut:SAMPle:FREQuency <nu>
, Opt. UPL-B2 (Digital Audio I/O):
27 kHz to 55 kHz (UPL-B2)
Opt. UPL-B29 (Dig. Audio 96 kHz):
40 kHz to 106
2.5.3
GEN-Panel
OUTPut:SAMPle[:FREQuency]:MODE F32
F44
F48
F88
F96
EXTern
SYNChron
VALue
2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Sample Freq
→ 32 kHz
→ 44.1 kHz
→ 48 kHz
→ 88.2 kHz
→ 96 kHz
→ EXTERN
→ SYNCHRON
→ VALUE:
OUTPut:SELect OFF
CH1
CH2
CH2Is1
2.5.2
2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Channel(s)
→ OFF
→ 1
→ 2
→ 2 ≡ 1
OUTPut:SIGNal:BALanced:LEVel <nu> 2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Bal Vpp
OUTPut:SIGNal:LEVel <nu> 2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Unbal Vpp
OUTPut:TYPE BALanced
UNBalanced 2.5.2
GEN-Panel
Output
→ BAL
→ UNBAL
OUTPut:VALidity CH1And2
NONE 2.5.3.2
GEN-Panel
Validity
OUTPut2:IMPedance R10
R200
R600
2.5.5
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN:
Impedance
→ 10 Ω
→ 200 Ω
→ 600 Ω
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.255 E-10
Command Parameter Section
OUTPut2:SELect OFF
CH1
CH2
CH2Is1
2.5.5
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN:
Channel(s)
→ OFF
→ 1
→ 2
→ 2 ≡ 1
OUTPut2:TYPE UNBalanced
BALanced 2.5.5
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN:
Output
→ UNBAL
→ BAL
SENSe:DIGital:FEED ADATa
JPHase
CINPut
2.6.3.1
ANLR-Panel
Meas Mode
→ AUDIO DATA
→ JITTER/PHAS
→ COMMON/INP
SENSe:DIGital:SYNC:REFerence GCLock
PLLVari
PLL32
PLL44
PLL48
PLL88
PLL96
2.6.3
ANLR-Panel
Related to
→ GEN CLK
→ VARI (PLL)
→ 32.0 (PLL)
→ 44.1 (PLL)
→ 48.0 (PLL)
→ 88,2 (PLL)
→ 96.0 (PLL)
SENSe:DIGital:SYNC:SOURce AINPut
RINPut 2.6.3
ANLR-Panel
Sync To
→ AUDIO IN
→ REF IN
SENSe:EQUalize:CONTrol:POINts?<n>
0 to 1024
Query only
2.9.1.3
No manual
operation
SENSe:EQUalize:CONTrol[:DATA] <n>{,<n>}2.9.1.3
No manual
operation
SENSe:FREQuency:FACTor <nu> MLT
1 to 20 for RMS-Sel. measurement 2.6.5.3
2.6.5.23
ANLR-Panel
FREQ MODE
→ Factor
SENSe:SWEep:SYNC NORMal
BLOCk2.6.5.1
2.6.5.23
ANLR-Panel
Sweep Mode
→ NORMAL
→ BLOCK
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.256 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SENSe:UFILter[1 to 9]:ORDer N4
N8 2.7.2
FILTER-Panel
Order
→ 4
→ 8
SENSe:VOLTage:EQUalize:POINts?<n>
0 to 1024
Query only
2.9.1.3
No manual
operation
SENSe:VOLTage:EQUalize[:DATA] <n>{,<n>}2.9.1.3
No manual
operation
SENSe:VOLTage:EQUalize[:STATe]
ON
OFF
2.6.5.7
2.6.5.12
ANL Panel
Equalizer
→ ON
→ OFF
SENSe:VOLTage:INTV:MODE
OFF
FORever
SMOoth
EDGE
2.6.5.24
ANLR-Panel
Max Hold
→ OFF
→ FOREVER
→ SLOW DECAY
→ FAST DECAY
SENSe:VOLTage:INTV:MODE
OFF
ON
2.6.5.25
ANLR-Panel
Max Hold
→ OFF
→ ON
SENSe[]:POWer:REFerence:RESistance <nu>
1 mΩ to 100 kΩ2.4 (RREF)
2.6.2
ANLR-Panel
Ref Imped
SENSe[]:VOLTage:RANGe[1|2]:AUTO ON
OFF 2.6.22.6.2
ANLR-Panel
Range
→ AUTO
SENSe[]:VOLTage:RANGe[1|2]:LOWer <nu>
Value range see 2.6.2
Configuration of the Analog
Analyzers
2.6.2
ANLR-Panel
Range
→ LOWER
SENSe[]:VOLTage:RANGe[1|2][:UPPer] <nu>
Value range see 2.6.2
Configuration of the Analog
Analyzers
2.6.2
ANLR-Panel
Range
→ FIX
SENSe[1]:BWIDth[:RESolution]
gleichbedeutend mit
SENSe[1]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]
<nu>
Value range determined by
instrument or function
2.6.5.3
ANLR-Panel
Bandwidth
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.257 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SENSe[1]:BWIDth[:RESolution]:MODE
gleichbedeutend mit
SENSe[1]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:MODE
PPCT1
PPCT3
PTOCt
POCT12
PFIX
PFASt
SPCT1
SPCT3
STOCt
SOCT12
SFIX
SFASt
2.6.5.3
ANLR-Panel
Bandwidth
→ BP 1%
→ BP 3 %
→ BP 1/3 OCT
→ BP 1/12 OCT
→ BP FIX:
→ BP FAST
→ BS 1%
→ BS 3 %
→ BS 1/3 OCT
→ BS 1/12 OCT
→ BS FIX:
→ BS FAST
SENSe[1]:CHANnel:DELay <nu>
-10 to 10 s 2.6.5.12
2.6.5.22
ANLR-Panel
Chan Delay
SENSe[1]:DATA1|2? <n>
Query only 3.15.8
Result display
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i> <i>*) = 1 to 3
OFF
Query returns name of the filter
switched on:
UFIL1
:
UFIL9
AWE
CMES
CCIT
CCIR
CCIU
DEMP5015
DEMP50
DEMP75
DEMP17
WRUM
URUM
DCN
CARM
IECT
JITT
2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:AWEighting[:STATe] <i>
1 to 3
ON|OFF
2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ A Weighting
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:CARM[:STATe] <i>
1 to 3
ON|OFF
2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ CCIR ARM
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:CCIR[:STATe] <i>
1 to 3
ON|OFF
2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ CCIR wtd
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.258 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:CCITt[:STATe] <i>
1 to 3
ON|OFF
2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ CCITT
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:CCIUnweight[:STATe] <i>
1 to 3
ON|OFF
2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ CCIR unwtd
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:CMESsage[:STATe] <i>
1 to 3
ON|OFF
2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ C MESSAGE
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:DCNoise[:STATe] <i>
1 to 3
ON|OFF
2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ DC NOISE HP
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:DEMPhasis17[:STATe] <i>
1 to 3
ON|OFF
2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ DEEMPH J.17
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:DEMPhasis50[:STATe] <i>
1 to 3
ON|OFF
2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ DEEMPH 50
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:DEMPhasis5015[:STATe] <i>
1 to 3
ON|OFF
2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ DEEM 50/15
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:DEMPhasis75[:STATe] <i>
1 to 3
ON|OFF
2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ DEEMPH 75
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:IECTuner[:STATe] <i>
1 to 3
ON|OFF
2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ IEC Tuner
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:JITTer[:STATe] <i>
1 to 4
ON | OFF
2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ JITTER wtd
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:UFILter1...:UFILter9[:STATe] <i>
1 to 3
ON|OFF
2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:URUMble[:STATe] <i>
1 to 3
ON|OFF
2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ RUMBLE unw
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.259 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SENSe[1]:FILTer<i>:WRUMble[:STATe] <i>
1 to 3
ON|OFF
2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ RUMBLE wtd
SENSe[1]:FILTer2:..... 2.7.1
ANLR panel
Filter
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:APERture:MODE
FAST
PRECision
2.6.5.19
ANLR-Panel
Meas Time
→ FAST
→ PRECISION
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:LIMit:LOWer <nu>
Value range determined by
instrument or function
2.6.5.7
2.6.5.23
2.6.5.24
2.6.5.25
ANLR-Panel
→ Frq Lim Low
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:LIMit:UPPer <nu>
Value range determined by
instrument or function
2.6.5.7
2.6.5.23
2.6.5.24
2.6.5.25
ANLR-Panel
→ Frq Lim Upp
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:MODE
FIXed|CW
SWEep
LIST
MULTisine
GENTrack
CH1
CH2
2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
SWEEP CTRL
→ OFF
→ AUTO SWEEP
MANU SWEEP
→ AUTO LIST
MANU LIST
→GEN MLTSINE
FREQ MODE
→ GEN TRACK
→ FREQ CH1
→ FREQ CH2
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:STARt
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:STOP <nu>
Value range determined by
instrument or function
2.6.5.3
ANLR-Panel
SWEEP CTRL
→ Start Stop
SENSe[1]:FREQuency[:FIXed|CW] <nu>
Value range determined by
instrument or function
2.6.5.3
ANLR-Panel
FREQ MODE
→ FIX
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.260 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion ’OFF’
’RMS’
’RMSSelectiv’
’PEAK’
’QREak’
’DC’
’THD’
’THDNsndr’
’MDISt’
’DFD’
’WAF’
’POLarity’
’FFT’
’FILTersimulation’
’WAVeform’
’COHerence’
’RUBBuzz’
’PROTocol’
’THIRdoct’
2.6.5
ANLR-Panel
FUNCTION
→ OFF
→ RMS & S/N
→ RMS SELECT
→ PEAK & S/N
→ QPK & S/N
→ DC
→ THD
→ THD+N/SINAD
→ MOD DIST
→ DFD
→ WOW & FL
→ POLARITY
→ FFT
→ FILTER SIM.
→ WAVEFORM
→ COHERENCE
→ RUB & BUZZ
→ PROTOCOL
→ THIRD OCT
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion ’OFF’
’RMS’
’RMSSelectiv’
’PEAK’
’QPEak’
’DC’
’THD’
’THDNsndr’
’MDISt’
’DFD’
’WAF’
’POLarity’
’FFT’
’FILTersim’
’WAVeform’
’PROTocol’’
TWELvthoct’
2.6.5
ANLR-Panel
FUNCTION
→ OFF
→ RMS & S/N
→ RMS SELECT
→ PEAK & S/N
→ QPK & S/N
→ DC
→ THD
→ THD+N/SINAD
→ MOD DIST
→ DFD
→ WOW & FL
→ POLARITY
→ FFT
→ FILTER SIM.
→ WAVEFORM
→ PROTOCOL
→ 12th OCTAVE
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:DCSuppression ON
OFF 2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
DC Suppres
→ ON
→ OFF
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:DISTortion <n> 2.6.5.6
ANLR-Panel
→ di2468
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:DMODeFAST
PRECision 2.6.5.6
2.6.5.7
2.6.5.8
2.6.5.9
ANLR-Panel
Dyn Mode
→ FAST
→ PRECISION
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.261 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:MCOunt
T30
T32
2.6.5.24
ANLR-Panel
Line Count
→ 30
→ 32
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:MMODe
PPEak
NPEak
PTOPeak
PABSolut
SELectdi
LSELectdi
DALL
LDALl
DODD
LDODd
DEVen
LDEVen
THDN
LTHDn
SNDRatio
NOISe
LNOise
D2_268 alias D2
D3_268 alias D3
D2_118
D3_118
STANdard
COMPressed
USAMpl
O33
2.6.5.4
ANLR-Panel
Meas Mode
→ PK +
→ PK -
→ PK to PK
→ PK abs
2.6.5.6
→ SELECT di
→ LEV SEL di
→ All di
→ LEV All di
→ All odd di
→ LEV odd di
→ All even di
→ LEV even di
2.6.5.7
→ THD+N
→ LEVEL THD+N
→ SINAD
→ NOISE
→ LEVEL NOISE
2.6.5.9
→ d2 (IEC268)
→ d3 (IEC268)
→ d2 (IEC118)
→ d3 (IEC118)
2.6.5.14
→ STANDARD
→ COMPRESSED
→ UNDERSAMP
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:... 2.3.4.2
ANLR-Panel
Fnct Settl
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:COUNt <n>
EXP | FLAT:
2 to 6
AVER:
2 to 100
2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Samples
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:MODE OFF
EXPonential
FLAT
AVERage
2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Settling
→ OFF
→ EXPonential
→ FLAT
→ AVERage
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:RESolution <nu>
Value range and units are
determined by instrument or
function
see 2.6.5.1
2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Resolution
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.262 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:TOLerance <n>
0.001 to 10 % 2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Tolerance
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:TOUT <nu> 0.001 to 10 s 2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Timeout
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SNSequence ON
OFF 2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
S/N Sequ
→ ON
→ OFF
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:STANdard NAB
JIS
DINiec
SI05
SI10
2.6.5.10
ANLR-Panel
Rule
→ NAB
→ JIS
→ DIN/IEC
→ 2 Sigma 5 s
→ 2 Sigma 10s
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:WEIGhting ON
OFF 2.6.5.10
ANLR-Panel
Weighting
→ ON
→ OFF
SENSe[1]:LIST:FREQuency <n>{,<n>}2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SENSe[1]:LIST:FREQuency:POINts?<n>
0 to 1023
Query only
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SENSe[1]:LIST:MODE AUTO
MANual 2.6.5.3
ANLR-Panel
SWEEP CTRL
→ AUTO LIST
→ MANU LIST
SENSe[1]:NOTCh:FREQuency:FIXed <nu>
Value range determined by
instrument or function
2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Notch Freq
→ VALUE:
SENSe[1]:NOTCh:FREQuency:MODE FIXed
GENTrack 2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Notch Freq
→ VALUE:
→ GEN TRACK
SENSe[1]:NOTCh[:STATe] DB0
DB12
DB30
OFF
2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Anlg. Notch
→ 0 dB
→ 12 dB
→ 30 dB
→ OFF
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.263 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SENSe[1]:O33? Query only
Query response: ASCII string. No manual
control
SENSe[1]:SMOothing:APERture N1
N2
N4
N8
N16
N32
2.6.5.14
ANLR-Panel
Interpol
→ 1
→ 2
→ 4
→ 8
→ 16
→ 32
SENSe[1]:SWEep:MODE AUTO
MANual 2.6.5.3
ANLR-Panel
SWEEP CTRL
→ AUTO SWEEP
→ MANU SWEEP
SENSe[1]:SWEep:POINts <n>
2 to 1024 2.6.5.3
ANLR-Panel
Points
SENSe[1]:SWEep:SPACing LINear
LOGarithmic 2.6.5.3
ANLR-Panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG
SENSe[1]:SWEep:STEP <nu> | <n> 2.6.5.3
ANLR-Panel
Steps
SENSe[1]:THDN:REJection NARRow
WIDE 2.6.5.7
ANLR-Panel
Rejection
→ NARROW
→ WIDE
SENSe[1]:TRIGger:SETTling:..... 2.3.4.2
ANLR-Panel
Fnct Settl
SENSe[1]:TRIGger:SETTling:COUNt<n>
EXP | FLAT:
2 to 6
AVER:
2 to 100
2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Samples
SENSe[1]:TRIGger:SETTling:MODE OFF
EXPonential
FLAT
AVERage
2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Settling
→ OFF
→ EXPONENTIAL
→ FLAT
→ AVERAGE
SENSe[1]:TRIGger:SETTling:RESolution <nu>
Value range and units determined
by instrument or function see
2.6.5.1
2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Resolution
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.264 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SENSe[1]:TRIGger:SETTling:TOLerance <n>
0.001 to 10 % 2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Tolerance
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:ATTenuation <i>
1 to 9
<nu> 3 to 120 dB
2.7.2.1
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 1 to 9
→ Atten
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:BPASs[:STATe] <i>
1 to 9
ON
2.7.2
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 01 to 09
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:BSTOp[:STATe] <i>
1 to 9
ON
2.7.2
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 01 to 09
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:CENTer <i>
1 to 9
<nu>
Value range see 2.6.1 Selecting
the Analyzer
2.7.2.4
2.7.2.5
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 1 to 9
→ Center Frq
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:DELay <i>
1 to 9
<nu>
0 to 1 s
Query only for all filters except for
file-defined filters
2.7.2.7
2.7.2.1 Query only
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 1 to 9
→ Delay
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:FILE ’filename’
<i>
1 to 9
2.7.2.7
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 1 to 9
→ Filename
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:FILE[:STATe] <i>
1 to 9
ON
2.7.2
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 01 to 09
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:HPASs[:STATe] <i>
1 to 9
ON
2.7.2
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 01 to 09
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:LPASs[:STATe] <i>
1 to 9
ON
2.7.2
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 01 to 09
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:NOTCh[:STATe] <i>
1 to 9
ON
2.7.2
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 01 to 09
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:OCTav[:STATe] <i>
1 to 9
ON
2.7.2
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 01 to 09
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:PASSb<i>
1 to 9
<nu>
Value range see 2.6.1
2.7.2.2
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 1 to 9
→ Passband
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.265 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:PASSb:LOWer <i>
1 to 9
<nu>
Value range see 2.6.1
2.7.2.3
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 1 to 9
→ Passb low
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:PASSb:UPPer <i>
1 to 9
<nu>
Value range see 2.6.1
2.7.2.3
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 1 to 9
→ Passb upp
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:STOPb:LOWer?<i>
1 to 9
<nu>
Query only
2.7.2.3
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 1 to 9
→ Stopb low
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:STOPb:UPPer?<i>
1 to 9
<nu>
Query only
2.7.2.3
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 1 to 9
→ Stopb upp
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:STOPb?<i>
1 to 9
<nu>
Query only
2.7.2.2
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 1 to 9
→ Stopband
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:TOCTave[:STATe] <i>
1 to 9
ON
2.7.2
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 01 to 09
SENSe[1]:UFILter<i>:WIDTh<i>
1 to 9
<nu>
Value range see 2.6.1
2.7.2.4
2.7.2.5
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 1 to 9
→ Width
SENSe[1]:UNIT PCT|DB 2.4
ANLR-Panel
Unit
SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture <nu> = >1 ms ...
Value range see 2.6.5.2 2.6.5.2
2.6.5.3
2.6.5.24
2.6.5.25
ANLR-Panel
Meas Time
SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE AFASt
AUTO
TRIGgered
GENTrack
VALue
FAST
2.6.5.2,
2.6.5.3
2.6.5.5
2.6.5.24
ANLR-Panel
Meas Time
→ AUTO FAST
→ AUTO
→ TRIGGERED
→ GEN TRACK
→ VALUE
→ FIX 200ms
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.266 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE VALue 2.6.5.25
ANLR-Panel
Meas Time
→ VALUE:
SENSe[1]:VOLTage:FUNDamental <nu>
Value range and units determined
by instrument or function
2.6.5.6
ANLR-Panel
Fundamentl
SENSe[1]:VOLTage:FUNDamental:MODE AUTO
VALue 2.6.5.6
2.6.5.7
ANLR-Panel
Fundamentl
→ AUTO
→ VALUE:
SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime <nu>
20 ms to 10 s
20 ms to 100 s
2.6.5.4
2.6.5.24
ANLR-Panel
Intv Time
SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime:MODE SFASt
FAST
SLOW
FIXed
VALue
2.6.5.4
ANLR-Panel
Intv Time
→ FIX 50ms
→ FIX 200ms
→ FIX 1000ms
→ FIX 3 SEC
→ VALUE:
SENSe[1]:WAVeform:COMPression <n>
2 to 1024 2.6.5.14
ANLR-Panel
Comp Fact
SENSe[1]:WAVeform:DURation <nu>
see 2.6.5.14 WAVEFORM 2.6.5.14
ANLR-Panel
Trace Len
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence <nu>
Analog instruments
100 pV to 1000 V
Digital instrument
0.0 to 1.0 FS |
100 pFS to 100 FS
2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Reference |
Ref Volt
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence:MODE CH1Store
CH2Store
CH1Meas
CH2Meas
STORe
GENTrack
VALue
2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Reference
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE CH2
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ STORE
→ GEN TRACK
→ VALUE:
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]PCT
DB
see 3.10.4 Units for IEC
Measurement Results
2.4
ANLR-Panel
Unit Ch1/Ch2
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.267 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]Analog units:
V | DBV | DBU |
DBM | W | DPCTV |
DV | VVR | PCTVVR | DPCTW |DW
| PPR | PCTPPR |DBR
Digital units:
FS | PCTFS | DBFS | DPCT | DBR
| LSBS | BITS
2.4
ANLR-Panel
Unit Ch1/Ch2
SENSe2:DATA1|2? <nu>
Query only 3.15.8
Result display
SENSe2:FUNCtion ’OFF’
’PEAKvoltage’
’RMS’
’PHASetoref’
’DIGInpampl’
2.6.5.18
ANLR-Panel
INPUT DISP
→ OFF
→ PEAK
→ RMS
→ PHAS to REF
→ DIG INP AMP
SENSe2:VOLTage:REFerence <nu>
Analog instruments
1 mV to 1000 V
Digital instrument
0.0 to 1.0 FS
2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Reference
SENSe2:VOLTage:REFerence:MODE CH1Store
CH2Store
STORe
CH1Meas
CH2Meas
GENTrack
DIGoutampl
VALue
2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Reference
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE CH2
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ STORE
→ GEN TRACK
→ DIG OUT AMP
→ VALUE:
SENSe3:DATA1|2? Query only 3.15.8
Result display
SENSe3:FREQuency:REFerence <nu>
-1 MHz to 1 MHz 2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Ref Freq
SENSe3:FREQuency:REFerence:MODE CH1Store
CH2Store
CH1Meas
CH2Meas
STORe
GENTrack
VALue
2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Reference
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE CH2
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ STORE
→ GEN TRACK
→ VALUE:
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.268 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SENSe3:FREQuency:REFerence:MODE CH1Store
CH2Store
STORe
CH1Meas
CH2Meas
GENTrack
VALue
2.6.5.19
ANLR-Panel
Ref Freq
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE Ch2
→ STORE
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ GEN TRACK
→ VALUE:
SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:..... 2.3.4.2
ANLR-Panel
Freq Settl
SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:COUNt<n>
EXP | FLAT:
2 to 6
AVER:
2 to 100
2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Samples
SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:MODE OFF
EXPonential
FLAT
AVERage
2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Settling
→ OFF
→ EXPonential
→ FLAT
→ AVERage
SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:RESolution <nu>
Value range and units determined
by instrument or function
see 2.6.5.1
2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Resolution
SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:TOLerance <nu>
0.001 to 10 % 2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Tolerance
SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:TOUT <nu>
0.001 to 10 s 2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Timeout
SENSe3:FREQuency:UNIT[1|2]HZ
DHZ
DPCTHZ
TERZ
OCT
DEC
FFR
2.4
ANLR-Panel
Unit Ch1/Ch2
SENSe3:FUNCtion ’OFF’
’FREQuency’
’SFREquency’
’FQPHase’
’FQGRoupdelay’
2.6.5.19
2.6.5.20
2.6.5.21
ANLR-Panel
FREQ/PHAS
→ OFF
→ FREQ
→ SAMPLE FREQ
→ FREQ&PHASE
→ FREQ&GRPDEL
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.269 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SENSe3:PHASe:FORMat POSitive
POSNegative
NEGative
RAD
RADBipolar
RADNegative
2.6.5.19
ANLR-Panel
Format Pha
→ 0 to 360°
→ -180° to 180°
→ - 360° to 0°
→ 0 to 2 π
→ - π to + π
→ -2 π το 0
SENSe3:PHASe:REFerence <nu>
-360° to +360°2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Reference
SENSe3:PHASe:REFerence:MODE STORe
VALue 2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Reference
→ STORE
→ VALUE:
SENSe3:PHASe:SETTling:..... 2.3.4.2
ANLR-Panel
Phas Settl
SENSe3:PHASe:SETTling:COUNt<n>
EXP | FLAT:
2 to 6
AVER:
2 to 100
2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Samples
SENSe3:PHASe:SETTling:MODE OFF
EXPonential
FLAT
AVERage
2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Settling
→ OFF
→ EXPonential
→ FLAT
→ AVERage
SENSe3:PHASe:SETTling:RESolution <nu>
Value range and units determined
by instrument or function
see 2.6.5.1
2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Resolution
SENSe3:PHASe:SETTling:TOUT <nu>
0.001 to 10 s 2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Timeout
SENSe3:PHASe:UNIT2 DEG
RAD
DDEG
DRAD
S
DS
2.4
ANLR-Panel
Unit Ch2
SENSe4:DATA? <nu>
Query only 3.15.8
Result display
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.270 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SOURce:AM:MODE
OFF
SINusoid
BURSt
2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
Ampl Var
→ OFF
→ SINE
→ BURST
SOURce:AM:MODE
OFF
SINusoid
BURSt
2.5.4.9
2.5.4.10
GEN-Panel
Ampl Var
→ OFF
→ SINE
→ BURST
SOURce:CODedaudio:CHANnel
CH2
CH6
CHL
CHC
CHR
CHLS
CHRS
CHLF
2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
Chan Mode
→ 2/0 192kb/s
→ 5.1 448kb/s
→ L 448kb/s
→ C 448kb/s
→ R 448kb/s
→ LS 448kb/s
→ RS 448kb/s
→ LFE 448kb/s
SOURce:CODedaudio:FORMat AC3 2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
Format
→ AC-3
SOURce:CODedaudio:FREQuency
F042
F997
F15K
2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
Frequency
→ 42 Hz
→ 997 Hz
→ 15 kHz
SOURce:DIGital:FEED ADATa
JITTer
PHASe
COMMon
2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Src Mode
→ AUDIO DATA
→ JITTER ONLY
→ PHASE
→ COMMON
ONLY
SOURce:DIGital:REFerence AZERo
AONE 2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Data
→ ALL ZERO
→ ALL ONE
SOURce:DIGital:SYNC:DELay <nu> 2.5.3.1
GEN-Panel
PhaseToRef
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.271 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SOURce:DIGital:SYNC:MODE V50
V60
WCLock
IWCLock
F1024
2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Sync Mode
→ VIDEO 50
→ VIDEO 60
→ WORD CLK
→ WRD CLK INV
→ 1024 kHz
SOURce:DIGital:SYNC:SOURce GCLock
AINPut
RINPut
SINPut
2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Sync Out
→ GEN CLK
→ AUDIO IN
→ REF IN
→ SYNC IN
SOURce:EQUalize:CONTrol:POINts?<n>
0 to 1023
Query only
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:EQUalize:CONTrol[:DATA] <n>{,<n>}2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:FREQuency <new>
5.21 Hz to 20 kHz at a sampling
rate of 48 kHz
2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
FREQUENCY
SOURce:FREQuency:AM <nu>
1 µHz to fmax
fmax depending on generator
2.5.4.4
2.5.4.9
2.5.4.10
GEN-Panel
Mod Freq
SOURce:FREQuency:CH2Stereo <nu>
Value range determined by sample
frequency
2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Freq Ch2
SOURce:FREQuency:DIFFerence <nu>
Value range and units determined
by instrument or function
2.5.4.8
GEN-Panel
DIFF FREQ
SOURce:FREQuency:MEAN <nu>
Value range and units determined
by instrument or function
2.5.4.8
GEN-Panel
MEAN FREQ
SOURce:FREQuency:MODE CW | FIXed
SWEep1
SWEep2
LIST1
LIST2
2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
SWEEP CTRL
X Axis
Z Axis
SOURce:FREQuency:MODE FIX 2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
Vari Mode
→ FREQUENCY
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.272 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SOURce:FREQuency:OFFSet:STATeON
OFF 2.5.4.1
GEN-Panel
Frq. Offset
→ + 1000 PPM
→ OFF
SOURce:FREQuency:REFerence <nu>
1 mHz to 1 MHz 2.5.2
GEN-Panel
Ref.Freq
SOURce:FREQuency:SELect FQPH
FQFQ 2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Freq Mode
FREQ&PHASE
FREQ CH1&2
SOURce:FREQuency:STARt
SOURce:FREQuency:STOP <nu>
Value range and units determined
by instrument or function
2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
FREQUENCY
→ Start
→ Stop
SOURce:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed] <nu>
Value range and units determined
by instrument or function
2.5.4.5
GEN-Panel
FREQUENCY
SOURce:FREQuency[<i>][:CW|FIXed] <i>
1 to 17
<nu>
Value range and units determined
by instrument or function
2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
Freq No1 to 17
SOURce:FREQuency[1][:CW|FIXed] <nu>
Value range and units determined
by instrument or function
2.5.4.8
GEN-Panel
UPPER FREQ
SOURce:FREQuency[1][:CW|FIXed] <nu>
ANALOG-Gen:
240 Hz to 21,75 kHz
DIGITAL-Gen:
240 Hz to fmax
fmax see 2.5.1
2.5.4.7
GEN-Panel
UPPER FREQ
SOURce:FREQuency2[:CW|FIXed] <nu>
0 Hz to fmax / 8
fmax see 2.5.1
2.5.4.7
2.5.4.14
GEN-Panel
LOWER FREQ
Carr Freq
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.273 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SOURce:FUNCtion:MODE
EQUalvoltage
DEFinedvoltage
IEC268
IEC118
FM
AM
2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
Mode
→ EQUAL VOLT
→ DEFINE VOLT
2.5.4.1.1
GEN-Panel
Mode
→ IEC 268
→ IEC 118
2.5.4.14
GEN-Panel
Mode
→ FM
→ AM
SOURce:FUNCtion[:SHAPe] SINusoid
MULTisine
BURSt
S2Pulse
MDISt
DFD
RANDom
USER
POLarity
2.5.4
GEN-Panel
FUNCTION
→ SINE
→ MULTISINE
→ SINE BURST
→ SINE² BURST
→ MOD DIST
→ DFD
→ RANDOM
→ ARBITRARY
→ POLARITY
SOURce:FUNCtion[:SHAPe] SINusoid
STEReo
MULTisine
BURSt
S2Pulse
MDISt
DFD
RANDom
USER
POLarity
FSK
FM
DC
CODedaud
2.5.4
GEN-Panel
FUNCTION
→ SINE
→ STEREO SINE
→ MULTISINE
→ SINE BURST
→ SINE² BURST
→ MOD DIST
→ DFD
→ RANDOM
→ ARBITRARY
→ POLARITY
→ FSK
→ MODULATION
→ DC
→ CODED AUDIO
SOURce:INTerval <nu>
set burst duration ... 60 s
2.5.4.4
2.5.4.9
2.5.4.10
GEN-Panel
INTERVAL
SOURce:INTerval:MODE CW | FIXed
SWEep1
SWEep2
LIST1
LIST2
2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
SWEEP CTRL
X Axis
Z Axis
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.274 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SOURce:INTerval:STARt<nu>
Value range and units determined
by instrument or function
2.5.4.1.3
2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN-Panel
Start
SOURce:INTerval:STOP <nu>
Value range and units determined
by instrument or function
2.5.4.1.3
2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN-Panel
Stop
SOURce:INTerval[:CW|FIXed] <nu>
Value range and units determined
by instrument or function
2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN-Panel
INTERVAL
SOURce:LIST:DWELl<n>{,<n>}2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:LIST:DWELl:CONTrol:POINts?<n>
0 to 1023
Query only
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:LIST:DWELl:CONTrol[:DATA] <n>{,<n>}2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:LIST:DWELl:POINts?<n>
0 to 1023
Query only
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:LIST:FREQuency <n>{,<n>}2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:LIST:FREQuency:POINts?<n>
0 to 1023
Query only
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:LIST:INTerval <n>{,<n>}2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:LIST:INTerval:POINts?<n>
0 to 1023
Query only
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:LIST:ONTime <n>{,<n>}2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:LIST:ONTime:POINts?<n>
0 to 1023
Query only
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:LIST:VOLTage <n>{,<n>}2.9.1.3
No manual
control
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.275 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SOURce:LIST:VOLTage:POINts?<n>
0 to 1023
Query only
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:LOWDistortion ON
OFF 2.5.4.1
2.5.4.3
GEN-Panel
Low Dist
→ ON
→ OFF
SOURce:MULTisine:COUNt<n>
1 to 17 2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
No of Sine
SOURce:MULTisine:MODE EQUalvoltage
DEFinedvoltage 2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
Mode
→ EQUAL VOLT
→ DEFINE VOLT
SOURce:O33 ’O33 ID code’No manual
control
SOURce:OFF:MODE SWEep2 | LIST2 2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Z Axis
→ OFF
SOURce:ONTime <nu>
tmin to tmax
Analog generator:
tmin= 20.83 µs
Digital generator: tmin= 1 / sample
frequency
tmax: 60 s – tmin
2.5.4.4
2.5.4.9
2.5.4.10
GEN-Panel
ON TIME
SOURce:ONTime:DELay <nu>
0 to 60 s 2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN-Panel
BurstOnDel
SOURce:ONTime:MODE CW | FIXed
SWEep1
SWEep2
LIST1
LIST2
2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
SWEEP CTRL
X Axis
Z Axis
SOURce:ONTime:STARt
SOURce:ONTime:STOP <nu>
Value range and units determined
by instrument or function
2.5.4.2
2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN-Panel
Start
Stop
SOURce:ONTime[:CW|FIXed] <nu>
Value range and units determined
by instrument or function
2.5.4.5
GEN-Panel
ON TIME
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.276 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SOURce:PHASe <nu>
0 ° to 360 °2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Phas Ch2:1
SOURce:PHASe[<i>][:ADJust] <i>
1 to 17
<nu>
0 to 360 °
2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
Phas No 1 to 17
SOURce:PROTocol OFF
STATic
ENHanced
2.5.3.2
ANA-Panel
PROTOCOL
→ PANEL OFF
→ STATIC
→ ENHANCED
SOURce:PROTocol:RCHannelstatus ZERO
LEQual
AES3
CRC
RAW
2.5.3.2
GEN-Panel
Ch Stat. R
→ ZERO
→ EQUAL L
→ FILE+AES3
→ FILE+CRC
→ FILE
SOURce:PROTocol:UMODeZERO
FILE 2.5.3.2
GEN-Panel
User Mode
→ ZERO
→ FILE DEF
SOURce:RANDom:DOMain FREQuency
TIME 2.5.4.9
GEN-Panel
Domain
→ FREQ
→ TIME
SOURce:RANDom:FREQuency:LOWer
SOURce:RANDom:FREQuency:UPPer <nu>
Value range and units determined
by instrument or function
2.5.4.9
GEN-Panel
Lower Freq
Upper Freq
SOURce:RANDom:PDF GAUSsian
TRIangle
RECTangle
2.5.4.1.1
2.5.4.9
GEN-Panel
PDF
→ GAUSS
→ TRIANGLE
→ RECTANGLE
SOURce:RANDom:SHAPeWHITe
PINK
TOCTave
ARBitrary
2.5.4.9
GEN-Panel
Equalizatn
→ WHITE
→ PINK
→ THIRD OCT
→ FILE
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.277 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SOURce:RANDom:SPACing:FREQuency <nu>
Lower limit value:
analog = 2.93 Hz
digital = sampling frequency /
16384
2.5.4.4
2.5.4.9
GEN-Panel
Spacing
SOURce:RANDom:SPACing:MODE ATRack
USERdefined 2.5.4.4
2.5.4.9
GEN-Panel
Spacing
→ ANLR TRACK
→ USER DEF
SOURce:SINusoid:DITHer <nu>
0 to 1 FS 2.5.4.1.1
GEN-Panel
Dither
SOURce:SINusoid:DITHer:STATeON
OFF 2.5.4.1.1
GEN-Panel
Dither
→ ON
→ OFF
SOURce:SWEep ... 3.10.1.4
GEN-Panel
SOURce:SWEep:DWELl<nu>
10 ms to 1000 s 2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Dwell
SOURce:SWEep:FREQuency:POINts <n>
2 to 1024 2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Points
SOURce:SWEep:FREQuency:SPACing LINear
LOGarithmic 2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Spacing
SOURce:SWEep:FREQuency:STEP <nu> 2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Step
SOURce:SWEep:INTerval:POINts <n>
2 to 1024 2.5.4.1.3
GEN-Panel
Points
SOURce:SWEep:INTerval:SPACing LINear
LOGarithmic 2.5.4.1.3
GEN-Panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG
SOURce:SWEep:INTerval:STEP <nu>
Value range and units determined
by instrument or function
2.5.4.1.3
GEN-Panel
Step
SOURce:SWEep:MODE MANual
AUTO 2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Sweep Ctrl
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.278 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SOURce:SWEep:NEXTstep DWELl
ASYNc
LIST
2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Next Step
→ ANLR SYNC
→ DWELL VALUE
→ DWELL FILE
SOURce:SWEep:ONTime:POINts <n>
2 to 1024 2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Points
SOURce:SWEep:ONTime:SPACing LINear
LOGarithmic 2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG
SOURce:SWEep:ONTime:STEP <nu>
Value range and units determined
by instrument or function
2.5.4.1.3
GEN-Panel
Step
SOURce:SWEep:VOLTage:POINts <n>
2 to 1024 2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Points
SOURce:SWEep:VOLTage:SPACing LINear
LOGarithmic 2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG
SOURce:SWEep:VOLTage:STEP <nu>
Value range and units determined
by instrument or function
2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Step
SOURce:VOLTage:AM <nu>
-100% to 0%
2.5.4.4
2.5.4.9
2.5.4.10
GEN-Panel
Variation
SOURce:VOLTage:CH2Stereo <nu>
0 to 1 FS 2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
VOLT Ch2
SOURce:VOLTage:CREStfactor <n>
1 to 100 2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
Crest Fact
SOURce:VOLTage:CREStfactor:MODE MINimized
DPHase
VALue
2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
Crest Fact
→ OPTIMIZED
→ DEFINE PHAS
→ VALUE
SOURce:VOLTage:EQUalize:POINts?<n>
0 to 1023
Query only
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.279 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SOURce:VOLTage:EQUalize:STATeON
OFF 2.5.4.1.1
2.5.4.4
2.5.4.3
GEN-Panel
Equalizer
→ ON
→ OFF
SOURce:VOLTage:EQUalize[:DATA] <n>{,<n>}2.9.1.3
No manual
control
SOURce:VOLTage:LIMit[:AMPLitude] <nu>
0 to 20 V
0 to 1 FS
2.5.2
GEN-Panel
For Volt Range =
AUTO, Max Volt
is displayed,
for Volt Range =
FIX, a numeric
value.
SOURce:VOLTage:LOWLevel <nu>
0 to SOUR:VOLT 2.5.4.5
GEN-Panel
Low Level
SOURce:VOLTage:MODE CW | FIXed
SWEep1
SWEep2
LIST1
LIST2
2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
SWEEP CTRL
X Axis
Z Axis
SOURce:VOLTage:MODE FIX 2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
Vari Mode
→ VOLTAGE
SOURce:VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO ON
OFF 2.5.2
GEN-Panel
Volt Range
→ AUTO
→ FIX
SOURce:VOLTage:RATio <n>
1 to 10 2.5.4.7
2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
VOLT LF:UF or
Volt Ch2:1
SOURce:VOLTage:REFerence <nu>
1 mV to 1 MV 2.5.2
GEN-Panel
Ref.Volt
SOURce:VOLTage:SELect VLRT
VLVL 2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Volt Mode
VOLT&RATIO
VOLT CH1&2
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.280 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SOURce:VOLTage:STARt<nu>
Value range determined by
instrument or function
2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
VOLTAGE
→ Start
SOURce:VOLTage:STOP <nu>
Value range determined by
instrument or function
2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
VOLTAGE
→ Stop
SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal:GAIN <nu> 2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
TOTAL GAIN
SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal:RMS? <nu>
0 V to 20 V 2.5.4.4
2.5.4.9
2.5.4.10
GEN-Panel
TOTAL RMS
SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal[:LEVel|AMPLitude] <nu>
Value range determined by
instrument or function
2.5.4.4 Query only
2.5.4.7
2.5.4.8
2.5.4.9
2.5.4.10
2.5.4.15
GEN-Panel
TOTAL VOLT
SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal[:LEVel|AMPLitude] <new>
1 µFS to 1 FS or
-120 dBFS to 0 dBFS
2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
TOTAL VOLT
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude] <nu>
0 to 12 V
0 to 24 V
0 to 1 FS
2.5.4.3
2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
2.5.4.11
2.5.4.12
2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
VOLTAGE or
VOLT Ch1
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet <n>
-5 V to 5 V
–10 V to 10 V
–1 FS to 1 FS
2.5.4.1.1
GEN-Panel
DC Offset
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STAT
eOFF
ON 2.5.4.1.1
GEN-Panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.281 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SOURce:VOLTage[<i>][:LEVel|AMPLitude] <i>
1 to 17
<nu>
Analog instr.: OUTP:TYPE UNB
0 to 10 V
Analog instr.: OUTP:TYPE BAL
0 to 20 V
Digital instrument:
0 to 1 FS
2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
Volt No 1 to 17
SOURce:VOLTage2<nu>
0 to 5 V
0 to 6V
0 to 0.5 FS
2.5.4.14
GEN-Panel
Carr Volt
SOURce2:FREQuency:MODE CW | FIXed
SWEep1
LIST1
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN:
SWEEP CTRL
X Axis
SOURce2:FREQuency:STARt<nu>
10 Hz to 110 kHz 2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN:
FREQUENCY
Start
SOURce2:FREQuency:STOP <nu>
10 Hz to 110 kHz 2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN:
FREQUENCY
Stop
SOURce2:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed] <nu>
10 Hz to 110 kHz 2.5.5
GEN-Panel
Abhängig von
AUX GEN:
→ Anlg Freq
→ Comm Freq
→ JittPkFreq
SOURce2:FUNCtion OFF
ANLGout
COMMon
JITTer
2.5.5
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN:
→ OFF
→ ANALOG OUT
→ COMMON
MODE
→ JITTER
SOURce2:SWEep ... 2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN:
SOURce2:SWEep:DWELl<nu>
10 ms to 1000 s 2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN:
Dwell
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.282 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SOURce2:SWEep:FREQuency:POINts <n>
2 to 1024 2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN:
FREQUENCY
Points
SOURce2:SWEep:FREQuency:SPACing LINear
LOGarithmic 2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG
SOURce2:SWEep:FREQuency:STEP <nu>
depending on STARt and STOP 2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN
FREQUENCY
Step
SOURce2:SWEep:MODE MANual
AUTO 2.5.4.1.3
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN
Sweep Ctrl
SOURce2:SWEep:NEXTstep DWEL
ASYN
LIST
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN:
Next Step
→ ANLR SYNC
→ DWELL VALUE
→ DWELL FILE
SOURce2:SWEep:VOLTage:POINts <n>
2 to 1024 2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN
VOLTAGE | AMPL
Points
SOURce2:SWEep:VOLTage:SPACing LINear
LOGarithmic 2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
VOLTAGE | AMPL
AUX GEN:
ANALOG
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG
SOURce2:SWEep:VOLTage:STEP <nu>
depending on STARt and STOP 2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN
VOLTAGE | AMPL
Step
SOURce2:VOLTage:MODE CW | FIXed
SWEep1
LIST1
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN
SWEEP CTRL
X Axis
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.283 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SOURce2:VOLTage:STARt<nu>
0 to 7.07 V
0 to 250 mUI
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN
VOLTAGE | AMPL
Start
SOURce2:VOLTage:STOP <nu>
0 to 7.07 V
0 to 7.07 V
0 to 250 mUI
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN
VOLTAGE | AMPL
Stop
SOURce2:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude] <nu>
0 to 7.07 V
0 to 7.07 V
0 to 250 mUI
2.5.5
GEN-Panel
Abhängig von
AUX GEN:
→ Anlg Ampl
→ Comm Ampl
→ JittPkAmpl
STATus:OPERation:COND? <n>
Query only 3.7.3.4
No manual
control
STATus:OPERation:ENABle <n>
.... 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0
...
....d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0
Example:
d2 and d5 set:
<n> = 36 (4 + 32)
3.7.3.4
No manual
control
STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <n> 3.7.3.4
No manual
control
STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <n> 3.7.3.4
No manual
control
STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?<n>
Query only 3.7.3.4
No manual
control
STATus:PRESet 3.7.5
No manual
control
STATus:QUEStionable:COND? <n>
Query only 3.7.3.5
No manual
control
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <n> 3.7.3.5
No manual
control
STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition <n> 3.7.3.5
No manual
control
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.284 E-10
Command Parameter Section
STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition <n> 3.7.3.5
No manual
control
STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?<n>
Query only 3.7.3.5
No manual
control
STATus:XQUEstionable:COND? <n>
Query only 3.7.3.6
No manual
control
STATus:XQUEstionable:ENABle <n> 3.7.3.6
No manual
control
STATus:XQUEStionable:NTRansition <n> 3.7.3.6
No manual
control
STATus:XQUEstionable:PTRansition <n> 3.7.3.6
No manual
control
STATus:XQUEstionable[:EVENt]?<n>
Query only 3.7.3.6
No manual
control
SYSTem:AHARdware:VERSion?ABOard
ACODe
Query only
Query:
SYST:AHAR:VERS? ABO
SYST:AHAR:VERS? ACOD
The response is either the number
of a version (eg 0.01) or
–NA- (Not Available) if the board is
not installed.
2.15.7
OPTIONS-Panel
VERSIONS ------
Anlg Board
code
SYSTem:BEEPer:STATeON
OFF 2.15.2
OPTIONS-Panel
Beeper
→ ON
→ OFF
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess <n>
0 to 31 2.15.1
OPTIONS-Panel
UPL IECadr
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GTL LOCAL-
Tastendruck
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2: CONTrol RTS
XON 2.15.1
OPTIONS-Panel
Handshake
→ RTS/CTS
→ XON/XOFF
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.285 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2: FEED:BITS <n>
n = 7 | 8
2.15.1
OPTIONS-Panel
Data Bits
→ 7
→ 8
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:FEED:BAUD <n>
n =
2400
3600
4800
7200
9600
19200
38400
56000
2.15.1
OPTIONS-Panel
Baud Rate
→ 2400 Baud
→ 3600 Baud
→ 4800 Baud
→ 7200 Baud
→ 9600 Baud
→ 19200 Baud
→ 38400 Baud
→ 56000 Baud
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:FEED:PARity[:TYPE
]NONE
EVEN
ODD
2.15.1
OPTIONS-Panel
Parity
→ NONE
→ EVEN
→ ODD
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:FEED:SBITs<n>
n = 1 | 2
2.15.1
OPTIONS-Panel
Stop Bits
→ 1
→ 2
SYSTem:DHARdware:VERSion?CPUboard
DBOard
Query only
Query:
SYST:DHAR:VERS? CPU
SYST:DHAR:VERS? DBO
The response is the number of a
version (eg 0.05).
2.15.7
OPTIONS-Panel
VERSIONS ------
CPU Board
Dig. Board
SYSTem:DISPlay:READing:RATE MAXSpeed
FSTSpeed
MEDSpeed
SLWSpeed
2.15.5
OPTIONS-Panel
Read Rate
→ MAX SPEED
→ 6/s
→ 3/s
→ 1/s
SYSTem:DISPlay:READing:RESolution <n> 2.15.5
OPTIONS-Panel
Read Resol
SYSTem:DISPlay:TRACe[]:LOAD MANual
DEFault
ACOLor
ALINe
2.15.5.4
OPTIONS-Panel
Scan conf
→ MANUAL
→ DEFAULT
→ AUTO COLOR
→ AUTO LINE
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.286 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SYSTem:DISPlay:TRACe[1|2]:COLor GREen
YELLow
BLUE
CYAN
MAGenta
WHITe
BLACk
DGRay
LGRay
2.15.5.4
OPTIONS-Panel
Color (A) / (B)
→ GREEN
→ YELLOW
→ BLUE
→ CYAN
→ MAGENTA
→ WHITE
→ BLACK
→ DARK GRAY
→ LIGHT GRAY
SYSTem:DISPlay:TRACe[1|2]:LINE
SSOLid
SD
SP
SPD
DSOLid
DD
DP
DPD
2.15.5.4
OPTIONS-Panel
Line (A) / (B)
→
→ ------
→ ......
→ .-.-.-
→
→ ======
→ ::::::
→ :=:=:=
SYSTem:DISPlay:TRACe[1|2]:SELect <n>
1 to 17 2.15.5.4
OPTIONS-Panel
Scannr.(A)
Scannr.(B)
SYSTem:ERRor?<n>
Query only
3.3.2
No manual
control
SYSTem:INFOtext:STATeON
OFF 2.9.1.1
FILE-Panel
Info Displ
→ ON
→ OFF
SYSTem:KEY:RDELay <nu>
0.25 to 1.0 s 2.15.3
OPTIONS-Panel
Rep Delay
SYSTem:KEY:RRATe<nu>
0 to 50 Hz 2.15.3
OPTIONS-Panel
Reptn Rate
SYSTem:LSPeed FAST
SLOW No manual
control
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.287 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SYSTem:OPTions:VERSion? LDG alias B1
REMOte alias B4
DAUDio alias B2|B29
SPEaker alias B5
DAPRotocol alias B21
DAJItter alias B22
SQCOntrol alias B10
B33
B6
B8
Query only
Query-Form e. g.:
SYST:OPT:VERS? LDG
The response is either the number
of an option (eg 0.01), INST or
-NA- (Not Available) if the board or
option are not installed.
2.15.7
2.6.6
OPTIONS-Panel
OPTIONS -------
B1 Low Dist
B4 Rem Ctrl
B2 DigAudio
B5 Speaker
B21 DA Prot
B22 DA Jitt
B10 Seq Ctrl
ITU-T O33
B6 Coher
B8 PhoneTst
SYSTem:PARameter:LINK <n>
0 to 2047 2.15.7
OPTIONS-Panel
Param. Link
SYSTem:PHONeSPKC
PERM 2.6.6
ANLR-Panel
Phone Out
→ SPKPhone
→ PERMANENT
SYSTem:PRINtTRACe1
TRACe2
EQUalize
ERRors
DWELl
LIMLower
LIMUpper
LIST1
LIST2
TR1And2
OFF
2.14.5
OPTIONS-Panel
PRINT
Type
→ TRACE A
→ TRACE B
→ EQUALIZATN
→ LIM REPORT
→ DWELL VALUE
→ LIM LOWER
→ LIM UPPER
→ X AXIS
→ Z AXIS
→ TRACE A+B
→ OFF
SYSTem:PROGram:EXECute ’filename’2.16
OPTIONS-Panel
Exec Macro
<filename>
SYSTem:PROGram:POINts? <n>
0 to 1024
Query only
No manual
control
SYSTem:PROGram[:DATA] <n>{,<n>}No manual
control
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.288 E-10
Command Parameter Section
SYSTem:SOFTware:VERSion?SOFTware
SETUp
Query only
Query:
SYST:SOFT:VERS? SOFT
SYST:SOFT:VERS? SETU
The response is the number of a
version (e.g. 3.05).
2.15.7
OPTIONS-Panel
VERSIONS ------
Software
Setup
SYSTem:SPEaker:GAIN <nu>
-120 to 120 dB 2.6.6
ANLR-Panel
Pre Gain
SYSTem:SPEaker:SOURce OFF
INP1
INP2
IN1And2
FNC1
FNC2
FN1And2
AES1
AES2
AE1And2
2.6.6
ANLR-Panel
SPEAKER
→ OFF
→ INPUT Ch1
→ INPUT JITT
→ INPUT COMM
→ INPUT Ch2
→ INPUT Ch1&2
→ FUNCT Ch1
→ FUNCT Ch2
→ FUNCT Ch1&2
→ DIG IN Ch1
→ DIG IN Ch2
→ DIG Ch1&2
SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume <nu>
0 to 100 % 2.6.6
ANLR-Panel
Skp Volume
SYSTem:SPEaker[:STATe] ON
OFF 2.6.6
ANLR-Panel
LOCAL-Taste
SYSTem:VERSion?<n>
Query only 2.15.7
No manual
control
TRACe:POINts?CREFerence1
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? CREF1
Query response
<n> =
0 to 1023
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe:POINts?CREFerence2
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? CREF2
Query response:
<n> =
0 to 1023
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.289 E-10
Command Parameter Section
TRACe:POINts?REFerence1
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? REF1
Query response:
<n> =
0 to 1023
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe:POINts?REFerence2
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? REF2
Query response: <n> =
0 to 1023
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe:POINts?TRACe2
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? TRAC2
Query response:
<n> =
0 to 1023
Query only
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe:POINts? LIST1 LIST1
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? LIST1
Query response:
<n> =
0 to 1023
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe:POINts? LIST2 LIST2
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? LIST2
Query response:
<n> =
0 to 1023
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe:POINts? TRACe1TRACe1
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? TRAC1
Query response:
<n> =
0 to 1023
Query only
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe[:DATA] LIST1,<n>{,<n>}
Queryform:
TRACe? LIST1
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe[:DATA] LIST2,<n>{,<n>}
Queryform:
TRACe? LIST2
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe[:DATA] REFerence1,<n>{,<n>}
Queryform:
TRACe? REF1
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.290 E-10
Command Parameter Section
TRACe[:DATA] REFerence2,<n>{,<n>}
Queryform:
TRACe? REF2
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe[:DATA] TRACe1,<n>{,<n>}
Queryform:
TRACe? TRAC1
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe[:DATA] TRACe2,<n>{,<n>}
Queryform:
TRACe? TRAC2
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe[:DATA] CREFerence1,<n>{,<n>}
Queryform:
TRACe? CREF1
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRACe[:DATA] CREFerence2, <n>{,<n>}
Queryform:
TRACe? CREF2
2.9.1.3
No manual
control
TRIGger:CHANnel CH1
CH2
GENBurst
2.6.5.14
ANLR-Panel
Trig Src
→ CHAN 1
→ CHAN 2
→ GEN BURST
TRIGger:COUNt<nu>
2 to 1024 2.6.4
ANLR-Panel
Points
TRIGger:DELay <nu>
0 to 10 s 2.6.4
ANLR-Panel
Delay
TRIGger:FREQuency:VARiation <nu>
> 0.1 to 50% 2.6.4
ANLR-Panel
Variation
TRIGger:LEVel <nu>
Analog instruments
–50 V to 50 V
Digital instrument
–1 FS to 1 FS
2.6.5.14
ANLR-Panel
Trig Level
TRIGger:SLOPePOSitive
NEGative 2.6.5.14
ANLR-Panel
Trig Slope
→ RISING
→ FALLING
UPL Alphabetical List of Commands
1078.2008.02 3.291 E-10
Command Parameter Section
TRIGger:SOURce IMMediate
TIMer
CH1Freq
CH2Freq
CH1Level
CH2Level
CH1Trigger
CH2Trigger
TCHart
CH1Rapidfreq
CH2Rapidfreq
CH1Edgetrigger
CH2Edgetrigger
2.6.4
ANLR-Panel
START COND
→ AUTO
→ TIME
→ CH1Freq
CH2Freq
→ CH1Level
CH2Level
→ LEV TRG CH1
LEV TRG CH2
→ TIME CHART
→ FRQ FST CH1
→ FRQ FST CH2
→ EDG TRG CH1
→ EDG TRG CH2
TRIGger:TIMer <nu>
10 ms to 2000 s 2.6.4
ANLR-Panel
Timetick
TRIGger:VOLTage:VARiation <nu>
> 0.1 ,900%
oder
> 0.01 to 20 dB
2.6.4
ANLR-Panel
Variation
Alphabetical List of Commands UPL
1078.2008.02 3.292 E-10
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface
1078.2008.02 3.293 E-10
3.12 IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface
The UPL is equipped with an IEC/IEEE-bus interface as a standard. The mating 25-pin connector
according to standard IEC 625.1/IEEE 488 is at the rear of the instrument. A controller for remote
control can be connected via the interface. Interconnection is made via a shielded cable.
3.12.1 Interface Characteristics
é8-bit parallel data transfer
ébidirectional data transfer
éthree line handshake
éhigh data transfer rate of max. 350 kByte/s
éup to 15 devices can be connected
émaximum length of interconnecting cable 15 m (single connection 2m)
éwired OR if several instruments are interconnected in parallel.
12 1
13
24
SHIELD SRQ NDAC DAV DIO4 DIO2
LOGIC GND GND(10) GND(8) GND(6) DIO8 DIO6
GND(11) GND(9) GND(7) REN DIO7 DIO5
ATN IFC NRFD EOI DIO3 DIO1
Fig. 3-7 Pin assignment of IEC/IEEE-bus interface
3.12.2 Bus Lines
1. Data bus with 8 lines DIO 1 to DIO 8.
The transmission is bit-parallel and byte-serial in the ASCII/ISO code. DIO1 is the bit of lowest order,
DIO8 the bit of highest order.
2. Control bus with 5 lines.
IFC (Interface Clear),
active low resets the interfaces of all connected instruments to the default setting.
ATN (Attention),
IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface UPL
1078.2008.02 3.294 E-10
active low signals the transmission of interface messages
inactive high signals the transmission of device-dependent messages.
SRQ (Service Request),
active low enables a device connected to send a service request to the controller.
REN (Remote Enable),
active low permits the switchover to remote control.
EOI (End or Identify),
has two functions in connection with ATN:
active low marks the end of data transmission with ATN = HIGH
active low triggers a parallel poll with ATN = LOW.
3. Handshake Bus mit drei Leitungen.
DAV (Data Valid),
active low signals a valid data byte on the data bus.
NRFD (Not Ready For Data),
active low signals that one of the devices connected is not ready for data transfer.
NDAC (Not Data Accepted),
active low as long as the instrument connected is accepting the data present on the data bus.
3.12.3 Interface Functions
Instruments which can be remote-controlled via IEC/IEEE bus can be equipped with different interface
functions. Table A-1 lists the interface functions appropriate for the UPL.
Table 3-10 Interface functions
Control
character Interface function
SH1 Handshake source function (source handshake)
AH1 Handshake drain function (acceptor handshake)
L3..L4/LE3..LE4 Listener function.
T5..T8/TE5..TE8 Talker function, ability to respond to serial poll
SR1 Service request function
PP1 Parallel poll function
RL1 Remote/Local switchover function
DC1 Resetting function (Device Clear)
DT1 Trigger function (Device Trigger)
C1...C27 Controller function (with optional software UPL-B10only)
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Error Messages
1078.2008.02 3.295 E-10
3.13 Interface Messages
Interface messages are transmitted to the UPL on the data lines, with the attention line being active
(LOW). They enable the communication between instrument and controller.Das Parsen von Befehlen
entfällt, dadurch wird eine hohe Verarbeitungsgeschwindigkeit erreicht.
3.13.1 Common Commands
The common commands are encoded in the range 10 through 1F hex. They are effective for all
instruments connected to the bus without addressing them before.
Table 3-11 Common commands
Command BASIC command for R&S
controllers Effect on UPL
DCL (Device Clear) IECDCL Aborts the processing of the commands just received
and sets the command processing software to a
defined initial state. Does not change the instrument
setting.
IFC (Interface Clear) IECIFC Resets the interfaces to the default setting.
LLO (Local Lockout) IECLLO The REM/LOCAL key is disabled.
SPE (Serial Poll Enable) IECSPE Ready for serial poll
SPD (Serial Poll Disable) IECSPD End of serial poll
PPU (Parallel Poll
Unconfigure) IECPPU End of the parallel-poll state
3.13.2 Addressed Commands
The addressed commands are encoded in the range 00 through 0F hex. They are only effective for
instruments addressed as listeners.
Table 3-12 Addressed commands
Command BASIC command for R&S
controllers Effect on UPL
SDC (Selected Device Clear) IECLAD 20: IECSDC Aborts the processing of the commands just received
and sets the command processing software to a
defined initial state. Does not change the instrument
setting.
GET (Group Execute Trigger) IECLAD 20: IECGET Triggers all actions which are waiting for a trigger
event. This command is identical with the commands
INIT and *TRG.
GTL (Go to Local) IECLAD 20: IECGTL Transition to the "Local" state (manual control)
PPC (Parallel Poll Configure) IEC PCON 20,1,6 Configure instrument for parallel poll
In the command to the left, the UPL with an address
of 20 is reporting a 1 on line 6.
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Error Messages UPL
1078.2008.02 3.296 E-10
3.14 List of Error Messages
The following list contains error messages which can be obtained via IEC/IEEE bus or in manual
operation. Negative error numbers are SCPI-defined. The positive error number "111" marks device-
specific errors.
When and how is the error queue output?
If the controller does not succeed in transmitting a command to UPL, an error message appears in the
information line on the screen and a short signal can be heard.
This error message can be indicated in the control program by outputting the error queue after every
command sent to UPL. This should be controlled by SRQ, i.e. only when bit 3 (Device Dependent Error),
bit 4 (Execution Error) or bit 5 (Command Error) of the event status register is set, but can also happen
at any location in the control program.
If no error has been detected, the message is
0, "No Error"
Example:
1000Errqueue:
1010 IEC OUT 20,"SYST:ERR?": ’ Output error queue until it is empty!
1020 IEC IN 20,E$. ’ Read error information
1030 IF LEFT$(E$,1)="0" THEN RETURN: ’ 0, "No Error", error queue empty!
1040 PRINT "Contents of error queue:"; E$:GOTO Errqueue
The table contains the error number in the left-hand column. In the right-hand column, the error text
being entered into the error/event queue or being displayed is printed in bold face. Below the error text,
there is an explanation as to the respective error.
3.14.1 SCPI-Specific Error Messages
No Error
Error number Error query response
Explanation
0No error
This message is output if the error queue is completely empty.
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Error Messages
1078.2008.02 3.297 E-10
3.14.2 Command Error
Command error — sets bit 5 in the ESR register.
Error number Error query response
Explanation
-100 Command Error
The command is faulty or invalid.
-101 Invalid Character
A syntactic element contains a character which is invalid for that type.
Example: A header containing an ampersand, "SOURCE&".
-102 Syntax error
An unrecognized command or data type was received.
Example: A string was received when the device does not accept strings.
-103 Invalid separator
The device was expecting a separator and received an illegal character.
Example: The semicolon was omitted after a program message unit.
-104 Data type error
The device recognized a data element different than one allowed.
Example: Numeric or string data are expected but block data was received.
-105 GET not allowed
A Group Execute Trigger (GET) was received within a program message.
-112 Program mnemonic too long
The header contains more than 12 characters.
-113 Undefined header
The header is syntactically correct, but it is undefined for the UPL.
Example: *XYZ is not defined for any device.
-114 Header suffix out of range
A nonheader character has been encountered in the header element parsed by the device.
Example: SOURce3 is not defined for any device.
-123 Exponent too large
The magnitude of the exponent is larger than 320000.
-124 Too many digits
The mantissa of a decimal numeric data element contains more than 255 digits (excluding leading
zeros).
-128 Numeric data not allowed
A legal numeric data element was received, but the device does not accept one in this position for the
header.
Example: Command SOURce:FREQuency:MODE requires the indication of a text parameter.
-131 Invalid suffix
The suffix is inappropriate for this device.
Example: nHz is not defined?
-134 Suffix too long
The suffix contains more than 12 characters.
-138 Suffix not allowed
A suffix was received after a numeric element which does not allow suffixes.
Example: Command *RCL does not permit indicating a suffix.
-141 Invalid character data
Either the character data element contains an invalid character or the particular element received is not
valid for the header.
Example: Write error with parameter indication; SOURce:FREQuency:MODE FIKSed.
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Error Messages UPL
1078.2008.02 3.298 E-10
Command error (cont.)
Error number Error query response
Explanation
-144 Character data too long
The character data element contains more than 12 characters.
-148 Character data not allowed
A legal character data element was encountered where prohibited by the device.
Example: Command *RCL requires the indication of a number.
-151 Invalid string data
A string data element was expected, but was invalid for some reason.
Example: An END message was received before the terminal quote character.
-158 String data not allowed
A legal string data element was encountered where prohibited by the device.
-161 Invalid block data
A block data element was expected, but was invalid for some reason.
Example: An END message was received before the length was satisfied.
-168 Block data not allowed
A legal block data element was encountered where prohibited by the device.
-178 Expression data not allowed
A legal expression data element was encountered where prohibited by the device.
3.14.3 Execution Error
Execution error — sets bit 4 in the ESR register.
Error number Error query response
Explanation
-200 Execution error
An error occurred when executing a received command.
-220 Parameter error
A program data element related error occurred.
-221 Settings conflict
A legal program data element was parsed but could not be executed due to the current device state.
-222 Data out of range
The received data element was syntactically correct but could not be executed because the value was
outside the legal range as defined by the device.
Example: Command TRIG:DEL only permits entries in the range of 50 ms to 10 sec.
-241 Hardware missing
A legal program command or query could not be executed because of missing device hardware;
for example, an option was not installed.
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Error Messages
1078.2008.02 3.299 E-10
3.14.4 Device-Specific Error
Device-specific Error — sets bit 3 in the ESR register.
Error number Error query response
Explanation
-300 Device-specific error
Generic device-dependent error for devices that cannot detect more specific errors.
3.14.5 Query Error
Query Error — sets bit 2 in the ESR register.
Error number Error query response
Explanation
-400 Query error
Generic device-dependent query error for devices that cannot detect more specific errors.
-420 Query UNTERMINATED
A condition causing an UNTERMINATED query error occurred.
Example: The device was addressed to talk and an incomplete program message was received.
-430 Query DEADLOCKED
A condition causing an DEADLOCKED query error occurred.
Example: Both input buffer and output buffer are full and the device cannot continue.
3.14.6 UPL-Specific Error Messages
Device-specific Error — sets bit 3 in the ESR register.
Error number Error query response
Explanation
111 After the error queue has been output, all device-dependent errors are shown with the code number 111
and a self-explanatory text having a maximum length of 50 characters, e.g.
111, „Device dep. error; Insufficient disk space! Cannot write file".
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming UPL
1078.2008.02 3.300 E-10
3.15 Examples of IEC/IEEE-Bus Programming
(Hints and Program Examples)
The examples illustrate UPL programming and may be taken as a basis for solving more complex
programming tasks.
All programming examples for IEC/IEEE-bus control in the path C:\UPL\IEC EXAM\EXAM1.BAS ff and
those of the UPL software are written in R&S BASIC.
These examples can be run directly on a controller using a suitable IEC/IEEE-bus card and R&S BASIC
(see (siehe 3.15.1, R&S BASIC). Files with the extension .SAC are setup files requiring the program
examples for setting the UPL. Files with the extension .TXT give the program code of the examples as
ASCII file so that they can be accessed with any editor.
If other languages are used for controlling the UPL by means of IEC/IEEE commands, the given
sequence of commands may be used but for a few exceptions, as it is independent of the programming
language.
3.15.1 R&S BASIC
The following program routines and examples and those contained in the UPL software are ready for
use provided R&S BASIC and the R&S IEC/IEEE-bus card have been installed in the controller.
Note:
R&S BASIC and the R&S IEC/IEEE-bus interface card may be ordered from your local sales engineer
under the designation PAT-B1, Order No. 1007.1150.02.
3.15.2 IEC/IEEE-Bus Control after Power-Up
After UPL power-up, messages may be displayed which have to be acknowledged using the ENTER or
CANCEL key. If the instrument is to be remote-controlled after power-up irrespective of any messages
displayed, it is recommended to start the UPL with the aid of the command line parameter "-r". In this
case messages do not require to be acknowledged by a keystoke, the UPL is started with a suitable
setup and immediately ready for remote control.
Example: C:\UPL\UPL_UI-r <CR>
3.15.3 Command Logging - Converting UPL-B10 Commands into IEC/IEEE-Bus
Commands
All commands required for setting the UPL or for measurements are listed in section 3.10 IEC-bus
Commands and section 3.11 Alphabetical List of IEC-bus Commands of the UPL manual. To avoid
a tedious search for the commands required, the Universal Sequence Controller, UPL-B10, which is
simply called B10 below and available as an option, permits all manual setting procedures to be stored
as B10 commands and to be converted into the IEC/IEEE-bus control program.
Note:
The Universal Sequence Controller option UPL-B10 may be ordered from your local sales engineer
under the Order No. 1078.3856.02. For installation please refer to the Installation Instruction enclosed
with Option UPL-B10.
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming
1078.2008.02 3.301 E-10
The procedure is explained by way of a sweep with subsequent display of the sweep curve:
• Prior to recording the desired command sequence, press key F2 to activate command logging
("logging on" displayed at bottom right). All settings performed subsequently in the UPL are
recorded as a sequence of B10 commands.
• When the setting sequence has been completed, disable command logging by pressing the F2 key
again ("logging off" displayed at bottom right).
• Call up the B10 program by pressing F3. Upon pressing F8 (LISTe), a list of commands is displayed
- for the time being without comments - which has been generated by means of B10 commands and
correspond to the settings just performed (in the example Settings for a frequency sweep).
10 UPL OUT "*RST" Listing of B10 commands without
comments.
20 UPL OUT "DISP:MODE COLB" Comments will we added manually later on.
30 UPL OUT "SENS:VOLT:APER:MODE AFAS"
40 UPL OUT "SENS:FILT:AWE ON"
50 UPL OUT "DISP:TRAC:OPER CURV"
60 UPL OUT "DISP:TRAC:X:SPAC LOG"
70 UPL OUT "SOUR:SWE:MODE AUTO;:SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE1"
• Use command ASAVE "A:LOGGING.TXT" to store the listing as ASCII file on a floppy disk.
• Return to the UPL operating level by pressing F3 and quit the UPL (CTRL+F9).
• Using an editor of your own choice at the DOS operating system level, edit the A:LOGGING.TXT file
in a form suitable for IEC/IEEE-bus control by replacing |UPL OUT| by |IEC OUT 20,| and store it on
the floppy disk.
10 IEC OUT 20,"*RST" Listing of IEC/IEEE-bus commands without
comments.
20 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:MODE COLB" Comments will be added manually later on!
30 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:VOLT:APER:MODE AFAS"
40 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FILT:AWE ON"
50 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:OPER CURV"
60 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:X:SPAC LOG"
70 IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:SWE:MODE AUTO;:SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE1"
• Establish connection to IEC/IEEE-bus controller and start R&S BASIC on the controller.
• Insert floppy holding the "LOGGING.TXT" file into the controller.
• Load the listing as ASCII file from the floppy with command ALOAD "A:LOGGING.TXT" and extend it
as required by IEC/IEEE-bus-specific commands and comments.
10 IEC TERM 10:’ Controller waits for Line Feed as terminator
20 IEC TIME 10000:’ IEC/IEEE-bus timeout 10 s
30 IEC OUT 20,"*RST;*WAI":’ UPL default setup
40 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:MODE COLB":’ Changes of colour
50 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:VOLT:APER:MODE AFAS":’ High measurement speed
60 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FILT:AWE ON":’ Switches on A-weighting filter
70 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:OPER CURV":’ Selects trace display
80 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:X:SPAC LOG":’ Logarithmic X axis
0 IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:SWE:MODE AUTO;:SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE1":’ Autom. Sweep
100 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:CONF AP":’ Selects graphic window
110 IEC OUT 20,"INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI":’ Starts sweep and waits for end
120 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:Y:AUTO ONCE":’ Autoscaling
130 IEC LAD 20: IEC GTL:’ Return to manual control
140 END
(listing of IEC/IEEE-bus commands with additional commands and comments)
• Start the ready-to-run program with RUN or F2.
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming UPL
1078.2008.02 3.302 E-10
3.15.4 Initialization and Default Status
The controller must be informed that the end character for query replies from the UPL is < Line Feed>
and that it has to wait for max. 10 s after a trigger command or an IEC-IN command before it signals a
timeout. The IEC/IEEE-bus Status Registers and the UPL are reset to the default state.
For default settings of UPL see annex A UPL Default Setup
10 ’Initialization of controller
10 IEC TERM 10:’ Controller waits for Line Feed as terminator
20 IEC TIME 10000:’ After 10 s controller signals IEC/IEEE-bus timeout
10 ’Initialization of UPL
20 IECOUT 20,"*CLS":’ Resets Status Register
30 IECOUT 20,"*RST:*WAI":’ Resets device and waits for end of calibration
:
3.15.5 Sending Instrument Setting Commands
In this routine, the UPL is set to maximum speed for triggered measurements.
10 IEC TERM 10:’ Terminator for query replies is Line Feed
20 IEC TIME 10000:’ Max. waiting time for query replies is 10 s
30 IEC OUT 20,"*CLS":’ Resets IEC/IEEE-bus Status Register
40 IEC OUT 20,"*RST;*WAI":’ UPL default setting, *WAI waits for calibr.
50 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:ANN OFF":’ Switches off result display
60 IEC OUT 20,"SENS2:FUNC ’OFF’":’ Switches off input-peak measurement
70 IEC OUT 20,"SENS3:FUNC ’OFF’":’ Switches off frequency measurement
80 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:VOLT:APER:MODE VAL"
90 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:VOLT:APER 1ms":’ Sets a measurement speed of 1 ms
:
3.15.6 Switchover to Manual Control
REM ------ Switching the instrument to manual control -------
:
100 IEC LAD 20:’ Addresses UPL
110 IEC GTL:’ Sets UPL to local
:
3.15.7 Readout of Instrument Settings
The settings made in section 3.15.5 Sending Instrument Setting Commands, are read out. In this
case the short form of the commands is used.
:
110 ’------- Readout of instrument settings ---------
120 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:ANN?":’ Query for setting the display Update
130 IEC IN 20,A$: PRINT A$:’ Displays OFF
140 IEC OUT 20,"SENS2:FUNC?":’ Query for input peak measurement
150 IEC IN 20,A$: PRINT A$:’ Displays OFF
160 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:VOLT:APER?":’ Query for measurement speed
170 IEC IN 20,A$: PRINT A$:’ Displays 1.E-3
:
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming
1078.2008.02 3.303 E-10
3.15.8 Readout of Measurement Results
Numeric results of a specific measurement function, ie input peak, input RMS or frequency and phase
measurements, can be taken from the UPL in a triggered or non-triggered form.
For triggering measurements and sweeps see section 3.6.7 Triggering a Measurement/Sweep
Waiting for the end of a measurement or sweep is described in section 3.6.8.2 Wait for End of
Measurement/Sweep.
The display below gives the IEC/IEEE-bus commands used for selecting and calling up measurement
results.
"SENS:DATA1?"
"SENS:DATA2?"
"SENS2:DATA1?"
"SENS2:DATA2?"
"SENS3:DATA1?"
"SENS3:DATA2?"
"SENS4:DATA?"
Fig. 3-8 Result display and associated IEC/IEEE-bus commands
Table 3-13 Selecting measurement results
Measurement function Channel setting Selection and readout of measurement results
Function IECOUT 20,"INP:SEL CH1" IECOUT 20,"SENS:DATA1?":IECIN 20,Func$
IECOUT 20,
"SENS:FUNC ’RMS’" IECOUT 20,"INP:SEL CH2" IECOUT 20,"SENS:DATA2?":IECIN 20,Func$
"SENS:FUNC ’RMSS’"
"SENS:FUNC ’PEAK’"
"SENS:FUNC ’QPE’"
"SENS:FUNC ’DC’"
"SENS:FUNC ’THD’"
"SENS:FUNC ’THDN’"
"SENS:FUNC ’MDIST’"
"SENS:FUNC ’DFD’"
"SENS:FUNC ’DIM’"
"SENS:FUNC ’WAF’"
"SENS:FUNC ’POL’"
"SENS:FUNC ’FFT’"
"SENS:FUNC ’FILT’"
"SENS:FUNC ’WAV’"
"SENS:FUNC ’COHE’"
IECOUT 20,"INP:SEL CH1A" or
IECOUT 20,"INP:SEL CH1I" or
IECOUT 20,"INP:SEL CH2I" or
IECOUT 20,"INP.SEL BOTH"
IECOUT 20,"SENS:DATA1?":IECIN 20,FuncA$
IECOUT 20,"SENS:DATA2?":IECIN 20,FuncB$
Input PEAK or
Input RMS IECOUT 20,"INP:SEL CH1" IECOUT 20,"SENS2:DATA1?":IECIN 20,Ip$
IECOUT 20, IECOUT 20,"INP:SEL CH2" IECOUT 20,"SENS2:DATA2?":IECIN 20,Ip$
"SENS2:FUNC ’PEAK’"
"SENS2:FUNC ’RMS’" IECOUT 20,"INP:SEL CH1A" or
IECOUT 20,"INP:SEL CH1I" or
IECOUT 20,"INP:SEL CH2I" or
IECOUT 20,"INP.SEL BOTH"
IECOUT 20,"SENS2:DATA1?":IECIN 20,IpA$
IECOUT 20,"SENS2:DATA2?":IECIN 20,IpB$
Frequency measurement IECOUT 20,"INP:SEL CH1" IECOUT 20,"SENS3:DATA1?":IECIN 20,Freq$
IECOUT 20, IECOUT 20,"INP:SEL CH2" IECOUT 20,"SENS3:DATA2?":IECIN 20,Freq$
"SENS3:FUNC ’FREQ’" IECOUT 20,"INP:SEL CH1A" or
IECOUT 20,"INP:SEL CH1I" or
IECOUT 20,"INP:SEL CH2I" or
IECOUT 20,"INP.SEL BOTH"
IECOUT 20,"SENS3:DATA1?":IECIN 20,FreqA$
IECOUT 20,"SENS3:DATA2?":IECIN 20,FreqB$
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming UPL
1078.2008.02 3.304 E-10
Measurement function Channel setting Selection and readout of measurement results
Frequency and
phase measurement
IECOUT 20,
"SENS3:FUNC ’FQPH’"
with two-channel
measurements only
IECOUT 20,"INP:SEL CH1A" or
IECOUT 20,"INP:SEL CH1I" or
IECOUT 20,"INP:SEL CH2I" or
IECOUT 20,"INP.SEL BOTH"
IECOUT 20,"SENS3:DATA1?":IECIN 20,Freq$
IECOUT 20,"SENS4:DATA?":IECIN 20,Phas$
Frequency and
group delay measurement
IECOUT 20,
"SENS3:FUNC ’FQGR’"
with two-channel
measurements only
IECOUT 20,"INP:SEL CH1A" oder
IECOUT 20,"INP:SEL CH1I" oder
IECOUT 20,"INP:SEL CH2I" oder
IECOUT 20,"INP.SEL BOTH"
IECOUT 20,"SENS3:DATA1?":IECIN 20,Freq$
IECOUT 20,"SENS4:DATA?":IECIN 20,Grpl$
3.15.8.1 Readout of Triggered Measurements
Readout of triggered measurement is demonstrated by way of an RMS measurement:
:
100 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FUNC ’RMS’":’ Sets RMS measurement
110 IEC OUT 20,"INPUT:SELECT CH1":’ Sets channel 1
:
210 ’One of three trigger modes can be selected
220 INPUT "Select trigger mode INIT [I], GET [G] or *TRG [T]:";Tg$
:
330 IEC OUT 20,"INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI":’ Selects single-measurement mode
:
480 IF Tg$="I" THEN IEC OUT 20,"INIT": GOTO In
490 IF Tg$="G" THEN IEC LAD 20: IEC GET :GOTO In
500 IF Tg$="T" THEN IEC OUT 20,"*TRG": GOTO In
:
620In:
630 IEC OUT 20,"*WAI":’ Sends next IEC/IEEE-bus command only after
640 ’ a result has been obtained.
650 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:DATA1?":’ Selects result of channel 1
660 IEC IN 20,Mwert$:’ Reads in measurement result
667 PRINT Mwert$:’ Outputs measurement result
:
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming
1078.2008.02 3.305 E-10
3.15.8.2 Readout of Non-Triggered Measurements
Contrary to triggered measurements, results of non-triggered measurements are read from the buffer at
maximum speed without considering settling so that the same value is displayed several times before a
new value is output.
Since results of non-triggered measurements are read out as an exception, no detailed description will
be given. Reading out triggered measurement results as described in section 3.15.8.1 Readout of
Triggered Measurements, is to be preferred in any case.
:
190 IEC OUT 20,"*RST;*WAI": ’ Sets up RMS measurement
200 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:ANN OFF":’ Switches off result display
210 IEC OUT 20,"SENS2:FUNC ’OFF’":’ Switches off PEAK measurement
220 IEC OUT 20,"SENS3:FUNC ’OFF’":’ Switches off frequency measurement
230 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:VOLT:APER:MODE AFAS":’ Selects high measurement speed
240 IEC OUT 20,"INIT:CONT ON":’ Selects continuous measurements
250 IEC LAD 20: IEC GET :’ Triggers with Group Executive Trigger
260 ’"*WAI" omitted!
270 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:DATA1?":’ Selects RMS result on channel 1
280 IEC IN 20,Mwert$:’ Reads in measurement result
:
3.15.9 Sweep Setting/Trigger
3.15.9.1 Generator Sweep
With a generator sweep of the UPL, output frequency, output level, burst duration, etc. are swept
between the start/stop values .
A sweep is triggered with INIT, *TRG or GET (see section 3.6.7 Triggering a Measurement/Sweep).
:
50 IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:SWE:MODE AUTO;:SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE1":’ Freq. sweep
60 IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:FREQ:STAR 100 HZ":’ Sweep start frequency 100 Hz
70 IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:FREQ:STOP 10 KHZ":’ Sweep stop frequency 10 kHz
80 IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:SWE:FREQ:POIN 15":’ 15 sweep points
90 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FILT:AWE ON": ’ Selects A-weighting filter
100 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:OPER CURV": ’ Selects trace display
110 IEC OUT 20,"INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI":’ Triggers single sweep, waits for end
120 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:CONF AP":’ Selects analyzer display with graphic window
130 IEC LAD 20: IEC GTL: ’ Displays sweep curve
:
See also section 3.15.10.3 Configuration for Maximum Sweep Speed and 3.15.10.3.1 Generator
Sweep.
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming UPL
1078.2008.02 3.306 E-10
3.15.9.2 External Sweep
With external sweep of UPL, measurement results are obtained by frequency and level variations
at channel 1 or 2 of the analyzer input.
The example below illustrates an external frequency sweep.
:
300 ’*** Setting parameters for external sweep
310 IEC OUT 20,"TRIG:SOUR CH1F": ’ Setup for external frequency sweep
320 IEC OUT 20,"ARM:LEV:MIN 100 mV": ’ Minimum level 100 mV
330 IEC OUT 20,"ARM:FREQ:STAR 100 Hz": ’ Start frequency 100 Hz
340 IEC OUT 20,"ARM:FREQ:STOP 16 kHz": ’ Stop frequency 16 kHz
350 IEC OUT 20,"TRIG:FREQ:VAR 4.5": ’ Var. just below sweep step width
360 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:CONF AP": ’ Selects graphic window
370 PRINT "External sweep is started - recording is in progress!"
380 IEC OUT 20,"INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI": ’ Triggers external single sweep
390 IEC OUT 20,"SYST:BEEP:STAT ON": ’ Waits for sweep end with dummy command
400 IEC LAD 20: IEC GTL : ’ Displays curve
:
See also section 3.15.10.3 Configuration for Maximum Sweep Speed and 3.15.10.3.2 External
Sweep.
3.15.9.3 RMS-Selektiv-Sweep
With the RMS selective sweep, the center frequency of a bandpass or bandstop filter is swept between
the start/stop frequencies and an RMS measurement is carried out after each sweep step.
The sweep is triggered with "INIT", "*TRG" or GET (see section 3.6.7 Triggering a
Measurement/Sweep)
:
100 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FUNC ’RMSS’":’ Setup for RMS selective measurement
110 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:BAND:MODE PPCT1":’ Bandwidth of bandpass filter 1%
120 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FREQ:MODE SWE;:SENS:SWE:MODE AUTO":’ Sweep setup
130 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:SWE:SPAC LOG;POIN 50":’ Log. sweep with 50 points
140 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FREQ:STAR 4000Hz;STOP 16000Hz":’ Start/stop freq.
150 IEC OUT 20,"INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI":’ Triggers sweep and waits for end
160 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:OPER CURV":’ Selects trace display
170 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:CONF AP":’ Selects analyzer panel with graphic window
180 IEC LAD 20: IEC GTL:’ Displays curve
:
See also section 3.15.10.3 Configuration for Maximum Sweep Speed and 3.15.10.3.3 RMS-
selective Sweep.
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming
1078.2008.02 3.307 E-10
3.15.10 Tuning - Setup for Maximum Measurement Speed
3.15.10.1 Configuration for Maximum Measurement Speed
To obtain maximum measurement speed, all unnecessary measurements and result displays are to be
avoided. This is demonstrated by way of a fast RMS measurement:
:
190 IEC OUT 20,"*RST;*WAI": ’ Sets up RMS measurement
200 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:ANN OFF":’ Switches off result display
210 IEC OUT 20,"SENS2:FUNC ’OFF’":’ Switches off PEAK measurement
220 IEC OUT 20,"SENS3:FUNC ’OFF’":’ Switches off frequency measurement
230 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:VOLT:APER:MODE AFAS":’ Selects high measurement speed
240 IEC OUT 20,"INIT:CONT OFF":’ Selects single measurement
250 IEC LAD 20: IEC GET :’ Triggers sweep with Group Execute Trigger
260 IEC OUT 20,"*WAI":’ *WAI Waits for measurement results
270 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:DATA1?":’ Selects RMS results on channel 1
280 IEC IN 20,Mwert$:’ Reads in measured value
:
3.15.10.2 Adapting Measurement Speed to Signal Frequency
Table 3-14 Hints for matching measurement speed and signal frequency
Automatic adaptation of measurement speed to signal frequency
IEC/IEEE-bus command Used for
"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE AFASt" RMS and RMS selective measurements:
Automatic matching of measurement time and signal
frequency by taking into account the signal period. The
measurement time is optimally adapted to the input signal. An
algorithmic error of max. 1% may occur
"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE AUTO" RMS and RMS selective measurements:
Same as AFASt but with an algorithmic error of max. 0.1%.
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming UPL
1078.2008.02 3.308 E-10
Fixed measurement speed
IEC/IEEE-bus command Used for
"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE SFASt" RMS and RMS selective measurements:
measurement time 50 ms
"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE FAST" RMS, RMS selective and DC measurements:
measurement time 200 ms
"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE SLOW" RMS and RMS selective measurements:
measurement time 1000 ms
"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE VALue"
"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture xxx ms"
RMS-, RMS selective and DC measurements:
measurement time freely selectable
VALue is a fixed integration time irrespective of the signal period.
RMS and RMS selective measurements:
• If the measurement time is an integral multiple of the signal period, optimum integration and therefore a steady display is
obtained.
• If the measurement time is longer and not an integral multiple of the signal period, an integration is obtained with a beat
effect in the display.
DC measurements:
If an AC voltage is superimposed on the DC, the measurement time as integration period has different effects with respect to
the signal period of the AC voltage shows different effects:
•If the measurement time is an integral multiple of the signal period, optimum integration is obtained. The AC voltage does
not influence the DC measurement result and the display is steady.
• If the measurement time is longer and not an integral multiple of the signal period, an integration is obtained with a beat
effect in the display. The AC voltage has no effect on the DC measurement result.
•If the measurement time is shorter than the signal period, the measurement result follows the signal curve. The AC voltage
affects the DC measurement result.
Fixed monitor time
IEC/IEEE-bus command Used for
"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime:MODE SFASt" PEAK measurements:
time 50 ms
"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime:MODE FAST" PEAK measurements:
time 200 ms
"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime:MODE SLOW" PEAK measurements:
time 1000 ms
"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime:MODE FIXed" QPK measurements:
time 3000 ms
"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime:MODE VALue"
"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime xxx ms"
PEAK and QPK measurements:
time freely selectable
Generally no recommendation can be made as to the most
suitable monitor time for peak values, as it depends on the
input signal and on the measurement itself.
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming
1078.2008.02 3.309 E-10
3.15.10.3 Configuration for Maximum Sweep Speed
3.15.10.3.1 Generator Sweep
To obtain maximum sweep speed, switch off all "slowing-down" settings. Particularly the frequency
measurement and settling of the low-distortion generator are very time-consuming. If permitted by the
measurement, these functions should be switched off.
The following example illustrates which functions are to be switched on or off to obtain maximum sweep
speed.
A typical example is a
• single-channel linear frequency sweep on channel 1 of
• 100 points,
• 200 Hz to 4 kHz and
• RMS measurement in
• AUTO FAST.
Each speed-reducing function can be switched off separately by means of a command after the *RST
command. In this case a single sweep should be triggered once with "INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI" (program
line 230) before sweeping is started to avoid the setting times of this command influencing the sweep
time. The sweep performed at maximum speed is then triggered with another INIT command (program
line 300).
:
100 IEC OUT 20,"*RST;*WAI"
110 IEC OUT 20,"INP:TYPE GEN1"
120 IEC OUT 20,"OUTP:SEL CH2"
130 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:VOLT:RANG 1V": ’ Prevent ranging
140 IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:LOWD OFF": ’ Low-distortion generator off
150 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:VOLT:APER:MODE GENT": ’ Measurement speed GEN TRACK
160 IEC OUT 20,"SENS2:FUNC ’OFF’": ’ Input peak measurement off
170 IEC OUT 20,"SENS3:FUNC ’OFF’": ’ Frequency measurement off
180 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:ANN OFF": ’ No display of measured values
190 IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:SWE:MODE AUTO;:SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE1": ’Frequency sweep
200 IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:FREQ:STAR 200;STOP 4000": ’ Sweep 200Hz to 4kHz
210 IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:SWE:FREQ:SPAC LIN": ’ Linear sweep
220 IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:SWE:FREQ:POIN 100": ’ 100 Sweep points
230 IEC OUT 20,"INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI": ’ Triggers single sweep
240 IEC OUT 20,"SYST:BEEP:STAT OFF": ’ Dummy command waits for sweep end
:
300 IEC OUT 20,"INIT;*WAI": ’ Einzelswp mit max. Geschwindigkeit ausloesen
310 IEC OUT 20,"SYST:BEEP:STAT OFF": ’ Dummy command waits for sweep end
:
The fastest way to set a suitable sweep is to load an ACTUAL SETUP in which the required settings
have already been made.
:
100 IEC OUT 20,"MMEM:LOAD:STAT 0,’C:\UPL\USER\MAXSWP.SAC’;*WAI"
110 IEC OUT 20,"INIT;*WAI": ’ Triggers single sweep
120 IEC OUT 20,"SYST:BEEP:STAT OFF": ’ Dummy command waits for sweep end
:
The maximum sweep speed attained in this example is approx. 25 ms/step when an UPL with 386
board is used and approx. 8 ms/step when a 486 board is used.
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming UPL
1078.2008.02 3.310 E-10
3.15.10.3.2 External Sweep
The example below demonstrates the setup for a fast external frequency sweep with a sweep-signal
sequence obtained, for instance, from a CD or tape.
Matching the external frequency sweep to the signal sequence:
• Set a start value which should corresponds to the expected lowest frequency of the sweep-signal
sequence.
• Select a stop value slightly below the expected highest sequence frequency (approx. 0.1%) to
provide a safe halt criterion.
• elect a variation that is approx. 5 to 10 % lower than the expected frequency variation of the signal
sequence to ensure safe triggering and avoid unwanted intermediate values.
The example below illustrates the settings for matching the external sweep of the UPL to the signal
sequence generated by a sweep generator for demonstration purposes.
Connect the sweep generator to UPL input UNBAL Ch1, and set and start a
• continuous logarithmic sweep of 100 Hz to 16.1 kHz,
• with a step width 5%,
• and 120-ms time tick
The external sweep parameters of the UPL are set as recommended above and the external single
sweep is started.
• Start frequency of ext. sweep = 100 Hz (expected lowest frequency in this case 100 Hz)
• Stop frequency of ext. sweep = 16 kHz (0.1% below the expected highest frequency, in this case
16.1 kHz)
• Variation of ext. sweep = 4.5% (10% below the expected frequency variation of the sequence, in this
case 5 %)
Each time the frequency varies by more than 4.5% on channel 1, UPL carries out an RMS measurement
until a frequency greater than 16 kHz is measured. After this the external sweep is terminated and the
sweep curve is displayed.
With the speed-increasing settings in lines 270 to 290 and the fast frequency measurement for the
external sweep in line 310, a signal sequence with a minimum time tick of 120 ms can still be reliably
measured. For all other settings a longer time is required.
:
260 ’*** Speed-increasing settings
270 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:ANN OFF": ’ Display Update off
280 IEC OUT 20,"SENS3:FUNC ’OFF’": ’ Frequency measurement off
290 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:VOLT:APER:MODE AFAS": ’ RMS meas. speed AUTO FAST
300 ’*** Setting of external sweep parameters
310 IEC OUT 20,"TRIG:SOUR CH1R": ’ Ext. sweep with fast freq. measurement
320 IEC OUT 20,"ARM:LEV:MIN 100 mV": ’ Measurement above 100 mV
330 IEC OUT 20,"ARM:FREQ:STAR 100 Hz": ’ Start frequency 100 Hz
340 IEC OUT 20,"ARM:FREQ:STOP 16 kHz": ’ Stop frequency 16 kHz
350 IEC OUT 20,"TRIG:FREQ:VAR 4.5": ’ Var. just below sweep step width
360 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:CONF AP": ’ Selects graphic window
370 PRINT "External sweep is started - recording goes on!"
380 IEC OUT 20,"INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI": ’ Triggers external single sweep
390 IEC OUT 20,"SYST:BEEP:STAT ON": ’ Dummy command waits for sweep end
400 IEC LAD 20: IEC GTL : ’ Displays curve
:
3.15.10.3.3 RMS Selective Sweep
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming
1078.2008.02 3.311 E-10
In the example below settings are made for a fast RMS selective sweep. The sweep speed mainly
depends on the
• bandwidth of the set bandpass /bandstop filter and the
• center frequency.
The bandpass or bandstop filters are very steep filters with an attenuation of 100 dB. The higher the
center frequency the wider the passband range and the faster the settling and therefore the RMS
selective measurement.
The example below illustrates a fast RMS selective sweep of a 5-kHz squarewave signal produced by
the UPL generator. The narrowband RMS measurement from 4 to 16 kHz yields a spectrum display of
the fundamental with the 2nd and 3rd harmonic of the squarewave signal.
10 IEC TERM 10: IEC TIME 60000
20 IEC OUT 20,"*RST;*WAI;:DISP:MODE COLB;:INP:TYPE GEN2"
30 IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:FUNC SQU;:SOUR:FREQ 5000Hz;:SOUR:VOLT 1V"
70 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FUNC ’RMSS’":’ Switches on RMS selective measurement
80 ’*** Speed-increasing measures
90 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:VOLT:APER:MODE AFAS":’ Fast RMS measurement
100 IEC OUT 20,"SENS2:FUNC ’OFF’":’ Input-peak measurement off
110 IEC OUT 20,"SENS3:FUNC ’OFF’":’ Frequency measurement off
120 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:ANN OFF":’ Display Update off
130 ’*** Settings for RMS selective sweep
140 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:BAND:MODE PPCT1":’ Bandpass filter 1%
150 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FREQ:MODE SWE;:SENS:SWE:MODE AUTO":’ Auto sweep
160 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:SWE:SPAC LOG;POIN 50":’ Log. sweep over 50 points
180 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FREQ:STAR 4000Hz;STOP 16000Hz":’ Start/stop frequency
190 ’*** Settings for graphics display
200 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:OPER CURV"
210 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:Y:UNIT DBV;:DISP:TRAC:X:AUTO OFF"
220 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:X:LEFT 3000Hz;RIGH 17000Hz":’ X scale
230’Measuring the sweep time
240 Z1=TIME
250 IEC OUT 20,"INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI"
260 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:CONF AP":’ Selects analyzer panel with graphic window
270 Z2=TIME: IEC LAD 20: IEC GTL:’ Displays spectrum
280 PRINT (Z2-Z1)/100;" Sec pro Sweep": END
Speed-increasing measures become more effective towards higher center frequencies ( > 5 kHz)!
Grundwelle
2. Harmonische
3. Harmonische
Fig. 3-9 Spectrum of 5-kHz squarewave obtained through RMS selective sweep
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming UPL
1078.2008.02 3.312 E-10
3.15.10.3.4 Measurement Speed with Reference to Sampling Mode
If the HIGH RATE sampling mode (CONF:DAI HRM) is used with option UPL-B29 (digital audio 96 kHz),
the increased performance requirements caused by the higher clock rates lead to a certain reduction of
the measurement speed as compared to the BASE RATE mode (CONF:DAI BRM).See also chapter
2.6.8 Optimizing the Measurement Speed, section 5, Optimized Utilization of DSP Performance with
Reference to the Clock Rate.
3.15.11 List Management
3.15.11.1 Loading Lists into the UPL
3.15.11.1.1 Loading Sweep Lists into the UPL
Depending on the application, data are loaded into the UPL by a variety of commands that can be
looked up in section 3.10.6 Commands for Graphical Representation of Results. Loading the frequency
values for a frequency sweep is used as an example for demonstrating the procedure.
Load command:
"SOURce:LIST:FREQuency 100.0,300.0,500.0, ... ,20000"
permits a maximum of 1024 values to be loaded.
Use DATA and READ for handling a greater number of frequency values in program code:
:
8110 DATA 100,300,500,700,800,900,1000,2000,3000,4000,5000,6000,7000
8120 DATA 10000,13000,15000,17000,20000,0
8150 IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:SWE:MODE AUTO":’ AUTO sweep
8160 IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:FREQ:MODE LIST1":’ LIST sweep of frequencies
8170 Bef$="SOUR:LIST:FREQ": ’ Lists block data of frequencies
8180 READ Frq
8190 Loop1:
8200 IF Frq<>0 THEN Bef$=Bef$+STR$(Frq)
8210 READ Frq: IF Frq<>0 THEN Bef$=Bef$+",": GOTO Loop1
8230 IEC OUT 20,Bef$:’ Outputs block command
:
3.15.11.1.2 Loading and Display of Several Traces in the UPL
Not only curves generated in the UPL by a sweep or FFT, or those stored in a file can be graphically
displayed but also any data sequences loaded into the UPL by the control program. All UPL capabilities
for scaling and unit conversion are used for the graphic display.
The following routine demonstrates loading of three traces into the UPL and their graphic display.
:
200 ’*********************** Loading traces ****************************
210 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:COUN 3":’ Sets number of traces to be loaded
220 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:IND 0":’ Selects trace with index 0
230 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC LIST1, 100,1000,5000,15000":’ X values for trace 0
240 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC TRAC1, 0.001,0.01,0.01,0.001": ’Y values for trace 0
250 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:IND 1":’ Selects trace with index 1
260 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC LIST1, 100,1500,5500,15000":’ X values for trace 1
270 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC TRAC1, 0.001,0.02,0.02,0.001": ’Y values for trace 1
280 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:IND 2":’ Selects trace with index 2
290 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC LIST1, 100,1800,6000,15200":’ X values for trace 2
300 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC TRAC1, 0.001,0.03,0.03,0.001": ’Y values for trace 2
310 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:OPER CURV":’ Selects the display mode
320 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:Y:AUTO ONCE":’ Optimizes scale
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming
1078.2008.02 3.313 E-10
330 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:CONF AP":’ Activates analyzer panel + graphic window
340 IEC LAD 20:IEC GTL:’ Displays curve
:
Note:
If traces are loaded into the UPL under program control and a sweep is subsequently selected, the trace
in the display will be erased and the sweep curve displayed.
3.15.11.1.3 Loading and Displaying of Trace Pairs in the UPL
The program below demonstrates loading of three trace pairs into the UPL, the graphic display,
subsequent selection of another unit, rescaling and changing from linear to logarithmic display on the X
axis.
:
290 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC1:FEED ’SENS:DATA’":’ Enables trace A
300 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC2:FEED ’SENS:DATA’":’ Enables trace B
310 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:COUN 3":’Three trace pairs
320 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:IND 0":’ Selects trace pair with index 0
330 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC LIST1, 100,1000,5000,15000":’ X values of trace A
340 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC TRAC1, 0.001,0.01,0.01,0.001":’ Y values of trace A
350 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC LIST2, 100,1100,5100,15000":’ X values of trace B
360 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC TRAC2, 0.001,0.02,0.02,0.001":’ Y values of trace B
370 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAc:IND 1":’ Selects trace pair with index 1
380 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC LIST1, 100,1500,5500,15000":’ X values of trace A
390 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC TRAC1, 0.001,0.03,0.03,0.001":’ Y values of trace A
400 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC LIST2, 100,1600,5600,15000":’ X values of trace B
410 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC TRAC2, 0.001,0.04,0.04,0.001":’ Y values of trace B
420 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAc:IND 2":’ Selects trace pair with index 2
430 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC LIST1, 100,1800,6000,15200":’ X values of trace A
440 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC TRAC1, 0.001,0.05,0.05,0.001":’ Y values of trace A
450 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC LIST2, 100,1900,6100,15200":’ X values of trace B
460 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC TRAC2, 0.001,0.06,0.06,0.001":’ Y values of trace B
470 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:OPER CURV":’ Selects trace display
480 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC2:Y:EQU ON":’ Scaling of trace B same as for A
490 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC1:Y:AUTO ONCE":’ Autoscaling
500 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:CONF DP":’ Selects DISPLAY panel with graphic window
510 IEC LAD 20: IEC GTL: HOLD 5000:’ Result display for 5 s
520 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC1:Y:UNIT W":’ Conversion of Y values into Watt
530 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC1:Y:AUTO ONCE":’ Autoscaling
540 IEC LAD 20: IEC GTL:HOLD 5000:’ Result display for 5 s
550 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:X:SPAC LOG":’ Log display on X scale
560 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC1:Y:AUTO ONCE":’ Autoscaling
570 IEC LAD 20: IEC GTL
:
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming UPL
1078.2008.02 3.314 E-10
Fig. 3-10 Trace pairs loaded into UPL by control program
3.15.11.2 Readout of Data Lists from the UPL
When data lists are read from the UPL, in compliance with SCPI values are always transferred in the
basic unit even if other units have been selected for the trace display. The table below shows the basic
units for transferring data of various functions from the UPL to the controller.
Table 3-15 Basic units of data
Measurement function/sweep settings Data with basic unit
for analog/digital instruments
"SENS:FUNC ’RMS’" V/FS
"SENS:FUNC ’RMSS’" V/FS
"SENS:FUNC ’PEAK’" V/FS
"SENS:FUNC ’QPE’" V/FS
"SENS:FUNC ’DC’" V/FS
"SENS:FUNC ’THD’" %
"SENS:FUNC ’THDN’" %
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD THDN|NOIS %
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD SNDR % (große Werte)
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD LTHD|LNOI V/FS
"SENS:FUNC ’DFD’" %
"SENS:FUNC ’DIM’" %
"SENS:FUNC ’MDIS’" %
"SENS:FUNC ’WAF’" %
"SENS:FUNC ’POL’" keine Daten
"SENS:FUNC ’FFT’" V/FS
"SENS:FUNC ’WAV’" V/FS
"SENS:FUNC ’COHE’" %
"SENS:FUNC ’RUBB’" V
"SENS2:FUNC ’PEAK’" V/FS
"SENS2:FUNC ’RMS’" V/FS
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming
1078.2008.02 3.315 E-10
"SENSe2:FUNCtion ’DIGInpamp’" V
"SENSe2:FUNCtion ’PHASetoref’" UI
"SENS3:FUNC ’FREQ’" Hz
"SENS3:FUNC ’FQPH’" Grad
"SENS3:FUNC ’FQGR’" s
"SOUR:FREQ:MODE ..." Hz
"SOUR:VOLT:MODE ..." V/FS
"SOUR:ONT:MODE ..." s
"SOUR:INT:MODE ..." s
"SENS:FREQ:MODE ..." Hz
When reading out lists remember that with commands
- "SOUR:LIST:FREQ?"
- "SOUR:LIST:INT?"
- "SOUR:LIST:ONT?"
- "SOUR:LIST:VOLT?"
- "SENS:LIST:FREQ?"
always the X values of the set sweep are read, contrary to commands
- "TRAC? LIST1"
- "TRAC? LIST2"
which cause the X values of the current graphic display to be read.
Note:
Normally, X values are identical for both command groups. They are only different if other than the
sweep curve is subsequently selected by means of program control or by loading a file while the
sweep mode is on .
3.15.11.2.1 Readout of Lists of up to 1024 Values
A great number of application-specific commands are available for reading out sweep data, FFT data,
data loaded from a file or by the control program (see section 3.10.6 Commands for Graphical
Representation of Results). The procedure is illustrated by an example for reading out level values of a
frequency sweep.
The readout procedure is as follows
"TRAC? TRAC" permits 1024 values to be read.
:
8270 IEC OUT 20,"INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI": ’ Triggers a single sweep
:
8420 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC":’ Reads in level data of trace A
8430 IEC IN 20,S$:’ S$ comprises an ASCII string with level values in the
8440 ’ form "1.1234E-003,2.3456E-002,3.4567E-001 ..."
:
3.15.11.2.2 Readout of FFT Lists of more than 1024 Values
The number of values that can be transferred is limited to 1024 lines. If more than 1024 lines are to be
read, the data have to be divided in blocks of 1024 values. The table in section 2.6.5.12 FFT informs
on the number of lines of the selected FFT which are a function of FFT size and zooming.
In the R&S BASIC program below, the 7488 lines of a 8k-zoom FFT with 8 blocks each (7 x 1024 and 1
x 320 lines) are read and stored in the form of a string
(eg "5.50884e-004,4.1273e-004,1.64638e-004,...") in files FFT_Y1.TXT ... FFT_Y8.TXT.
:
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming UPL
1078.2008.02 3.316 E-10
500 FOR Blkidx=0 TO 7
510 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:IND"+STR$(Blkidx):’ Selects block index 0 to 7
520 ’ Reads out FFT lines and stores in string Fftdat$
530 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC"
540 IEC IN 20,Fftdat$:’ Reads in FFT data as ASCII string
550 Filename$="FFT_Y"+RIGHT$(STR$(Blkidx+1),1)+".TXT":’ Defines file name
560 OPENO# 1,Filename$: PRINT# 1,Fftdat$: CLOSE# 1
570 NEXT Blkidx
:
FFT line frequencies are read out in the same way with command
"TRAC? LIST1"
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming
1078.2008.02 3.317 E-10
3.15.11.2.3 FFT Lists with Suppressed Noise Floor
Since in most cases the noise floor of an FFT is of no interest, the number of lines can be considerably
reduced by including only values exceeding a certain limit in the trace, eg 0.1 V.
To do so set the UPL as described below:
:
100 IECOUT 20,"DISPlay:TRACe:OPERation FFTErrors":’ Sets limits
110 IECOUT 20,"CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:VALue 0.1V":’.. >0.1 V
:
510 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:IND 0":’ Block index 0
520 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC":’ Stores FFT lines above 0.1 V
530 IEC IN 20,Fftdat$:’ as string data under Fftdat$
:
FFT lines frequencies are read out in the same way using command
"TRAC? LIST1"
3.15.11.2.4 Readout of Several Traces from UPL
If several traces are displayed on the UPL ("DISP:TRAC:COUN > 1" set), the required trace can be
selected with command "DISP:TRAC:IND 0 to 17" and read out with commands "TRAC?
LIST1" and "TRACE? TRAC":
:
200 ’**************** Readout of traces ********************
220 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:IND 0":’ Selects trace with index 0
230 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? LIST1":’ Selects X values of trace with index 0
240 IEC IN 20,X0$:’ Stores X values as ASCII string under X0$
250 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC":’ Selects Y values of trace with index 0
260 IEC IN 20,Y0$:’ Stores Y values as ASCII string under Y0
270 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:IND 1":’ Selects trace with index 1
280 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? LIST1":’ Selects X values of trace with index 1
290 IEC IN 20,X1$:’ Stores X values as ASCII string under X1$
300 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC":’ Selects Y values of trace with index 1
310 IEC IN 20,Y1$:’ Stores Y values as ASCII string under Y1$
320 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:IND 2":’ Selects trace with index 2
330 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? LIST1":’ Selects X values of trace with index 2
340 IEC IN 20,X2$:’ Stores X values as ASCII string under X1$
350 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC":’ Selects Y values of trace with index 2
:
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming UPL
1078.2008.02 3.318 E-10
3.15.11.2.5 Readout of Trace Pairs from UPL
Trace pairs are read out in the way described in section 3.15.11.2.4 Readout of Several Traces from
UPL, with the difference
"TRAC? LIST1" and "TRAC? TRAC1" reads out the X and Y values of trace A
"TRAC? LIST2" and "TRAC? TRAC2" reads out the X and Y values of trace B
:
200 ’******************** Readout of trace pairs**********************
220 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:IND 0":’ Selects trace pair with index 0
230 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? LIST1":’ Selects X values of trace A with index 0
240 IEC IN 20,Xa0$:’ Stores X values as ASCII string under Xa0$
250 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC1":’ Selects Y values of trace A with index 0
260 IEC IN 20,Ya0$:’ Stores Y values as ASCII string under Ya0$
270 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? LIST2":’ Selects X values of trace B with index 0
280 IEC IN 20,Xb0$:’ Stores X values as ASCII string under Xb0$
290 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC2":’ Selects Y values of trace B with index 0
300 IEC IN 20,Yb0$:’ Stores Y values as ASCII string under Yb0$
310 ’
320 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:IND 1":’ Selects trace pair with index 1
330 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? LIST1":’ Selects X values of trace A with index 1
340 IEC IN 20,Xa1$:’ Stores X values as ASCII string under Xa0$
350 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC1":’ Selects Y values of trace A with index 1
360 IEC IN 20,Ya1$:’ Stores Y values as ASCII string under Ya0$
370 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? LIST2":’ Selects X values of trace B with index 1
380 IEC IN 20,Xb1$:’ Stores X values as ASCII string under Xb0$
390 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC2":’ Selects Y values of trace B with index 1
400 IEC IN 20,Yb1$:’ Stores Y values as ASCII string under Yb0$
410 ’
420 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:IND 2":’ Selects trace pair with index 2
430 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? LIST1":’ Selects X values of trace A with index 2
440 IEC IN 20,Xa2$:’ Stores X values as ASCII string under Xa0$
450 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC1":’ Selects Y values of trace A with index 2
460 IEC IN 20,Ya2$:’ Stores Y values as ASCII string under Xa0$
470 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? LIST2":’ Selects X values of trace B with index 2
480 IEC IN 20,Xb2$:’ Stores X values as ASCII string under Xa0$
490 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC2":’ Selects Y values of trace B with index 2
500 IEC IN 20,Yb2$:’ Stores Y values as ASCII string under Xa2$
:
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming
1078.2008.02 3.319 E-10
3.15.12 Filter Settings
In the case of RMS measurements, the analyzer permits a maximum of 4 filters to be switched into the
measurement path, 3 filters with PEAK and QPK measurements and one filter with THDN
measurements. Fixed filters like CCITT, CCIR or WRUMble or user-defined filters can be used.
The example below illustrates a customized filters made up of a bandpass filter of 11 to 15 kHz and the
two notch filters of 12 and 14 kHz.
:
300 IEC OUT 20,"*RST;*WAI": ’ *WAI waits for end of calibration
310 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:MODE COLB":’ Coloured user interface
315 ’----- User filter No. 1: Bandpass filter 11 to 15 kHz, Atten. 100 dB
320 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:UFIL1:BPAS ON"
330 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:UFIL1:PASS:LOW 11 KHZ"
340 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:UFIL1:PASS:UPP 15 KHZ"
350 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:UFIL1:ATT 100 DB"
355 ’----- User filter No. 2: 12-kHz notch filter
360 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:UFIL2:NOTC ON"
370 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:UFIL2:CENT 12 KHZ"
380 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:UFIL2:WIDT 500 HZ"
390 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:UFIL2:ATT 100 DB"
395 ’----- User filter No. 3: 14-kHz notch filter
400 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:UFIL3:NOTC ON"
410 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:UFIL3:CENT 14 KHZ"
420 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:UFIL3:WIDT 500 HZ"
430 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:UFIL3:ATT 100 DB"
435 ’The 3 customized filters defined above are used for RMS
436 ’measurements; the bandpass filter for increasing the filter slope
437 ’is used twice.
440 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FUNC ’RMS’"
450 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FILT1:UFIL1 ON":’ Two bandpass filters for
460 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FILT2:UFIL1 ON":’ increasing the filter slope
470 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FILT3:UFIL2 ON":’ 12-kHz notch filter
480 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FILT4:UFIL3 ON":’ 14-kHz notch filter
:
Filter curve obtained in a sweep from 9 to 17 kHz:
Fig. 3-11 Filter curve: steep bandpass filter + 2 notch filters
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming UPL
1078.2008.02 3.320 E-10
3.15.13 Finding a File
UPL provides no special command to find out whether a file has been stored on the UPL hard disk or on
a floppy.
Remedy:
If an attempt to copy the file in a temporary file is not followed by an error message, the file already
exists.
:
100 File$ = "’C:\UPL\USER\MY.SCO’":’ File of interest
110 IECOUT 20,"MMEM:COPY "+File$+",’TMP.TMP’"
120 IECOUT 20,"SYST:ERROR?": IECIN 20,E$
130 IF LEFT$(E$,1)="0" THEN
140 PRINT "File available!"
150 ELSE
160 PRINT "File not available!"
170 ENDIF
:
3.15.14 Readout of Error Queue
The error queue can be read out after each command or by means of an SRQ interrupt routine if an
error has occurred (see section 3.7.4.5 Error Queue Query)
The program below is a routine for reading out the error queue until it is empty.
:
1290Errqueue:
1300 IEC OUT 20,"SYST:ERR?": ’ Reads out error queue until queue is empty
1310 IEC IN 20,E$
1320 IF LEFT$(E$,1)="0" THEN RETURN:’ Quits error routine
1330 PRINT "Contents of error queue: ";E$: GOTO Errqueue
:
3.15.15 Command Synchronization
The synchronization modes realized in the example below are described in section 3.6.8, Command
Synchronization.
Use commands *WAI, *OPC? or *OPC with SRQ to terminate a specific action before a new one is
executed. Through suitable programming the controller can be made to wait for a specific action to be
completed (see section 3.6.8.3 Comparison of Synchronization Capabilities).
There are two events in the UPL which have to be waited for before the next command can be
executed:
• End of calibration
• End of measurement
Selection of an instrument with automatic calibration is used as an example for demonstrating the three
synchronization methods. The following command should only be sent when the automatic calibration is
completed. For more detailed information refer to section 3.6.8.1 Wait for End of Calibration.
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming
1078.2008.02 3.321 E-10
3.15.15.1 Command Synchronization with *WAI
IECOUT 20,"INSTrument2 A100;*WAI":’ Selects new analog instrument and
waits with *WAI for end of calibration
3.15.15.2 Command Synchronization with *OPC?
IECOUT 20,"INSTrument2 A100":’ Selects new analog instrument
IECOUT 20,"*OPC?":’ Sends OPC?. Calibration is terminated when
IECIN 20,A$:’ the response "1" is received.
3.15.15.3 Command Synchronization with *OPC and SRQ
Command synchronization with *OPC and SRQ is described in advance of section 3.15.16 Service
Request, which should best be read through first. Waiting for end of calibration with *OPC and SRQ
after an instrument selection is again used as an example.
Procedure:
• set Operation Complete bit (OPC) in the Event Status Register,
• set ESB bit 5 in the Status Byte Register
• activate SRQ handler,
• call up change of instrument with automatic calibration,
• output synchronization command *OPC,
• wait in a loop for SRQ (end of calibration).
1057 ’***************** Setting up SRQ ********************************
1058 IEC TERM 10:’ Line Feed as terminator
1059 IEC TIME 10000.’ IEC/IEEE-bus timeout 10 s
1060 IEC OUT 20,"*CLS"
1061 ’Enable OPC (Operation Complete) in the Event Status Register
1062 ’ +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
1063 ’ | d7| Event Status Register | d0|
1064 ’ |POW|USR|CME|EXE|DDE|QUE| |OPC|
1065 IEC OUT 20,"*ESE 1": ’ | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 1 |
1066 ’ +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
1067 ’Trigger SRQ through entry in the Event Status Register (d5=1)
1068 ’ +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
1069 ’ | d7| Status Byte Register | d0|
1070 ’ |SOR|RQS|ESB| |SQR| | | |
1071 IEC OUT 20,"*SRE 96": ’ | 0 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 |
1072 ’ +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
1073 ON SRQ1 GOSUB Srqintr:’ Activate SRQ handler of IEC/IEEE bus No. 1
:
1080 IECOUT 20,"INSTrument2 A100":’ Instrument change with autom. calibr.
1090 IECOUT 20,"*OPC":’ Synchronization command
:
1100 REPEAT
1110 ’Other tasks may be performed as long as no SRQ is appears.
1120 ’Signalled by a count on screen.
1130 Count=Count+1: PRINT Count
1140 UNTIL Srqflag=0:’ Flag = 1 when calibration is completed
:
2000 ’** Standard SRQ interrupt routine shown in section 4.15.1.2 ***
2010 Srqintr:
2020 IEC SPL 20,Sb%: ’ Reads in Status Byte via Serial Poll
2040 :
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming UPL
1078.2008.02 3.322 E-10
3.15.16 Service Request
As can be seen from the introduction to the SRQ standard routine below, a Service Request routine
requires an extended initialization of the UPL.
The SRQ standard routine uses Serial Poll for processing SRQ . This SRQ routine is used in almost all
demo programs but for the sake of clarity it is not listed each time (remark in program code). The
program example in section 3.15.16.2 SRQ Interrupt Routine with Parallel Poll, demonstrates SRQ
handling by means of Parallel Poll which should be used to speed up identification of the instrument
raising the SRQ when several IEC/IEEE-bus instruments are connected.
Same as with all other program examples it is assumed that IEC/IEEE-bus address 20 is set on the UPL
to be controlled.
3.15.16.1 SRQ Interrupt Routine with Serial Poll
The examples below for initializing an SRQ and the SRQ interrupt routine are suggestions which can be
modified as required by the specific application.
Serial Poll SRQ and the Serial Poll SRQ interrupt routine are initialized in this or a similar form in almost
all program examples.
3.15.16.1.1 Initialization of Serial Poll SRQ
:
100 ’************ Initializing Serial Poll SRQ ****************
110 IEC TERM 10:’ IEC/IEEE-bus terminator = Line Feed
120 IEC TIME 10000: ’ IEC/IEEE-bus waiting time 10 s
130 IEC OUT 20,"*CLS":’Resets Status Register
140 ’Enables error bits in the Event Status Register
150 ’ +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
160 ’ | d7| Event Status Register | d0|
170 ’ |POW|USR|CME|EXE|DDE|QUE| |OPC|
180 IEC OUT 20,"*ESE 61": ’ | 0 | 0 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 1 |
190 ’ +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
200 ’Enables d5 for SRQ trigger through Event Status Register
210 ’ +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
220 ’ | d7| Status Byte Register | d0|
230 ’ |SOR|RQS|ESB| |SQR| | | |
240 IEC OUT 20,"*SRE 96": ’ | 0 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 |
250 ’ +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
260 Srqflag=0
270 ON SRQ1 GOSUB Srqintr: ’ Activates SRQ handler
:
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming
1078.2008.02 3.323 E-10
3.15.16.1.2 Serial Poll SRQ Routine
The following standard SRQ interrupt routine is used in almost all the program examples. It displays the
reason for the SRQ and the contents of the error queue on the controller monitor and signals to the
main program with Srqflag = 1, that a SRQ has occurred.
1000Srqintr:
1010 ’ ***********************************************
1020 ’ ******* Standard SRQ Interrupt Routine ********
1030 ’ ***********************************************
1040 IEC SPL 20,Sb%: ’ Read-in of Status Byte
1050 IF (Sb% AND 64)=0 THEN GOTO Ret: ’ No response in the case of false
alarm
1060 Srqflag=1
1070 PRINT "Status Byte Register = ";Sb%
1080 IF (Sb% AND 1) THEN PRINT " SRQ->Not used"
1090 IF (Sb% AND 2) THEN PRINT " SRQ->Not used"
1100 IF (Sb% AND 4) THEN PRINT " SRQ->Not used"
1110 IF (Sb% AND 8) THEN PRINT " SRQ->Questionable-status bit"
1120 IF (Sb% AND 16) THEN PRINT " SRQ->Not used"
1130 IF (Sb% AND 32) THEN PRINT " SRQ->Event-status bit"
1140 IF (Sb% AND 64) THEN PRINT " SRQ->Summary bit"
1150 IF (Sb% AND 128) THEN PRINT " SRQ->Operation-status bit"
1160 ’
1170 IEC OUT 20,"*ESR?": ’ Read-in of Status Register
1180 IEC IN 20,Es$
1190 PRINT "Event Status Register = ";Es$
1200 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 1) THEN PRINT " ESR->Operation-complete bit"
1210 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 2) THEN PRINT " ESR->Not used"
1220 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 4) THEN PRINT " ESR->Query-error bit"
1230 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 8) THEN PRINT " ESR->Device-dep. error bit"
1240 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 16) THEN PRINT " ESR->Execution-error bit"
1250 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 32) THEN PRINT " ESR->Command-error bit"
1260 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 64) THEN PRINT " ESR->User-request bit"
1270 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 128) THEN PRINT " ESR->Power-on bit"
1280 ’
1290Errqueue:
1300 IEC OUT 20,"SYST:ERR?": ’ Readout of error queue until queue is empty!
1310 IEC IN 20,E$
1320 IF LEFT$(E$,1)="0" THEN GOTO Ret
1330 PRINT "Contents of Error Queue:"
1340 PRINT " ";E$: GOTO Errqueue
1350 ’
1360Ret: ON SRQ1 GOSUB Srqintr: RETURN:’ Reactivates SRQ!
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming UPL
1078.2008.02 3.324 E-10
3.15.16.2 SRQ Interrupt Routine with Parallel Poll
3.15.16.2.1 Initialization of Parallel Poll SRQ
:
100 ’************ Initialization of Parallel Poll SRQ ********************
110 IEC TERM 10:’ IEC/IEEE-bus terminator = Line Feed
120 IEC TIME 10000: ’ IEC/IEEE-bus waiting time 10 s
130 IEC OUT 20,"*CLS":’ Resets Status Register
140 IEC OUT 20,"*ESE 121":’ Enables OPC,DDE,EXE,CMD in the Event Status Reg.
150 IEC OUT 20,"*SRE 32":’ Enables Event Status bit as SRQ event
160 IEC OUT 20,"*PRE 255":’ Enables all Parallel Poll lines
170 IEC PCON 20,1,6:’UPL identifies itself with 1 on line 6
180 IEC PCON 10,1,3:’Device with address 10 ident. itself with 1 on line 3
190 ON SRQ1 GOSUB Srqintr:’ SRQ handler activated
:
3.15.16.2.2 Parallel Poll SRQ Routine
740 ’******************************************************************
750 ’******* Standard Parallel-Poll SRQ Interrupt Routine *************
760 ’******************************************************************
770Srqintr:
790 PRINT "SRQ has occurred!"
800 IEC PPL Pp%
810 IF (Pp% AND 32)<>0 THEN GOSUB UPLsrq
820 IF (Pp% AND 4)<>0 THEN GOSUB Adr10srq
825 ON SRQ1 GOSUB Srqintr: RETURN:’ Reactivates SRQ
826 ’
830UPLsrq:
840 ’******************************************************************
850 ’********** SRQ sent by UPL *******************
860 ’******************************************************************
1040 IEC SPL 20,Sb%: ’ Read-in of Status Byte
1060 Srqflag=1
1070 PRINT "Status Byte Register = ";Sb%
1080 IF (Sb% AND 1) THEN PRINT " SRQ->Not used"
1090 IF (Sb% AND 2) THEN PRINT " SRQ->Not used"
1100 IF (Sb% AND 4) THEN PRINT " SRQ->Not used"
1110 IF (Sb% AND 8) THEN PRINT " SRQ->Questionable status"
1120 IF (Sb% AND 16) THEN PRINT " SRQ->Not used"
1130 IF (Sb% AND 32) THEN PRINT " SRQ->Event Status"
1140 IF (Sb% AND 64) THEN PRINT " SRQ->Summary"
1150 IF (Sb% AND 128) THEN PRINT " SRQ->Operation Status"
1160 ’
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming
1078.2008.02 3.325 E-10
1170 IEC OUT 20,"*ESR?": ’ Read-in of Event Status Register
1180 IEC IN 20,Es$
1190 PRINT "Event Status Register = ";Es$
1200 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 1) THEN PRINT " ESR->Operation complete"
1210 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 2) THEN PRINT " ESR->Not used"
1220 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 4) THEN PRINT " ESR->Query error"
1230 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 8) THEN PRINT " ESR->Device-dep. error"
1240 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 16) THEN PRINT " ESR->Execution error"
1250 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 32) THEN PRINT " ESR->Command error"
1260 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 64) THEN PRINT " ESR->User request"
1270 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 128) THEN PRINT " ESR->Power on"
1280 ’
1290Errqueue:
1300 IEC OUT 20,"SYST:ERR?": ’ Read-out of error queue until it is empty
1310 IEC IN 20,E$
1320 IF LEFT$(E$,1)="0" THEN RETURN
1330 PRINT "Contents of error queue:"
1340 PRINT " ";E$: GOTO Errqueue
1250 RETURN
1260 ’
1270Adr10srq:
1280 ’*****************************************************************
1290 ’******* SRQ sent by device with the address 10 *************
1300 ’*****************************************************************
1310 IEC SPL 10,Sb%: ’ Reset SRQ conditions for device with address 10
1320 ’SRQ evaluation for device with the address 10
1330 ’
1340 ’
1350 RETURN
3.15.17 Readout of Cursor Position and Values
The values of a curve displayed on the UPL can be read by the controller, no matter whether the curve
has been generated by a sweep or FFT or loaded into the UPL from a file or the controller. To do so the
o- or * cursor has to be positioned as required. The value at the cursor crossing the curve or the
difference value can be read out.
The great number of commands available for positioning the cursor are listed below.
To simplify the program examples for the various cursor display modes and the respective intercept
points, the cursor position is indicated directly in the form of a value.
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming UPL
1078.2008.02 3.326 E-10
Table 3-16 Positioning the cursor on the displayed curve
Positioning the cursor for curve display
Positioning the o cursor: Positioning the *-cursor:
"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE MIN1"
Sets the horizontal o-cursor to the minimum value of
curve A on the X axis.
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE MIN1"
Sets the horizontal *-cursor for modes
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE N12|D12|C12"
to the minimum value of curve A on the X axis .
Sets vertical *-cursor for modes
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE HL1|HL2|HLD1|HLD2"
to minimum of curve A on the Y axis.
"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE MAX1"
Sets horizontal o-cursor to maximum of
curve A.
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE MAX1"
Sets horizontal *-cursor for modes
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE N12|D12|C12"
to maximum of curve A on the X axis.
Sets vertical *-cursor for modes
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE HL1|HL2|HLD1|HLD2"
to maximum of curve A on the Y axis.
"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE MIN2"
Sets horizontal o-cursor to minimum of
curve B.
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE MIN2"
Sets horizontal *-cursor for modes
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE N12|D12|C12"
to maximum of curve B on the X axis.
Sets vertical *-cursor for modes
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE HL1|HL2|HLD1|HLD2"
to minimum of curve B on the Y axis.
"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE MAX2"
Sets horizontal o-cursor to maximum of
curve B.
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE MAX2"
Sets horizontal *-cursor for modes
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE N12|D12|C12"
to maximum of curve B on the X axis.
Sets vertical *-cursor for modes
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE HL1|HL2|HLD1|HLD2"
to maximum of curve B on the Y axis.
"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE VALue"
"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS 1000kHz"
Sets horizontal o-cursor for modes
"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE N12|D12|C12"
to specified position on the X axis.
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE VALue"
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS 1000kHz"
Sets horizontal *-cursor for modes
"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE N12|D12|C12"
to specified X position.
Sets vertical *-cursor for modes
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE HL1|HL2|HLD1|HLD2
to specified position on the Y axis.
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming
1078.2008.02 3.327 E-10
Table 3-17 Positioning the cursor for FFT spectrum display
Positioning the cursor for FFT spectrum display
Positioning the o-cursor: Positioning the *-cursor:
"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE MARKer1"
Sets vertical o-cursor to X position of marker if the latter was
switched on with
"DISP:TRAC1|2:MARK:MODE MAX|CURS".
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE MARKer1"
Sets vertical *-cursor to X position of marker if the latter was
switched on with "DISP:TRAC1|2:MARK:MODE MAX|CURS".
"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE NEXTmarker"
Sets vertical o-cursor to X position of next harmonic if
harmonics display was switched on with
DISP:TRAC1|2:MARK:HARM ON.
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE NEXTmarker"
Sets vertical *-cursor to X position of next harmonic if
harmonics display was switched on with
"DISP:TRAC1|2:MARK:HARM ON".
"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE IMAX1"
Sets vertical o-cursor to X position of highest Y value of FFT
curve A.
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE IMAX1"
Sets vertical *-cursor to X position of highest Y value of
FFT curve A.
"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE IMAX2"
Sets vertical o-cursor to X position of highest Y value of FFT
curve B.
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE IMAX2"
Sets vertical *-cursor to X position of highest Y value of
FFT curve B.
Note:
Positioning of *-cursor partly depends on the set cursor mode "DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE
N12|D12|C12|HL1|HL2|HLD1|HLD2". Function and effect of the individual cursor modes can be
seen from the following diagrams and the associated program line 110
Abbreviations used in the diagrams below:
o(A) = Y value at crosspoint of vertical o-cursor on curve A
o(B) = Y value at crosspoint of vertical o-cursor on curve B
o(X) = X value of vertical o-cursor
*(A) = Y value at crosspoint of vertical *-cursor on curve A
*(B) = Y value at crosspoint of vertical *-cursor on curve B
*(X) = X value of vertical *-cursor
*(Y) = Y value of horizontal *-cursor
*(X)AL = X value at left crosspoint of horizontal *-cursor on curve A
*(X)AR = X value at right crosspoint of horizontal *-cursor on curve A
*(X)BL = X value at left crosspoint of horizontal *-cursor on curve B
*(X)BR = X value at right crosspoint of horizontal *-cursor on curve B
Cursor data for traces can be read out without restrictions as from UPL program version 2.10 onwards.!
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming UPL
1078.2008.02 3.328 E-10
100 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1 ACT": ’ Activates o-cursor 1
110 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:MODE N12"
120 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE VAL": ’at 1000 Hz
130 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS 1000 Hz"
Analogously, CURS2 activates the *-cursor yielding the values *(A), *(X) and
*(B)
Fig. 3-12 Cursor data o(A), o(X), o(B), *(A), *(X), *(B)
100 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1 ACT": ’ Activates o-cursor 1
110 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:MODE D12"
120 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE VAL": ’at 1000 Hz
130 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS 1000 Hz"
Analogously, CURS2 activates the *-cursor yielding the values *(A) - *(B) and
*(X)
Fig. 3-13 Cursor data o(A)-o(B), o(X), *(A)-*(B), *(X)
100 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1 ACT;CURS2 ACT": ’Activates
o- and *-cursors
110 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:MODE C12"
120 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE VAL": ’o-cursor 1 kHz
130 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS 1000 Hz"
140 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE VAL": ’*-cursor 2 kHz
150 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS 5000 Hz"
Fig. 3-14 Cursor data *(A)-o(A), *(X)-o(X), *(B)-o(B)
100 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2 ACT": ’ Activates *-cursor
110 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:MODE HL1"
120 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE VAL": ’Positions *-
cursor to
Y value 0.2 V
130 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS 0.2 V"
Analogously, cursor ...CURS2:MODE HL2 yields values *(X)BL, *(Y) and
*(X)BR for curve B.
Fig. 3-15 Cursor data *(X)AL, *(Y), *(X)AR
100 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1 ACT;CURS2 ACT": ’Activates
o- and *-cursors
110 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:MODE HLD1"
120 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE VAL": ’Positions
o-cursor on 1000 Hz
130 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS 1000.0 Hz"
140 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE VAL": ’Positions
*-cursor on Y value 0.2 V.
150 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS 0.2 V"
Fig. 3-16 Cursor data *(X)AL, o(A)-*(Y), *(X)AR
Kurve B
Kurve A
X
Y
o
DATA1?
DATA2?
DATA3?
o(A)
o(X)
o(B)
Kurve B
Kurve A
X
Y
o
DATA1?
DATA2?
o(A)-o(B)
o(X)
Kurve B
Kurve A
X
Y
o
*
DATA1?
DATA2?
DATA3?
*(A)-o(A)
*(X)-o(X)
*(B)-o(B)
Kurve B
Kurve A
X
Y
*
DATA1?
DATA2?
DATA3?
*(X)AL
*(Y)
*(X)AR
Kurve B
Kurve A
X
Y
o
*
DATA1?
DATA2?
DATA3?
*(X)AL
o(A)-*(Y)
*(X)AR
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming
1078.2008.02 3.329 E-10
100 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1 ACT;CURS2 ACT": ’Activates
o- and *-cursors
110 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:MODE HLD2"
120 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE VAL": ’Positions
o-cursor on 1000 Hz
130 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS 1000.0 Hz"
140 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE VAL": ’Positions
*-cursor on Y value 0.2 V
150 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS 0.2 V"
Fig. 3-17 Cursor data *(X)BL, o(B)-*(Y), *(X)BR
Readout of cursor values
DATA1?, DATA2? and DATA3? values are read in with the following commands:
IECOUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS:DATA1?":IEC IN 20,"D1$ Values are output with the unit
IECOUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS:DATA2?":IEC IN 20,"D2$ indicated in the display.
IECOUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS:DATA3?":IEC IN 20,"D3$
3.15.18 Call a BASIC-Macro
With the UPL, setting and measurement sequences can be written as BASIC programs or recorded
using the built-in program generator (see 3.15.3 Command Logging - Converting B10 into IEC/IEEE-
Bus Commands). Option UPL-K2 (Universal Autorun Control) is required. The generated BASIC
programs can be stored (preferred file extension: .BAS) and called and used in various ways (see Macro
operating).
The following example illustrates how a BASIC macro is called by means of an IEC/IEEE-bus control
program in the programming language C and the IEC/IEEE-bus driver GPIB.COM from National
Instruments:
Example 1:
BASIC macro transfers a measurement result in a measurement-result buffer to the
control program
BASIC macro:
A short program is written under Universal Autorun Control UPL-B10 to trigger a level in channel 1. To
demonstrate that any data can be transferred to the IEC/IEEE-bus control program as floating-point
values via the measurement-result buffers, the level of channel 1 (line 30) is copied into the
measurement-result buffer of channel 2 (line 40), from where it is read with the aid of the IEC/IEEE-bus
control program.
This BASIC macro is stored in the UPL under the file name LEV_CH1.BAS.
10 UPL OUT "INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI"
20 UPL OUT "*TRG;*WAI"
30 UPL OUT "SENS:DATA?": UPL IN A$: ’ level of channel 1 ...
40 UPL OUT "SENS:DATA2 "+A$: ’... copying into buffer of channel 2
50 END
How to proceed:
• Press the F3 key to switch from the UPL user interface to Universal Autorun Control.
• Type the five lines shown above.
• Store program with SAVE LEV_CH1.BAS.
• Press the F3 key again to return to UPL user interface.
Kurve B
Kurve A
X
Y
o
*
DATA1?
DATA2?
DATA3?
*(X)BL
o(B)-*(Y)
*(X)BR
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming UPL
1078.2008.02 3.330 E-10
The following IEC/IEEE-bus control program calls the BASIC macro in the UPL with the command
SYST:PROG:EXEC ’LEV_CH1.BAS’. There is a delay until serial polling indicates that bit 14 (RUN)
has changed from 1 to 0 in the OPERation register; this indicates that the BASIC macro has been
executed.
The measurement result is read from channel 2’s measurement-result buffer and displayed on the
screen.
IEC/IEEE-bus control program in controller:
/*************************************************************************
* A BASIC program in UPL triggering a level-measurement result in channel 1
* To be started as a BASIC macro from the controller
* Measurement result to be output at the controller
**************************************************************************/
#include <stdio.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <conio.h>
#include <bios.h>
#include "C:\NI-GPIB\C\DECL.H"
void report_error(int fd, char *errmsg)
{
fprintf(stderr, "Error %d: %s\n", iberr, errmsg);
if (fd != -1) {
printf("Cleanup: taking board off-line\n");
ibonl(fd,0);
}
getch();
exit(1); /* abort program */
}
void befout (int upl, char *befstr)
{
ibwrt(upl, befstr,(long)strlen(befstr));
if (ibsta & ERR)
report_error (upl, "Could not initialize UPL");
}
void queryin (int upl, char* reading)
{
ibrd(upl, reading, 20L);
if (ibsta & ERR)
report_error (upl, "Could not read data from UPL");
reading[ibcnt-1] = ’\0’; /* Overwrites line feed with string terminator */
}
void main()
{
int upl; /* File descriptor for UPL */
int i;
char reading[20]; /* UPL measurement results */
long count = 0;
char stb;
if ((upl = ibdev(0, 20, 0, T10s, 1, 0)) < 0)
report_error (upl, "Could not initialize UPL");
befout (upl,"*ESE 0"); //Disables information from event status register
befout (upl,"*SRE 0"); //Disables SRQ
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming
1078.2008.02 3.331 E-10
/* The 1 -> 0 transition of bit 14 (RUN) in the OPERation register
should set bit 7 (OPER) in the STB. The STB is read by means
of serial poll until the event has occurred. */
befout (upl,"STAT:OPER:NTR 16384"); /* Enables 1->0 transition of bit 14 */
befout (upl,"STAT:OPER:PTR 0"); /* Disables 0->1 transition of bit 14
*/
befout (upl,"STAT:OPER:ENAB 16384"); /* Enables bit 14 for STB */
/* The BASIC program LEV_CH1.BAS in the UPL working directory writes
the level measured in channel 1 to the measurement-result buffer of
channel 2
to demonstrate data transfer via the measurement-result buffers. */
for (i=1; i <= 10; i++)
{/* Reads 10 measurement results via the BASIC macro LEV_CH1.BAS */
/* Reading the EVENt part of the OPERation register deletes the
OPER bit in the status byte register! */
befout (upl,"STAT:OPER:EVEN?");
queryin (upl,reading);
befout (upl,"SYST:PROG:EXEC ’LEV_CH1.BAS’"); // Starts the BASIC macro
/* When the RUN bit (bit 14) in the OPERation register changes from 1 to
0, the BASIC macro has been executed and the measurement
result can be read from the measurement-result buffer. */
stb = 0;
while ((stb & 0x80) == 0) // Serial poll is performed until
{ // bit 7 (OPER) in the STB is set to 1.
ibrsp (upl,&stb); // Serial poll of the status byte register
if ((count++ % 100) == 0) // Progress counter while
printf ("+"); // waiting for bit 7 = 1 */
}
/* The level of channel 1 can be read from the channel-2 measurement-
result buffer, where it was stored by the BASIC macro. */
befout (upl,"SENS:DATA2?");
queryin (upl,reading);
printf ("\n%s\n",reading);
}
printf ("Any key:\n");
getch ();
ibonl(upl, 0); /* Take UPL off-line */
}
Data transfer between BASIC macro and controller via the measurement-result buffers:
The measurement-result buffers can be written to so as to transfer data between the BASIC macro and
the controller. The measurement results calculated by the macro can thus then be displayed in the UPL
environment, which is familiar to the user.
Furthermore, fast exchange of floating-point parameters and floating-point measurement results
between the UPL macro and the controller is possible via the measurement-result buffers. The following
commands are available for the data exchange:
SENS1:DATA1, SENS1:DATA2
SENS2:DATA1, SENS2:DATA2
SENS3:DATA1, SENS3:DATA2
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming UPL
1078.2008.02 3.332 E-10
Note:
If the measurement results are not to be overwritten by the UPL measurement task, make sure the
measurement task is halted, ie no measurement or sweep is being performed, while the measurement
results are being written.
Example 2:
BASIC macro transfers a set of data in a block buffer to the control program
BASIC macro:
A short program is written under Universal Autorun Control UPL-B10. This program writes any set of
data into the block buffer specially generated for BASIC macros. The data are then read from this buffer
by the IEC/IEEE-bus control program.
This BASIC macro is stored in the UPL under BLK.BAS.
10 DIM A(1000): Frq=100: A(0)=X
20 FOR I=1 TO 999: ’ 1000 log. frequency values ...
30 Frq=Frq*1.00503: A(I)=Frq: ’ ... 100 Hz to 15 kHz
40 NEXT I
50 UPL BLOCKOUT A(0),1000
60 UPL OUT "SYST:PROG"
70 END
Proceed as for example 1.
The following IEC/IEEE-bus control program calls the BASIC macro in the UPL with the command
SYST:PROG:EXEC ’BLK.BAS’. There is a delay until serial polling indicates that bit 14 (RUN) in the
OPERation register has changed from 1 to 0. This shows that the BASIC macro has been executed.
The block data are read from the block buffer and displayed on the screen.
IEC/IEEE-bus control program in the controller:
First part of program as in example 1
:
:
befout (upl,"SYST:PROG:EXEC ’BLK.BAS’"); // Starts the BASIC macro
stb = 0;
while ((stb & 0x80) == 0) // Serial poll is performed until
{ // bit 7 (OPER) in the STB is set to 1.
ibrsp (upl,&stb);
if ((count++ % 100) == 0) // Progress counter while
printf ("_"); // waiting for bit 7 = 1 */
}
/* Determines number of values in the block buffer */
befout (upl, "SYST:PROG:POIN?");
queryin (upl,reading);
points = atoi (reading);
printf ("\nBlock buffer contains %d values. Display values...\n",points);
getch();
/* Read values from block buffer */
befout (upl,"SYST:PROG?"); /* Fetch contents from block buffer.
The values are available as ASCII characters separated
by commas */
ibeos (upl,0x142C); //Stringterminator = ’,’
for (i = 0; i < points-1; i++)
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming
1078.2008.02 3.333 E-10
{// Each value is read up to the comma
queryin (upl,reading);
fltvalfield[i] = atof (reading);
}
// Before the last value has been read, the string terminator ...
ibeos (upl,0x140A); //... is reset to AF.
queryin (upl,reading);
fltvalfield[i] = atof (reading);
// Values are output on the screen.
for (i = 0; i < points; i++)
printf ("%d: %f\n", i+1, fltvalfield[i]);
printf ("Any key:\n");
getch ();
ibonl(upl, 0); /* Take UPL off-line */
}
3.15.19 Third analysis - Output of Block Data
Example of Programming for Universal Autorun Control UPL-B10:
The following program example shows the settings for the third analysis measurement function of a
noise signal (1/3 OCTAVE measurement function in ANALYZER panel).
Important!
The current level values of the 1/3 octave analysis are available under Scan Count 1 (line 200), the
maximum level values of the max. hold function (line 60) under Scan Count 2 (line 210). The frequency
list is queried with TRAC? LIST (line 140) , the max. hold level values with TRAC? TRAC (line 260).
10 REM ******** Third analysis - read out of Block Data ******************
20 UPL OUT "*RST": ’ UPL default setup
30 UPL OUT "SOUR:FUNC RAND": ’ Noise signal for generator
40 UPL OUT "INP:TYPE GEN2": ’ Internal connection to generator channel 2
50 UPL OUT "SENS:FUNC ’THIR’": ’ Switches on Third Analysis
60 UPL OUT "SENS:VOLT:INTV:MODE FOR": ’ Max-hold function switched on
70 UPL OUT "DISP:TRAC:OPER FFTL": ’ FFT data in tabular form
80 UPL OUT "INIT:CONT OFF": ’ Selects single-measurement mode
90 UPL OUT "*TRG;*WAI": ’ Triggers single-measurement
100 UPL OUT "TRAC:POIN? LIST": ’ Request count of frequency values
110 UPL IN A$: Count=VAL(A$): ’ Read out count of frequency values
120 PRINT "Count of freq. values:";Count: INPUT "Go on......";A$
130 DIM X(Count): ’ Field for frequency values
140 UPL OUT "TRAC? LIST": ’ Read out frequency values
150 UPL BLOCKIN X(0): ’ Loads frequency block data into the data field X
160 FOR I=0 TO Count-1
170 PRINT X(I);"Hz ": ’ Display frequency values
180 NEXT I
190 UPL OUT "DISP:TRAC:OPER SPEC": ’ COUNT selection only avail. in SPEC
200 REM UPL OUT "DISP:TRAC:COUN 1": ’ Choose current values of T. Analysis
210 UPL OUT "DISP:TRAC:COUN 2": ’ Choose Max-hold values of Third Analysis
220 UPL OUT "TRAC:POIN? TRAC": ’ Request count of level values
230 UPL IN A$: Count=VAL(A$): ’ Read out count of level values
240 PRINT : PRINT "Count of level values: ";Count: INPUT "Go on......";A$
250 DIM Y(Count): ’ Field for level values
260 UPL OUT "TRAC? TRAC": ’ Read out Max-hold level values
270 UPL BLOCKIN Y(0): ’ Loads level block data into the data field Y
280 FOR I=0 TO Count-1
290 PRINT Y(I);"V ": ’ Display level values
300 NEXT I
310 END
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming UPL
1078.2008.02 3.334 E-10
3.15.20 Binary Data via IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface
Using the IEC bus command MMEMory:DATA 'filename', #<lele><le><Binärdaten>, it is
possible to transfer any binary data and files from the host to the UPL.
#220
The ASCII character ’#’ precedes each binary block transfer
Number of digits of the following lenght value in ASCII
Length in ASCII of the binary datarecord in Bytes.
:MMEM:DATA ’filename’, < Any binary data >
Using the IEC bus command MMEMory:CHECk? 'filename', a digital signature can be calculated on
the transferred binary data record in order to check whether an error occurred.
To ease the file transfer from host to the UPL not only experienced C- and IEC bus programmers the
DOS programs IEC_BT.EXE, RS232_BT.EXE and UPMD5.EXE are provided from UPL version 2.0.
First Steps
After the installation of a new UPL software version 2.0 or higher, the following two EXE files are stored
in the C:\UPL\IEC_EXAM directory (the EXE files can be run under DOS):
IEC_BT.EXE (copied by a process controller from a file and transferred to UPL via the IEC/IEEE bus)
RS232_BT.EXE (kopiert von einem Steuerrechner aus eine Datei über RS232-Schnittstelle zum UPL)
UPMD5.EXE (generates the unique signature of a file)
The associated source code
IEC_BT.C
RS232_BT.BAS
is stored too.
To be able to transfer a file from a process controller to the UPL via the IEC/IEEE-bus interface or
RS232 control, the files IEC_BT.EXE, RS232_BT.EXE and UPMD5.EXE must be copied to a floppy disk
and transferred from the disk to the process controller. The disk can be copied either on the UPL under
DOS or, with the UPL measurement software running, from the FILE Panel using the commands ’Copy’
and ’To’.
Important: The program UPMD5.EXE must be in the directory from which IEC_BT.EXE or
RS232_BT.BAS is started, or in a directory specified under PATH.
Transfer of File to UPL via IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface
The program IEC_BT.EXE allow the transfer of any file to the UPL via the IEC/IEEE-bus interface.
This is done by transmitting then IEC bus command MMEM:DATA followed by then contents of the file
to the UPL. The filename is specified interactively.
The source file IEC_BT.C is written in the programming language C. The source file provides
information on the transfer procedure and the call-up of the MD5 signature method. IEC_BT can be
adapted to user’s requirements.
For the signature method to be executed, an IEC/IEEE-bus driver from National Instruments must be
installed in the process controller, and the setting Remote via IEC BUS selected in the OPTIONS
Panel of the UPL.
After IEC_BT is called up, the program tries to find
• an UPL connected to the IEC/IEEE bus. When an UPL has been found, measurements on UPL are
stopped to obtain maximum transfer speed.
• The path and name of the file to be transferred are requested, as well as the path and name of the
target file to be generated in the UPL.
UPL IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming
1078.2008.02 3.335 E-10
• The program generates a temporary file with the name TEMP.OUT, which contains the IEC/IEEE-
bus command required for the UPL as well as the data record to be transferred.
• TEMP.OUT is transferred to the UPL, followed by a final NL. The transfer rate between 30 and 100
Kbytes per second depends on the process controller and the UPL configuration. The file
TEMP.OUT remains stored in the process controller after it is transferred so that it can be read if
necessary by means of an editor capable of handling binary characters.
• At the end of the transfer, a signature is generated both of the original file stored in the process
controller and the file generated in the UPL (see MD5 signature method). If the signatures agree, it
can be assumed that the two files are completely identical and no transmission errors have occurred.
Transmitting a File to UPL via RS232 Interface
see 3.17.5 Binary Data via RS232 Interface
MD5 Signature Method
MD5 stands for "Message Digest 5" (coding and processing rule), an algorithm recognised world-wide
which is used for generating a 128-bit checksum (Signature) of a data record.
To check whether a file was transferred error-free from the process controller to the UPL, the
MD5 signature method can be used to generate the digital signature of the file on the process controller
prior to the transfer. After the transfer of the file to the UPL via the IEC/IEEE bus, a digital signature is
generated on the UPL. If the two signatures agree, it can be assumed that the contents of the files are
identical and the transfer was therefore error-free. Moreover, it can be determined in this way whether
any subsequent modifications have been made to the file.
The program UPMD5.EXE generates a 16-byte hexadecimal signature of any file. The signature is
displayed as a 32-digit ASCII character string on the screen.
Example:
The signature of the file IEC_BT.C is to be generated:
UPMD5 IEC_BT.C
ASCII character string displayed on the screen:
0d45494a3e3e262609e20050b5274f58
If the signature of a file is needed for further processing in a program, the signature can be written to a
file instead of being displayed on the screen:
Example:
UPMD5 IEC_BT.C > IEC_BT.CHK
UPMD5.EXE can conveniently be called up as "child process" from its IEC/IEEE-bus or RS232 control
program in order to evaluate the signature.
As an example in programming language C, here are the lines of source code IEC_BT.C:
// Calculate MD5 checksum of host file. Pipe result to chkfile
sprintf (syststr,"UPMD5.EXE %s > %s",hostfile, chkfile);
// UPMD5.EXE child process prints checksum to chkfile
err = system (syststr); // Call MD5 data security child process
Example in QuickBASIC see source code RS232_BT.BAS lines 53 and 54
shellcmd$ = "UPMD5.EXE " + hostfina$ + "> " + hostcheckfina$
SHELL (shellcmd$)
To fetch the signature of a file stored on the UPL via the IEC/IEEE bus or under RS232 control, the
command
"MMEMory:CHECk? ’filename’"
is to be sent to the UPL.
The 32-digit signature of the requested file will be sent in return.
If ’filename’ is specified without giving the path, the file will be searched in the current working
directory of the UPL. The current working directory of the UPL is the directory specified under Work
Dir in the FILE Panel of the UPL.The source code for the MD5 signature method is available on the
Internet under www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1321.html
IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming UPL
1078.2008.02 3.336 E-10
UPL-B10 Universal Sequence Controller
1078.2008.02 3.337 E-10
3.16 Automatic Control of UPL with R&S BASIC
Important:
The software described below is an accessory for UPL and available under the designation UPL-B10 . It
is not part of the equipment supplied with UPL.
The program examples in the paths C:\UPL\B10_EXAM\EXAM1.BAS ff of the UPL software can be
directly run on the UPL with Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10. Files with the extension .SAC are
setup files required by the examples for setting the UPL. Files with the extension .TXT provide the
program code of the examples as an ASCII file and can be accessed by any editor.
3.16.1 Use
Executing frequent test sequences in a fast and reproducible way, summing up the results and creating
a valuable documentation, these are the applications of the UPL universal sequence controller using
R&S BASIC. These automatic measurements, consisting of generator and analyzer functions of the
UPL, are used for a full characterization of instruments and components in production or the test shop
and for ensuring and monitoring the characteristics of system and transmission devices.
A universal sequence controller for automatic measurements does not only have to control the
instrument functions, but must also be able to evaluate the measurement results and branch in the
program. Besides, operator prompting with confirmations and indications is expected. Furthermore,
synchronization with a time base or external events may be required. Thus, some programming is
sometimes required, but it should be as simple as possible. Therefore, a complete BASIC interpreter
with optimally integrated commands is used for operation of the measuring instrument. A simple
keystroke permits to change between normal operation of the measuring instrument and BASIC. The
command extensions for the instrument control feature the same structure as the IEC/IEEE-bus
commands, which in turn comply with the international SCPI standard.
3.16.2 Scope of Functions
The UPL provides about 600 elements (ie functions in the programming language) and almost as many
keywords as parameters. Therefore, users not wishing to do any programming, but also experts will
appreciate the integrated program generator. Every input via front panel or keyboard for setting the UPL
is recorded in logging mode and added to the program as a complete program line. Simple test
sequences are thus completely programmed without having typed a single line. There is no need to
check the correct syntax, the created program can be easily read due to the standard SCPI notation and
is thus simple to modify and supplement.
R&S BASIC with easy-to-handle IEC/IEEE-bus commands that are optimally incorporated into the
syntax can also control further IEC/IEEE-bus devices without the need for an external controller. (This
requires the Remote Control option UPL-B4). Likewise, it is straightforward to operate the serial
interface and write and read files for connection with peripheral devices or other programs.
For graphical output, BASIC can fully make use of the UPL software: Graphs with sophisticated scaling
and labelling, bargraphs, bargraphs with trailing pointers, all of them also with automatic scaling
depending on the measured value, are still available. In addition, the graphics commands belonging to
BASIC can also be used.
If the UPL is to be controlled by an external controller in a test system, two REPLACE commands can
be used to convert all UPL IN/OUT instructions into IEC/IEEE commands (IEC IN/OUT). This
constitutes the basic program for controlling the UPL.
Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10
1078.2008.02 3.338 E-10
3.16.3 Preparation for Use
If the Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10 is ordered together with the UPL it is immediately ready
for use. When retrofitted, it has to be enabled by means of an installation key. A key matching the serial
number of the UPL is supplied to the user to activate the software.
Subsequently, a memory model for BASIC can be selected by calling UPLSET. The user has to indicate
how much memory he wants to reserve for the BASIC program and BASIC data (variables). Since the
UPL cannot simultaneously be remote-controlled via the IEC/IEEE bus and the Universal Sequence
Controller UPL-B10, the user must choose between the two modes by means of UPLSET. The files
CONFIG.SYS and UPL.BAT are thus changed.
-UPLSET contains a menu through which the user is guided:
½Enter "UPLSET" and "↵" after the prompt c:>.
The selected operating mode is maintained even after instrument switch-off.
To estimate the required memory, the following empirical values are given: A typical BASIC line requires
about 25 bytes. A 13k program memory is thus sufficient for about 500 lines or 10 pages of program.
The remaining empty memory can be polled in BASIC with FRE(1). A variable in BASIC requires about
15 bytes (depending on the length of the name), and a field with floating-point numbers requires 8 bytes
for each index. FRE(o) indicates the remaining storage area.
The memory should not be oversized, since the program may be limited in its speed from a certain size
onwards (see also Section 3.16.4.11 UPL/Basic Memory Management - UPL-B10). If the preset values
are not exceeded, the UPL operates at full speed.
In the case of first installation, the UPL must be booted anew; otherwise this is only necessary when the
memory model is changed. UPLSET can also be called in order to poll about the currently active
memory allocation. If the UPL is to operate again as a measuring instrument controlled externally via
IEC/IEEE bus, UPLSET can be used to return to this mode.
UPL-B10 Universal Sequence Controller
1078.2008.02 3.339 E-10
3.16.4 Operation
In the following, a distinction is made between BASIC and the UPL program, the latter including all
routines except BASIC (i.e. the test, readout, graphics output and input routines).
3.16.4.1 Switchover between UPL and BASIC Entry Mode
• Switchover from UPL to BASIC entry mode:
Use function key F3 on the external keyboard or BACKSP on the front panel. With BASIC in the
entry mode, the fields for reading out measured values are displayed at the upper edge irrespective
of whether full graphics display is selected in the UPL or not. The field below down to the softkeys is
available to BASIC.
Possible error messages after pressing the F3 key: When the message "BASIC not installed" is
displayed, BASIC has not been installed at all or incorrectly. "Memory not available" indicates that a
memory size exceeding the available space has been selected with UPLSET.
• Entry in the BASIC mode:
All characters can be entered from the external keyboard as required. A limited control is also
possible from the UPL front panel:
Keys of the front-panel key blocks DATA/PANEL and EDIT as well as the CURSOR keys have the
common functions.
Exceptions:
SELECT = blank
+/- = - (minus)
The keys of the CONTROL block as well as HELP, the tabulator and PgUp/Dn keys in the
CURSOR/VARIATION block have no function.
Letters cannot be output with the front-panel keys but the entry of numerals opens up plenty of
possibilities for controlling a BASIC program without the burden of an external keyboard.
While BASIC waits for a line entry (as after pressing of the "↵"-key), the UPL program continuous to
run in the background and the measurement results are displayed. The effects of the settings made
by BASIC can thus be observed immediately. However, after the first character has been entered,
the UPL program is not called up any more. No measurements are performed and the printer spooler
(HCOPY) does not run in the background until the entry is terminated with "↵".
Note:
When the UPL is controlled with BASIC, printing with HCOPY is considerably slowed down as the
available computing time must be divided up. There will be more time for the printout if the
measurement is stopped using the STOP key on the front panel.
• Switching back from BASIC to UPL entry mode:
Key F3 on the external keyboard or the keys ENTER and then LOCAL on the front panel.
When switching back to UPL control the panels are completely restored to show the current settings
as there may have been changes under BASIC. BASIC is inactive but the last-set status will be
retained.
Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10
1078.2008.02 3.340 E-10
3.16.4.2 First Steps (Readout of Measurement Results)
Program example:
Triggering 10 measurement results and output on the screen.
• Press key F3 of the external keyboard from the UPL user interface. The result display field appears
at the top of the screen, the softkey lines at the bottom. "R&S-BASIC version..." is displayed in the
screen center.
• Enter the following program (including line numbers 10-90).
10 UPL OUT "*RST": ’ UPL default setting
20 UPL OUT "INP:TYPE GEN2": ’Internal connection to generator channel 2
30 FOR I=1 TO 10
40 UPL OUT "INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI": ’ Triggers a single measurement
50 UPL OUT "SENS:DATA?": Requests function test result from channel 1
60 UPL IN M$: ’ Reads in measurement result
70 PRINT M$: ’ Prints measurement result
80 NEXT
90 END
• Start the program with F6:
Due to the default setting made with *RST (see Appendix A UPL Default Setup), the UPL generator
produces a 1-kHz sinewave signal with a level of 0.5 V.
Command INP:TYPE GEN2 internally links generator channel 2 and analyzer channel 1 so that cabling
between inputs and outputs is not required for this first test. The UPL analyzer performs 10 RMS
measurements and the results are displayed on the UPL screen.
Note:
To display a measurement result on the screen it must first be triggered (line 40). After triggering a
settled result is available which can be requested (line 50), read out (line 60) and displayed on the
UPL screen (line 70).
• Return to manual operation: Press F3 on the external keyboard or ENTER and then LOCAL on the
front panel.
3.16.4.3 Logging Mode
Function key F2 switches the logging mode on or off. The respective mode is indicated in the bottom
righthand corner above the softkeys. In the case of "on", all entries used for setting the UPL are
appended to the BASIC program as a command line. After switching to the BASIC mode, these new
lines are displayed automatically and may be modified.
The BASIC commands for automatic control of the UPL differ only slightly from the commands for
remote control via the IEC/IEEE bus. The program can easily be converted into the other commands
using the BASIC command REPLACE (eg for controlling the UPL with an external controller). See also
UPL-specific modifications of the BASIC manual, paragraph REPLACE. A detailed example is given in
section 3.15.3 Command Logging - Converting B10 into IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands.
UPL-B10 Universal Sequence Controller
1078.2008.02 3.341 E-10
3.16.4.4 Differences to IEC/IEEE-Bus Remote Control
The differences between the R&S BASIC commands of the universal sequence controller and the R&S
BASIC commands of the IEC/IEEE-bus control are illustrated by way of examples:
Delimiters of character strings, Timeout
R&S BASIC command R&S IEC/IEEE-bus command
A delimiter need not be specified for the transfer of
a character string. 10 IEC TERM 10
Controller expects LF as delimiter for an UPL
response
Waits indefinitely for a response.
However, in special cases the time can be
monitored by querying bit d0 (OPC) of the Event
Status Register in a loop until the bit assumes the
value 1 which signals that a measurement result is
available. The program example is given under
"Other differences to IEC/IEEE-bus remote control"
further down in this section.
10 IEC TIME 5000
The controller does not wait longer than 5 s for a
response from the UPL before an IEC/IEEE-bus
timeout is signalled.
Output of commands
R&S BASIC command R&S IEC/IEEE bus command
10 UPL OUT "SOUR:FREQ 1000Hz"
(sets generator frequency)
Transfers a character string (constant in quotes,
variable denoted with $ or a character string
expression) to the UPL program.
10 IEC OUT 20, " SOUR:FREQ 1000Hz "
Reading in responses
R&S BASIC command R&S IEC/IEEE-bus command
100 UPL OUT "SENS:DATA2?"
110 UPL IN A$
(transfers the measured value of channel 2 to the variable A$
for processing)
Takes a character string from the UPL program.
This may be a measured value or a queried
setting. The information to be taken must first be
defined in a query (command with question mark).
100 IEC OUT 20, "SENS:DATA2?"
110 IEC IN 20, A$
Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10
1078.2008.02 3.342 E-10
Output of block data
R&S BASIC command R&S IEC/IEEE-bus command
10 DIM A(20)
20 Frqval = 20
30 FOR I = 0 TO 19
40 A(I) = Frqval
50 Frqval = Frqval*1.44
60 NEXT I
70 UPL BLOCKOUT A(0),20
80 UPL OUT "sour:list:freq"
(transfer of 20 values for a frequency list sweep to the UPL)
UPL BLOCKOUT <array(i)>[,n]
Stores block data in a reserved communication
range of the UPL so that they can be transferred
subsequently from BASIC to the UPL with an UPL
OUT "...." command. This applies, for instance, to
the transfer of lists or values for graphic display.
The index i indicates the value from which onwards
the data field is to be transferred. n defines the
number of values. If n is not specified, the quantity
defined with DIM will be used.
10 DIM A(20)
20 ’ Combines block data to a string
30 Bef$="SOUR:LIST:FREQ"
40 Frqval=20
50 FOR I=0 TO 19
60 Bef$=Bef$+STR$(INT(Frqval))
70 IF I<19 THEN Bef$=Bef$+","
80 Frqval=Frqval*1.44
90 NEXT I
100 IEC OUT 20,Bef$
Reading out block data
R&S BASIC command R&S IEC/IEEE-bus command
10 DIM A(200)
20 UPL OUT "TRAC? TRAC"
30 UPL BLOCKIN A(0)
40 UPL OUT "TRAC:POIN? TRAC"
50 UPLIN A$:Count = VAL(A$)
(loads a sweep list in the form of block data from
the UPL into field A( ) of BASIC and loads the
data into Count)
UPL BLOCKIN <array(i)>
loads block data (ie lists or a
measurement sequence) from the UPL
program into a data field (index
variable) for further processing. Same
as with UPL IN the data to be read
must first be defined in a query
(sour:list:freq?). i denotes the
index from which the first value of a
block is stored. The list is always used
in full length, ie a sufficiently large data
field has first to be defined with DIM.
10 DIM A (200)
20 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC:POIN? TRAC"
30 IEC IN 20,Count$: Count=VAL(Count$)
40 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC"
50 IEC TERM 44: ’ Sets string term. to ’,’ (0x2C = 44d)
60 FOR I=0 TO Count-2: ’ Reads in n - 1 values
70 IEC IN 20,A$: DIM(I) = VAL(A$)
80 NEXT I
90 ’Reads last value
100 IEC TERM 10: ’Resets string term. to LF
110 IEC IN 20,A$: DIM(Count-1) = VAL(A$)
UPL-B10 Universal Sequence Controller
1078.2008.02 3.343 E-10
Switchover to UPL user interface
R&S BASIC command R&S IEC/IEEE-bus
command
UPL GTL (Go To Local)
With this command BASIC is quit and the UPL screen is displayed. Control is
also transferred to the UPL and entries can be made in the UPL panels. To
return to BASIC the F3 key has to be pressed.
This means that in the program mode this command has the same function as
the F3 key (switchover from BASIC to UPL). If the operator now presses F3,
control is switched back and BASIC continues with the command that follows
UPL GTL in the program. When entered in the BASIC direct mode, this
command has the same function as the F3 key.
Note:
After a BASIC program has been started with RUN, key F3 is disabled. It is
enabled again only after END, STOP or abort (with Ctrl/Break)in the BASIC entry
mode.
UPL GTL U (Go To Local, temporarily with UPL screen)
This command is required when the UPL display should be used under BASIC.
Thus an ongoing sweep or FFT can be monitored (provided a measurement was
started before, the display is continuously updated) or values computed in BASIC
are to be displayed. (These values have to be transferred first from BASIC to
UPL using the UPL BLOCKOUT command).
The panel displayed at the left of the graphics window can be used by BASIC for
PRINT outputs. A line must not be longer than 26 characters, however, as
otherwise the graphics window will be overwritten. After the UPL GTL U
command, the screen scroll is stopped to avoid the graphic display being shifted
and destroyed when the first or the last line is reached (in the case of
uncontrolled PRINT outputs). Status lines 1 and 2 cannot be used either as this
space is occupied by the UPL display.
With this command the BASIC display is stored and the UPL screen displayed.
Control is not transferred to the UPL, however, and entries cannot be made in
the UPL panels. Immediately after display of the UPL screen, control is handed
back to BASIC without the BASIC display being restored.
Use the GTL B command described below to restore the BASIC display. After an
UPL GTL U command and before terminating the program with END, STOP or
abort (with Ctrl/Break or in case of a fault) the operator should restore the BASIC
display as otherwise no entries can be made, eg in the UPL full-screen mode. As
an aid for the operator, the BASIC display is automatically restored when the
BASIC entry mode is reached (entry of commands or program instructions) with
the consequence that UPL GTL B is performed immediately when UPL GTL U
command is entered in the direct mode and the entry has no effect.
UPL OUT "DISP:ACT ON | OFF"
This command is of interest in conjunction with GTL U. The OFF state prevents
the graphics display being updated after every control command as this might be
disturbing and slow down program execution. With ON the display is completely
restored and then continually updated. The OFF and ON commands are to be
used together as a pair as otherwise the UPL graphics display is not restored, not
even when the UPL is manually controlled.
IEC LAD 20
IEC GTL
Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10
1078.2008.02 3.344 E-10
UPL GTL B (set BASIC screen)
This command is only needed with UPL GTL U. It restores the BASIC screen
displayed before the UPL display set up with UPL GTL, UPL GTL U or with the
F3 key (change from BASIC to UPL control).
UPL GTL G (draw UPL graphic)
This command is needed when the UPL graphics display is to be used under
BASIC. The display is restored but not subsequently updated as is the case with
UPL GTL U. Thus values computed in BASIC, for instance, can be displayed (the
values have to be transferred first from BASIC to the UPL using the UPL
BLOCKOUT command). The operator can make full use of the UPL graphics
display with scales and labels.
The graphics display must be switched on of course (with command
UPL OUT "disp:conf ...." using parameters xP or P, or previously in manual
control). Note: Upon loading a setup, the 3-panel display may be selected which
has the effect of switching off the graphics display. In case of doubt check the
setting by changing to the UPL mode.
When the result output has been activated (set to display) using UPLOUT
"disp:ann on" also the measurement results in the display field at the screen top
are updated.
Contrary to F3, UPL GTL or UPL GTL U, the BASIC screen is not stored and the
UPL display set up, but the UPL graphics display is integrated in the BASIC
screen. Like any other graphic drawn under BASIC, the display is shifted
together with the text when the cursor reaches the top or bottom edge. The
graphic may also be overwritten by text (in this case the background is blanked)
irrespective of whether this is useful or not.
When the display is shifted, which can always be prevented by adequately
positioning the cursor (see section 3.16.4.8 STRINX.SYS Driver for Screen and
Keyboard - UPL-B10), parts of the graphics display remain visible at the upper or
lower edge of the scroll window as the scrolled parts are shifted in multiples of
the text size, which do not correspond to the UPL graphic displayed.
Since the UPL graphic has become part of the BASIC screen it is always
restored when the UPL display is switched over to BASIC with the F3 key. It is
cleared together with the BASIC text screen using the sequence PRINT "Esc[2J".
CLEAR also clears the screen or parts thereof (see section 3.16.4.5 UPL-
specific Modifications to the Basic Manual - UPL-B10 under CLEAR).
Further differences to IEC/IEEE-bus remote control:
• An SRQ procedure cannot be programmed in R&S BASIC of the Universal Sequence Controller
UPL-B10, ie the control program cannot perform other tasks while waiting for measurement results
or error messages from the UPL. Error queue or the status registers must be queried cyclically in the
control program.
• Since the UPL does not generate an SRQ for the Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10, there is
no need to determine the sender or source of the SRQ by means of a serial or parallel poll. This
should not be mixed up with the possibility of using the UPL as an IEC/IEEE-bus controller and to
control other instruments on the IEC/IEEE bus from the Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10
(described in the manual R&S BASIC Interpreter supplied with the UPL-B10 option).
• Line messages like REN, GET, DCL, etc are not possible.
• The line message EOI denoting the end of a binary block cannot be used.
Binary block data cannot be received. The command " FORMat REAL" is ineffective.
Block data can only be received with command UPL BLOCKIN described above.
UPL-B10 Universal Sequence Controller
1078.2008.02 3.345 E-10
• In R&S BASIC of the Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10 all common commands referring to
SRQ control are not relevant. Respective information can be obtained from the table under 3.9
Common Commands.
An exception is the *OPC command. Although mainly intended to trigger an SRQ when a
measurement result is relevant, under R&S BASIC this command may be used to wait for a
measurement result in a loop by querying the bit d0 of the Event Status Register:
Example:
110 UPL OUT "*OPC;*TRG": ’ Triggers measurement result
120 Brk=0: I=0
130 WHILE (Brk=0) AND (I<=100)
140 UPL OUT "*ESR?"
150 I=I+1: UPL IN Esr$: IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 1)<>0 THEN Brk=1: ’ Queries OPC
160 WEND
170 IF I>100 THEN PRINT "Timeout": STOP
180 UPL OUT "SENS:DATA?": ’ Requests measured value
190 UPL IN M$: PRINT M$: ’ Reads and output measured value
• Common commands (3.13.1) and addressed commands (3.13.2) are not available for the Universal
Sequence Controller UPL-B10.
• All registers and commands of the status reporting system which are not related to SRQ generation
can be used:
*STB? not usable
*SRE not usable
*PRE not usable
*IST? not usable
*ESR? usable
*ESE not usable
STATus:OPERation? usable
STATus:QUEStionable? usable
STATus:XQUEstionable? usable
SYSTem:ERRor? usable
• Note:
If UPL with Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10 is used as a controller for other IEC/IEEE-bus
devices (described in the R&S BASIC Interpreter manual supplied with the UPL-B10 option), and
should again be controlled by another controller as a talker/listener on the IEC/IEEE bus, IEC/IEEE-
bus control must be released by the Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10 with command IECRLC
(IEC ReLease Control) .
Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10
1078.2008.02 3.346 E-10
3.16.4.5 UPL-Specific Modifications to the BASIC Manual
There are only a few modifications to the supplied standard BASIC manual which result from different
conditions. In the part of the manual dealing with process controllers, the BASIC manual of the PSA and
PAT controller versions is valid.
Softkey labelling and function keys
As against the standard BASIC manual, the function keys are shifted by 4 keys as F1 to F4 are
assigned different functions in the UPL. The softkey labelling has been adapted accordingly for the UPL.
Switchover between alphanumeric and graphics mode ( F8) is not provided in the UPL.
BYE
is a synonym for EXIT; description see under EXIT.
CLEAR [ 1 | 2 | 3 ]
This command clears the screen or parts of it. The size of the parts corresponds to the UPL panels or
fields. The commands always clear the indicated parts irrespective of whether they are assigned UPL
fields or not.
Without parameter specified, the upper part of the screen is cleared, however without the output field for
measured values.
CLEAR 1 clears the output field for measured values
CLEAR 2 clears the field at the left of the graphic display.
CLEAR 3 clears the UPL graphics.
UPL-B10 Universal Sequence Controller
1078.2008.02 3.347 E-10
COLOR
should not be modified to avoid changing of the UPL graphics output. The colours are assigned as
follows:
Pen UPL colour mode UPL b/w mode
0 white white (background)
1 dark grey white
2 white black
3 red black
4 grey grey
5 yellow light grey
6 dark grey dark grey
7 yellow dark grey
8 green grey
9 green black
10 blue black
11 green black
12 yellow grey
13 cyan dark grey
14 black black
15 black black (preselected colour)
COPYOUT
is not supported. See GSAVE "LPT1".
EXIT (Synonym for BYE)
leaves the BASIC mode and returns to the UPL input mode and not to MS-DOS.
GRAPHIC
The interface name for putting out graphics on the screen is no longer GRAPH but GRAPX with the
UPL.
GSAVE on LPT
is not supported. Instead, the HCOP:DEST <> remote-control command should be used for a printout
of the display.
HELP
is not supported as a command.
HOLD
Note:
During the wait time the routines are not continued. Therefore, with long times, the wait time should
better be implemented with a loop using TIME.
REPLACE
To allow also the comma to be contained in the REPLACE command as part of the string (and not as
separator between the new and the old string), it has to be preceded by a backslash (\,).
Example 1:
old program: 100 UPL OUT A$
REPLACE UPL OUT, IEC OUT 20,
new program: 100 IEC OUT 20,A$
Example 2:
old program: 100 IEC IN 20, A$
REPLACE IEC IN 20\,, UPL IN
new program: 100 UPL IN A$
Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10
1078.2008.02 3.348 E-10
SCREEN
is not supported; SCREEN 18 ( VGA mode with 16 colours/grey shades) is always set.
SET
The colour of the pen is selected from the colours described above under COLOR.
SHELL
is only supported with restrictions, since the remaining memory of approx. 60 Kbytes is too small; the
MS-DOS command interpreter together with the program called must not exceed this memory size.
However, this is the case with the internal and a few external MS-DOS commands (dir, del, md, cd etc,
see MS-DOS manual).
VIEWPORT
The upper limit for y2 should be 294 so that the upper field remains vacant for readout of the measured
values. In principal, there are no restrictions to the BASIC graphics commands, it is up to the user
whether the area used by the UPL graphics is overwritten.
WINDOW
The preselected values are 0,639,0,293.
ZOOM
is not supported
3.16.4.6 BASIC Screen
The screen contains 30 text lines, 5 at the lower edge being reserved for softkeys and two lines for
status indication. One status line is used by BASIC, the other is available to the user (see labels of
status lines and softkeys).
Two modes are provided for the upper 25 lines: either BASIC uses all lines or the UPL builds up a field
for the output of measured values at the top edge, where the measurement results are continuously
updated. This field comprises 7 text lines and reduces the BASIC text window to 18 lines. The second
mode is activated using UPL OUT "disp:ann on".
Inside the 25/18-line window, the text is scrolled when the cursor reaches the top or bottom edge. If this
window contains a graphic, the latter is shifted as well. This also applies to graphics drawn by the UPL
software. However, since the graphics are slightly larger than the text window, which is variable in steps
of 16 pixels only (text size), they seem to be somewhat "torn". By positioning the text appropriately, the
user must ensure not to write outside the text window (which causes a shift).
The command PRINT "Esc (2)" clears the 18- or 25-line window depending on the mode. The CLEAR
command (without parameter) only clears the 18-line window (without the area reserved for the output of
measured values). The BASIC extensions CLEAR 1½ 2 ½ 3 clear the panel fields or the output field for
measured values irrespective of whether they contain UPL panels or not (see section 3.16.4.5 UPL-
specific Modifications to the Basic Manual - UPL-B10).
If text is entered for BASIC, BASIC does not get the keyboard entries but reads out the screen contents.
If graphics are superimposed on this text, it is possible that the character is not identified and BASIC
responds with an error message. Even the space between the last character and the right-hand screen
edge is significant if it can be interpreted as a blank or character. Therefore, the user should write at a
"clean" position, or go to a position by scrolling the text before writing.
UPL-B10 Universal Sequence Controller
1078.2008.02 3.349 E-10
3.16.4.7 Control Commands Unsuitable for Logging
The control commands are described in detail in the UPL manual, classified according to their function
and then in alphabetical order. Furthermore, almost all commands can be logged in manual operation,
the commands being created in the correct notation and added to the program.
Commands for reading out measured values and control commands via the front-panel keys in the
CONTROL block cannot be logged. They are briefly summed up in the following.
CONTROL key commands:
START UPL OUT "init:cont on"
UPL OUT "init”
SNGL UPL OUT "init:cont off"
STOP UPL OUT "abort"
HCOPY UPL OUT "hcop"
LCD ON/OFF UPL OUT "disp:enab on" adv. off
OUTPUT ON/OFF -----
LOCAL UPL GTL
Commands for reading out single measurement results:
Function CH1: UPL OUT "sens:data?":UPL IN A¤
Function CH2: UPL OUT "sens:data2?":UPL IN A¤
Input PEAK CH1: UPL OUT "sens2:data?":UPL IN A¤
Input PEAK CH2: UPL OUT "sens2:data2?":UPL IN A¤
Freq CH1: UPL OUT "sens3:data?":UPL IN A¤
Freq CH2: UPL OUT "sens3:data2?":UPL IN A¤
Phase: UPL OUT "sens4:data2?":UPL IN A¤
Commands for reading out block data:
Trace A: UPL OUT "trac? trac1":UPL BLOCKIN A(0)
Trace B: UPL OUT "trac? trac2":UPL BLOCKIN B(0)
X values: UPL OUT "trac? list1":UPL BLOCKIN X(0)
Z values: UPL OUT "trac? list2":UPL BLOCKIN Z(0)
Command for synchronization:
UPL OUT "*WAI"
Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10
1078.2008.02 3.350 E-10
3.16.4.8 Driver for Screen and Keyboard STRINX.SYS
An internationally standardized software interface based on the ANSI standard X 3.41-1774 is provided
for addressing the screen. This standard defines all functions required to operate a terminal. The most
important functions of this standard as well as certain functions mainly required for operating the BASIC
editor are implemented in the STRINX device driver.
This driver is loaded when booting the operating system, if
DEVICE = C:\UPL\DRIVER\STRINX.SYS
is contained in the configuration file CONFIG.SYS.
The following function groups are supported:
•Cursor control
•Labelling of status lines and softkeys
•Clearing screen areas
•Editing screen
•Setting the video attributes.
If the appropriate ANSI sequence can be assigned parameters P1; P2 ...; Pn, they must be entered as
decimal numbers with one or two digits. The individual parameters are separated by semicolons.
The STRINX.SYS driver is to be used exclusively for programming in R&S BASIC. With this driver, the
UPL is largely compatible with the PSA. ANSI.SYS has to be loaded for programs using the control
sequences of the ANSI standard.
Cursor Control
The cursor can be set to absolute or relative positions. The output of new characters is continued
starting at the set position.
Table 3.18 Cursor Control (UPL-B10)
Cursor function Sequence Example in BASIC
Free positioning (one parameter may be omitted) ESC[P1; P2H *) ?”Ec[05;32H”;
Column
Row
Shift cursor by Pn positions ↑
Shift cursor by Pn positions ↓
Shift cursor by Pn positions →
Shift cursor by Pn positions ← (Pn with one digit only)
ESC[Pn A
ESC[Pn B
ESC[Pn C
ESC[Pn D
?”Ec[5A”;
?”Ec[3B”;
?”Ec[3C”;
?”Ec[5D”;
Shift cursor by one position ↑
↓ with scrolling
ESC[ : A
ESC[ : B ?”Ec[:A”;
?”Ec[:B”;
Store cursor position /
recall cursor position ESC[ s
ESC[ u ?”Ec[s”;
?”Ec[u”;
Switch off cursor
Switch on cursor ESC[ h
ESC[ l ?”Ec[h”;
?”Ec[l”;
*) ESC means the key "Esc" or the keyboard code 1BH or 27 decimal
UPL-B10 Universal Sequence Controller
1078.2008.02 3.351 E-10
Labelling of Status Lines and Softkeys
Table 3.19 Labelling of Status Lines and Softkeys (UPL-B10)
Function Sequence Example in BASIC
Label status lines ESCQPnTEXT ?”EcQ3TEXT”
Label softkeys ESCRPnTEXT ?”EcR4TEXT”
Note:
The sequences must be terminated by LF (ASCII code 10).
Softkeys 1 to 4 cannot be labelled as they have been assigned important basic functions that must be
available in all program states.
Status and softkey lines are labelled as follows:
Table 3.20 Labelling of Softkeys (UPL-B10)
Screen lines VGA graphics mode *)
First
Last
25 Q1
26 Q2, Q
27 Q3
28 Q4, softk.
29 Q5
*) Compatible with PSA mode
Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10
1078.2008.02 3.352 E-10
If one of the softkeys is labelled, the PSA compatibility mode is switched on (return with sequence
"ESC[1j"). The keyboard codes are converted to the corresponding values of the PSA according to the
following table:
Table 3.21 Labelling of Softkeys, Conversion table (UPL-B10)
PSA code PC comp. Keyboard labels
scan code German
keyboard American
keyboard
0E0H
0E1H
0E2H
0E3H
0E4H
0E5H
0E6H
0E7H
0E8H
0E9H
0EAH
0EBH
0B7H
0B8H
0B9H
0B4H
0B6H
0B1H
0B2H
0B3H
0B0H
0AEH
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4B
4D
4F
50
51
52
53
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
Pos 1 7
↑8
Bild ↑9
←4
→6
Ende 1
↓2
Bild ↓3
Einfg 0
Entf .
F1
F2
F3
F5
F4
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
Home
↑
Pg Up
←
→
End
↓
Pg Dn
Ins
Del
UPL-B10 Universal Sequence Controller
1078.2008.02 3.353 E-10
Editing the screen
Table 3.22 Editing the screen (UPL-B10)
Action Sequence Example
Insert blank lines ESC[ PnL?”Ec[ 5L”
Delete lines ESC[ PnM?”Ec[ 3M”
Clearing Screen Area
Table 3.23 Clearing Screen Area (UPL-B10)
Cursor function Sequence Example in
R&S BASIC
Clear screen, Cursor ESC[ 2J ?”Ec[ 2J”
Clear complete video RAM, Cursor ESC[ 3J ?”Ec[ 3J”
Clear from cursor to end of screen ESC[ J ?”Ec[ J”
Clear from cursor to end of line ESC[ K ?”Ec[ K”
Clear status and softkey lines
Note:
The sequence must be terminated by LF.
ESC[ y ?”Ec[ y”
Setting the colours
Colours may be assigned to each character output on the screen. The colours are also set via the ANSI
interface.
Table 3.24 Setting the colours (UPL-B10)
Colour b/w Sequence Example in
R&S BASIC
light grey light grey
light grey light grey
yellow white
---- ----
blue black
dark grey dark grey
black black
black black
ESC[ 91m
ESC[ 92m
ESC[ 93m
ESC[ 94m
ESC[ 95m
ESC[ 96m
ESC[ 97m
ESC[ 98m
?”Ec[ 91m”
?”Ec[ 92m”
?”Ec[ 93m”
?”Ec[ 94m”
?”Ec[ 95m”
?”Ec[ 96m”
?”Ec[ 97m”
?”Ec[ 98m”
Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10
1078.2008.02 3.354 E-10
3.16.4.9 Operation of Serial Interfaces COM1 and COM2
The transmission rate, parity bit, number of data and stop bits as well as the error handling mode of the
serial interfaces can be configured using the MS-DOS MODE program, which is described in section
2.17 Connecting External Devices or in the DOS manual (DOS commands). Configuration is made
either automatically on calling the AUTOEXEC.BAT program, in the operating system by means of an
entry via the keyboard, or in BASIC using the SHELL command. Example:
10 SHELL "mode com2: baud=24 parity=e data=7 stop=1 retry=n >NUL"
The last instruction for rerouting to the NUL device ensures that MODE does not output the response on
the screen, but suppresses it.
The serial interface designated COM1 or COM2 is prepared for the output using the PRINT# command.
As with every PRINT command, CR and LF are added to the string to be output if the line is not
terminated by a comma or semicolon. Example:
10 OPENO #1,"com1:"
20 PRINT #1,A$
If the acknowledge lines DSR and CTS are not active, the operating system outputs the error message
"ERROR 74 IN LINE xx: DOS: write fault".
The interfaces are prepared for reception using the OPEN command. With the subsequent INPUT#
command, characters are read in until a CR is received. If the sending device continues to transmit
characters, these characters must immediately be read in using the next INPUT# command, otherwise
they are lost and an error is signalled. Timing becomes more critical the higher the transmission rates. If
no characters are received (timeout), a zero is stored every 100 ms.
Example:
10 OPENI #1,"com1:"
20 INPUT #1,A$
The entry described above is for line-oriented text as characters are accepted until reception of CR.
However, if the number of characters is known, the INPUT$() function ensures that any character and
almost any number of characters can be received.
Example:
10 OPENI #1, "com2:"
20 A$=INPUT$( 100, #1)
Precisely 100 characters are read in. If less characters are received, the device waits 100 ms (specified
timeout) for every expected character (and enters zero).
To wait for the start of the transmission, a character can be entered in a loop until the character is no
longer zero.
Example:
20 REPEAT
30 A$=INPUT( 1, #1)
40 UNTIL ASC( A$) > 0
40 INPUT #1,B$
50 B$=A$+B$
UPL-B10 Universal Sequence Controller
1078.2008.02 3.355 E-10
3.16.4.10 UPL-Specific Error Messages From BASIC
ERROR 83: ’Instrument command allowed in this context’
The command is not allowed in this instrument state and depends on other settings.
(’Execution error’ with IEC/IEEE-bus control)
ERROR 84: ’Instrument param not within valid range’
The value of the command parameter is illegal.
ERROR 85: ’Instrument unit not allowed in this context’
The indicated unit is not allowed (in this state).
ERROR 87: ’Instrument option not installed’
The option required for this command is not fitted.
ERROR 88: ’Instrument ??? user error’
A user-correctable error has occurred during command execution (eg file not found).
ERROR 89: ’Instrument ??? system error’
An error has occurred in the MS-DOS or UPL software during command execution.
ERROR 90: ’Instrument invalid header string’
The actual command was not recognized (possibly because of a notation error).
ERROR 91: ’Instrument invalid parameter string’
The parameter of the command (string) is invalid.
ERROR 92: ’Instrument invalid unit string’
The unit of the command (string) is invalid.
Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10
1078.2008.02 3.356 E-10
3.16.4.11 UPL/BASIC Memory Management
The user need not be familiar with all the details, as the user automatically receives the CONFIG.SYS to
be used and associated batch files with the program UPLSET described in section 3.16.3.
Since the memory available to MS-DOS programs is limited, the overlay technique is used in the UPL
program. Furthermore, BASIC requires memory for the user program and its data (variables). These
memory areas are assigned the parameters
-bp<n> for the program memory and
-bd<n> for the data memory.
Example:
upl_ui -bp16 -bd8
reserves 16k main memory for the program and 8k for the data, BASIC itself needing about 3k for its
own management.
The minimum values are about 8k program and 4k data. BASIC can manage a maximum of 64k.
However, with a size of about 2 times 32 k, the overlay memory for the UPL program decreases,
reducing the program speed. More details cannot be given, since the available total memory, which may
be occupied by resident programs and device drivers, may be very different.
The memory management of the UPL program is to be briefly explained in the following so that an
experienced user can optimize his own configuration. The program and data memory used for BASIC is
first reserved in the UMB area. If this is not possible (because the line DOS=HIGH,UMB is missing in
the CONFIG.SYS, or too may other programs have been loaded into this area by LOADHIGH or
DEVICEHIGH), the space in the conventional memory (below 640k) is used. If the remaining memory
for the UPL program thus becomes too small, no memory is reserved for BASIC at all. The attempt to
switch to BASIC then produces the error message "not enough memory for BASIC".
In memory models 64k plus 32k (or 32k plus 64k) also the device drivers are loaded into the UMB area.
With 64k plus 64k the upper memory is completely full and the device drivers have to be stored in the
conventional memory.
If space is to be used in the conventional memory, the size of the overlay memory is reduced. The UPL
program may be restricted in its speed from a certain size onwards, which also depends on the memory
required by other resident programs.
When executing BASIC, other instruments can also be controlled via the IEC/IEEE-bus interface. In this
case, the UPL is the system controller via BASIC, i.e. it can no longer be remote-controlled by an
external controller. The parser program UPL_IEC.EXE is no longer needed and must not be loaded any
more when starting the UPL. Instead, BASIC requires the following device drivers:
STRINX.SYS as BASIC editor
IECX.SYS as IEC/IEEE-bus controller
GRAPHX.SYS for the BASIC commands for graphics output
BEEPX.SYS for audio outputs.
UPL Remote Control via RS-232 Interface
1078.2008.02 3.357 E-10
3.17 Remote Control via RS-232 Interface
As from UPL version 1.0 onwards, when an option UPL-B4 is purchased, remote control is not only
possible via the IEC/IEEE bus but also via the RS-232 interface at the COM2 port at the rear of the
instrument.
3.17.1 Preparation for Use
To activate the COM2 interface of the UPL for remote control select
Remote via COM2
in the options panel.
To allow communication between controller and UPL via the RS-232 interface, the parameters of the
two COM2 interfaces must be matched. The UPL parameters can be set with
COM2 PARAMETER -------------
Baud Rate 2400 ... 56000
Parity EVEN|ODD|NONE
Data Bits 7|8
Stop Bits 1|2
Handshake XON/XOFF|RTS/CTS
in the options panel.
The meaning of the parameters can be seen in section 2.15.1 IEC/IEEE-bus Address
Use a zero-modem cable with the following assignment for interconnecting controller and UPL (2 x 9-pin
female connector, R&S Order No. 1050.0346). This cable is suitable for RTS/CTS and XON/XOFF
handshake.
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
5
66
5
RxD
TxD
DTR
DSR
GND
RTS
CTS
TxD
RxD
DTR
DSR
GND
RTS
CTS
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
8
2
3
4
7
6
22
5
620
5
RxD
TxD
DTR
DSR
GND
RTS
CTS
TxD
RxD
DTR
DSR
GND
RTS
CTS
UPL
pin Controller
9 pin UPL
9 pin Controller
25 pin
Fig. 3-18 Universal RS-232 cable, suitable for RTS/CTS and XON/XOFF handshake
RTS (request to send) is an output of the UPL which is set to TRUE (+12V) upon UPL switch-on. With
handshake = RTS/CTS selected, UPL sets RTS to FALSE (-12V) when the UPL buffer is full during a
data transmission from the controller to the UPL. In this case the controller must stop data transmission
immediately until the contents of the data buffer have been processed by the UPL and RTS has been
reset to TRUE. Normally, the RTS line of the UPL is connected to the CTS line of the controller. With
handshake = XON/XOFF, RTS is not served by the UPL and remains set to TRUE.
Remote Control via RS-232 Interface UPL
1078.2008.02 3.358 E-10
DTR (data terminal ready) is an output of the UPL which is set to TRUE (+12V) upon UPL switch-on
and which does not change. If the RS-232 interface of the controller requires the DSR (data nor ready)
input to be set to TRUE, it is best to connect DTR of the UPL to DSR of the controller. With Handshake
= XON/XOFF selected, RTS of UPL is always TRUE. Thus DSR and CTS of the controller could be
linked by means of a jumper on the PC connector (see dotted line).
CTS (clear to send) of the UPL is an input. If the UPL wishes to send data to the controller or plotter
with handshake = RTS/CTS selected, it first checks whether the addressed device is ready to receive
data. State-of-the-art devices normally signal their readiness to receive via the RTS output (older
devices often via the DTR output). If the CTS input of the UPL is TRUE (+12V), UPL starts data
transmission. If the data buffer of the addressed device is full, the RTS output is reset and the CTS input
of the UPL is set to FALSE (-12V). As soon as the data buffer of the addressed device is empty, the
device resets the RTS output and thus the CTS input of the UPL to TRUE and UPL continues data
transmission. With handshake = XON/XOFF selected, the CTS input of the UPL is irrelevant and the
connection CTS - . - . RTS (dash-point line) is not required.
DSR (data set ready) of the UPL is an input which is not evaluated however. The line
DSR - . . - . . DTR (dash-dot-dot line) is not required.
3.17.2 Switchover to Remote Control
After power-up, the UPL is always in the manual operating mode (LOCAL state)") and can be controlled
from the front panel or a keyboard. Control is switched to REMOTE as soon as a signal is identified at
the RS-232 interface via COM2 in the remote control mode. During remote control the front-panel keys
are disabled. The UPL remains in the REMOTE control mode.
3.17.3 Return to Manual Operation
UPL remains in the REMOTE control mode until switched to manual mode by means of the LOCAL key
on the front panel or command SYSTem:GTL. A change from manual to remote control and vice versa
does not change the instrument settings.
3.17.4 First Steps (Readout of Measurement Results)
A simple test of the RS-232 interface can first be performed with DOS commands from the PC.
Example:
• Connect the COM1 interface of the PC and the COM2 interface of the UPL using the zero-modem
cable. If the COM1 interface of the PC is assigned to a mouse, the mouse may be connected to the
COM2 interface of the PC using the adapter cable (9 → 25-way) normally supplied with the mouse.
• Set UPL in the OPTIONS panel to remote control using the RS-232 interface. The standard
parameters of the COM2 interface, 9600 baud, even parity, 7 data bits, 1 stop bit, are set in the UPL.
This standard setting is made when the BACKSPACE key is pressed during UPL switch-on (loading
DEFAULT setup), UPL -d is entered at the DOS level and after (new) installation of an UPL software.
On switching the UPL off and on or upon loading a setup, the "Remote via" settings and the
parameters of the serial COM2 interface remain unchanged.
UPL Remote Control via RS-232 Interface
1078.2008.02 3.359 E-10
Remote via COM2
:
:
PARAMETER ------------
Baud Rate 9600
Parity EVEN
Data Bits 7
Stop Bits 1
Handshake RTS/CTS
• Adapt the COM1 interface of the PC to the COM2 interface of the UPL with DOS command mode:
mode com1
:9600,e,7,1
• Create an ASCII file with the name COMOUT.TXT at the PC using the DOS editor, which comprises
the characters "*RST" (set UPL to default setting).
• Send the contents of file COMOUT.TXT to the COM1 interface:
• copy COMOUT.TXT com1:
UPL goes to the REMOTE mode and to the default setting.
• Although the described method allows control of the UPL, data cannot be read out as the copy
command of DOS requires received characters to be terminated with the delimiter CTRL Z (1A hex)
and UPL terminates its responses with a Line Feed (0A hex).
The following program examples demonstrate UPL control and read-out of measurement results via the
RS-232 interface. For the three examples the RS-232 interface parameter should be set as described in
section 3.17.4.
Because of the default setting with "*RST" (see Appendix A UPL Default Setup), the UPL generator
produces a 1-kHz sinewave signal with a level of 0.5 V.
Command "INP:TYPE GEN2" internally links generator channel 2 and analyzer channel 1 so that no
cabling of outputs and inputs is required. The UPL analyzer performs 10 RMS measurements and the
results are displayed in the result field and on the controller screen.
Note:
A measurement result must be triggered before it can be displayed on the screen ("INIT:CONT
OFF;*WAI"). After triggering, a settled result is available which can be queried, ("SENS1:DATA1?"),
read in (comin) and displayed on the screen of the controller. (PRINT...).
3.17.4.1 Readout of Measurement Results in QuickBASIC
Enter the following program listing in Microsoft QuickBASIC (most of the PCs will use QuickBASIC
under MS-DOS on the PC) and start with Shift-F5:
In QuickBASIC a maximum transfer rate of 19200 baud can be set (OPEN
"COM1:19200,E,7,1,RB100" FOR RANDOM AS #1).
Since QuickBASIC does not support the hardware handshake RTS/CTS the size of the communication
buffer (RB value in byte) had to be adapted to the expected data quantity and the controller speed: the
slower the controller the larger the data quantity and the higher the RB value.
Every output string must be terminated with an LF (line feed) so that UPL is able identify the end of the
command. In this program example the line feed is added generally to the output string in the Comout
output routine (PRINT #1, A$; CHR$(10)).
Remote Control via RS-232 Interface UPL
1078.2008.02 3.360 E-10
’***************************************************
’* Triggering and output of 10 measurement results *
’***************************************************
DECLARE FUNCTION Comin$ ()
DECLARE SUB Comout (A$)
OPEN "COM1:9600,E,7,1,RB100" FOR RANDOM AS #1: ’ Parameter of COM1
’The size of the communication buffer (RB value in bytes) has to be
’adapted to the expected data quantity: The slower the controller the larger
the data quantity and the higher the RB value.
’For a single measurement result a few bytes will be sufficient,
’for a block data transfer of 1024 Y values of an FFT in ASCII
’format with a total length of more than 12000 bytes approx. RB5000
is required.
Comout ("*RST;*WAI"): ’ Loads default setup
Comout ("INP:TYPE GEN2"):’Connects analyzer input to generator output
FOR I = 1 TO 10
Comout ("INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI"): ’ Triggers and waits for result
Comout ("SENS1:DATA1?"): ’ Queries measurement result of channel 1
PRINT Comin$: ’ Reads out and outputs measurement result
NEXT I
CLOSE
END
FUNCTION Comin$
’*** Reading the response string of UPL at COM1 ***
’ UPL terminates each output string with NL (CHR$(10)).
’ Characters are read from the COM1 interface until NL is received.
X$ = ""
NZ: Z$ = INPUT$(1, 1): ’ Reads single characters from COM1
IF Z$ <> CHR$(10) THEN X$ = X$ + Z$: GOTO NZ: ’ Next character
Comin$ = X$: ’ Returns complete string
END FUNCTION
SUB Comout (A$) STATIC
’*** Output of ASCII string at the COM1 interface ***
PRINT #1, A$; CHR$(10): ’Each string must be terminated with NL (CHR$(10)).
END SUB
3.17.4.2 Readout of Measurement Results in R&S BASIC
Enter the following program listing in R&S BASIC and start with F2 (RUN).
When R&S BASIC is already installed on the controller, the COMX.SYS device driver allows the
maximum UPL transmission rate of 56000 baud (OPENI# 1,"com1:56000,e,7,1,2000") to be
used.
Every output string must be terminated with LF so that the UPL is able to identify the end of a command
(eg "INP:TYPE GEN2"+CHR$(10);).
10 ’************************************************************************
30 ’* Triggering and output of 10 measurement results *
40 ’************************************************************************
50 OPENO# 2,"com1:"
60 OPENI# 1,"com1:9600,e,7,1,2000": ’ Set COM1 parameter
70 PRINT# 2,"*RST"+CHR$(10);: ’ Sets default setup with internal connection
80 PRINT# 2,"INP:TYPE GEN2"+CHR$(10);: ’ between generator and analyzer
90 FOR I=1 TO 10: ’ Outputs 10 individually triggered measurement results
100 PRINT# 2,"INIT;*WAI"+CHR$(10);: ’ Triggers measurement result
110 PRINT# 2,"SENS:DATA?"+CHR$(10);: ’ Selects measurement result
120 GOSUB Comin: ’ Reads out measurement result
UPL Remote Control via RS-232 Interface
1078.2008.02 3.361 E-10
130 PRINT Instr$: ’ Outputs measurement result
140 NEXT I
150 END
160 ’
170 ’************** Reading in the UPL response *****************
180 Comin:
190 C$="": Instr$=""
200 Nexchar:
210 C$=INPUT$(1,#1): ’ Reads individual characters
220 IF C$=CHR$(10) THEN RETURN : ’Terminates reading when an LF is received
230 Instr$=Instr$+C$: GOTO Nexchar: ’Links individual characters to a string
3.17.4.3 Readout of Measurement Results in Borland-C 3.0
Enter the following program listing in Borland-C 3.0 and start with CTRL-F9 (RUN).
In Borland-C 3.0 a maximum transmission rate of 9600 baud can be set.
Each output string must be terminated with a line feed so that UPL can identify the command end (eg
"INP:TYPE GEN2\n").
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <bios.h>
#include <dos.h>
#include <conio.h>
/**************************************************************************/
/* Declarations */
/**************************************************************************/
#define COM_1 0
#define COM_2 1
#define SETTINGS (_COM_9600 | _COM_CHR7 | _COM_STOP1 | _COM_EVENPARITY)
/*The following settings can be made in bios.h: */
// _COM_CHR7 0x02 /* 7 data bits */
// _COM_CHR8 0x03 /* 8 data bits */
// _COM_STOP1 0x00 /* 1 stop bit */
// _COM_STOP2 0x04 /* 2 stop bits */
// _COM_NOPARITY 0x00 /* no parity */
// _COM_EVENPARITY 0x18 /* even parity */
// _COM_ODDPARITY 0x08 /* odd parity */
// _COM_110 0x00 /* 110 baud */
// _COM_150 0x20 /* 150 baud */
// _COM_300 0x40 /* 300 baud */
// _COM_600 0x60 /* 600 baud */
// _COM_1200 0x80 /* 1200 baud */
// _COM_2400 0xa0 /* 2400 baud */
// _COM_4800 0xc0 /* 4800 baud */
// _COM_9600 0xe0 /* 9600 baud */
Remote Control via RS-232 Interface UPL
1078.2008.02 3.362 E-10
/**************************************************************************/
/* Initialization of interface */
/**************************************************************************/
void init_com(int port)
{
_bios_serialcom(_COM_INIT, port, SETTINGS);}
/**************************************************************************/
/* Output of character */
/**************************************************************************/
void outp_char(int port,char c)
{
_bios_serialcom(_COM_SEND, port, c);
}
/**************************************************************************/
/* Reading a character */
/**************************************************************************/
int inp_char(int port,char *to_rec)
{
unsigned int status;
while (1)
{ /* Read until a character of error-free status is received */
status = (_bios_serialcom(_COM_RECEIVE, port, 0) & 0x9fff);
if ((status & 0x9f00) == 0)
{
*to_rec = (char)status;
return (0);
}
}
}
/**************************************************************************/
/* Output of string */
/**************************************************************************/
void comout(int port, char *strptr)
{
while (*strptr != ’\0’)
outp_char(port,*strptr++);
}
/**************************************************************************/
/* Read string until a line feed is received */
/**************************************************************************/
void comin (int port, char *recptr)
{
int idx = 0;
char c = 0;
while (1)
{
inp_char (port,&c);
recptr[idx] = c;
if (c == ’\n’) // Abort when LF is received
break;
idx++;
}
recptr[idx] = ’\0’; // Overwrite NL with ’\0’
}
UPL Remote Control via RS-232 Interface
1078.2008.02 3.363 E-10
/***************** Main program *******************/
/* Triggering and output of 10 measurement results */
/***************************************************/
int main ()
{
char recstring[100];
int i;
init_com(COM_1);
comout (COM_1, "*RST;*WAI\n");
comout (COM_1, "INP:TYPE GEN2\n");
for (i = 1; i <= 10; i++)
{
comout (COM_1, "INIT;*WAI\n");
comout (COM_1, "SENS:DATA?\n");
comin (COM_1, recstring);
printf ("%s\n",recstring);
}
printf ("Continue: ");
getch ();
return (1);
}
3.17.5 Binary Data via RS232 Interface
First steps
To obtain the programs RS232_BT.EXE and RS232_BT.BAS, which are required for a transmission of
binary data via RS232 interface, proceed as described under 3.15.20 Binary Data via IEC/IEEE-Bus
Interface.
Transmitting a File to UPL via RS232 Interface
RS232_BT.BAS is written in the programming language QuickBASIC from Microsoft, which are under
MS-DOS on most PCs.
The source file RS232_BT.BAS runs under QuickBASIC and can be adapted to the user’s needs
whenever necessary.
For transmitting binary data via RS232_BT.EXE, the following settings must be made in the OPTIONS
panel of UPL:
Remote via COM2
COM2 PARAMETER -------
Baud Rate 19200 (max. permissible baudrate for QuickBASIC)
Parity NONE (required for binary transmission)
Data Bits 8 (required for binary transmission)
Stop Bits 1
Handshake RTS/CTS
When transmitting binary data via the RS232 interface, the XON/XOFF handshake must not be set in
the OPTIONS panel of UPL, since XON/XOFF functions by means of exchanging binary characters,
which may affect characters in the binary data stream.
Remote Control via RS-232 Interface UPL
1078.2008.02 3.364 E-10
As an RS232 cable connecting UPL and the control PC, a modem-bypass cable with R&S order number
1050.0346 should be used, or a cable with a pin assignment as described in 3.17.1 Preparation for
Use, Fig. 3-42.
After RS232_BT has been called, the program requests the following:
• Selection of the desired interface COM1 or COM2 at the controller as well as the desired baud rate
(make sure the baud rate selected in UPL is used). The program now attempts to contact the UPL. If
this is successfully done, UPL measurements are halted to attain maximum transmission speed.
• Path and file name of the file to be transmitted are polled as well as the name of the file to be
generated with this content in the UPL working directory.
• The program now generates a temporary file with the name TEMP.OUT, which contains the RS232
command required for UPL and the data set to be transmitted.
• TEMP.OUT is now transmitted to UPL. As the transmission takes considerably more time than via
IEC/IEEE bus, the program has a progress bar. The file TEMP.OUT is retained in the controller also
after the transmission is completed so that it can be viewed by means of an editor with binary
capability.
• Following the transmission, signatures are generated (see MD5 signature technique) using the
original file on the controller and the file stored in UPL. If these two files have the same signatures, it
may be assumed with great certainty that the file are absolutely identical and no transmission errors
have occurred.
MD5 Signature Method
To check whether a file was transferred error-free from the process controller to the UPL, the
MD5 signature method can be used, see 3.15.20 Binary Data via IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface.
UPMD5.EXE can conveniently be called up as "child process" (SHELL) from its RS232 control program
in order to compate the signature with the signature of the file transmitted to the UPL.
Example in QuickBASIC see source code RS232_BT.BAS lines 53 and 54
shellcmd$ = "UPMD5.EXE " + hostfina$ + "> " + hostcheckfina$
SHELL (shellcmd$)
To fetch the signature of a file stored on the UPL under RS232 control, the command
"MMEMory:CHECk? ’filename’"
is to be sent to the UPL.
3.17.6 Differences to Remote Control via IEC/IEEE Bus
• A command line sent to the UPL must always be terminated with <New Line> (ASCII code 10,
decimal). Since the character <Carriage Return> (ASCII code 13, decimal) before the delimiter is a
filler without significance, the combination <Carriage Return> <New Line> is also permissible.
• ASCII strings sent by the UPL as a response to the controller via the RS-232 interface are always
terminated with <New Line> (ASCII code 10, decimal).
Block data in binary form are sent to the controller via the RS-232 interface without delimiter. The
number of bytes can be seen from the digits sent ahead of the block data:
UPL Remote Control via RS-232 Interface
1078.2008.02 3.365 E-10
#220
1st value 2nd value 3rd value 4th value 5th value
--- 1.1 --- --- 1.2 --- --- 1.3 --- --- 1.4 --- --- 1.5 ---
23 32 32 30 cd cc 8c 3f 3f 3f 3f 3f9a 99 99 66 66 a6 33 33 b3 00 00 c0
The ASCII character ’#’ introduces a binary block transfer.
Number of digits of subsequently indicated length in ASCII
Number of following bytes in ASCII. This value divided by 4 yields
the number of subsequent floating-point values in IEEE format.
Hexadecimal
form
Program examples 3.17.4.1 Readout of Measurement Results in QuickBASIC and 3.17.4.3
Readout of Measurement Results in Borland-C 3.0 illustrate the readout of binary block data.
• With remote control via RS-232 all the common commands related to SRQ control are not useful.
This can be seen in the table under 3.9 Common Commands . An exception is the *OPC command.
The main task of this command is to trigger an SRQ when a measurement result is available, but in
the case of RS-232 control, it may be used to wait in a loop for a measurement result by querying bit
d0 of the Event Status Register, see 3.17.4.1 Readout of Measurement Results in QuickBASIC.
• Common commands (3.13.1) and addressed commands (3.13.2) are not used in RS-232 control.
• With RS-232 remote control, an SRQ procedure cannot be programmed, ie the control program is
not able to carry out another task while it waits for measurement results or error messages from the
UPL.
Error queue or status register must be queried cyclically in the control program.
• Since an SRQ routine is not available, there is no need to determine the sender or the source of an
SRQ in a serial or parallel poll.
• Line messages like REN, GET, DCL, etc are not possible.
• The line message EOI denoting the end of a binary block cannot be used.
If binary data are to be received nevertheless, the expected block length must be used instead.
Remember that data bits = 8 and parity = NONE must be set for the receipt of binary data.
• All registers and commands of the status reporting system not referring to SRQ generation may be
used:
*STB? not usable
*SRE not usable
*PRE not usable
*IST? not usable
*ESR? usable
*ESE not usable
STATus:OPERation? usable
STATus:QUEStionable? usable
STATus:XQUEstionable? usable
SYSTem:ERRor? usable
Maintenance UPL
1078.2008.02 4.1 E-10
4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
4.1 Maintenance
4.1.1 Mechanical Maintenance
•Clean the front panel and keys using a soft, damp cloth soaked with a liquid detergent, if required.
•Cleaning the LC display: do not use any acid solutions or abrasive cleaners (otherwise the
anti-reflecting coat is damaged)! We recommend that standard cleaners as are used for optical
devices such as glasses, objectives and the like or water mixed with some rinsing liquid be used for
cleaning.
4.1.2 Electrical Maintenance
The UPL requires no electrical maintenance.
4.2 Function Test
Upon switch-on of the UPL the following self-tests are performed:
•Self-test on the computer. On the detection of any error the AT warning tone codes (see Table 4-1)
will be audible. The system start is aborted, the UPL cannot be operated. With an external keyboard
connected, the subsequent memory test can be aborted by pressing the "ESC" key.
Table 4-1 AT warning tone codes
AT-warning tone Meaning
1 DRAM refresh failure
2 Parity Circuit failure
3 Base 64kB RAM failure
4 System Timer failure
5 Processor Failure
6 Keyboard Controller-Gate A20 error
7 Virtual Mode Exception Error
8 Display Memory R/W Test Failure *)
9 ROM-BIOS CheckSum Failure
*) non-fatal error
•Self-test on all boards of the measurement hardware including all options installed (recognized by the
UPL itself). The self-test is carried out while the switch-on picture is being displayed on the screen
and also during normal measurement procedures - however to a limited extent. On the detection of
an error a message is displayed, which specifies the type of error, the name of the defective board
and, if possible, a hint for the user how to eliminate the defect.
UPL Troubleshoooting
1078.2008.02 4.2 E-10
4.3 Troubleshooting
Error messages displayed after the self-tests or during a measurement usually contain a hint as to the
cause of trouble and its elimination (see Section 2.3.6 Error Messages). If the cause is a defective
board, it should be replaced (see 4.4 Replacing the Boards). For more details on the theory of
operation of the measurement hardware boards and instructions on further fault locating, please refer to
the Service Manual (order designation 1030.7551.24 ).
4.3.1 BIOS-SETUP
It depends on the UPL model and the time of delivery, which controller boards and hard disk drives are
supplied with the instrument. Thus, the operating menu for setting the SETUP parameters and the
parameters, too, differ accordingly.
Operation of the setup menu is not explained since it may be obtained from the operator guidance lines.
Calling the SETUP menu
•Switch off the instrument, connect external keyboard.
•Switch on, press "DEL" key (or ENTF key with German keypad) and hold until the SETUP menu is
displayed.
•Select menu item for setting the setup (e.g., "RUN CMOS SETUP", "STANDARD-SETUP", ...)
•Set according to the board and hard disk installed. The parameters to be entered are listed in the
paragraphs below.
Note: The setup menus assume an English keypad to be connected. With a German keypad, Y
and Z have been exchanged compared to the English one (notice with acknowledging
requests).
Caution: If the SETUP is not set correctly, this may lead to malfunction of the instrument! In this
case, switch off the instrument, press "INS" key (or "Einfg" key with German keypad) and
hold, switch on the instrument and release key with start of the memory test. The SETUP is
thus reset to default values.
SETUP for UPL 05 with 80486 DX4/75 Board
Table 4-2 Standard Setup (UPL05)
Date/Time Current date /time
Floppy A 1,44 MB
Floppy B, Slave Disk not installed
Hard Disk use DETECT MASTER (s. u.)
Troubleshoooting UPL
1078.2008.02 4.3 E-10
The parameters for the hard disk need not be entered. The setup program determines the parameters
when calling the "DETECT MASTER" function in the UTILITY menu.
Table 4-3 Advanced Setup (UPL 05)
Typematic Rate 30
System Keyboard Absent
Primary Display VGA/EGA
Above 1MB Memory Test Enabled
Memory Test Tick Sound Enabled
Hit "DEL" Message Display Enabled
Extended BIOS RAM Area 0:300
Halt for "F1" if any Error Disabled
System Boot Up Num Lock On
Numeric Processor Test Enabled
Floppy Drive Seek At Boot Disabled
System Boot Up Sequence C:, A:
Password Checking Setup
Video Shadow C000, 32K Enabled
Shadow C800, 32K Enabled
Shadow D000, 32K Disabled
Shadow D800, 32K Disabled
Shadow E000, 32K Disabled
Shadow E800, 32K Disabled
Internal Cache Enabled
Internal Cache Write Mode Wrt-Thru
External Cache Enabled
Video ROM Cache C000, 32k Enabled
System ROM Cache F000, 64k Enabled
Non Cachable Area #1 Size Disabled
Non Cachable Area #1 Base Disabled
Non Cachable Area #1 Type DRAM
Non Cachable Area #2 Size Disabled
Non Cachable Area #2 Size Disabled
Non Cachable Area #2 Type DRAM
IDE Block Mode Disabled
Primary Master IDE LBA Mode Disabled
Primary Slave IDE LBA Mode Disabled
Secondary IDE Drives Preset None
Secondary Master IDE LBA Mode Disabled
Secondary Slave IDE LBA Mode Disabled
UPL Troubleshoooting
1078.2008.02 4.4 E-10
Table 4-4 Chipset Setup (UPL 05)
System Auto Configuration Enabled
Bus Frequency 7.159 MHz
System DRAM Speed Fastest
DRAM Write Cycle Pulse Time 1T
DRAM Write Cycle Wait State 1 ws
Cache Burst Read Cycle Time 1T
Cache Write Cycle Time 2T
16 Bit 0 Wait State Override Disabled
16 Bit I/O Read Cmd Delay Disabled
16 Bit Read Cyc Reduction Disabled
DRAM Burst Write Mode Disabled
Slow Refresh Disabled
Hidden Refresh Enabled
Local Bus Latch Timing T3
Local Bus Ready (LRDY *) Sync.
16 Bit I/O Recovery Time 5 Clks
16 Bit Memory, I/O Wait State 1 ws
8 Bit I/O Recovery Time 16 Clks
8 Bit Memory, I/O Wait State 4 ws
Note on memory expansion, if fitted:
The SIMM modules used have 72 contacts (PS2-SIMMs). 1Mx36 or 4Mx36 modules with an access
time of 70 ns may be used.
SETUP for UPL 02 with 80386/40-Board
Table 4-5 Standard Setup (UPL 02)
Floppy Drive A 1.44 MB
System Keyboard Not Installed
Harddisk C use AUTODETECT HARDDISK (s.u.)
Harddisk D Not installed
Primary Display VGA/EGA
The parameters for the hard disk need not be entered. The setup program determines the parameters
when calling the AUTO DETECT HARDDISK function.
Table 4-6 Advanced Setup (UPL 02)
Above 1MB Memory Test Enabled
Memory Test Tick Sound Disabled
Hard Disk Type 47 Area 0:300
System Boot Up Num Lock Off
Floppy Drive Seek At Boot Disabled
System Boot Up Sequence C:, A:
External Cache Enabled
Internal Cache Disabled
Password Checking Setup
IDE Block Mode Disabled
IDE Standby Mode Disabled
Chip Away Virus Disabled
Troubleshoooting UPL
1078.2008.02 4.5 E-10
Table 4-7 Chipset Setup (UPL 02)
Cache Read Option 3--1--1--1
Cache Write Option 1 WS
DRAM Waitstates 1 WS
Keyboard Clock Select 9.5 MHz
AT Clock CPUCLK/5
16 Bit I/O Recovery Time 5/3 BCLK
CoProcessor Ready No Delay
Non Cachable Area \#1 Size Disabled
Non Cachable Area \#1 Base Disabled
Non Cachable Area \#1 Type DRAM
Non Cachable Area \#2 Size Disabled
Non Cachable Area \#2 Size Disabled
Non Cachable Area \#2 Type DRAM
Memory Remapping Enabled
Alle Shadow Optionen Enabled
•Store setup
Note on memory expansion, if fitted :
The SIMM modules used have 72 contacts (PS2-SIMMs). 1Mx36 or 4Mx36 modules with an access
time of 70 ns may be used..
4.3.2 Others
Fault symptom:
•After switch-on, the UPL is not in the same state as it was before switch-off. The last entries have
been omitted.
•The following error message is displayed:
"CMOS CHECKSUM ERROR. "
Cause:
Battery of test hardware discharged, since the instrument has long since been switched on.
The UPL contains a CMOS memory which stores all settings of all active panels and the data of the
recorded traces. The settings of the other panels and the previous states of the active panels is saved
on the hard disk, in addition. These data are still available after a failure of the battery. A capacitor bank
is used as backup for the CMOS RAM when the instrument is switched off.
Error recovery:
Have the instrument switched on for at least four hours. The battery is then recharged and the settings
are retained after switch-off.
UPL Troubleshoooting
1078.2008.02 4.6 E-10
Fault symptom:
The UPL does not respond in a sensible way or not at all on key depressions or IEC bus commands.
Cause:
The combination of previous settings resulted in an inadvertent program run causing the software to
"crash".
Error recovery:
Restart the UPL!
Depending on the desired instrument setup take the following steps:
Restart the UPL with the instrument setup most recently stored in the CMOS-RAM.
This setup may be correct despite the faulty response of the UPL. To avoid having to enter again the
settings most recently made, have a try at starting the UPL with this setup.
•Turn power switch off and on. (No further action possible).
In case the procedure stated above fails, restart the UPL with its default setup.
•Connect external keyboard (see 1.1.6 Connecting an External Keyboard).
•Turn power switch off and on.
•When the UPL switch-on logo is displayed, abort the UPL program by pressing ESC and enter the
DOS operating system level, where you can restart the UPL with its default setting by entering the
command
UPL -d and confirm by pressing ENTER
The setup "DEFAULT.SET" in the "c:\upl\setup" directory supplied together with the UPL is loaded.
LOAD INSTRUMENT STATE in the FILE panel allows the loading of a setup which was stored by the
user (see 2.9.1.1).
Further notes on software faults can be looked up in Section 2.3.6 Error Messages.
UPL Generator Default Settings
1078.2008.02 A.1 E-10
A UPL Default Setup
The default setup of the UPL is triggered by means of the settings below:
Manual setting in the FILE panel: IEC/IEEE
bus:
LOAD INSTRUMENT STATE
Mode DEF SETUP *RST
A precondition for the validity of basic settings is that the parameter link is switched off (see 2.15.8
Transfer of Parameters (Parameter Link Function)).
A.1 Default Settings of Generator
INSTRUMENT — ANALOG
· Channel(s) 2 = 1
For setting GENERATOR
→
ANALOG (default setting) the following applies:
· Output UNBAL
· Max Volt 12.000 V
· Ref Freq 1000.0 Hz
· Ref Volt 1.0000 V
For setting GENERATOR
→
DIGITAL the following applies:
· Src Mode AUDIO DATA Further selections: JITTER ONLY | PHASE | COMMON ONLY
· PhaseToRef 0.0000 %FRM with Src Mode PHASE only
· Channel(s) 2 = 1 not with Src Mode COMMON ONLY
· Unbal Out AUDIO OUT
· Cabel Sim OFF
· Sync To AUDIO IN
· Sample Frq 48 kHz
· Sync Out GEN CLK
Type WORD CLK
· Ref Out REF GEN
· Data ALL ZERO
· Audio Bits 20 with Src Mode AUDIO DATA| PHASE only
· Unbal Vpp 1.0000 V
· Bal Vpp 0.0000 V
· Max Volt 1.0000 FS with Src Mode AUDIO DATA | PHASE only
· Ref Freq 1000.0 Hz
· PROTOCOL STATIC
· Ch Stat. L ZERO
· Ch Stat. R EQUAL L
· AUX GEN OFF with SRC Mode AUDIO DATA | PHASE only
For setting AUX GEN
→
ANALOG OUTthe following appliest:
· Channel(s) 2 = 1
· Output UNBAL
· SWEEP CTRL OFF
· Anlg Freq 1000.0 Hz
· Anlg Ampl 0.1000 V
The auxiliary generator (AUX GEN) has its own sweep system
designed similar to the sweep system of the function generator. The
function for a 2-dimensional sweep (Z axis), ie simultaneous
frequency and level sweep, is not implemented. The default setting
of commands is largely identical to the SWEEP CTRL points
described for FUNCTION SINE in the section "Functions common
to all generators".
Generator Default Settings UPL
1078.2008.02 A.2 E-10
For setting AUX GEN
→
COMMON MODE the following applies:
· SWEEP CTRL OFF
· Comm Freq 1000.0 Hz
· Comm Ampl 0.1000 V
For setting AUX GEN
→
JITTER the following applies:
· SWEEP CTRL OFF
· Jitt Freq 1000.0 Hz
· Jitt Ampl 0.1000 UI
Functions common to all generators
FUNCTION SINE
· Frq Offset OFF
· Low Dist ON ANALOG generator. If low-dist. generator option not installed: OFF
· DC Offset OFF with ON: 0.0000 FS or: 0.0000 V
· Dither OFF with DIGITAL generator
For setting Dither ON the following applies:
0.0001 FS with DIGITAL generator
· PDF GAUSS with DIGITAL generator
· Equalizer OFF
· Equal.File R&S_EXAM.VEQ with equalizer ON
· SWEEP CTRL OFF
· FREQUENCY 1000.0 Hz
· VOLTAGE 0.5000 V[FS]
For setting SWEEP CTRL → AUTO SWEEP or MANU SWEEP the following applies:
· Next Step ANLR SYNC with AUTO SWEEP only
· X Axis FREQ
· Z Axis OFF
With X or Z axis
→
FREQ selected
FREQUENCY
· Spacing LOG POINT
· Start 20000 Hz
· Stop 20.000 Hz
· Points 30
· VOLTAGE 0.5000 V [FS]
With X or Z axis
→
VOLT selected
· FREQUENCY 20000 Hz
· Equalizer OFF
· Equal.File R&S_EXAM.VEQ with equalizer ON
VOLTAGE
· Spacing LIN POINTS
· Start 0.0100 V[FS]
· Stop 0.5000 V[FS]
· Points 30
UPL Generator Default Settings
1078.2008.02 A.3 E-10
For setting SWEEP CTRL → AUTO LIST or MANU LIST the following applies:
· Next Step ANLR SYNC with AUTO LIST only
· X Axis FREQ
· Z Axis OFF
With X or Z axis
→
FREQ selected
· FREQ.FILE R&S_EXAM.SPF with X or Z axis → FREQ selected
With X or Z axis
→
VOLT selected
· FREQUENCY 1000.0 Hz
· VOLT.FILE R&S_EXAM.SPV
FUNCTION STEREO SINE with INSTRUMENT DIGITAL only
. Frq Offset OFF
. DC Offset OFF with ON: 0.0000 FS
. Dither OFF
For setting Dither ON the following applies
0.0001 FS
. PDF GAUSS
. Equalizer OFF
. Equal.File R&S_EXAM.VEQ with Equalizer ON
. Freq Mode FREQ&PHASE
. Volt Mode VOLT&RATIO
. SWEEP CTRL OFF
. FREQUENCY 1000.0 Hz
. Phas Ch2:1 0.0000 °
. VOLT CH1 0.5000 FS
. Volt Ch2:1 4.0000 :1
For setting Freq Mode
→
FREQ CH1&2
. Freq Ch1 1000.0 Hz
. Freq Ch2 1000.0 Hz
For setting Volt Mode
→
VOLT CH1&2
. Volt Ch1 0.5000 FS
. Volt Ch2 0.5000 FS
For setting von SWEEP CTRL
→
AUTO SWEEP or MANU SWEEP the following applies:
. Next Step ANLR SYNC with AUTO SWEEP only
. X Axis FREQ
. Z Axis OFF
For setting Freq Mode
→
FREQ&PHASE
with X- or Z-Axis
→
FREQ selected
FREQUENCY
. Spacing LOG POINT
. Start 20000 Hz
. Stop 20.000 Hz
. Points 30
. Phas Ch2:1 0.0000 °
For setting Freq Mode
→
FREQ CH1&2
with X- or Z-Axis
→
FREQ selected
FREQUENCY
. Spacing LOG POINT
. Start 20000 Hz
. Stop 20.000 Hz
. Points 30
. Freq Ch2 1000.0 Hz
Generator Default Settings UPL
1078.2008.02 A.4 E-10
For setting Volt Mode
→
VOLT&RATIO
with X- or Z-Axis
→
VOLT selected
VOLTAGE CH1
. Volt Ch2:1 4.0000 :1
. Spacing LIN POINTS
. Start 0.0100 FS
. Stop 0.5000 FS
. Points 30
For setting Volt Mode
→
VOLT CH1&2
with X- or Z-Axis
→
VOLT selected
VOLTAGE CH1
. Spacing LIN POINTS
. Start 0.0100 FS
. Stop 0.5000 FS
. Points 30
. Volt Ch2 0.5000 FS
For setting von SWEEP CTRL
→
AUTO LIST or MANU LIST the following applies:
. Next Step ANLR SYNC with AUTO LIST only
. X Axis FREQ
. Z Axis OFF
For setting Freq Mode
→
FREQ&PHASE
with X- or Z-Axis
→
FREQ selected
. FREQ FILE R&S_EXAM.SPF
. Phas Ch2:1 0.0000 °
. VOLT CH1 0.5000 FS
. Volt Ch2:1 4.0000 :1
For setting Freq Mode
→
FREQ CH1&2
with X- or Z-Axis
→
FREQ selected
. FREQ FILE R&S_EXAM.SPF
. Freq Ch2 1000.0 Hz
. VOLT CH1 0.5000 FS
. Volt Ch2:1 4.0000 :1
For setting Volt Mode
→
VOLT&RATIO
with X- or Z-Axis
→
VOLT selected
. Freq Ch1 21000 Hz
. Freq Ch2 1000.0 Hz
. Volt Ch2:1 4.0000 :1
. VOLT FILE R&S_EXAM.SPF
For setting Volt Mode
→
VOLT CH1&2
with X- or Z-Axis
→
VOLT selected
. Freq Ch1 21000 Hz
. Freq Ch2 1000.0 Hz
. VOLT FILE R&S_EXAM.SPF
. Volt Ch2 0.5000 FS
FUNCTION MULTISINE
· DC Offset OFF with ON: 0.0000 FS or 0.0000 V
· Spacing USER DEF
10.000 Hz
· Mode DEFINE VOLT
· Equalizer OFF
· Crest Fact OPTIMIZED
· Equal.File R&S_EXAM.VEQ with equalizer ON
· No of Sin 2
UPL Generator Default Settings
1078.2008.02 A.5 E-10
· Multisine CHOICE ...
· TOTAL GAIN 0.0000 dB
· TOTAL PEAK 1.0000 V[FS]
· TOTAL RMS 1.0000 V for INSTRUMENT ANLG only
. Ampl Var OFF
For setting Ampl Var
→
SINE
. Mod Freq 10.000 Hz
. Variation 0.0000 %
For setting Ampl Var
→
BURST
. ON TIME 0.0100 s
. INTERVAL 1.0000 s
For setting "No of Sin 17" and Crest Fact → OPTIMIZED the following applies:
Multisine
Frequency Voltage
1 1000.0 Hz 0.5000 V [FS]
2 40.000 Hz 0.5000 V
3 60.000 Hz 0.0000 V Close
4 120.00 Hz 0.0000 V
5 250.00 Hz 0.0000 V
6 310.00 Hz 0.0000 V
7 500.00 Hz 0.0000 V
8 1000.0 Hz 0.0000 V
9 2000.0 Hz 0.0000 V
10 4000.0 Hz 0.0000 V
11 6290.0 Hz 0.0000 V
12 8000.0 Hz 0.0000 V
13 10000 Hz 0.0000 V
14 12500 Hz 0.0000 V
15 14000 Hz 0.0000 V
16 16000 Hz 0.0000 V
17 18000 Hz 0.0000 V
For setting "No of Sin 17" and Crest Fact → , OPTIMIZED the following applies::
Multisine
Frequency Phase Voltage
1 1000.0 Hz 0.0000 ° 0.5000 V [FS]
2 40.000 Hz 0.0000 ° 0.5000 V
3 60.000 Hz 0.0000 ° 0.0000 V Close
4 120.00 Hz 0.0000 ° 0.0000 V
5 250.00 Hz 0.0000 ° 0.0000 V
6 310.00 Hz 0.0000 ° 0.0000 V
7 500.00 Hz 0.0000 ° 0.0000 V
8 1000.0 Hz 0.0000 ° 0.0000 V
9 2000.0 Hz 0.0000 ° 0.0000 V
10 4000.0 Hz 0.0000 ° 0.0000 V
11 6290.0 Hz 0.0000 ° 0.0000 V
12 8000.0 Hz 0.0000 ° 0.0000 V
13 10000 Hz 0.0000 ° 0.0000 V
14 12500 Hz 0.0000 ° 0.0000 V
15 14000 Hz 0.0000 ° 0.0000 V
16 16000 Hz 0.0000 ° 0.0000 V
17 18000 Hz 0.0000 ° 0.0000 V
FUNCTION SINE BURST | SINE² Burst
· DC Offset OFF with ON: 0.0000 FS or 0.0000 V
. Equalizer OFF
. Equal.File R&S_EXAM.VEQ with Equalizer ON
· SWEEP CTRL OFF
· FREQUENCY 1000.0 Hz
· VOLTAGE 0.5000 V [FS]
For setting SWEEP CTRL → AUTO SWEEP or MANU SWEEP the following applies:
· Next Step ANLR SYNC with AUTO SWEEP only
· X Axis VOLT
· Z Axis OFF
Generator Default Settings UPL
1078.2008.02 A.6 E-10
With X or Z axis
→
VOLT selected
FREQUENCY 1000.0 Hz
VOLTAGE
· Spacing LIN POINTS
· Start 0.0100 V[FS]
· Stop 0.5000 V[FS]
· Points 30
· Low Level 0.0000 V [FS] for SINE BURST only
· ON TIME 0.0100 s
· INTERVAL 1.0000 s
· BurstOnDel 0.0000 s
With X or Z axis
→
FREQ selected
FREQUENCY
· Spacing LIN POINT
· Start 20000. Hz
· Stop 20.000 Hz
· Points 30 points 2 for SINE² burst
· VOLTAGE 0.0100 V [FS]
· Low Level 0.0000 V [FS] for SINE BURST only
· ON TIME 0.0100 s
· INTERVAL 1.0000 s
· BurstOnDel 0.0000 s
With X or Z axis
→
ON TIME selected
· FREQUENCY 20000 Hz
· VOLTAGE 0.0100 V [FS]
· Low Level 0.0000V [FS] for SINE BURST only
ON TIME
· Spacing LIN POINTS
· Start 0.0010 s
· Stop 0.2000 s
· Points 30
· INTERVAL 1.0000 s
· BurstOnDel 0.0000 s
With X or Z axis
→
INTERVAL selected
· FREQUENCY 20000 Hz
· VOLTAGE 0.0100 V [FS]
· Low Level 0.0000V [FS] for SINE BURST only
· ON TIME 0.0010 s
INTERVAL
· Spacing LIN POINTS
· Start 1.0000 s
· Stop 0.0200 s
· Points 30 points 2 for SINE² burst
· BurstOnDel 0.0000 s
For setting SWEEP CTRL → AUTO LIST or MANU LIST the following applies:
· Next Step ANLR SYNC with AUTO LIST only
· X Axis FREQ
· Z Axis OFF
With X or Z axis
→
VOLT selected
· FREQUENCY 1000.0 Hz
· VOLT FILE R&S_EXAM.SPV
· Low Level 0.0000 V [FS] for SINE BURST only
· ON TIME 0.0100 s
· INTERVAL 1.0000 s
UPL Generator Default Settings
1078.2008.02 A.7 E-10
· BurstOnDel 0.0000 s
With X or Z axis
→
FREQ selected
· FREQ FILE R&S_EXAM.SPF
· VOLTAGE 0.5000 V
· Low Level 0.0000 V [FS] for SINE BURST only
· ON TIME 0.0100 s
· INTERVAL 1.0000 s
· BurstOnDel 0.0000 s
With X or Z axis
→
ON TIME selected
· FREQUENCY 1000.0 Hz
· VOLTAGE 0.5000 V [FS]
· Low Level 0.0000 V [FS] for SINE BURST only
· ONTIM FILE R&S_EXAM.SPO
· INTERVAL 1.0000 s
· BurstOnDel 0.0000 s
With X or Z axis
→
INTERVAL selected
· FREQUENCY 1000.0 Hz
· VOLTAGE 0.5000 V [FS]
· Low Level 0.0000 V [FS] for SINE BURST only
· ON TIME 0.0100 s
· INTV FILE R&S_EXAM.SPI
· BurstOnDel 0.0000 s
FUNCTION MOD DIST
· Frq Offset OFF
· DC Offset OFF with ON: 0.0000 FS or 0.0000 V
· SWEEP CTRL OFF
· UPPER FREQ 4000.0 Hz
· LOWER FREQ 40.000 Hz
· Volt LF:UF 4.0000 :1
· TOTAL VOLT 1.0000 V
For setting SWEEP CTRL → AUTO SWEEP or MANU SWEEP the following applies:
· Next Step ANLR SYNC with AUTO SWEEP only
· X Axis FREQ
· Z Axis OFF
With X or Z axis
→
FREQ selected
UPPER FREQUENCY
· Spacing LOG POINTS
· Start 20000. Hz
· Stop 4000.0 Hz
· Points 30
· LOWER FREQ 40.000 Hz
· VOLT LF:UF 4.0000 :1
· TOTAL VOLT 1.0000 V [FS]
With X or Z axis
→
VOLT selected
· UPPER FREQ 20000 Hz
· LOWER FREQ 40.000 Hz
· VOLT LF:UF 4.0000 :1
TOTAL VOLTAGE
· Spacing LIN POINTS
· Start 0.0100 V[FS]
· Stop 0.5000 V[FS]
· Points 30
Generator Default Settings UPL
1078.2008.02 A.8 E-10
For setting SWEEP CTRL → AUTO LIST or MANU LIST the following applies:
· Next Step ANLR SYNC with AUTO LIST only
· X Axis FREQ
· Z Axis OFF
With X or Z axis
→
FREQ selected
· UPP F.FILE R&S_EXAM.SPF if X or Z axis → FREQ selected
· LOWER FREQ 40.000 Hz
· VOLT LF:UF 4.0000 :1
· TOTAL VOLT 1.0000 V [FS]
With X or Z axis
→
VOLT selected
· UPPER FREQ 4000.0 Hz
· LOWER FREQ 40.000 Hz
· VOLT LF:UF 4.0000 :1
· TOT V.FILE R&S_EXAM.SPV
FUNCTION DFD
· Frq Offset OFF
· DC Offset OFF with ON: 0.0000 FS or 0.0000 V
· MODE IEC 268
For setting the IEC 268 mode the following applies:
· Equalizer OFF
· Equal.File R&S_EXAM.VEQ with Equalizer ON
· SWEEP CTRL OFF
· MEAN FREQ 12500. Hz
· DIFF FREQ 80.000 Hz
· TOTAL VOLT 1.0000 V
For setting the IEC 118 mode the following applies:
· Equalizer OFF
· Equal.File R&S_EXAM.VEQ with Equalizer ON
· SWEEP CTRL OFF
· UPPER FREQ 12500. Hz
· DIFF FREQ 80.000 Hz
· TOTAL VOLT 1.0000 V
For setting SWEEP CTRL → AUTO SWEEP or MANU SWEEP the following applies:
· Next Step ANLR SYNC with AUTO SWEEP only
· X Axis FREQ
· Z Axis OFF
UPL Generator Default Settings
1078.2008.02 A.9 E-10
With X or Z axis
→
VOLT selected
· MEAN FREQ 12500 Hz UPPER FREQ with IEC 118 mode selected
· DIFF FREQ 80.000 Hz
TOTAL VOLTAGE
· Spacing LIN POINTS
· Start 0.0100 V[FS]
· Stop 0.5000 V[FS]
· Points 30
With X or Z axis
→
FREQ selected
MEAN FREQUENCY UPPER FREQuency with IEC 118 mode selected
· Spacing LIN POINTS
· Start 20000 Hz
· Stop 200.0 Hz
· Points 30
· DIFF FREQ 80.000 Hz
· TOTAL VOLT 0.0100 V [FS]
For setting SWEEP CTRL → AUTO LIST or MANU LIST the following applies:
· Next Step ANLR SYNC with AUTO LIST only
· X Axis FREQ
· Z Axis OFF
With X or Z axis
→
VOLT selected
· MEAN FREQ 12500 Hz UPPER FREQuency with IEC 118 mode selected
· DIFF FREQ 80.000 Hz
· TOT V.FILE R&S_EXAM.SPV
With X or Z axis
→
FREQ selected
· MEANF.FILE R&S_EXAM.SPF UPP F.FILE with IEC 118 mode selected
· DIFF FREQ 80.000 Hz
· TOTAL VOLT 1.0000 V [FS]
FUNCTION RANDOM
· DC Offset OFF with ON: 0.0000 FS or 0.0000 V
· Domain TIME
· PDF GAUSS
· VOLT PEAK 1.0000 V [FS]
· VOLT RMS 0.2550 V in analog generator only
For setting Domain FREQ the following applies:
· Spacing USER DEF
10.000 Hz
· Shape WHITE
· Lower Freq 10.000 Hz
· Upper Freq 20000. Hz
· Equalizer OFF
· Equal.File R&S_EXAM.VEQ with equalizer ON
· VOLT PEAK 1.0000 V [FS]
· VOLT RMS 1.0000 V in analog generator only
. Ampl Var OFF
For setting Ampl Var
→
SINE
. Mod Freq 10.000 Hz
. Variation 0.0000 %
For setting Ampl Var
→
BURST
. ON TIME 0.0100 s
. INTERVAL 1.0000 s
Generator Default Settings UPL
1078.2008.02 A.10 E-10
FUNCTION ARBITRARY
· DC Offset OFF with ON: 0.0000 FS or 0.0000 V
· Shape File R&S_EXAM.TTF
· VOLT PEAK 1.0000 V [FS]
· VOLT RMS 1.0000 V in analog generator only
. Ampl Var OFF
For setting Ampl Var
→
SINE
. Mod Freq 10.000 Hz
. Variation 0.0000 %
For setting Ampl Var
→
BURST
. ON TIME 0.0100 s
. INTERVAL 1.0000 s
UPL Generator Default Settings
1078.2008.02 A.11 E-10
FUNCTION POLARITY
· DC Offset OFF with ON: 0.0000 FS or 0.0000 V
· VOLTAGE 0.5000 V [FS]
FUNCTION FSK
· DC Offset OFF with ON: 0.0000 FS or 0.0000 V
· VOLTAGE 0.5000 V[FS]
FUNCTION RANDOM+ANLR
. DC Offset OFF with ON: 0.0000 FS bzw. 0.0000 V
. Spacing USER DEF
10.000 Hz
. Lower Freq 350.00 Hz
. Upper Freq 550.00 Hz
. Crest Fact OPTIMIZED
For setting Crest Fact
→
Value:
1.0000
. RND PEAK 1.0000 V|FS
. RND RMS 0.3869 V|FS
. Loop Chan 1
. Loop Gain 0.0000 *
FUNCTION MODULATION
. DC Offset OFF with ON: 0.0000 V | FS
. Mode FM
. Mod Freq 1000.0 Hz
. Deviation 0.5000 %
. Carr Freq 40.000 Hz
. Carr Volt 0.5000 V|FS
For setting Mode
→
AM
. Mod Freq 1000.0 Hz
. Mod Depth 0.5000 %
. Carr Freq 40.000 Hz
. Carr Volt 0.5000 V|FS
FUNCTION DC
. SWEEP CTRL OFF
. VOLTAGE 1.000 V|FS
For setting von SWEEP CTRL
→
AUTO SWEEP or MANU SWEEP the following applies:
. Next Step ANLR SYNC
. X Axis VOLT only Volt
VOLTAGE
. Spacing LIN POINTS
. Start 0.0100 V|FS
. Stop 0.5000 V|FS
. Points 30
For setting von SWEEP CTRL
→
AUTO LIST or MANU LIST the following applies:
. Next Step ANLR SYNC
. X Axis VOLT only Volt
. VOLT FILE R&S_EXAM.SPF
Generator Default Settings UPL
1078.2008.02 A.12 E-10
FUNCTION CODED AUDIO for INSTRUMENT DIGITAL only
. Format AC-3
. Chan Mode 2/0 192kb/s
. SWEEP CTRL OFF
SWEEP Setting like Function SINE
. Vari Mode FREQUENCY
. FREQUENCY 1000.0 Hz
. TOTAL VOLT 0.1000 FS
UPL Analyzer Default Settings
1078.2008.02 A.13 E-10
A.2 Default Settings of Analyzer
INSTRUMENT — ANLG 22kHz
For setting ANALYZER ANLG 22 kHz and ANLG 110 kHz the following applies.
· Min Freq 10 Hz 20 Hz for ANLG 110kHz only
· Ref Imped 600.00 Ω
· Channel(s) 1
· Ch1 Coupl AC
· Ch1 Input BAL
· Ch1 Imped 600 Ω
· Ch1 Common FLOAT The same settings apply with channel 2 selected
· Ch1 Range AUTO
For setting ANALYZER DIGITAL the following applies:
· Meas Mode AUDIO DATA
· Min Freq 10 Hz for Meas Mode AUDIO DATA only
· Channel(s) 1 for Meas Mode AUDIO DATA only
· Input BAL (XLR)
· Sync To AUDIO IN for Meas Mode AUDIO DATA only
· Sample Frq 48 kHz for Meas Mode AUDIO DATA only
· Audio Bits 20 for Meas Mode AUDIO DATA only
· Jitter Ref VARI (PLL) for Meas Mode JITTER/PHAS only
START COND — AUTO
· Delay 0.0000 s
For setting START COND TIME TICK the following applies:
· Time 1.0000 s
· Points 30
For setting START COND FREQ CH1 FREQ CH2 the following applies:
· Delay 0.0000 s
· Min Volt 0.0100 V [FS]
· Start 1000.0 Hz
· Stop 10000. Hz
· Variation 10.000 %
· Settling OFF
For setting START COND VOLT CH1 VOLT CH2 the following applies:
· Delay 0.0000 s
· Start 0.0100 V [FS]
· Stop 1.0000 V [FS]
· Variation 10.000 %
· Settling OFF
For setting START COND LEV TRG CH1 LEV TRG CH2 the following applies:
· Delay 0.0000 s
· Start 0.0100 V [FS]
· Stop 1.0000 V [FS]
· Variation 10.000 %
· Settling OFF
For setting START COND TIME CHART the following applies:
· Time 1.000 s
· Points 30
Analyzer Default Settings UPL
1078.2008.02 A.14 E-10
For setting START COND FRQ FST CH1 FRQ FST CH2 the following applies:
· Delay 0.0000 s
· Min Volt 0.0100 V [FS]
· Start 1000.0 Hz
· Stop 10000 Hz
· Variation 10.000 %
· Settling OFF
For setting START COND FREQ CH1|2 | FRQ FST CH1|2 and
Settling EXPONENTIAL ½ FLAT the following applies:
· Samples 3
· Tolerance 1.0000 %
· Resolution 0.0010 Hz
For setting START COND VOLT CH1|2 | LEV TRG CH1|2and
Settling EXPONENTIAL ½ FLAT the following applies:
· Samples 3
· Tolerance 1.0000 %
· Resolution 0.0010 V [FS]
Functions common to all analyzers
Input measurement for analog analyzers
INPUT DISP PEAK | RMS
· Unit Ch1 V
· Unit Ch2 V with two-channel measurement
· Reference VALUE:
1.0000 V [FS]
Input measurement for digital analyzer in Meas Mode AUDIO DATA
INPUT DISP PEAK | RMS
· Unit Ch1 dBFS FS for RMS
· Unit Ch2 dBFS FS for RMS, with two-channel measurement
· Reference VALUE:
1.0000 FS
Input measurement for digital analyzer in Meas Mode COMMON/INP
INPUT DISP PEAK | DIG INP AMP
· Unit Ch1 V
· Reference VALUE:
1.0000 V[FS]
Input measurement for digital analyzer in Meas Mode JITTER/PHAS
INPUT/PHAS PEAK
· Unit Ch1 UI %FRM for PHAS TO REF
· Reference VALUE: for PEAK only
1.0000 UI for PEAK only
INPUT/PHAS PHAS TO REF
· Unit %FRM
UPL Analyzer Default Settings
1078.2008.02 A.15 E-10
Frequency measurement for analog analyzers and digital analyzer
in Meas Mode AUDIO DATA
FREQ/PHASE FREQ
· Unit Ch1 Hz
· Unit Ch2 Hz with two-channel measurement
· Ref Freq VALUE:
1000.0 Hz
· Freq Settl OFF
Frequency/phase measurement with two-channel measurement for analog analyzers and digital
analyzer in Meas Mode AUDIO DATA
FREQ/PHASE FREQ&PHASE
· Unit Ch1 Hz
· Unit Ch2 °
· Ref Freq VALUE:
1000.0 Hz
· Format Pha -180...+180°Formatt Pha 0 to 360° for analog analyzer
· Ref Phase VALUE:
10.000 °
· Freq Settl OFF
· Phas Settl OFF
Frequency/group-delay measurement with two-channel measurements for analog
analyzers and digital analyzer in Meas Mode AUDIO DATA
FREQ/PHASE FREQ&GRPDEL
· Unit Ch1 Hz
· Unit Ch2 s
· Ref Freq VALUE:
1000.0 Hz
· Ref Phase VALUE:
10.000 s
· Freq Settl OFF
Sample frequency measurement for digital analyzer in Meas Mode AUDIO DATA
FREQ/PHASE SAMPLE FREQ
· Unit Ch1 Hz
· Unit Ch2 Hz with two-channel measurement
· Ref Freq VALUE:
1000.0 Hz
· Freq Settl OFF
· Freq Settl OFF
Frequency and sample frequency measurement for digital analyzer in Meas Mode
JITTER/PHAS | COMMON/INP
FREQ/PHASE FREQ | SAMPLE FREQ
· Unit Hz
· Ref Freq VALUE:
1000.0 Hz
common to all FREQ/PHASE settings:
For setting Freq Settl EXPONENTIAL
FLAT the following applies:
· Samples 3
· Tolerance 0.1000 %
· Resolution 0.1000 Hz
· Timeout 5.0000 s
Analyzer Default Settings UPL
1078.2008.02 A.16 E-10
For setting Freq Settl AVERAGE the following applies:
· Samples 3
For setting Phas Settl EXPONENTIAL
FLAT the following applies:
· Samples 3
· Resolution 0.1000 °
· Timeout 5.0000 s
For setting Phas Settl AVERAGE the following applies:
· Samples 3
Functions of all analyzers:
FUNCTION RMS & S/N
· DC Suppres ON for digital- analysator only
· S/N Sequ OFF for analogen analyzers only
· Meas Time AUTO FAST
· Unit Ch1 V [FS]
· Unit Ch2 V [FS] (with channel 2 activated)
· Reference VALUE:
1.0000 V [FS]
· Notch (Gain)OFF for analogen analyzers only
· Filter OFF
· Filter OFF
· Filter OFF
· Fnct Settl OFF
· POST FFT OFF
· SPEAKER OFF
For setting POST FFT = ON the following applies:
· FFT Size 4096
· Window RIFE VINC 2
FUNCTION RMS SELECT
· DC Suppres ON for digital- analysator only
· Meas Time AUTO
· Unit Ch1 V [FS]
· Unit Ch2 V [FS] if channel 2 is on
· Reference VALUE:
1.0000 V [FS]
· Sweep Mode NORMAL
· Bandwidth BP 1% with bandwidth BP FIX or BS FIX: 100.00 Hz
· SWEEP CTRL OFF
· FREQ MODE GEN TRACK
· Factor 1.0000 * with FREQ MODE GEN TRACK only
For setting SWEEP CTRL AUTO SWEEP, MANU SWEEP the following applies:
· Spacing LOG POINTS
· Start 100.00 Hz
· Stop 20000. Hz
· Points 30
UPL Analyzer Default Settings
1078.2008.02 A.17 E-10
For setting SWEEP CTRL AUTO LIST, MANU LIST the following applies:
· Filename R&S_EXAM.SPF
For setting SWEEP CTRL GEN MLTSINE the following applies:
There are no further parameters
· Notch(Gain)OFF for analogen analyzers only
· Fiter OFF for analogen analyzers only
· Fnct Settl OFF
· SPEAKER OFF
FUNCTION PEAK & S/N for analyzers ANLG 22kHz and DIGITAL only
· S/N Sequ OFF
· Meas Mode PK+
· Intv Time FIX 200ms
· Unit Ch1 V [FS]
· Unit Ch2 V [FS] (if channel 2 is on)
· Reference VALUE:
1.0000 V [FS]
· Filter OFF
· Filter OFF
· Filter OFF
· Fnct Settl OFF
· SPEAKER OFF
FUNCTION QPK & S/N for analyzers ANLG 22 kHz and DIGITAL
· S/N Sequ OFF
· Intv Time FIX 3
· Unit Ch1 V [FS]
· Unit Ch2 V [FS] with channel 2 activated
· Reference VALUE:
1.0000 V [FS]
· Notch (Gain) OFF for analog analyzers only
· Filter OFF
· Filter OFF
· Filter OFF
· Fnct Settl OFF
· SPEAKER OFF
FUNCTION DC
· Meas Time FIX 200ms
· Unit Ch1 V [FS]
· Unit Ch2 V [FS] if channel 2 is on
· Reference VALUE:
1.0000 V|FS
· Fnct Settl OFF
· SPEAKER OFF
FUNCTION THD
· Meas Mode All di
· Dyn Mode PRECISION for analogen analyzers only
· Unit dB
· Fundamentl AUTO
· Fnct Settl OFF
· SPEAKER OFF
Analyzer Default Settings UPL
1078.2008.02 A.18 E-10
FUNCTION THD+N/SINAD
· Meas Mode THD+N
· Dyn Mode PRECISION for analog analyzers only
· Meas Time SLOW
· Rejektion NARROW for digital analyzer only
· Unit dB
· Fundamentl AUTO
· FILTER OFF
· FrqLim Low 100.00 Hz 128 Hz for ANLG 110kHz
· FrqLim Upp 20000. Hz
· Fnct Settl OFF
· POST FFT OFF
. Equalizer OFF
. Equal.File R&S_EXAM.VEQ with Equalizer ON
SPEAKER OFF
For setting POST FFT ON the following applies:
· FFT Size 8192
· Window RIFE VINC 3
FUNCTION MOD DIST
· Dyn Mode PRECISION for analog analyzers only
· Unit dB
· Fnct Settl OFF
· SPEAKER — OFF
FUNCTION DFD
· Meas Mode d2 (IEC 268)
· Dyn Mode PRECISION for analogen analyzers only
· Unit dB
· Fnct Settl OFF
SPEAKER — OFF
FUNCTION WOW & FL in analyzers ANLG 22 kHz and DIGITAL
· Standard DIN/IEC
· Weighting ON
· Unit %
· Fnct Settl OFF
· POSTFFT OFF
· SPEAKER — OFF
For setting POST FFT the following applies:
· FFT Size 8192
· Window RIFE VINC 1
FUNCTION POLARITY
There are no further parameters
FUNCTION FFT
· DC Suppres ON with digital analysator only
· Unit Ch1 dBV [dbFS]
· Reference VALUE:
1.0000 V [FS]
· Notch (Gain)OFF for analogen analyzers only
· FFT Size 4096
. Filter OFF
. Filter OFF
. Filter OFF
· Window RIFE VINC 2 RIFE VINC 3 for digital analyzers
· Avg Mode EXPONENTIAL
· Avg Count 1
· Zooming OFF
. Equalizer OFF
. Equal.File R&S_EXAM.VEQ with Equalizer ON
· SPEAKER — OFF
UPL Analyzer Default Settings
1078.2008.02 A.19 E-10
For setting ZOOMING ON the following applies:
· Zooming ON (2 to 128) Zooming ON (2 to 8) for ANLG 110 kHz
· Center 10000 Hz
· Span 21.94 kHz SPAN 140.40 for ANLG 110 kHz
In the digital analyzer, the value depends on the selected
sample rate
· Zoom Fact 2
FUNCTION FILTER SIM.
· Unit %
· Filter OFF
· Filter OFF
· Filter OFF
· SPEAKER — OFF
FUNCTION WAVEFORM
· DC Suppres ON with digital analysator only
· Meas Mode STANDARD
· Unit V [FS]
· REF VOLT 1.0000 V
· Filter OFF
· Trig Level 0.0000 V
· Trig Slope RISING
· Interpol 1
· Trace Len 0.0100 s
· Trig Src CHAN 1 for analog analyzer ANLG 22kHz only
· SPEAKER — OFF
FUNCTION PROTOCOL for digital analyzer only
there are no further parameters
FUNCTION COHERENCE
· Unit %
. Chan Delay 0.0000 s for analyzers ANLG 22kHz and DIGITAL only with two channels
· FFT Size 4096
· Window RIFE VINC 2
· Avg Count 2
· Start 0.0000 Hz
· Stop 21938 Hz
· Resolution 11.719 Hz
FUNCTION RUB & BUZZ with analog analyzer only
· Meas Time GEN TRACK
· Unit Ch1 V
· Reference VALUE:
· 1.0000 V
· FREQ MODE GEN TRACK
· Factor 2.0000 *
· Sweep Mode NORMAL
· Filter OFF
· FrqLim Low 100.0 Hz
· FrqLim Upp 21938 Hz 120 kHz with analyzer ANLG 110 kHz only
Analyzer Default Settings UPL
1078.2008.02 A.20 E-10
FUNCTION 3rd OCTAVE for analyzers ANLG 22kHz and DIGITAL
. Line Count 30
. Meas Time VALUE
. 0.5013 s
. Max Hold OFF
. Unit Ch1 V [FS]
. Unit Ch2 V [FS]
. Reference VALUE:
1.0000 V [FS]
. Filter OFF
. FrqLim Low 100.00 Hz
. FrqLim Upp 21938 Hz
FUNCTION 12th OCTAVEfor analyzers ANLG 22kHz and DIGITAL
. Meas Time VALUE
. 1.3925 s
. Max Hold OFF
. Unit Ch1 V [FS]
. Unit Ch2 V [FS]
. Reference VALUE:
1.0000 V [FS]
. Filter OFF
. FrqLim Low 100.00 Hz
. FrqLim Upp 20586 Hz
Common to all measurement functions:
For setting SPEAKER unequal to OFF the following applies:
· Pre Gain 0.0000 dB with SPEAKER FUNCT CH1|2|1&2 only
· Spk Volume 30.000 %
· Phone Out = SPEAKER
For setting Fnct Settl EXPONENTIAL
FLAT the following applies:
· Samples 3
· Tolerance 0.1000 %
· Resolution 0.0010 V
· Timeout 5.0000 s
For setting Fnct Settl AVERAGE the following applies:
· Samples 3
UPL Filter Panel Default Settings
1078.2008.02 A.21 E-10
A.3 Default Settings of Filter Panel
Basic parameters of filters:
Lowpass filter:
· Order 8
· Passband 20000. Hz
· Attenuat. 60.000 dB
· Short Name 1:LP20.0kHz
Highpass filter:
· Order 8
· Passband 400.00 Hz
· Attenuat. 60.000 dB
· Short Name 2:HP400.0Hz
Bandpass filter:
· Passb Low 900.00 Hz
· Passb Upp 1100.0 Hz
· Attenuat. 60.000 dB
· Short Name 3:BP900.0Hz
Bandstop filter:
· Passb Low 900.00 Hz
· Passb Upp 1100.0 Hz
· Attenuat. 60.000 dB
· Short Name 4:BS900.0Hz
Notch filter:
· Center Frq 16000. Hz
· Width 500.00 Hz
· Attenuat. 60.000 dB
· Short Name 5:NO16.0kHz
Octave filter (1/3 OCT FLT):
· Center Frq 12500. Hz
· Attenuat. 60.000 dB
· Short Name 7:TO12.5kHz
Oktave filter (OCTAVE FLT):
· Center Frq 12500. Hz
· Attenuat. 60.000 dB
· Short Name 8:OC12.5kHz
File-defined filter (FILE DEF):
· Filename R&S_EXAM.COE
· Delay 0.1000 s
· Short Name 9:R&S_EXAM
Standard filter types:
FILTER 01 LOW PASS
FILTER 02 HIGH PASS
FILTER 03 BAND PASS
FILTER 04 BAND STOP
FILTER 05 NOTCH FLT
FILTER 06 1/3 OCT FLT
FILTER 07 OCTAVE FLT
FILTER 08 FILE DEF.
FILTER 09 FILE DEF.
Display Panel Default Settings UPL
1078.2008.02 A.22 E-10
A.4 Default Settings of Display Panel
OPERATION BARGRAPH
· Scans COUNT 1
· User Label OFF
BARGRAPH A FUNC CH1
· Unit V [FS, Hz, dB, %] Basic unit of selected analyzer or bargraph
function (see section 2.4 Units)
· Limit Ref VALUE:
1.0000 V [FS, Hz, dB, %] Basic unit of selected analyzer or bargraph
function (see section 2.4 Units)
· Scale AUTO ONCE
· Spacing LIN
BARGRAPH B OFF
If the same function was selected for BARGRAPH B and BARGRAPH A:
· Scale B NOT EQUAL A
With Scale B → NOT EQUAL A selected :
· Unit V [FS, Hz, dB, %] Basic unit of selected analyzer or bargraph
function (see section 2.4 Units)
· Limit Ref VALUE:
1.0000 V [FS, Hz, dB, %] Basic unit of selected analyzer or bargraph
function (see section 2.4 Units)
· Scale AUTO ONCE
· Spacing LIN
BARGRAPH X VOLT VOLT, FREQ, ON TIME and INTERVAL are
· Unit V [FS] displayed depending on the setting under
· Reference 10000 V [FS] X axis in the case of a generator sweep.
· Scale AUTO For a sweep of the center frequency of the rms
· Spacing LIN selective bandpass filter in the analyzer with
measurement function RMS SELECT, FREQ is
displayed.
BARGRAPH X FREQ
· Unit Hz
· Reference 1000.0 Hz
· Scale AUTO
· Spacing LIN
BARGRAPH X ON TIME INTERVAL
· Unit S
· Scale AUTO
· Spacing LIN
LIMIT CHECK ——————
· Mode OFF
For setting "Mode LIM LOWER, LIM UPPER, LIM LOW&UP" the following applies:
· Check TRACE A
· Lim Upper VALUE: not with LIM LOWER
0.5000 V
· Lim Upper VALUE: not with LIM UPPER
0.0500 V
UPL Standard Settings of Option Panel
1078.2008.02 A.23 E-10
A.5 Default Settings of Options Panel
· Remote via IEC BUS with remote control option (UPL-B4) installed
· UPL IECadr 20 not with remote control via COM2
· Beeper ON
PARAM.LINK ————————
· Param Link CHOICE... Function tracking Gen → Anl selected
DIGITAL AUDIO I/O ———
. Sampl Mode BASE RATE The HIGH RATE-Mode (96 kHz-Instrument) has also the
default setting described here
SCREEN HARD COPY ———
For setting Destin
→
PRINTR/SPC the following applies:
· Destin PRINTR/SPC
· Printname Default-Printer
· Frame Col FILE DEF
· Comment ON
· Left Mrgn 10 Chars
· Prn Resol HIGH
· X Scaling 1.5000
· Y Scaling 1.5000
· Orientatn PORTRAIT
Default Printer stands for the printer selected last by the user. If
printer 0 is selected in the setup, loading the default setup does
not overwrite the printer type selected by the user.
For setting Destin
→
PLOTTR/HPGL | PRINTR/HPGL the following applies:
· Destin PLOTTR/HPGL | PRINTR/HPGL
· Color OFF
· Copy SCREEN
· Plot on COM2
· IEC Adr 4 with Plot on = IEC BUS
For setting Destin → FILE/PCX the following applies:
· Destin FILE/PCX
· Color OFF
· Frame Col FILE DEF
· Plot on COM2
For setting Destin → FILE/HPGL the following applies:
· Destin FILE/HPGL
· Color OFF
· Copy SCREEN
· Filename SCREEN
For setting Destin → PRINTR/PS | FILE/PS | FILE EPS the following applies:
· Destin PRINTR/PS | FILE/PS | FILE EPS
· Color OFF
· Comment ON
· Paper Size A4
· Orientatn LANDSCAPE
· Plot on COM2
· Plots/Page 1
PRINT ——————————
· Type OFF
COM2 PARAMETER ———————
· Baud Rate 9600
· Parity EVEN
· Data Bits 7
· Stop Bits 1
· Handshake RTS/CTS
This standard setting is only set when the BACKSPACE key is pressed
during UPL switch-on, UPL-d is entered or after a (new) installation of
an UPL software.
COM2 parameters remain unchanged when a default settup is loaded.
This prevents interface parameters, which have to correspond to those
of the connected device, being overwritten by mistake.
Standard Settings of Option Panel UPL
1078.2008.02 A.24 E-10
PANEL KEYS ———————
· Reptn Rate 10.000 Hz
· Rep Delay 0.5000 s
DISPLAY —————————
· Extrn Disp BOTH AUTO
· Meas Disp ON
· Read Rate 6/s
· Read Resol CHOICE ... Automatic for all 6 displays
TRACES COLOR/LINE ————
· Scan Conf MANUAL
· Scannr. (A) 0
· Color (A) GREEN
· Line (A) ————————
· Scannr. (B) 0
· Color (B) GREEN
· Line (B) ————————
HELP LANGUAGE ——————
· Language GERMAN
CALIBRATion ANL ————
· Zero Auto ON
CALIBRATion GEN ————
· PhaseToRef OFF
· DIAGNOSTIC password ?
· Device INSTALL KEY
· Option No. 0
· InstallKey 0
UPL Standard Settings of the File Panel
1078.2008.02 A.25 E-10
A.6 Default Settings of File Panel
LOAD INSTRUMENT STATE ———
. Applicat USER DEF
· Mode ACTUAL
· Info Displ ON
· Filename LASTSAVE
STORE INSTRUMENT STATE ———
· Mode ACTUAL
· Attrib READ/WRITE
· Info Text no infotext
· Filename LASTSAVE
STORE TRACE/LIST ———————
· Store OFF
UTILS —————————————
· Delete TO_DELETE
· Work Dir C:\UPL\USER
· COPY SOURCE
· To DEST
Index UPL
1078.2008.02 I.1 E-10
A
A weighting.....................................................................2.208
A WITH * .......................................................................2.343
A WITH o........................................................................2.343
Abort...............................................................................2.364
Abort event.......................................................... 2.358, 2.363
AC coupling....................................................................2.147
AC coupling input unit.....................................................2.151
AC supply network..............................................................1.1
AC supply voltages.............................................................1.1
AC-3...............................................................................2.135
AC-3 format ....................................................................2.135
Activating
STATUS panel .........................................................2.293
Activation panels ..............................................................2.31
ACTUAL .............................................................. 2.298, 2.299
Actual instrument setup ....................................... 2.298, 2.299
Actual setup......................................................... 2.298, 2.299
Actual setup and data.....................................................2.299
ACTUAL+DATA..............................................................2.299
Address
IEC/IEEE bus ...............................................................3.4
Addressed commands ....................................................3.295
AES Ch1.........................................................................2.262
AES Ch1&2 ....................................................................2.262
AES Ch2.........................................................................2.262
AES/EBU protocol definition.............................................2.78
AES/EBU receivers
reset.........................................................................2.365
ALL.................................................................................2.348
All di ...............................................................................2.200
All even di.......................................................................2.200
All odd di.........................................................................2.200
ALL ONE ..........................................................................2.74
ALL ZERO........................................................................2.74
AM..................................................................................2.132
Ampl Var.......................................... 2.89, 2.105, 2.122, 2.126
Amplitude
distribution..................................................................2.86
ratio (MOD DIST)
generator............................................................2.111
Amplitude accuracy ........................................................2.226
Amplitude entry
FM............................................................................2.132
Amplitude list (list sweep) ...............................................2.141
Amplitude modulation .....................................................2.132
Amplitude ratio (MOD DIST)
analyzer....................................................................2.212
Amplitude Variation...........................................................2.89
Analog
analyzer....................................................................2.146
Analog Ampl...................................................................2.139
Analog Freq....................................................................2.139
Analog generator ..............................................................2.66
Analog interfaces
Input connectors...........................................................2.9
Analog notch filter..................................... 2.201, 2.205, 2.213
ANALOG OUT................................................................2.138
Analyzer
availability of functions .............................................2.144
configuration.............................................................2.146
Filters .......................................................................2.278
input peak measurement ..........................................2.144
input peak measurements ........................................2.235
instruments...............................................................2.142
measurement functions ............................................2.165
measurement range limits ........................................2.143
reference value.............................................. 2.169, 2.172
Settings ......................................................................2.16
synchronization...........................................................2.94
ways of starting ........................................................2.159
ANALYZER panel .......................................................... 2.142
Analyzers
reference values ...................................................... 2.172
ANLG - ANLG ................................................................ 2.297
ANLG – DIGI.................................................................. 2.297
ANLG 25 kHz................................................................... 2.65
ANLR key................................................................ 2.3, 2.278
ANLR SYNC..................................................................... 2.94
ANLR TRACK ................................................................ 2.101
ANLR-TRACK ................................................................ 2.118
Application ..................................................................... 2.297
application setups .......................................................... 2.297
ARBITRARY .................................................................... 2.85
ARBITRARY signals
measuring on ........................................................... 2.181
Arbitrary waveform........................................................... 2.85
Arith. symm. bandwidth RMS sel.................................... 2.186
Arithmetic averaging, settling ................................ 2.42, 2.175
ASCII ...................................................................2.305, 2.354
ASCII format .................................................................. 2.305
Asterisk............................................................................ 3.15
Asymmetrical sine burst ................................................... 2.85
AT o DOWN................................................................... 2.340
AT o UP ......................................................................... 2.340
Atten .............................................................................. 2.285
Attenuation..................................................................... 2.284
Attrib .............................................................................. 2.300
Attribute.......................................................................... 2.300
AUD IN RCLK .................................................................. 2.74
Audio Bits.............................................................. 2.75, 2.157
AUDIO DATA ........................................................ 2.71, 2.153
AUDIO IN.............................................2.71, 2.72, 2.74, 2.156
AUDIO OUT............................................................ 2.71, 2.74
AUTO..2.157, 2.159, 2.174, 2.179, 2.185, 2.202, 2.207, 2.248
AUTO COLOR ............................................................... 2.397
AUTO FAST..............................................2.179, 2.185, 2.248
AUTO LINE.................................................................... 2.397
AUTO LIST
Generator-Sweep....................................................... 2.93
AUTO ONCE........................................................2.335, 2.348
AUTO Range
Analyzer................................................................... 2.149
generator ................................................................... 2.67
AUTO SCALE ...........................................2.335, 2.338, 2.348
AUTO SCALE ................................................................ 2.335
AUTO SWEEP
analyzer ................................................................... 2.187
Generator................................................................... 2.93
Automatic
sweep ...................................................................... 2.187
sweep ........................................................................ 2.93
Automatic control, size of data memory.......................... 3.356
Automatic range selection.............................................. 2.149
AUX GEN....................................................................... 2.138
Availability
phase measurement ................................................ 2.240
sweep parameters...................................................... 2.91
AVERAGE...................................................................... 2.175
AVERAGE, settling .......................................................... 2.42
Averaging
FFT.......................................................................... 2.223
measurement results.................................................. 2.42
Averaging method in the FFT......................................... 2.223
Avg Count ............................................................2.223, 2.245
Avg Mode....................................................................... 2.223
Index UPL
1078.2008.02 I.2 E-10
B
B WITH * ........................................................................2.343
B WITH o........................................................................2.343
BACK softkey .................................................................2.337
BACKSP.............................................................................2.5
BALGenerator.................................................................2.139
BAL XLR
analyzer......................................................... 2.148, 2.154
Generator........................................................2.66, 2.139
Balanced Output...............................................................2.69
Band limit
THD+N / SINAD .......................................................2.208
Band limits
analyzer instruments.................................................2.143
BAND PASS...................................................................2.287
BAND STOP...................................................................2.287
Bandpass .......................................................................2.184
center frequency.......................................................2.194
RMS sel....................................................................2.184
Bandpass .......................................................................2.287
Bandstop ........................................................................2.287
bandwidth
third octave...............................................................2.252
twelfth octave ...........................................................2.256
Bandwidth
analyzer....................................................................2.186
RMS Select ..............................................................2.186
Bandwidth bandpass RMS sel........................................2.186
BAR 1.............................................................................2.348
BAR 2.............................................................................2.348
BAR 3.............................................................................2.348
Bar chart
MOD DIST................................................................2.213
BARGRAPH ...................................................................2.327
BARGRAPH display ............................................ 2.347, 2.349
BARGRAPH display parameters.....................................2.347
BARGRAPH X................................................................2.347
BARGRAPH1 .................................................................2.347
BARGRAPH2 .................................................................2.347
BASIC-Macro..................................................................3.329
Battery replacement............................................................4.8
baud ...............................................................................2.409
Baud Rate ......................................................................2.391
Beats
DC measurement .....................................................2.198
RMS measurement...................................................2.181
Beeper............................................................................2.393
Beeper On/Off ................................................................2.393
BIN ENTRY .............................................................2.79, 2.81
BINARY..........................................................................2.354
Binary block data............................................................3.364
Binary data blocks ............................................................3.12
Binary form.....................................................................2.305
BIOS-SETUP......................................................................4.2
BIPHASE CLK..................................................................2.74
Biquads ..........................................................................2.229
BLACKMAN-HARRIS .......................................... 2.222, 2.245
BLOCK ..................................................... 2.182, 2.193, 2.250
Boards replacement............................................................4.7
Boolean parameter (command).........................................3.13
BOTH .............................................................................2.153
BOTH AUTO...................................................................2.394
BOTH BW.......................................................................2.394
BOTH COLOR................................................................2.394
Bottom............................................................................2.335
Bounding Box .................................................................2.378
BP 1% ............................................................................2.186
BP 1/12 OCT..................................................................2.186
BP 1/3 OCT....................................................................2.186
BP 3% ............................................................................2.186
BP FAST........................................................................ 2.186
BP FIX\: ......................................................................... 2.186
Broadband noise............................................................ 2.199
BS 1%............................................................................ 2.186
BS 1/12 OCT.................................................................. 2.186
BS 1/3 OCT.................................................................... 2.186
BS 3%............................................................................ 2.186
BS FAST........................................................................ 2.186
BS FIX\: ......................................................................... 2.186
BURST.............................................2.89, 2.105, 2.122, 2.126
burst duration ...................................2.90, 2.105, 2.123, 2.126
Burst duration SINE BURST........................................... 2.108
Burst on Del .........................................................2.108, 2.110
Burst signal SINE........................................................... 2.106
C
C 448 kb/s...................................................................... 2.135
C MESSAGE.................................................................. 2.208
Cable Sim ........................................................................ 2.72
Cable Simulation.............................................................. 2.72
Calculation of filters..............................................2.285, 2.291
Calibration...................................................................... 2.399
DIG .......................................................................... 2.399
Calibration ANL.............................................................. 2.399
Calibration GEN ............................................................. 2.399
Calibration of low-distortion generator............................ 2.399
CANCEL ..................................................2.5, 2.13, 2.34, 2.35
CANCEL .................................................................................
Carr Freq........................................................................ 2.132
Carr Volt......................................................................... 2.132
Carrier frequency
FM ........................................................................... 2.132
CCIR 409-J standard W&F............................................. 2.217
CCIR unwtd.................................................................... 2.208
CCIR wtd........................................................................ 2.208
CCIT ARM...................................................................... 2.208
CCITT 0.41 .................................................................... 2.208
CEN TO o ...................................................................... 2.340
Center ............................................................................ 2.224
Center Freq..........................................................2.289, 2.290
Center frequency
bandpass RMS sel................................................... 2.194
DFD ......................................................................... 2.115
notch filter ................................................................ 2.174
Center frequency............................................................ 2.290
Centronics...................................................................... 2.411
Ch Stat. L......................................................................... 2.79
Ch. Stat. R ....................................................................... 2.81
Chan delay...........................................................2.220, 2.245
Chan Mode..................................................................... 2.135
CHAN STAT L................................................................ 2.353
CHAN STAT R ............................................................... 2.353
CHAN STATUS.............................................................. 2.157
Changing
an instrument ............................................................. 2.33
functions .................................................................... 2.34
the panels .................................................2.29, 2.30, 2.31
Changing a function
parameter link ............................................................ 2.34
Changing an instrument
parameter link ............................................................ 2.33
Changing between the instruments .................................. 2.34
Changing the unit at a later date....................................... 2.35
UPL Index
1078.2008.02 I.3 E-10
Channel
sequence..................................................................2.352
Channel delay.................................................................2.220
Channel Mode ................................................................2.135
Channel status..................................................................2.84
Channel status data, user data, validity, parity..................2.78
Channel(s)
analyzer......................................................... 2.146, 2.153
generator....................................................................2.66
Generator.................................................................2.139
Character
data (command) .........................................................3.13
string (command)........................................................3.14
Characteristic notch........................................................2.174
Check .............................................................................2.350
CHECKSUM ERROR .........................................................4.5
CHOICE .........................................................................2.403
Clock rate generator........................................................2.73
Clock rate error...............................................................2.352
CMOS CHECKSUM ERROR..............................................4.5
Coded Audio...................................................................2.134
CODED AUDIO ................................................................2.85
Coded Audio Signal Generation......................................2.134
COHERENCE.................................................................2.165
Coherence Measurement ...............................................2.244
Colon................................................................................3.15
Color...................................................................... 2.27, 2.398
Color palette information.................................................2.294
Colour.............................................................................2.377
Colour display.................................................................2.394
Colour display PROTOCOL analysis ..............................2.352
Colour monitor................................................................2.394
Colour monitor................................................................2.394
COM2.................................................................. 2.379, 2.390
COM2 interface ..............................................................2.390
COM2 PARAMETER......................................................2.390
Comma.............................................................................3.15
Command
addressed ................................................................3.295
Common...................................................................3.295
common commands ...................................................3.39
header..........................................................................3.7
hierarchy ......................................................................3.7
keyword........................................................................3.7
line delimiter .................................................................3.9
structure.................................................................3.9
numeric suffix...............................................................3.8
parameters .................................................................3.13
permissibility...............................................................3.19
processing..................................................................3.18
structure .......................................................................3.7
synchronization...........................................................3.21
syntax elements .........................................................3.15
command line option
-tappl ........................................................................2.296
command line parameter
-tthdnwin...................................................................2.210
COMMENT.....................................................................2.336
Comments for hardcopy..................................................2.299
Comments on hardcopy..................................................2.298
Common
analyzer....................................................................2.148
Common Ampl................................................................2.140
Common commands..............................................3.39, 3.295
form..............................................................................3.7
Common Freq.................................................................2.140
COMMON MODE...........................................................2.138
COMMON ONLY..............................................................2.71
Common parameters
all analyzer functions................................................ 2.166
all filters ................................................................... 2.285
all generator functions................................................ 2.87
generator signals ....................................................... 2.86
SINE, DFD, MOD DIST signals.................................. 2.86
COMMON/INP ............................................................... 2.153
Comp ............................................................................. 2.231
COMPLETE .........................................................2.298, 2.299
Complete setup....................................................2.298, 2.299
COMPRESS .................................................................. 2.135
COMPRESSED.............................................................. 2.231
Computer operation of UPL............................................ 2.412
CONDition register........................................................... 3.25
Conditional tracing of measured values.......................... 2.159
Configuration
analog analyzer........................................................ 2.146
analog generator........................2.66, 2.139, 2.140, 2.141
digital analyzers ....................................................... 2.153
digital generator ......................................................... 2.71
Configuration File PS.CFG............................................. 2.385
Connecting
external devices....................................................... 2.408
external VGA monitor................................................. 2.11
CONT............................................................................. 2.358
CONT key ...................................................................... 2.161
Continuous measurement .............................................. 2.360
Continuous measurement without trigger condition ........ 2.159
Contrast ............................................................................. 1.3
Control file...................................................................... 2.321
Control panel
CONTROL ............................................................ 2.5, 2.7
CURSOR / VARIATION ............................................... 2.7
EDIT ............................................................................ 2.5
Front-panel................................................................... 2.3
conversion factor............................................................ 2.170
Conversion factor........................................................... 2.269
Conversion formula of units.............................................. 2.57
Copy .............................................................................. 2.373
COPY............................................................................... 2.27
coupling
AC............................................................................ 2.178
DC ........................................................................... 2.178
Coupling
analyzer inputs......................................................... 2.147
Crest Fact ............................................................2.102, 2.120
Crosstalk........................................................................ 2.266
CRT monitor................................................................... 2.411
Ctrl D.............................................................................. 2.394
Cursor
graphics .........................................................2.337, 2.343
panel.......................................................................... 2.31
Cursor IMAX A............................................................... 2.343
Cursor IMAX B............................................................... 2.343
CURVE ................................................................2.338, 2.373
Curve plot
cursor....................................................................... 2.337
overrange................................................................. 2.337
underrange............................................................... 2.337
CURVE PLOT ................................................................ 2.327
CURVE/GRID................................................................. 2.373
Index UPL
1078.2008.02 I.4 E-10
D
d2 (IEC 118)...................................................................2.215
d2 (IEC 268)...................................................................2.215
d3 (IEC 118)...................................................................2.215
d3 (IEC 268)...................................................................2.215
Dangerous contact voltages ...............................................2.1
data ................................................................................2.409
Data Bits.........................................................................2.391
Data entry.........................................................................2.34
Data input or output during measurements .......................2.39
Data strings (command)....................................................3.14
DC......................................................................... 2.85, 2.165
component..................................................................2.87
coupling....................................................................2.143
measurement ................................................ 2.165, 2.198
noise HP...................................................................2.208
offset ..........................................................................2.87
offset calibration.......................................................2.399
voltage......................................................................2.198
DC coupling....................................................................2.147
DC coupling input unit.....................................................2.151
DC Offset...............................2.99, 2.101, 2.106, 2.109, 2.111
............................................2.114, 2.117, 2.125, 2.127, 2.128
DC Suppres....................................2.166, 2.178, 2.184, 2.220
Decimal point....................................................................3.15
DEEM 50/15...................................................................2.208
Deemph 50.....................................................................2.208
Deemph 75.....................................................................2.208
Deemph J.17 ..................................................................2.208
DEFAULT............................................................ 2.298, 2.397
Default setup ..................................................................2.298
DEFAULT.SET ...............................................................2.296
DEFINE PHASE .............................................................2.102
DEFINE VOLT................................................................2.102
DEL BEF WR ......................................................2.328, 2.330
Delay
filter ..........................................................................2.285
restart of measurement.............................................2.162
Delay value with external sweep.......................................2.50
Delete.............................................................................2.321
DELete BEFore WRite....................................................2.330
Delimiter
command line...............................................................3.9
response to query.......................................................3.11
Destin.................................................................. 2.371, 2.372
Deviation ........................................................................2.132
FM............................................................................2.132
Deviation settling ............................................................2.176
DFD
analyzer....................................................................2.165
Generator...................................................................2.85
Dialog window
multisine...................................................................2.103
DIFF FREQ ....................................................................2.115
Difference frequency distortion ............................ 2.114, 2.214
measurement ................................................ 2.165, 2.214
Difference value curves ..................................................2.339
Differences to IEC/IEEE-Bus Remote Control (B10).......3.341
Differences to remote control via IEC/IEEE bus (RS-232)
.......................................................................................3.364
DIG INP AMP ...................................................... 2.166, 2.235
DIG OUT AMP................................................................2.170
DIGI – ANLG ..................................................................2.297
DIGI – DIGI.....................................................................2.297
DIGITAL ...........................................................................2.65
Digital generator ...............................................................2.71
DIN 45403 ......................................................................2.114
DIN 45507 standard W&F...............................................2.217
DIN/IEC ..........................................................................2.217
DIN-IEC 268-3................................................................2.114
Directories........................................................................ 2.37
Directory structure.............................................................. 1.9
Display .................................................................... 2.7, 2.327
DISPLAY key ..................................................................... 2.3
Display modes
Switchover using the mouse ...................................... 2.29
Display of lists................................................................ 2.344
Display of lists parameters ............................................. 2.344
Display of traces and spectra ...............................2.330, 2.337
Distant interferences suppression .................................. 2.222
Distortion measurement ................................................. 2.165
Distortion measurement THD+N/SINAD......................... 2.203
Distortion measurements THD ....................................... 2.199
Distribution
function...................................................................... 2.86
noise........................................................................ 2.122
Dither .................. 2.85, 2.86, 2.99, 2.101, 2.111, 2.114, 2.128
Dolby Digital................................................................... 2.135
Domain........................................................................... 2.117
DOS operating system ..................................................... 2.53
Double cross.................................................................... 3.15
Drive ................................................................................ 2.38
drivername ..................................................................... 2.373
DUAL FILE.....................................2.302, 2.330, 2.331, 2.344
Dual trac......................................................................... 2.302
Dwell..................................................................... 2.94, 2.389
file.............................................................................. 2.94
time............................................................................ 2.94
value.......................................................................... 2.94
DWELL FILE.................................................................... 2.94
Dwell time ...................................................................... 2.304
Dwell time printout.......................................................... 2.389
DWELL VALUE..................................................... 2.94, 2.304
Dyn Mode............................ 2.201, 2.205, 2.206, 2.213, 2.215
Dynamic
offset calibration....................................................... 2.399
Dynamic....................................................2.201, 2.205, 2.215
Dynamic Mode ............................................................... 2.213
Dynamic Mode PRECISION........................................... 2.399
E
EDG TRG CH1............................................................... 2.161
EDG TRG CH2............................................................... 2.161
Editing files and directories ............................................ 2.321
EMC problems ............................................................... 2.154
ENABle register................................................................ 3.26
ENHANCED..................................................................... 2.78
ENTER............................................2.5, 2.13, 2.16, 2.34, 2.35
Entering a new file name.................................................. 2.37
Entering file names.................................................. 2.36, 2.37
Entry of amplitude
RANDOM (noise)..................................................... 2.125
SINE ........................................................................ 2.141
Entry of data..................................................................... 2.34
Entry of figures................................................................. 2.31
Entry of values
brief introduction ........................................................ 2.14
Epilog for HPGL ............................................................. 2.294
EQUAL A ....................................................................... 2.332
EQUAL L.......................................................................... 2.81
EQUAL VOLT................................................................. 2.102
Equal. file ..................... 2.88, 2.99, 2.102, 2.106, 2.114, 2.120
..................................................................2.130, 2.211, 2.225
Equalization.................................................................... 2.304
Equalization.................................................................... 2.389
Equalization data............................................................ 2.302
UPL Index
1078.2008.02 I.5 E-10
Equalization file...............................................................2.304
equalization of analyzer signal ............................. 2.210, 2.225
equalization of generator signals.......................................2.88
EQUALIZATN.................................................................2.389
EQUALIZATN.................................................................2.304
Equalizer.......................2.88, 2.99, 2.102, 2.106, 2.114, 2.120
................................................................. 2.130, 2.210, 2.225
equalizer file, generation...................................... 2.211, 2.225
Equalizer file, generator....................................................2.88
Equalizer table printout ...................................................2.389
Equivalent.......................................................................2.122
Error messages .......................................................2.51, 2.53
DFD measurement ...................................................2.214
during program run.....................................................2.53
Fatal...........................................................................2.54
MOD DIST measurement .........................................2.212
THD+N/SINAD measurement...................................2.203
Error Messages
IEC/IEEE bus ...........................................................3.296
Error messages during measurement...............................2.53
Error queue.......................................................................3.35
ESE (event status enable register) ...................................3.29
ESR (event status register)...............................................3.29
EVENt register..................................................................3.26
Examples of application
external sweep with settling process ..........................2.48
quantising noise measurement.................................2.175
Settling by arithmetic averaging..................................2.42
Exec macro ....................................................................2.407
Explanations of Front- and Rearpanel Views ......................2.3
EXPONENTIAL .......................................... 2.42, 2.175, 2.223
EXPORT.........................................................................2.305
Extension of file names...................................................2.294
Extern disp .....................................................................2.394
External
sweep.......................................................................2.159
external clock ...................................................................2.73
External Keyboard..............................................................2.3
F
Factor .................................................................. 2.192, 2.249
FALLING ........................................................................2.232
FAST..............................................2.193, 2.206, 2.238, 2.250
analyzer....................................2.201, 2.205, 2.213, 2.215
FAST DECAY.................................................................2.254
Fast Fourier Transformation ...........................................2.220
Fast frequency response measurement..........................2.271
Fatal error
with error message.....................................................2.53
without error message................................................2.54
FDAS..............................................................................2.292
FFT......................................2.101, 2.118, 2.165, 2.220, 2.278
amplitude accuracy...................................................2.226
frequency measurement...........................................2.226
implementation.........................................................2.227
POST FFT................................................................2.172
Resolution ................................................................2.173
Round noise .............................................................2.226
Size ............................................................... 2.173, 2.209
undersampling..........................................................2.226
Window ....................................................................2.173
FFT...................................................................................2.15
FFT Size................................................... 2.218, 2.221, 2.245
Fileshort form.................................................................2.284
FILE.......................2.3, 2.79, 2.81, 2.331, 2.332, 2.344, 2.354
FILE + AES3............................................................2.79, 2.81
FILE + CRC............................................................. 2.79, 2.81
File attributes ................................................................. 2.300
FILE DEF.............................................................. 2.82, 2.374
File extensions............................................................... 2.294
File extensions............................................................... 2.321
FILE INTERN ................................................................. 2.333
FILE NAME.................................................................... 2.344
FILE panel...................................................................... 2.294
File selection.................................................................... 2.37
FILE/EPS ....................................................................... 2.372
FILE/HPGL..................................................................... 2.372
FILE/PCX....................................................................... 2.372
FILE/PS ......................................................................... 2.372
File-defined filter............................................................. 2.292
Filename ............... 2.36, 2.80, 2.81, 2.82, 2.125, 2.190, 2.301
.......................................................2.306, 2.331, 2.351, 2.378
FILENAME RMS-sel. sweep .......................................... 2.191
Filter......................... 2.182, 2.194, 2.197, 2.208, 2.221, 2.229
............2.232, 2.251, 2.254, 2.258, 2.278, 2.286, 2.287, 2.289
attenuation............................................................... 2.284
parameters............................................................... 2.291
FILTER.................................................................2.172, 2.290
FILTER key........................................................................ 2.3
Filter simulation.............................................................. 2.229
FILTER SIMULATION.................................................... 2.165
First steps (readout of measurement results) ................. 3.340
First steps (readout of measurement results) (RS-232) .. 3.358
FIX 1000 MS.................................................................. 2.197
FIX 200 MS..........................................................2.197, 2.198
FIX 3 SEC...................................................................... 2.197
FIX 50 MS...................................................................... 2.197
FIX Range
Analyzer................................................................... 2.149
generator ................................................................... 2.67
FIX\: ............................................................................... 2.191
FLAT..................................................................... 2.42, 2.175
FLAT TOP...................................................................... 2.245
FLAT_TOP..................................................................... 2.222
FLOAT ........................................................................... 2.148
Floating inputs................................................................ 2.151
Floating reference values ............................................... 2.268
FM.................................................................................. 2.132
FNCT Ch1...................................................................... 2.262
FNCT Ch1&2.................................................................. 2.262
FNCT Ch2...................................................................... 2.262
Fnct Settl............................. 2.175, 2.182, 2.194, 2.197, 2.198
............................................ 2.202, 2.208, 2.213, 2.215, 2.218
FOREVER...................................................................... 2.254
Format.......................................................2.135, 2.305, 2.354
Format Pha .................................................................... 2.241
FrameCol ....................................................................... 2.374
FREQ.................................................................... 2.95, 2.117
Freq Ch1........................................................................ 2.129
FREQ CH1.......................... 2.160, 2.191, 2.330, 2.344, 2.347
FREQ Ch1&2 ................................................................. 2.128
Freq Ch2........................................................................ 2.129
FREQ CH2.......................... 2.160, 2.191, 2.330, 2.344, 2.347
FREQ FILE ........................................................... 2.97, 2.141
Freq Mode...................................................................... 2.128
FREQ MODE .......................................................2.191, 2.249
FREQ MODE RMS sel. Sweep ...................................... 2.191
Freq No (i)...................................................................... 2.103
Freq Settl .......................................2.175, 2.239, 2.242, 2.243
FREQ&PHASE............................................................... 2.128
Index UPL
1078.2008.02 I.6 E-10
Frequency ................2.106, 2.109, 2.129, 2.135, 2.139, 2.140
difference .................................................................2.115
generator....................................................................2.99
Offset .......................................................................2.111
results ........................................................................2.59
units ...........................................................................2.59
FREQUENCY...................................................... 2.136, 2.137
Frequency and phase measurement...............................2.237
Frequency entry
SINE................................................... 2.129, 2.139, 2.140
Frequency input
SINE...........................................................................2.99
frequency measurement
fast ...........................................................................2.178
Frequency measurement ................................................2.237
Frequency measurement time ........................................2.238
Frequency measurement with FFT .................................2.226
Frequency modulation ....................................................2.132
Frequency response measurement
fast ...........................................................................2.271
Frequency response measurement...................................2.15
Frequency shift keying......................................................2.85
Frequency Sweep RMS sel. ...........................................2.187
Frequency units
reference value..................................................2.67, 2.75
Frequency, Phase and Group Delay...............................2.240
Frequenzeingabe
SINE.........................................................................2.129
Front-panel .........................................................................2.3
FRQ FST CH1................................................................2.160
FRQ FST CH2................................................................2.160
Frq lim Low.....................................................................2.255
Frq Lim Low....................................................................2.258
Frq lim Upp.....................................................................2.255
Frq Lim Upp....................................................................2.259
Frq Offset ................................2.86, 2.99, 2.111, 2.114, 2.128
FrqLim Low.......................................................... 2.208, 2.251
FrqLim Upp.......................................................... 2.208, 2.251
FSK ..................................................................................2.85
Full scale value.................................................................2.58
Full screen mode............................................ 2.32, 2.29, 2.30
full-screen mode 3-panel display key................................2.32
FUNC CH1 ............................................... 2.330, 2.344, 2.347
FUNC CH2 ............................................... 2.330, 2.344, 2.347
Function
analyzer......................................................... 2.165, 2.166
generator....................................................................2.85
FUNCTION
Generator...................................................................2.85
Functions
changing of.................................................................2.34
Functions of softkey........................................................2.341
Fundamental...................................................................2.203
Fundamental frequency ..................................................2.203
Fundamentl.......................................................... 2.202, 2.207
Fuses .................................................................................1.2
G
Gain factor......................................................................2.174
for notch filters..........................................................2.174
MULTISINE..............................................................2.104
GAUSS...........................................................................2.122
Gaussian distribution........................................................2.86
GEN CLK...................................................... 2.72, 2.74, 2.155
GEN CROSSED.............................................................2.148
GEN key...........................................................................2.64
GEN key.............................................................................2.3
GEN MLTSINE............................................................... 2.188
GEN TRACK....................... 2.170, 2.171, 2.174, 2.191, 2.202
.......................................................2.207, 2.248, 2.249, 2.333
GEN1............................................................................. 2.148
GEN2............................................................................. 2.148
General Instructions for Use............................................. 2.29
Generating a
sweep list................................................................. 2.303
Generation of a sweep list.............................................. 2.303
Generation of an
sweep list................................................................. 2.175
Generator
analog...................................................................... 2.139
channels .................................................................... 2.66
common parameters .................................................. 2.86
configuration .............................................................. 2.66
frequency offset ......................................................... 2.86
functions .................................................................... 2.85
instuments ................................................................. 2.65
settings ...................................................................... 2.17
signal functions .......................................................... 2.85
sweeps ...................................................................... 2.91
GENERATOR .................................................................. 2.64
Generator source impedance ........................................... 2.66
Generator sweep
linear step size........................................................... 2.96
Generator tracking
fundamental THD..................................................... 2.202
linearity measurement.............................................. 2.268
Notch filter frequency............................................... 2.174
GENTRACK
RMS measurement speed........................................ 2.185
RMS measuring speed............................................. 2.180
Gibb’s phenomenon ....................................................... 2.196
GRAPH..................................................................... 2.3, 2.32
Graphic Display
Colour Selection....................................................... 2.395
Graphic window................................................................ 2.31
Graphical data presentation ........................................... 2.327
Graphical display
MOD DIST measurement......................................... 2.213
THD measurement................................................... 2.202
GROUND
analyzer ................................................................... 2.148
Group delay.................................................................... 2.144
GROUP DELAY ........................................2.331, 2.344, 2.347
Group of scans............................................................... 2.326
Group of traces ....................................................2.303, 2.330
group-delay measurement.............................................. 2.233
H
H COPY key............................................................ 2.5, 2.371
HAMMING............................................................2.222, 2.245
Handshake..................................................................... 2.392
HANN...................................................................2.222, 2.245
Hard copy....................................................................... 2.371
Hard copy of screen........................................................... 2.5
Hardcopy
PCX Images............................................................. 2.298
hardware options............................................................ 2.401
HARM ............................................................................ 2.343
Harmonics...................................................................... 2.200
HCOPY key.................................................................... 2.298
Header ............................................................................... 3.7
Headphone/Speaker output............................................ 2.260
Headphones................................................................... 2.260
help.................................................................................. 2.15
UPL Index
1078.2008.02 I.7 E-10
Help..................................................................................2.15
functions.....................................................................2.55
texts ...........................................................................2.55
Help during entry ..............................................................2.36
Help for graphics softkeys ................................................2.55
Help functions.................................................................2.393
HELP key ...........................................................................2.7
HEX................................................................................2.354
Hex display of measurement results .................................2.58
High level time for SINE BURST.....................................2.108
HIGH PASS....................................................................2.286
Highpass filter.................................................................2.286
Histogram
DFD..........................................................................2.215
MODDIST.................................................................2.213
THD..........................................................................2.199
HLINE.................................................................. 2.340, 2.341
HOLD ....................................................... 2.330, 2.333, 2.344
Hold time ........................................................................2.254
HPGL data......................................................................2.372
I
IEC 118 ..........................................................................2.115
IEC 268 ..........................................................................2.115
IEC 386 standard W&F...................................................2.217
IEC 61937 ......................................................................2.134
IEC Adr...........................................................................2.379
IEC BUS.............................................................. 2.379, 2.390
IEC TUNER ....................................................................2.208
IEC/IEEE bus
address ........................................................................3.4
connection................................................................2.408
interface ...................................................................3.293
functions.............................................................3.294
messages...........................................................3.295
IEC/IEEE-bus
address ....................................................................2.390
IEC/IEEE-bus control......................................................3.345
IEC/IEEE-bus interface...................................................2.390
IMAX A...........................................................................2.343
IMAX B...........................................................................2.343
Impedance
analyzer....................................................................2.148
Implementing the FFT.....................................................2.227
Info Disp .........................................................................2.300
Info Text .........................................................................2.300
INP RMS CH1 ................................................................2.330
INP RMS CH2 ................................................................2.330
Input .................................................................... 2.148, 2.154
analyzer....................................................................2.148
channels...................................................................2.146
generator....................................................................2.66
impedance................................................................2.148
INPUT Ch1.....................................................................2.262
INPUT Ch1&2.................................................................2.262
INPUT Ch2.....................................................................2.262
INPUT COMMON...........................................................2.262
Input connectors of analyzers
analog ..........................................................................2.9
digital............................................................................2.9
INPUT DISP ...................................................................2.235
DIGital INPut AMPlitude...........................................2.236
PEAK .......................................................................2.236
PHASE.....................................................................2.235
PHASe TO REF .......................................................2.236
RMS.........................................................................2.236
Input during a measurement, data output..........................2.39
Input interface ................................................................ 2.154
INPUT JITTER............................................................... 2.262
input peak value............................................................. 2.235
Input unit (IEC/IEEE-bus)................................................. 3.18
INPUT/PHAS ................................................................. 2.235
PHASE .................................................................... 2.235
INPUT? - Press SHOW I/O .............................................. 2.53
Installation
hardware options ......................................................... 1.5
MS-DOS operating system........................................... 1.8
software options........................................................... 1.5
UPL operating and measurement software .................. 1.8
UPL software ............................................................... 1.8
Installation der UPL-Bedien- und Meßsoftware .................. 1.9
Instructions for Use, General............................................ 2.29
Instrument
change....................................................................... 2.33
Instrument model (IEC/IEEE-bus) .................................... 3.18
Instrument status, loading and storing............................ 2.296
Integration effect ............................................................ 2.198
Integration time .............................................................. 2.181
Interchannel delay.......................................................... 2.220
Interface functions.......................................................... 3.294
Interface message
DCL ........................................................................... 3.18
GET ........................................................................... 3.19
LLO.............................................................................. 3.5
Interface messages........................................................ 3.295
Interfaces
COM1, COM2 .......................................................... 2.408
RS-232..................................................................... 2.408
Interference level
measurement results.................................................. 2.59
units........................................................................... 2.59
Interfering
frequency................................................................. 2.112
signal ....................................................................... 2.111
sinewave signal........................................................ 2.212
Intermodulation
components ............................................................. 2.214
Intermodulation measurement
DFD ......................................................................... 2.214
MOD DIST ............................................................... 2.212
Intermodulation product.................................................. 2.212
INTERN.......................................................................... 2.154
INTERN ONLY............................................................... 2.394
Internal
signal connection analyzer - generator..................... 2.148
Internal signal paths ....................................................... 2.151
Interpol........................................................................... 2.233
Interpolated maximum.................................................... 2.343
Interpolated values......................................................... 2.337
Interpolation steps.......................................................... 2.233
Interpolation to a common X Axis................................... 2.325
Interpretation file for channel status data........................ 2.354
Interpretation file for user data........................................ 2.355
Interpretation mode ........................................................ 2.354
INTERVAL ........ 2.90, 2.95, 2.105, 2.108, 2.110, 2.123, 2.126
Interval for SINE BURST
monitoring interval.................................................... 2.196
Monitoring interval for peak value detection ............. 2.197
interval length................................................................... 2.90
Interval time .......................................................... 2.95, 2.197
Interval time ..................................................................... 2.95
Introduction
operation UPL............................................................ 2.15
INTV FILE........................................................................ 2.98
Intv Time........................................................................ 2.197
Invert1/n......................................................................... 2.306
IST flag ............................................................................ 3.29
Index UPL
1078.2008.02 I.8 E-10
J
JIS standard W&F ..........................................................2.217
JITTER..................................................................2.71, 2.138
Jitter Freq .......................................................................2.140
Jitter Peak Ampl .............................................................2.140
Jitter Ref.........................................................................2.155
JITTER/PHAS .......................................................2.71, 2.153
K
KAISER..........................................................................2.222
KEEP..............................................................................2.341
Key[LOCAL]
lock ........................................................................3.5
DISPLAY..................................................................2.327
FILE .........................................................................2.294
GRAPH ......................................................................2.32
H COPY ...................................................................2.371
OFF LCD..................................................................2.394
OPTIONS.................................................................2.381
OUTPUT OFF ..........................................................2.371
SHOW I/O ................................................................2.370
STATUS...................................................................2.293
STOP CONT ............................................................2.370
Key combinations
ALT ............................................................................2.31
Ctrl D........................................................................2.394
of external keyboard............................................2.3, 2.32
Keyboard settings...........................................................2.393
Keys of the front panel...............................................2.5, 2.31
Keys, front panel
ANLR........................................................................2.278
GEN ...........................................................................2.64
TAB...................................................... 2.64, 2.142, 2.278
Keyword
form..............................................................................3.8
Keywords of the protocol file...........................................2.354
L
L 448 kb/s.......................................................................2.135
LANDSCAPE..................................................................2.376
Language........................................................................2.393
Language of help texts ...................................................2.393
LCD....................................................................................2.7
Contrast....................................................................2.394
LED
REM.............................................................................3.4
Left .................................................................................2.336
Left Mrgn ........................................................................2.375
LEFT/BOTTOM ..............................................................2.348
Legend of graphic symbols.................................................2.1
LEV all di........................................................................2.200
LEV even di....................................................................2.200
LEV odd di......................................................................2.200
LEV SEL di.....................................................................2.200
LEV TRG CH1................................................................2.161
LEV TRG CH2................................................................2.161
Level
ratio..........................................................................2.113
Level control monitor output............................................2.260
Level entry
Coded Audio.............................................................2.137
Level measurement
DC ........................................................................... 2.198
PEAK....................................................................... 2.196
QUASI-PEAK........................................................... 2.196
RMS......................................................................... 2.178
RMS SELECT.......................................................... 2.184
LEVEL NOISE................................................................ 2.205
LEVEL THDN................................................................. 2.205
Level units........................................................................ 2.58
LFE 448 kb/s.................................................................. 2.135
LIM LOW&UP ................................................................ 2.350
LIM LOWER................................................................... 2.389
Lim Lower ...................................................................... 2.350
LIM LOWER.........................................................2.304, 2.350
LIM REPORT ................................................................. 2.389
Lim Upper....................................................................... 2.350
LIM UPPER...............................................2.304, 2.350, 2.389
Limit
check ................... 2.318, 2.319, 2.337, 3.349, 2.350, 3.19
curve........................................................................ 2.350
over/underrange....................................................... 2.317
violation.................................................................... 2.318
Limit curve
printing..................................................................... 2.389
storing...................................................................... 2.304
value........................................................................ 2.326
Limit curve...................................................................... 2.350
Limit exceeded............................................................... 2.350
Limit exceeded, printout ................................................. 2.389
Limit files
editing ...................................................................... 2.312
generated from trace file .......................................... 2.314
generation by means of application program............ 2.317
header...................................................................... 2.312
measured values...................................................... 2.312
Limit frequency of analyzer instruments ......................... 2.143
Limit frequency/cutoff frequency
FFT frequency measurement................................... 2.237
Limit report list................................................................ 2.317
Limit value...................................................................... 2.351
LIN ................................................................................. 2.348
LIN POINTS
Analysator................................................................ 2.189
generator ................................................................... 2.96
LIN Spacing ................................................................... 2.335
LIN STEPS..................................................................... 2.189
generator ................................................................... 2.96
Line................................................................................ 2.398
Line Count...................................................................... 2.253
Line diagram .................................................................. 2.327
Linear step size
generator sweep ........................................................ 2.96
Linearity Measurements................................................. 2.268
List sweep........................................................................ 2.91
buffers........................................................................ 2.91
generator .......................................................... 2.91, 2.93
storing...................................................................... 2.303
LLO.................................................................................... 3.5
LOAD INSTRUMENT..................................................... 2.296
Loading
and Storing .............................................................. 2.294
files .......................................................................... 2.294
instrument setups..................................................... 2.296
Loading of setups........................................................... 2.299
Loading the default setup................................................. 2.15
LOCAL ............................................................................... 2.7
Local timecode and CRC.................................................. 2.79
lock error........................................................................ 2.365
LOG ............................................................................... 2.348
LOG POINTS
analyzer ................................................................... 2.189
UPL Index
1078.2008.02 I.9 E-10
generator....................................................................2.96
LOG Spacing..................................................................2.335
LOG STEPS
analyzer....................................................................2.189
generator....................................................................2.96
Logarithmic step size
generator sweep.........................................................2.96
RMS sel. sweep .......................................................2.189
LONG CABLE...................................................................2.72
Long form (command).........................................................3.8
Loudspeaker...................................................................2.260
Loudspeaker Measurements...........................................2.246
Low Dist.................................................................2.99, 2.399
low frequency enhancement...........................................2.135
Low Level .......................................................................2.107
Low level time for SINE BURST .....................................2.107
LOW PASS.....................................................................2.286
Low-distortion generator.................................................2.109
Low-distortion generator.................................................2.203
Lower case (command) ....................................................3.37
Lower Freq .....................................................................2.121
LOWER FREQ ...............................................................2.112
Lower frequency limit......................................................2.153
Lower frequency range limit............................................2.146
LOWER\: ........................................................................2.149
Lowpass filter .................................................................2.286
LPT1...............................................................................2.379
LS 448 kb/s ....................................................................2.135
M
Mainlobe.........................................................................2.222
MANU LIST
Generator-Sweep .......................................................2.93
MANU LIST ....................................................................2.188
MANU SWEEP
analyzer....................................................................2.188
Generator-Sweep .......................................................2.93
MANUAL .................................................. 2.335, 2.348, 2.397
Manual control....................................................................3.5
Manual Operation ...............................................................2.1
Manual sweeps
generator....................................................................2.93
operation ..................................................................2.360
MARKER.................................................. 2.341, 2.342, 2.343
Marks comment lines......................................................2.322
MAX ...............................................2.332, 2.334, 2.345, 2.347
Max hold.........................................................................2.254
Max Hold........................................................................2.257
MAX HOLD.....................................................................2.328
Max Volt ..................................................................2.67, 2.75
Maximum of measurement series ...................................2.343
Maximum peak value......................................................2.165
Maximum values bargraph..............................................2.349
MD5-Signaturverfahren (RS232).....................................3.364
MEAN FREQ....................................................... 2.115, 2.121
MEAS CH1............................................... 2.170, 2.171, 2.333
MEAS CH2............................................... 2.170, 2.171, 2.333
Meas Disp ......................................................................2.394
Meas Mode..........................2.153, 2.196, 2.200, 2.205, 2.215
Meas time................................................. 2.238, 2.248, 2.253
Meas Time..... 2.179, 2.180, 2.185, 2.198, 2.206, 2.224, 2.257
RMS measurement...................................................2.179
RMS SELECT measurement....................................2.185
Measured value
buffer........................................................................2.160
stabilization.................................... 2.41, 2.47, 2.1772.177
Measured value and status displays...............................2.394
Measured value resolution .................................... 2.45, 2.176
Measurement
range selection......................................................... 2.149
Measurement Display
ON/OFF ................................................................... 2.394
Readin Rate............................................................. 2.395
Reading Resolution.................................................. 2.395
Measurement function
reference values ...................................................... 2.169
Measurement range ....................................................... 2.150
Measurement range limit
analyzer instruments ................................................ 2.143
lower........................................................................ 2.146
upper........................................................................ 2.143
Measurement rate ................................................2.179, 2.185
Measurement results, display window.............................. 2.40
Measurement time................................................2.253, 2.257
Measurement valid/invalid................................................ 2.39
Measurement, input during............................................... 2.39
Measurements ............................................................... 2.358
Measuring ...................................................................... 2.299
Measuring time.....................................................2.179, 2.185
Measuring time FFT ....................................................... 2.227
Memory expansion...................................................... 4.4, 4.5
Messages on operating state ........................................... 2.51
Meßzeit .......................................................................... 2.257
Min Freq...............................................................2.146, 2.153
Min VOLT....................................................................... 2.163
Minimum value of resulution during settling...................... 2.45
Minimum voltage............................................................ 2.163
Mod Depth ..................................................................... 2.132
MOD DIST
analyzer .........................................................2.165, 2.212
generator ................................................................. 2.111
Generator................................................................... 2.85
Mod Freq............................... 2.89, 2.105, 2.123, 2.126, 2.132
MODDIST signal
measuring on ........................................................... 2.180
Mode................................... 2.115, 2.298, 2.299, 2.330, 2.350
LOCAL......................................................................... 3.4
REMOTE ..................................................................... 3.4
Modulation
factor analysis.......................................................... 2.109
MODULATION ...................................................... 2.85, 2.132
modulation deviation
AM ........................................................2.89, 2.105, 2.123
Modulation deviation
AM ........................................................................... 2.126
Modulation distortion ........................................................ 2.85
measurement........................................................... 2.212
modulation frequency
AM .................................................................. 2.89, 2.139
Modulation frequency
AM ........................................................................... 2.126
FM ........................................................................... 2.132
MODULATION function.................................................... 2.89
Modulationshub
AM ........................................................................... 2.126
FM ........................................................................... 2.132
Monitor output ................................................................ 2.261
MORE ............................................................................ 2.341
mouse
scrolling in the panel .................................................. 2.32
mouse .............................................................................. 2.36
Mouse
connection of ........................................................... 2.408
numeric entry ............................................................. 2.35
mouse functions..........................................2.64, 2.142, 2.278
Mouse Operation.............................................................. 2.29
Multichannel................................................................... 2.135
Multisine
Index UPL
1078.2008.02 I.10 E-10
dialog window...........................................................2.103
MULTISINE ........................................................... 2.85, 2.101
N
NAB................................................................................2.217
NAB standard W&F ........................................................2.217
NARROW.......................................................................2.206
Next step..........................................................................2.94
NEXTHARM ...................................................................2.343
No of sine .......................................................................2.103
Noise
distribution................................................................2.122
spacings...................................................................2.117
suppression (THD) ...................................................2.199
weighting (THD+N/SINAD).......................................2.203
Noise..............................................................................2.117
NOISE ............................................................................2.205
Noise component..............................................................2.86
Nominal AC supply voltage.................................................1.1
NONE...............................................................................2.78
NORMAL........................................2.182, 2.193, 2.223, 2.250
Normalize .......................................................................2.334
Normalized frequency response......................................2.305
Normfreq.........................................................................2.305
NOT EQUAL A ...............................................................2.332
Notch..............................................................................2.289
analog filter...............................................................2.174
characteristic............................................................2.174
freq...........................................................................2.174
gain ..........................................................................2.174
Notch (Gain)........................2.174, 2.182, 2.194, 2.197, 2.221
NOTCH FLT ...................................................................2.289
Notch Freq......................................................................2.174
Note on delay ...................................................................2.47
NTRansition register.........................................................3.26
number of thirds..............................................................2.253
Numeric values (command) ..............................................3.13
O
o CURSOR.....................................2.332, 2.334, 2.342, 2.345
o TO *.............................................................................2.340
Octave............................................................................2.290
Octave............................................................................2.290
Octave filter ....................................................................2.290
Octave Filter...................................................................2.290
OCTAVE FLT .................................................................2.290
OFF LCD key..................................................................2.394
ON TIME ...........2.90, 2.95, 2.105, 2.108, 2.110, 2.123, 2.126
one-dimensional sweep ....................................................2.95
ONTIM FILE .....................................................................2.98
Opening the instrument.......................................................4.7
Operating mode (IEC/IEEE)
LOCAL .....................................................................3.358
REMOTE..................................................................3.358
Operating states of sweep system..................................2.363
Operating system level ...................................................2.294
OPERATION ............................................ 2.327, 2.328, 2.352
OPTICAL........................................................................2.154
OPTIMIZED......................................................... 2.102, 2.120
Optimizing
Frequency Response ...............................................2.277
measurement speed.................................................2.272
settling parameters.....................................................2.49
Option
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL B10) ............... 3.337
Options
enabling ................................................................ 1.5, 1.7
OPTIONS key .................................................................... 2.5
Order of a Filter.............................................................. 2.286
Orientation ..................................................................... 2.376
OTHER TRACE ............................................................. 2.333
Output .............................................................2.7, 2.66, 2.139
Impedance................................................................. 2.66
power......................................................................... 2.70
Output BAL ...................................................................... 2.69
output clock rate............................................................... 2.73
Output clock rate............................................................ 2.157
Output impedance.......................................................... 2.139
Output of block data (B10) ............................................. 3.342
Output of commands
Output of commands................................................ 3.341
Output of commands (B10) ............................................ 3.341
OUTPUT OFF key.......................................................... 2.371
output UNBAL.................................................................. 2.68
output voltage
bal.............................................................................. 2.75
unbal.......................................................................... 2.75
Output voltage
limit value.......................................................... 2.67, 2.75
limitation..................................................................... 2.75
Overlapping execution...................................................... 3.19
OVERlay/Max Hold ........................................................ 2.330
Overloading DC measurement ....................................... 2.198
Overshoots..................................................................... 2.196
Overview of measurement and sweep systems.............. 2.358
P
PAGE............................................................................... 2.13
Pair of traces..................................2.303, 2.325, 2.330, 2.332
Panel......................................................2.31, 2.39, 2.79, 2.81
ANALYZER.............................................................. 2.142
DISPLAY.............................................2.327, 2.330, 2.347
FILE......................................................................... 2.294
FILTER .................................................................... 2.278
OPTIONS................................................................. 2.390
scrolling...................................................................... 2.32
STATUS................................................................... 2.293
Panel.............................................................................. 2.327
PANEL............................................................................. 2.81
PANEL + AES 3.................................................... 2.79, 2.819
PANEL + CRC ........................................................ 2.79, 2.81
PANEL OFF..................................................................... 2.78
Panel selection................................................................. 2.31
Panelfile ........................................................................... 2.83
Panels
changing ........................................................... 2.29, 2.30
changing between...................................................... 2.31
changing using the keyboard ..................................... 2.31
changing using the mouse ......................................... 2.31
position on the screen................................................ 2.32
Paper Size...................................................................... 2.379
Parallel poll ...................................................................... 3.34
Param. Link.................................................................... 2.403
Parameter (command)...................................................... 3.13
Parameter Link..............................................2.33, 2.34, 2.403
Parameters
changing .................................................................... 2.34
display panel..................................................2.330, 2.347
list display ................................................................ 2.344
selection..................................................................... 2.34
UPL Index
1078.2008.02 I.11 E-10
Parity................................................................... 2.391, 2.409
Parser...............................................................................3.19
Partial setup, loading and storing....................................2.296
Part-screen graphics.......................................................2.357
Passb Low......................................................................2.287
Passb Upp......................................................................2.287
Passband .......................................................................2.286
Password protection.......................................................2.402
Path..................................................................................2.36
PDF..............................2.86, 2.99, 2.111, 2.114, 2.122, 2.128
PEAK..............................................................................2.235
PEAK & S/N ...................................................................2.165
PEAK measurement .......................................................2.196
Peak value detector............................................. 2.165, 2.196
Peak weighting...............................................................2.196
Peak-to-peak amplitude
MOD DIST................................................................2.113
MULTISINE..............................................................2.104
POLARITY ...............................................................2.127
SINE................................................... 2.100, 2.139, 2.140
SINE BURST............................................................2.107
SINE2 BURST..........................................................2.109
Periodic tracings of measured values .............................2.160
PERMANENT.................................................................2.263
Permissible range of values..............................................2.36
Phas Ch2
1...............................................................................2.130
Phas Settl............................................................ 2.175, 2.242
PHAS TO REF................................................................2.235
Phase
digital..........................................................................2.71
frame (jitter)..............................................................2.235
measurement results..................................................2.59
optimization ..............................................................2.117
position sine voltage with MULTISINE......................2.101
reference value.........................................................2.172
units ...........................................................................2.59
PHASE..................................................... 2.330, 2.344, 2.347
Frame Phase............................................................2.235
Phase difference.............................................................2.240
phase measurement.......................................................2.144
Phase No (i)....................................................................2.103
Phase Reference value ..................................................2.172
PHASE TO REF.............................................................2.166
PhaseToRef....................................................................2.400
Phone.............................................................................2.263
Phone Out ......................................................................2.177
PINK...............................................................................2.118
Pink noise.......................................................................2.118
Plot on............................................................................2.379
Plots/Page......................................................................2.380
PLOTTR/HPGL...............................................................2.372
Points
analyzer......................................................... 2.163, 2.190
generator....................................................................2.97
Polarity
measurement ...........................................................2.219
Polarity measurement.................................................2.85
test ...........................................................................2.127
Test..........................................................................2.219
POLARITY........................................................................2.85
analizer.....................................................................2.127
generator..................................................................2.165
Polarity reversal..............................................................2.219
Polarity Test ...................................................................2.219
Poles ..............................................................................2.292
PORTRAIT .....................................................................2.376
Post FFT.........................................................................2.183
POST FFT........................................................... 2.173, 2.209
Post FFT RMS measurement .........................................2.183
Post-FFT ........................................................................2.218
Potential reference..........................................................2.149
Power supply ..................................................................... 1.1
PPE (parallel poll enable register) .................................... 3.29
Pre Gain...............................................................2.177, 2.263
PRECISION ................................................................... 2.238
analyzer ...................................2.201, 2.205, 2.213, 2.215
Precision of frequency measurement ............................. 2.238
Preparation for use (RS232)........................................... 3.357
Print
format....................................................................... 2.376
Printer
output....................................................................... 2.389
PRINTER ....................................................................... 2.371
Printing traces and lists .................................................. 2.389
Printname....................................................................... 2.373
Printout........................................................................... 2.376
PRINTR/HPGL............................................................... 2.372
PRINTR/PS.................................................................... 2.372
Prn Hight........................................................................ 2.379
Prn Resol ....................................................................... 2.376
Prn Width....................................................................... 2.379
Program example
Readout of results in R&S BASIC ............................ 3.360
Program examples
Readout of Measurement results (B-10)................... 3.340
Readout of measurement results in Borland-C 3.0 ... 3.361
Result readout in QuickBASIC................................. 3.359
Programming examples.................................................. 3.300
Programming model
UPL analyzer ............................................................. 3.17
UPL generator............................................................ 3.16
Prolog for HPGL............................................................. 2.294
PROTO AUTO ............................................................... 2.352
Proto File..............................................................2.354, 2.355
protocol ............................................................................ 2.78
PROTOCOL.....................................2.78, 2.165, 2.328, 2.352
PROTOCOL analysis ..................................................... 2.352
PTRansition register......................................................... 3.25
Pulse duration SINE2 BURST........................................ 2.110
Pulse spectrum .............................................................. 2.222
Q
Q PK & S/N.................................................................... 2.165
Quantising noise measurement...................................... 2.175
Quasi-PEAK measurement ............................................ 2.196
Quasi-peak weighting..................................................... 2.191
Query
form ............................................................................. 3.7
response.................................................................... 3.11
Question mark.................................................................. 3.15
Index UPL
1078.2008.02 I.12 E-10
R
R 448 kb/s ......................................................................2.135
Rackmounting.....................................................................1.1
RAM drive................................................................ 1.7, 2.134
RANDOM .........................................................................2.85
Range.............................................................................2.149
overranges .................................................................2.51
rated value .................................................... 2.149, 2.150
spacing.....................................................................2.150
unterranges ................................................................2.51
Ranges...........................................................................2.150
READ ONLY...................................................................2.300
Read Rate ......................................................................2.395
Read Resol.....................................................................2.395
READ.ME...........................................................................1.9
READ/WRITE.................................................................2.300
Reading in responses (B10) ...........................................3.341
Reading out block data (B10) .........................................3.342
Readout of measurement results
in Borland-C 3.0 .......................................................3.361
in R&S BASIC ..........................................................3.360
Univ. Sequence Controller UPL-B10.........................3.340
Readout of Measurement Results
in QuickBASIC .........................................................3.359
REAL..............................................................................2.305
Rear view ................................................................2.10, 2.11
RECTANGLE....................................................................2.86
RECTANGULAR.................................................... 2.222, 2.245
Ref Freq ...........................................................................2.67
Analysator ................................................................2.243
analyzer.............................................. 2.171, 2.239, 2.241
Ref Frq .............................................................................2.75
REF GEN .........................................................................2.74
Ref Imped.......................................................................2.146
REF IN.......................................................... 2.72, 2.74, 2.156
Ref Out
Data ...........................................................................2.74
Source........................................................................2.74
Ref Phase............................................................ 2.172, 2.242
Ref Volt......................................................... 2.68, 2.76, 2.232
Reference...... 2.169, 2.170, 2.181, 2.186, 2.197, 2.198, 2.201
...................... 2.206, 2.220, 2.236, 2.248, 2.254, 2.258, 2.332
................................................................. 2.333, 2.345, 2.347
impedance................................................................2.146
point DC measurement.............................................2.198
trace was stored in the file........................................2.333
traces .......................................................................2.332
traces ............................................................ 2.302, 2.324
value depend............................................................2.335
variable.....................................................................2.302
Reference measurement potential ..................................2.149
Reference value
storage on key stroke...............................................2.172
Reference values
floating......................................................................2.268
group-delay measurement........................................2.172
phase measurement.................................................2.172
Rejection ........................................................................2.206
Release control...............................................................3.345
Remote control ...................................................................3.1
Remote control via RS-232 interface ..............................3.357
Remote via .....................................................................2.390
Rep delay .......................................................................2.393
Rep rate..........................................................................2.393
Repetition delay..............................................................2.393
Repetition rate ................................................................2.393
Repetitive triggering........................................................2.393
Replace
the SETUP battery .......................................................4.8
Resolution
FFT ....................2.173, 2.210, 2.218, 2.224, 2.227, 2.245
Settling............................................................ 2.50, 2.176
Resolution value............................................................... 2.50
Restart
of a measurement .................................................... 2.359
of sweep .................................................................. 2.160
of the last valid setting ............................................... 2.53
of the UPL.................................................................. 2.54
of the UPL with default setting ................................... 2.54
retry................................................................................ 2.410
Return to manual operation (RS-232)............................. 3.358
RIFE-VINC 1 ........................................................2.222, 2.245
RIFE-VINC 2 ........................................................2.222, 2.245
RIFE-VINC 3 ........................................................2.222, 2.245
Right .............................................................................. 2.336
RIGHT/TOP ................................................................... 2.348
Ripple............................................................................. 2.287
RISING........................................................................... 2.232
RMS.....................................................................2.178, 2.235
RMS & S/N..................................................................... 2.165
RMS S/N........................................................................ 2.178
RMS SELECT......................................................2.165, 2.184
RMS value incl. S/N ....................................................... 2.178
rollkey .............................................................................. 2.53
Rotary knob........................................................................ 2.7
Rounding noise .............................................................. 2.227
RS- 232 interface ........................................................... 2.390
RS 448 kb/s ................................................................... 2.135
RS-232 (COM1, COM2) ................................................. 2.408
RS-232 interface
Differences to the IEC/IEEE bus .............................. 3.364
First steps (readout of measurement results)........... 3.358
Preparation for use................................................... 3.357
Return to manual operation...................................... 3.358
RS-232 Interface
Switchover to Remote Control.................................. 3.358
RTS/CTS........................................................................ 2.392
RUB & BUZZ.................................................................. 2.165
Rub & Buzz Measurements............................................ 2.246
Rub&Buzz ...................................................................... 2.278
RUMBLE UNW............................................................... 2.208
RUMBLE WTD............................................................... 2.208
S
S/N measurement .......................................................... 2.167
S/N Sequ...................................................2.167, 2.178, 2.196
Sample.................................................................... 2.42, 2.50
Sample frequency
maximum ................................................................. 2.157
Sample Frequency
analyzer ................................................................... 2.157
generator ................................................................... 2.73
Sample Frq
Analyzer................................................................... 2.157
Generator................................................................... 2.73
Sample Mode................................................................. 2.405
Sample rate
filter.......................................................................... 2.291
Samples......................................................................... 2.175
Sampling Frequency
Measurement........................................................... 2.243
Scale....................................................................2.335, 2.348
Scale B .......................................................................... 2.332
Scan conf....................................................................... 2.397
Scan Count .................................................................... 2.329
Scan count =1................................................................ 2.324
Scan count >1................................................................ 2.325
Scan index ..................................................................... 2.337
UPL Index
1078.2008.02 I.13 E-10
Scan index...............................................................2.7, 2.325
Scannr............................................................................2.397
SCPI
introduction...................................................................3.7
keywords......................................................................3.8
SCREEN ........................................................................2.373
Screen copies
plotting......................................................................2.381
printing .....................................................................2.381
storing ......................................................................2.381
Scrolling in the panel ........................................................2.32
SELECT ....................................................................2.5, 2.16
SELECT ...........................................................................2.34
SELECT di......................................................................2.200
Selection
commands..................................................................2.83
file ..............................................................................2.37
of a Parameter............................................................2.34
Selection of analyzer ......................................................2.142
Selection of function
brief introduction.........................................................2.14
Selection of generator.......................................................2.65
Selective rms measurement ...........................................2.165
Selective rms value ........................................................2.184
SELECTP.......................................................................2.379
Selftest ...............................................................................1.3
Semicolon.........................................................................3.15
Sequence Control (opt. UPL B10)...................................3.337
Sequence of operation in the panels........................2.29, 2.30
Serial poll..........................................................................3.34
Series of data .................................................................2.302
Series of measured values .............................................2.324
Service functions ............................................................2.401
Service request.................................................................3.33
SET TO ..........................................................................2.340
SETREF .............................................................. 2.341, 2.343
Setting and displaying auxiliary.......................................2.390
Setting parameters ...........................................................2.13
Setting the Display Parameters ........................................2.18
Setting, switching off the displays...................................2.394
Settling ................................................................ 2.164, 2.175
delay with external sweep
control ..................................................................2.45
resolution .............................................................2.45
introduction.................................................................2.41
optimizing the parameters...........................................2.48
process
measurement run with external sweep .................2.47
Settling .............................................................................2.41
SETTLING
check..........................................................................2.48
Settling by arithmetic averaging........................................2.42
Settling condition ..............................................................2.42
Settling delay with external sweep....................................2.50
Settling parameter
optimizing ...................................................................2.49
Settling parameters...........................................................2.42
settling process
combination................................................................2.41
Settling process..............................................................2.175
possible combinations ................................................2.41
Settling process................................................................2.41
Settling time
filter ..........................................................................2.284
Settling tolerance..............................................................2.42
SETUP ....................................................................1.3, 2.298
Shape.............................................................................2.118
Shape file .......................................................................2.119
Shielded cables ..............................................................2.408
Short circuit
generator output.........................................................2.70
Short form (command)........................................................3.8
Short name of filters....................................................... 2.284
Shortname...................................................................... 2.285
SHOW I/O............................................................... 2.5, 2.370
key........................................................................... 2.370
messages .................................................................. 2.53
SHOW I/O........................................................................ 2.40
Signal amplification ........................................................ 2.261
Signal period matching.........................................2.179, 2.185
Signal spectrum ............................................................. 2.222
Signal-to-noise measurement......................................... 2.167
Signaturverfahren MD5 (RS232) .................................... 3.364
Simulation ............................................................2.172, 2.278
Simulation ...................................................................... 2.229
SINAD............................................................................ 2.205
Sine.................................................................................. 2.85
SINE ....................................... 2.85, 2.89, 2.105, 2.122, 2.126
SINE ................................................................................ 2.99
SINE BURST ................................................................... 2.85
Sine burst signal............................................................... 2.85
SINE2 BURST.................................................................. 2.85
SINE2 BURST................................................................ 2.127
SINE2 BURST signal ..................................................... 2.219
Sinewave amplitude
MULTISINE.............................................................. 2.104
SINE ........................................................................ 2.100
SINE BURST ........................................................... 2.107
SINE2 BURST ......................................................... 2.109
Sinewave amplitude SINE....................................2.139, 2.140
Sinewave frequency
MULTISINE.............................................................. 2.103
SINE BURST ........................................................... 2.106
SINE2 BURST .............. 2.109, 2.110, 2.112, 2.113, 2.115
Sinewave signal ............................................................. 2.138
Single
key........................................................................... 2.160
SINGLE.............................................................................. 2.5
SINGLE................................................................2.363, 2.364
SINGLE key ................................................................... 2.360
Single measurement ............................................... 2.5, 2.160
Single measurement at fixed intervals............................ 2.163
Single measurements..................................................... 2.358
Single sine ..................................................................... 2.101
Sinusamplitude SINE ..................................................... 2.130
SLOW ............................................................................ 2.206
SLOW DECAY ............................................................... 2.254
Smoothed display........................................................... 2.233
SMPTE .......................................................................... 2.111
SMPTE measurement procedure ................................... 2.212
Softkey menus ............................................................... 2.337
Softkeys.................................................................... 2.9, 2.35
Softkeys......................................................................... 2.339
software options............................................................. 2.401
installing....................................................................... 1.5
Software options
enabling ....................................................................... 1.5
.................................................................................... 1.7
installation.................................................................... 1.5
.................................................................................... 1.7
new installation of ........................................................ 1.5
.................................................................................... 1.7
Software Options
enabling ....................................................................... 1.5
source.............................................................................. 2.66
Source..................................................................2.139, 2.353
Source impedance ................................................ 2.66, 2.139
Source impedance ........................................................... 2.66
Space............................................................................... 3.15
Spacing...................... 2.96, 2.101, 2.118, 2.189, 2.335, 2.348
Span .............................................................................. 2.224
Span FFT....................................................................... 2.227
SPC LIM REP ................................................................ 2.327
SPEAKER................ 2.177, 2.183, 2.194, 2.197, 2.198, 2.202
Index UPL
1078.2008.02 I.14 E-10
........... 2.213, 2.215, 2.218, 2.225, 2.229, 2.233, 2.251, 2.255
............................................................................ 2.259, 2.262
Speaker off.....................................................................2.260
SPECTR LIST ................................................................2.327
SPECTRUM ...................................................................2.328
Spectrum Analysis..........................................................2.220
SPEKER.........................................................................2.219
Spk Volume......................................................... 2.177, 2.263
Spurious emissions.........................................................2.408
SRE (service request enable register) ..............................3.28
SRQ (service request) ......................................................3.33
Standard.........................................................................2.217
STANDARD....................................................................2.231
Standard W&F................................................................2.217
Start............... 2.163, 2.173, 2.189, 2.210, 2.218, 2.223, 2.245
generator sweep.........................................................2.96
START................................................................................2.5
START COND ..................................................... 2.159, 2.160
START COND ..................................................................2.39
Start condition.................................................................2.159
START key.....................................................................2.160
START key............................................... 2.360, 2.363, 2.364
Start of arithmetic averaging.............................................2.42
Start Options ....................................................................1.10
Start/stop limits for triggering ..........................................2.163
Starting and stopping of measurements or sweeps.........2.358
State diagram
measurement ...........................................................2.359
sweep.......................................................................2.360
STATIC.............................................................................2.78
Status
display......................................................................2.117
Status byte .......................................................................3.28
Status diagram
sweep.......................................................................2.360
Status display
ANL status..................................................................2.51
GEN ORUN................................................................2.73
GEN status.................................................................2.51
SWP status ................................................................2.52
Status display.......................................................... 2.51, 2.52
Status displays ...............................................................2.358
Status information.............................................................2.40
STATUS key.......................................................................2.3
Status operation register...................................................3.30
Status panel .....................................................................2.32
STATUS panel................................................................2.293
Status questionable register .............................................3.31
Status register
condition part..............................................................3.25
enable part .................................................................3.26
error queue.................................................................3.35
event part ...................................................................3.26
event status enable register........................................3.29
event status register...................................................3.29
IST flag.......................................................................3.29
ntransition part............................................................3.26
overview.....................................................................3.27
parallel poll enable register.........................................3.29
ptransition part............................................................3.25
service request enable register...................................3.28
status byte..................................................................3.28
status operation register.............................................3.30
status questionable register........................................3.31
structure .....................................................................3.25
summary bit................................................................3.26
Status reporting system....................................................3.24
resetting .....................................................................3.36
use .............................................................................3.33
steady readout by settling.................................................2.41
Step
generator....................................................................2.97
RMS sel. sweep....................................................... 2.190
Step size
linear generator sweep............................................... 2.96
logorithmic generator sweep ...................................... 2.96
STEREO SINE...................................................... 2.85, 2.128
Stop ...............2.163, 2.173, 2.210, 2.218, 2.224, 2.245, 2.409
generator sweep ........................................................ 2.96
Stop ................................................................................... 2.5
STOP............................................................................. 2.358
Stop Bits ........................................................................ 2.391
STOP CONT key............................................................ 2.370
STOP key....................................................................... 2.161
STOP/CONT ...................................................................... 2.5
STOP/CONT........................................................2.363, 2.364
Stopb Low............................................................2.287, 2.289
Stopb Upp............................................................2.287, 2.289
Stopband........................................................................ 2.286
STORE...........................................2.169, 2.171, 2.172, 2.303
STORE CH1.........................................................2.169, 2.171
STORE CH2.........................................................2.169, 2.171
STORE INSTRUMENT .................................................. 2.299
STORE TRACE/LIST..................................................... 2.303
Store traces and sweep lists .......................................... 2.303
Storing complete instrument setup ................................. 2.299
Storing of setups ............................................................ 2.299
Strings.............................................................................. 3.14
Suffix, numeric ................................................................... 3.8
Sum transfer function..................................................... 2.229
Summary bit..................................................................... 3.26
SUPERFAST ................................................................. 2.206
Superimposed sinewave voltages .................................. 2.101
supplementary software
installation.................................................................... 1.6
sweep ............................................................................ 2.399
External.................................................................... 2.361
frequency sweeps.............................................. 2.361
level sweeps...................................................... 2.361
level trigger........................................................ 2.361
Time-chart................................................................ 2.361
Time-tick .................................................................. 2.361
Sweep
automatic lists-......................................................... 2.188
direction ..................................................................... 2.96
frequency of selective rms measurement................. 2.187
lists RMS sel. sweep................................................ 2.191
manual lists.............................................................. 2.188
one-dimensional......................................................... 2.91
steps are skipped....................................................... 2.94
stop.............................................................................. 2.5
two-dimensional......................................................... 2.91
Sweep............................................................................ 2.358
Sweep Control.................................................................. 2.93
SWEEP CTRL2.99, 2.106, 2.109, 2.111, 2.115, 2.129, 2.133,
2.136, 2.141, 2.187, 2.188
sweep direction ................................................................ 2.96
SWEEP LIST .......................................................2.327, 2.330
Sweep Mode .............................................2.182, 2.193, 2.250
Sweep parameter
X axis)........................................................................ 2.95
Sweeps
analyzer ................................................................... 2.187
generator ................................................................... 2.91
Switching off....................................................................... 1.4
Switching on....................................................................... 1.3
Switching on the UPL....................................................... 2.13
Switching sweeps on and off.......................................... 2.362
Switchover to Remote Control (RS232).......................... 3.358
Switchover to UPL user interface ................................... 3.343
SWP CONT RUNNING .................................................. 2.363
SWP INVALID................................................................ 2.363
SWP LIM REP ............................................................... 2.327
SWP MANU RUNNING.................................................. 2.363
UPL Index
1078.2008.02 I.15 E-10
SWP OFF.......................................................................2.363
SWP SNGL RUNNING ...................................................2.363
SWP STOPPED.............................................................2.363
SWP TERMINATED.......................................................2.363
SYNC IN...........................................................................2.72
Sync Mode .......................................................................2.72
Sync Out
Source........................................................................2.74
Type...........................................................................2.74
SYNC PLL........................................................................2.74
Sync To
analyzer....................................................................2.156
generator....................................................................2.72
SYNC TO ANaLyzer.........................................................2.73
Synchronization (command) .............................................3.21
Syntax elements (command) ............................................3.15
SYSTEM..................................................................2.5, 2.412
System files....................................................................2.294
SYSTEM key..................................................................2.233
T
Test signal
intermodulation measurement .......................2.111, 2.114
polarity measurement...............................................2.127
Text commands ................................................................2.84
THD................................................................................2.165
THD measurement .........................................................2.199
THD+N ...........................................................................2.205
THD+N / SINAD measurement .......................................2.208
THD+N/SINAD................................................................2.165
THD+N/SINAD measurement .........................................2.203
third analysis
lower band limit ........................................................2.255
upper band limit........................................................2.255
Third analysis .................................................................3.333
Third Analysis.................................................................2.252
THIRD OCT....................................................................2.118
Third Octave...................................................................2.278
Third-octave....................................................................2.290
Third-octave Filter...........................................................2.290
Third-octave noise..........................................................2.118
Time .................................................................... 2.117, 2.162
TIME CHART..................................................................2.160
Time domain display.......................................................2.230
TIME TICK......................................................................2.160
Timeout .................................................................2.50, 2.177
Tolerance .......................................................................2.176
Tolerance .........................................................................2.50
Tolerance band.................................................................2.42
TOP................................................................................2.335
TOSLINK........................................................................2.154
Total Gain factor.............................................................2.104
Total Peak ......................................................................2.104
Total RMS ......................................................................2.105
TOTAL VOLT....................................................... 2.113, 2.116
TRACE A..................2.303, 2.305, 2.330, 2.344, 2.350, 2.389
TRACE A + B ...................................................... 2.350, 2.389
Trace and spectrum display............................................2.337
TRACE B..................2.303, 2.305, 2.330, 2.344, 2.350, 2.389
Trace data storing...........................................................2.303
Trace Len .......................................................................2.233
Trace length....................................................................2.233
Trace length of the signal ...............................................2.233
Trace printout .................................................................2.389
TRACEA.........................................................................2.341
TRACEB.........................................................................2.341
Traces ............................................................................2.302
Traces to be used .......................................................... 2.337
Tracing of measured values
continuous ............................................................... 2.160
due to frequency change.......................................... 2.160
due to voltage change.............................................. 2.160
fixed number ............................................................ 2.163
fixed time interval..................................................... 2.163
Tracing of measured values at regular intervals ............. 2.160
Transfer function............................................................ 2.292
Transfer Function........................................................... 2.244
Transfer of parameters................................................... 2.403
Triangle................................................................. 2.86, 2.122
Triangular distribution....................................................... 2.86
Trig Chan ....................................................................... 2.233
Trig Level .............................................................2.183, 2.232
Trig Slope....................................................................... 2.232
Trigger
Waveform ................................................................ 2.230
Trigger............................................................................ 2.159
Trigger condition for tracing measured values................ 2.159
Trigger event.................................................................. 2.160
trigger source................................................................. 2.233
TRIGGERED
RMS measurement .................................................. 2.180
True rms measurement ........................................2.165, 2.178
twelfth analysis
lower band limit........................................................ 2.258
upper band limit ....................................................... 2.259
Twelfth Analysis............................................................. 2.256
two-dimensional sweep.................................................... 2.95
Two-tone signal to SMPTE............................................. 2.111
Type............................................................................... 2.389
U
UNBAL
Generator........................................................ 2.66, 2.139
UNBAL BNC
analyzer ................................................................... 2.154
Unbal Out......................................................................... 2.71
Unbalanced output ........................................................... 2.68
Unbalanced output (Output UNBAL, BNC)....................... 2.69
UNDERSAMPLE............................................................ 2.231
Undersampling FFT........................................................ 2.226
UNDO ............................................................................ 2.341
Unit ................2.168, 2.201, 2.206, 2.213, 2.215, 2.218, 2.232
.............................................................................2.245, 2.332
UNIT ....................................................................2.344, 2.347
Unit Ch1................... 2.168, 2.181, 2.186, 2.197, 2.198, 2.220
.......................2.236, 2.239, 2.241, 2.243, 2.248, 2.254, 2.258
Unit Ch2................... 2.168, 2.181, 2.186, 2.197, 2.198, 2.220
.......................2.236, 2.239, 2.241, 2.243, 2.248, 2.254, 2.258
Unit/Label....................................................................... 2.332
Units conversion formulas for entry of values................ 2.61
conversion formulas................................................... 2.57
display of measurement results.................................. 2.57
for measurement results............................................. 2.57
for value inputs........................................................... 2.57
function labelling...................................................... 2.329
IEC-bus notation ........................................................ 2.59
list of all...................................................................... 2.57
measurement result output....................................... 2.168
of measurement results............................................ 2.168
output of measurement result................................... 2.239
result display............................................................ 2.241
Universal Sequence Controller
Index UPL
1078.2008.02 I.16 E-10
Switchover to UPL....................................................3.343
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL B10)......................3.337
Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10........................3.337
Differences to IEC/IEEE-bus Control........................3.341
First steps (readout of measurement results)............3.340
Output of block data .................................................3.342
Reading in responses...............................................3.341
Reading out Block data ............................................3.342
UNZOOM .......................................................................2.341
UPL IEC adr ...................................................................2.390
UPL software
command line options.................................................1.11
command line parameters at power-up.......................1.13
integration of programs...............................................1.10
restarting ....................................................................1.10
UPL-B1...........................................................................2.401
UPL-B10..................................................................1.5, 2.401
UPL-B10 Universal sequence controller .........................3.337
UPL-B2...........................................................................2.401
UPL-B21......................................................... 1.5, 2.78, 2.401
UPL-B22..................................................................1.5, 2.401
UPL-B23....................................... 1.5, 1.7, 2.85, 2.134, 2.401
UPL-B29.........................................................................2.401
UPL-B33..................................................................1.5, 2.401
UPL-B4....................................................................1.5, 2.401
UPL-B5...........................................................................2.401
UPL-B6....................................................................1.5, 2.401
UPL-B8....................................................................1.5, 2.401
UPL-B9....................................................................1.5, 2.401
UPLCFG...........................................................................1.13
Upper case (command) ....................................................3.37
Upper Freq .....................................................................2.121
UPPER FREQ ................................................................2.112
Useful signal...................................................................2.111
Useful sinewave signal ...................................................2.212
User data..........................................................................2.82
USER DEF ............................................... 2.101, 2.118, 2.297
User files ........................................................................2.294
USER L ..........................................................................2.353
User Label......................................................................2.329
User Mode........................................................................2.82
USER R..........................................................................2.353
User-definable filter.........................................................2.284
USERKEYB.BAT.....................................................1.10, 1.13
V
Valid Chan........................................................................2.78
Validity bit.......................................................................2.352
VALUE..............................................................................2.73
Value commands..............................................................2.84
Value entry, rotary knob, numeric keypad.........................2.35
Value of axes, printout....................................................2.389
VARI (PLL) .....................................................................2.155
Vari Mode.......................................................................2.136
Variation ................................2.89, 2.105, 2.123, 2.126, 2.164
Variation mode ...............................................................2.136
Variation Mode ...............................................................2.136
Version display...............................................................2.401
VGA
interface ...................................................................2.411
monitor .....................................................................2.394
monitor connector 15-contact .....................................2.11
VGA monitor...................................................................2.394
VIDEO 50.........................................................................2.72
VIDEO 60.........................................................................2.72
VIEW OFF......................................................................2.342
VIEW PCX......................................................................2.298
Virtual Drive
installation.................................................................... 1.7
VOLT ............................................................................... 2.95
Volt Ch1......................................................................... 2.130
VOLT CH1 ..................................................................... 2.161
VOLT CH1&2................................................................. 2.128
Volt Ch2......................................................................... 2.130
1............................................................................... 2.131
VOLT CH2 ..................................................................... 2.161
VOLT FILE............................................................ 2.97, 2.141
VOLT LF\:UF.................................................................. 2.112
Volt Mode....................................................................... 2.128
Volt No (i)....................................................................... 2.104
Volt Range ....................................................................... 2.67
VOLT RMS...........................................................2.122, 2.125
VOLT&RATIO ................................................................ 2.128
Voltage...........2.107, 2.109, 2.127, 2.130, 2.133, 2.139, 2.140
generator ................................................................. 2.100
increase ................................................................... 2.101
range........................................................................ 2.149
sweeps ...................................................................... 2.97
VOLTAGE............................................................2.136, 2.137
voltage check................................................................... 2.67
voltage limitation .............................................................. 2.67
VOLTAGE PEAK..................................................2.121, 2.125
Voltage selector ................................................................. 1.1
Voltsource...................................................................... 2.305
Volume........................................................................... 2.261
W
W&F............................................................................... 2.165
Waterfall......................................................................... 2.223
WATERFALL ................................................................. 2.328
Waveform....................................................................... 2.165
WAVEFORM.................................................................. 2.165
Waveform display........................................................... 2.230
Ways of presentation ....................................................... 2.15
Ways of Starting the Analyzer, Ext. Sweep .................... 2.159
Weighting....................................................................... 2.217
Weighting filters.............................................................. 2.279
WHITE .................................................................2.118, 2.374
White noise .................................................................... 2.118
WIDE ............................................................................. 2.206
Width.............................................................................. 2.290
Width of a Filter.............................................................. 2.289
Windoe........................................................................... 2.245
Window .....................................................2.210, 2.218, 2.222
FFT.......................................................................... 2.173
Window functions........................................................... 2.222
Window functions of FFT................................................ 2.228
WORD CLK............................................................. 2.72, 2.74
Word width
digital generator ......................................................... 2.75
Work dir.......................................................................... 2.321
working directory............................................................ 2.296
Working Directory............................................................. 2.38
WOW & FL..................................................................... 2.165
Wow & Flutter ................................................................ 2.217
Wow&Flutter .................................................................. 2.165
WRD CLK INV.................................................................. 2.72
Write protection.............................................................. 2.300
UPL Index
1078.2008.02 I.17 E-10
X
X AXIS................................................................. 2.303, 2.389
X Axis (sweep) .................................................................2.95
X Pos..............................................................................2.336
X scaling.........................................................................2.376
X-axis (sweep)..................................................................2.91
XLR output .....................................................................2.139
XON/XOFF.....................................................................2.392
Y
Y Pos..............................................................................2.336
Y scaling.........................................................................2.376
Z
Z Axis ....................................................................2.95, 2.389
Z AXIS............................................................................2.303
Z sweep............................................................................2.91
Z-axis ...............................................................................2.91
ZERO ............................................................. 2.79, 2.81, 2.82
Zero Auto........................................................................2.399
Zeros ..............................................................................2.292
ZOOM.............................................................................2.340
Zoom Fact ......................................................................2.223
Zoom factor ....................................................................2.223
Zooming frequency range FFT........................................2.223
Zooming zone.................................................................2.224
Z-parameter......................................................................2.91
-
Π
... +........................................................................ 2.229
#
∗
CURSOR..................................................................... 2.314
*
* CURSOR ...........................................................2.312, 2.314
*CURSOR ............................................................2.307, 2.321
+
+1000 ppm....................................................................... 2.86
=
= SPEAKER................................................................... 2.247
0
0 dB ............................................................................... 2.164
1
1/3 OCT FLT.................................................................. 2.273
1/3 OCTAVE ........................................................2.155, 2.240
1024 kHz.......................................................................... 2.72
12 dB Auto ..................................................................... 2.164
1-k block......................................................................... 2.306
2
2 Sigma.......................................................................... 2.206
2Sigma weighting........................................................... 2.206
3
30 dB Auto ..................................................................... 2.164
32 kHz.............................................................................. 2.73
32.0 (PLL) ...................................................................... 2.145
3-panel display........................................................ 2.29, 2.32
4
44,1 kHz........................................................................... 2.73
44.1 (PLL) ...................................................................... 2.145
48 kHz.............................................................................. 2.73
48.0 (PLL) ...................................................................... 2.145

Navigation menu